Home

UniOP User`s Manual

1. DN File Edit view Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 8 x H sae EE a Q Defaut y 5 m be Se A E cP E EE Ee Zeck FlowMeters Ee A Aal a hs E pi U nae GEI SH Flow Meter 1 Wenturi Flow System Dither z Floyd Steinberg P A l Contat i D Brightness ke CH o gt HE Meter Flow Meter 2 Flow Element IC Smooth Invert D IT Sharpen J Flip 2 0 W J Blur T Mirror Ge Preview Flow Meter 3 Turbine Flow Tube Y Si i Reset Meter 1 lv Size to Fit es SE Turbine Empi61 Meter 2 KEE e A ad gt a Gish A A IE e e EE EE Re e TEFA leeslbei eil Select options For this page E Designer is distributed with a rich set of predefined graphic symbols To use these symbols just select one of them from the right category e g Arrows Banners Blowers Callouts FlowMeters etc and drag and drop it on the Project Screen If necessary a BitMap Settings dialog box will pop up and allow you to adjust the symbol s graphic attributes to the panel currently selected inside the project By right clicking on the Graphics area a set of commande are displayed They are divided into the following categories EDIT COMMANDS Copy Allows to copy the graphic symbol into the clip board so that it can be pasted into the Project Screen Remove Removes the graphic symbol from the catalogue Rename Changes the name of the graphic symbol CATALOGUE COMMANDS New Catalogue Tn1
2. Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Page Number Address E Data Format BYTE Bin z Cancel Help In order to change the language that the project file uses once it has been downloaded to the UniOP panel you can create a control variable with a data type of Language Make sure that this field is created as read write so that it can be edited To change the language that is being used you will need to increment or decrement this field This can be done in one of two ways One way is to simply edit the field and enter the number of the language that you want to use The other way is to program a key or a touchcell using the macro command Step Control Variables You could program one key or touchcell to step up the value of the language control variable field and another key or touchcell to step down the value of the language control variable field Password Data Field Properties EC 21xj Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Password Address e Ee Data Format fasci DI Cancel Help The Password field is an ASCII field and is only available under Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII when ASCII is chosen as the Style Recipe Page for Selection Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 55 IN X OR Tech note Data Field Properties Be 2 xi Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Address
3. Cancel Help The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in which you wish to work The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cell Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a
4. The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom button Custom buttons can be created for both Off and On states Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box The button width and height can be specified Color options may also be selected according to the selected panel s support of colors The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Custom buttons This checkbox allows you to place an indicator light on the button 4 4 119 Push Button Touch Cell Example In this example we will configure a push button touch cell Note It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback Select Insert Touch Cells Push Button Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Push Button Properties dialog box select 3D Round as the Style Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 122 E AS UR Tech note Under Push Action select the desired push button action Click on the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the touch cell Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse color when it is pressed Select the Layout tab and select Red as the co
5. Walt Count 3 Cancel Help Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where Is now appears under the Pressure label placeholders Creating the Time Indexed Field Finally we need to create a field on the screen where the time information for the process can be displayed Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCIl or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed below the Time label The Numeric Field Properties box appears Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 4 since the maximum value of this field is 9999 Set the Reference as Index and click the button to specify the controller location The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears Since there are three time values that we wish to monitor enter the Count as 3 In the Selector list box on the left side of the Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box three memory locations will be listed with the values 0 1 and 2 since we left the Min value as 0 They will all initially show the same memory location To display the time in stage 1 enter the address DB10 DW6 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 66 EXOR Tech note Click on entry 0 in the Selector list The memory location for entry O changes to DB10 DW6 To d
6. Colors The user is provided with three toolbar buttons i e Replace image Replace all images Edit Image in order to manipulate replace the images in the project All the three commands can be invoked via context sensitive menu as shown below Replace Project Images E x EI Bitmap Info Name Regenera Width pixels 199 Height pixels 199 Resolution bits 4 Colors 16 Simple M Replace Image Replace All Images Edit Image Replace image When only one image of the project has to be replaced with another image Replace image command can be used Once this command is invoked the open file dialog is shown from which the user can select the new image Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 339 EXOR Tech note Replace all images By using this command the user can change all the images of the project at a single stretch The Replace All command first gets the image directory and once the directory is selected by the user the below Confirm Images dialog is shown Confirm Images E 4 x Project Images New Images Dithering Options 2 Bmp370 Image Dither D Floyd Steinberg Contat 4 Brightness i4 Smooth T Invert Sharpen J Flip T Blur Mirror I Des5 compatibility dithering Reset If there any discrepancy in images the concerned image can be individually replaced using Replace Image command Note
7. Style Format 99 Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Signed Unsigned T Fixed point Placement Jo Size Width 33 Height i Reference PLC Variable Recipe Index DB10 Dw0 Cancel Apply Help A number of items can be configured from this dialog box They are grouped in the following tabs General Text Range Scaling Attributes An external small window allows to Preview the data files A placeholder of 9 s is used to indicate the presence of an numeric data field in Designer while a placeholder of A s indicates an ASCII data field 4 4 8 Preview 999999999999999999999999999999999 If a numeric format is chosen the field will be represented by 9 s the panel If an ASCII format is chosen the field will be shown as A s on the display If Reference is set to Variable Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 45 E AS D BR Tech note the field is shown as C s on the display If Reference is set to Recipe the field is shown as R s on the display 4 4 9 General 4 4 10 General tab The Style Format and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific These areas are used to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data Numeric Field Properties General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Signed Unsigned IT Fixed point Placement Jr Size Width 33 Height i Reference PLC Var
8. More than one panel can have the same panel node The configuration corresponds in this case to several different UniNET networks that cohabit on the same Ethernet line Each time two partners are configured with the same UniNET node and they reside together on the same Ethernet network they are conceptually part of distinct UniNET networks This concept allows users to put more than 32 UniNET nodes on the same UniNET Ethernet based network Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 215 EXOR Tech note Note A general configuration where the UniOP UniNET node is set to 1 and several servers are configured with different IP address is allowed if it corresponds to several UniNET networks each one composed of only one panel working as server These UniNET networks are part of the same Ethernet network the UniOP servers are independent from each other and the use of a similar layout is useful when a UniNET client running on a PC may be required to collect data coming from several different controllers 4 6 104 IP Address Ethernet network only Represents the IP address assigned to the UniNET node This must be unique in the Ethernet network 4 6 105 Comm Port for Network RS 485 network only Specify the port that the network will use for communication 4 6 106 Printout Node Node number of the node to be used for the network printout function 4 6 107 Num Comm Retries Number of times a network message is retried in case of
9. oonconconncnnoconoccconanns 51 436 Recipe e E 187 Recipe E 56 440 Recipe Menu Multipage Recipes 446 Recipe Mem useeg gchie dios gZehe gue 172 Recipe Medicina incio nad sasid 446 Recipe Menu Eaxample 444 Recipe Menu Field CIO aa 443 Recipe Menu bel 443 Recipe Menu Keyboard Macros 445 505 Recipe Menu Support Fields 443 Recipe Name Example ooooonocccnnocininccoconccnnns 442 Recipe Names ccooocccnnocononcnononanononanananocanenonns 442 Recipe Page Selection epee 55 440 Recipe Pages eetgesteagseriiertesde gees ista 55 Recipe Page visi ccsisicsssessitvsstvioecsseviavecsesnsseeee 440 Recipe Parameter Set Selection 52 437 Recipe Parameter Sets Copnfteumng cccorocnicnnicaninanoncacnnaonn adora r cons 434 Recipe Parameter eis 187 Recipe Parameter eis 434 Recipe EE 199 Recipe Status ceesceecsesrsseesseetseetseeees 377 Recipe Upload 270 Recipe Values i scsadearisdsnsshasval sissies 186 Recipes 61 407 433 434 435 441 445 447 448 Recognition Old Panel Modelen 195 GATT E 195 Record MOI ie cvccecsisedscivicvessescdsesedes disen 292 Rectan cle siccssiscedesscasiersationtesdeseses statin 147 301 REGO E 24 291 Reference inci 160 E E 193 Refresh Database eu 249 Remote Hardware ooococnnncccnonccononannnncononananns 204 Remote PDassthrough A 276 REMOVE wis sends leisteiasastethagsasbelalatenedasastecdaisiene 231 Remove SH scesscoencest asus
10. Contatti ange SS I Smooth Invert Sharpen J Flip T Blur Mirror Preview IV Size to Fit Reset Cancel The Bitmap Settings dialog box appears showing a preview of the image with two tabs labeled Image and Panel Options are available for changing the appearance of the image on the panel Image shows the original image while Panel shows how the image will appear on the panel Note Only files in supported image formats may be imported using the Import Bitmap Graphics box i e Windows and OS 2 Bitmaps bmp dib rle JPEG jpeg AutoCAD files dwg dxf dwf Scalable Vector graphics svg Windows Metafile wmf Enhanced Metafile emf Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 176 EXOR Tech note Windows Icons and Cursors ico cur TIFF tif tiff Adobe Photoshop psd WordPerfect wpg Portable Network Graphics png Kodak PhotoCD pcd Kodak FlashPix fpx ZSoft PCX and DCX pcx dcx TARGA tga Encapsulated Postscript eps Macintosh PICT pct Sun Raster ras MacPaint mac GEM Image img Gerber gbr Computer graphics metafile cgm DRW drw Intergraph Microstation Format dgn ESRI shape format shp A graphic can be moved or resized once it is imported To move a graphic simply single click the left mouse button over the graphic and move it to the desired location To resize a graphic single click the left mouse button once on
11. Indicate whether the project will be stored on internal panel memory such as an SSFDC card or on a memory device external to the panel 4 7 27 Recipe Upload Indicate whether original or modified data is to be used during recipe upload 4 7 28 Transfer Advanced 4 7 29 Transfer Advanced Properties E ax Ports Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibility with version 1 _4 gt Download Project only Protocol only Both LG Donot download protocol if exists in the target v Download Graphics V Download Tags new Je Download Fonts M Download Text Object Info Iw Compress Fonts Y Download Object Format Info Y Download Tags old V Download SVG Files Cancel Help The Transfer Advanced tab lets you select the memory location for the protocol download compress options and whether to download the project the protocol or both 4 7 30 Memory Location for Protocol Specify whether the memory location for the protocol is internal or external to the panel or in the firmware Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 270 EXOR Tech note 4 7 31 Download You can choose to download the project the protocol or both If Both is selected you have the option to not download the protocol if it already exists in the tar file as a precaution 4 7 32 Download Compress Options Select whether graphics fonts tags and or object information are to be downloaded and whether fonts are to be compres
12. The Font Editor Width menu is currently disabled 4 8 82 Options Menu 4 8 83 Options Menu The Font Editor provides a method of editing characters that are used in basic character formation These commands are available under the Options menu of the Font Editor Commands in the Options menu include Rectangles Large Characters Bargraphs Define Symbol and Symbol Browser 4 8 84 Rectangles By selecting Rectangles from the Options menu of the Font Editor you can edit the characters that form each of the two rectangles that are implemented in the Designer software Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 301 EXOR Tech note The rectangle is composed of eight characters 4 corner characters and 4 characters that connect the corners By selecting any of these characters you can create the rectangle with a particular style Designer comes with two default rectangle styles single line and double line Once you have defined the characters that make up the rectangle you can draw a rectangle of any size in any page of your project Note You should launch the Font Editor from within Designer so that the necessary IN files are updated automatically If the Font Editor is launched outside of Designer you will need to enter the character codes that make up the rectangle into the DISPLAYS INI file manually This file is located in the Windows directory As you scroll through the file each font will have a line that beg
13. Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 291 EXOR Tech note 4 8 41 New Dictionary The New Dictionary command is available from the Tag Editor File menu if no tag dictionaries are currently opened If a tag dictionary is open then the New Dictionary command is available under the Dictionary menu Selecting New Dictionary from the File or Dictionary menus clicking on the New icon or right clicking on a dictionary in the workspace and selecting New Dictionary will open the New Tag Dictionary dialog box In this box you name your new dictionary and associate it with a particular controller Enter a name for your new dictionary in the Tag Dictionary box Select the controller driver that you plan to use from the list provided If more than one driver model is available with the selected controller select the model you plan to use from the list under Driver Model 4 8 42 New Group The New Group command is available from the Tag Editor File menu if no tag dictionaries are currently opened lf a tag dictionary is open then the New Group command is available under the Dictionary menu The New group dialog box allows you to enter tag information The particular columns available may vary but will normally contain at least the tag name the logical address for the tag the data format for the tag and any comments necessary Type a tag name in the Tag box and any comments in the Comment box Clicking on the Logical_address box activates a
14. 192 83 e 166 255 Em 18 166 255 eee e 192 O WW 18 192 O Pes D 12 128 17 128 192 128 36 6 12 192 m8 18 192 192 8 86 192 25 m9 128 192 25 88 e 224 0 0 224 O 9 e 224 120 LSC 128 224 128 E es 224 192 ES 125 224 192 QM 6 224 255 43 18 224 255 E e 255 O WW 128 255 O0 Kb 6 255 125 G 128 255 128 E es 255 192 WW 128 255 192 ES ee 255 255 ESCH GG 255 255 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual E AS DR Tech note Coos Colors Index R_ G B Index R_ G B fees 165 12 o 0 A we o 123 ME 12 o 18 eee 165 O 192 ME 12 o 12 pistes 0 25 0163 192 0 25 2 66 LA O EC 192 Aa BS 166 A 128 065 192 44 128 A 166 44 192 166 192 44 192 BS 166 44 255 161 192 44 25 Ebbe 16 ss O Ess 192 es O0 Br 166 ss 125 169 192 866 128 138 166 86 192 170 192 86 192 fee 165 es 255 WW 192 86 255 fee 166 128 O WW 192 128 0 E we 128 126 WW 192 18 128 4 128 192 LI 128 192 pms 166 18 25 15 192 128 25 A 166 166 0 we 192 16 0 MAS 166 166 125 LI 166 128 M6 166 192 18 192 166 192 fee wee 192 O WW 192 192 O 9 192 128 181 192 192 128 fee 166 192 19 WW 19
15. 7 3 29 Get Current Language The controller can use this command to get the number of the currently active language from the panel Command code 129 This command requires no parameters After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 385 ES UH Tech note escription D Error the project is not multilanguage If Code 0 is returned the Parameter Word 0 will contain the number of the active language 7 3 30 Set Current Language The controller can use this command to change the language in the operator panel Command code 130 Language number After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below OK Error the project is not multilanguage 2 Error illegal language number requested 7 3 31 Start Screen Saver It is possible to activate the screen saver from the controller using this command Command code 145 No parameters are required by this command The panel will respond with a code in the Command Response Word The possible codes are listed below A OK Error screen saver not enabled in the project 7 3 32 Stop Screen Saver It is possible to deactivate the screen saver from the controller using this command Command code 146 No parameters are required by this command The panel will respond with a code in the
16. Font Name Font Size 4 2 25 Font Name Select a panel font for the on screen text from the pull down list Font Editor Installing New Panel Fonts 4 2 26 Font Size The Font Size buttons can be used to change the character size of any text or variable field Font size choices include Regular Regular Large or Extra Large Regular characters are simply a single character Double characters are twice the size of a regular character 2x2 Large characters are four times the size of a regular character 4x4 Extra large characters are eight times the size of a regular character 8x8 Note When the area defined for a text box is too small only the sizes that can fit inside the selected area are enabled Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 28 E AS DR Tech note 4 2 27 Objects Font 4 2 28 Objects Font Font Font style DS A egular Arial Black Italic Tr Arial Narrow Bold Arioso Bold Italic O Book Antiqua O Bookman Old Style T Bookshelf Symbol 1 sl r Effects Sample IT Strikeout T Underline AaBbYyZz Color MN Black e Script Westem v The Font dialog box lets you select the default font for all graphic objects meters trends and the touch cells Font Font Style Size Effects Sample Script 4 2 29 Objects Font Font Choose a font from the pull down list New fonts may be added just like any other True Type font by opening Fonts from the Windows Cont
17. Numeric ASCIl or clicking on the Numeric ASCI icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page Select the data field style as Numeric and set the Reference to be Recipe Click on the button to set the Reference value Verify the Data Field Properties settings or change if necessary Click OK Click OK again A data field placeholder will appear using R as a placeholder for the actual recipe values Select Insert Recipe Menu or click on the Recipe Menu icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a box on the page This area will contain the Recipe Menu field The Recipe Menu dialog box appears Adjust the Width and Height of the Recipe Menu field if necessary Choose the attribute combination blink highlight and or reverse for indicating the selected recipe name Check Show Record Numbers if you want to show the record number which is just the parameter set number along with the recipe name Click on the OK button Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 444 EXOR Tech note 7 8 24 Recipe Menu Keyboard Macros Three special keyboard macros support Recipe Menus They are Go to Recipe Menu can be used to jump to a page with a Recipe Menu Scroll Recipe Menu can be used to scroll to a selection in the Recipe Menu Confirm Recipe Menu Selection can be used to accept the selected parameter set name 7 8 25 Recipes and the Interlock Mailbox The Int
18. Second 0 59 After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Description Error RTC error Error Requested setting out of range 7 3 26 Clear Event List from Controller Mailbox The controller can use this command to request that the UniOP panel clear its event list Command code 97 The command requires no parameters After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with a 0 indicating that the event list has been cleared Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 384 EXOR Tech note 7 3 27 Start Report Printout This command is used to start a report printout Command code 113 This command requires only one parameter Report Number After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Error Printer process already active if START command is issued more than once Error Printer process already inactive if CANCEL command is issued more than once 2 Error Illegal report number 3 Error Activation queue is full 7 3 28 Stop Report Printout This command is used to stop a report printout Command code 114 This command requires no parameters After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Error Printer process already inactive
19. Sitek S p A Tn179 05 Ver 1 00 UniOP User s Manual Updated for Designer 6 06 Copyright O 2007 Sitek S p A Verona Italy Subject to change without notice The information contained in this document is provided for informational purposes only While efforts were made to verify the accuracy of the information contained in this documentation it is provided as is without warranty of any kind Third party brands and names are the property of their respective owners www exor rd com Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 2 EXOR Tech note Table Of Contents 1 VUE TE 2 QUICK Staind idos 2 1 Quick Start Tutorial Introduction ooooocoooooooooooooononono nono nonononononononononononononons 2 1 1 Development Environment Setup coomccinnninnncccnnnccnnoninn nana nanc cnn rca rana ccnn 2 2 Quick Start Tutorial 3 Installation acess costs ot gases ira 3 1 OVNI Wisin ee ee ee 3 2 ASSUMPUONS ivi it rd uted con eaten dees 3 3 el VE 3 4 System Requirements ooonncconncconcnonncconnncccncccnn cnn 3 4 1 Free hard disk epace rra nn cc rn rn 34 2 RAM MEMON EE 3 4 3 Supported Operating Gystems ne tenesenenetnnttnnttnnntnnnennsnnnet 3 5 Software Insialaton eaaa a ana a diaa 3 6 Connecting the Panel to bebe 3 7 How to Report a Blind li bi ita 3 8 Technical SUD POM EE 3 9 Contact te due EE 3 10 Designer Software License ooooonnicinnncnnnnninnncnnnccnonccncrannn cnn cnn 3 10 1 SOFTWARE LICENSE iii titi
20. The Needle tab allows you to customize the color and size of the gauge indicator needle The Background tab lets you insert a custom background if you wish An external small window allows to Preview the Meter Instrument Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 158 E AS DR Tech note 4 4 230 Preview The Preview window allows you to see how the gauge will look before it is actually created and placed into a project file 4 4 231 General 4 4 232 General Meter Instrument Properties E 2 x General Layout Gauge Needle Backaround Style Range ea Min fo Max 100 KA Full Circle Half Circle Count 5 Prec fo Quarter Circle PAENGA EP Three Quarte PLC C Variabl 2 Right Side deeg DB10 DwO El Scale Y 41 52 X B a Pap Pelo Cancel Help Within this index tab you can enter the main properties that define the gauge such as the style range reference location and any necessary scaling Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 159 EXUR Tech note 4 4 233 Style The style of gauge to be inserted full circle half circle etc Custom gauges may also be created 4 4 234 Range 4 4 235 Range The minimum and maximum scale values the number of value labels to be shown on the gauge and the gauge precision 4 4 236 Minimum Minimum and value on the gauge scale 4 4 237 Maximum Maximum value on the gauge scale 4 4 238 Count The number of v
21. Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 225 E AS UR Tech note 4 6 137 Update Cycle Specifies the average update cycle time used by the UniOP firmware to update the status of the physical output points The output points are updated by reading them from the external controller memory area assigned to the output points as specified in the Reference address 4 6 138 Output Reference Specifies the starting address for copying the image of the output data Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box where more detailed PLC programmable logic controller information may be entered Note The panel I O feature requires a minimum offset between the starting addresses of the input and output area The difference between the starting addresses must be at least of 16 bytes The data format used to specify the initial address can be byte word or double word depending on the protocol 4 6 139 Modules A list of all the local I O boards available for use with the Panel I O feature is provided Use the arrow buttons to move modules from the Available list to the Connected list and vice versa and to specify the order of modules in the Connected list Note Current UniOP hardware supports only one local UO module 4 6 140 Report on Panel Printer 4 6 141 Report on Panel Printer It is possible to define the printer device driver and the communication parameters the report format and the timetable on which a
22. eee 64 Testing Tag Validation 461 CA Ate sine cerita etnies 461 A E 42 AA dcecbschecteescdecdessnenese 336 Teta salada ina 68 75 80 Re 166 A Ge iiai i 165 Tile Horizontally ooooonnnnnnnnoccnoncnoncnnnccnnn n 341 KIEREN 341 VIC 189 240 Time Data Feld 101 Time Data Field Example eee 102 AA 200 Time Indexed Field Creating alicantina 66 Time Indexed Feld 66 Time Out D ta Et 207 Field Selection csscessesscseeseseeeees 207 Panel Menu oer dessisstatesaeessectereiuvee 207 Time Outo ege csseevsit dE Eege 207 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Time Dti daa 207 Time OUt ic 207 Time Scheduler Triggers 0 cesses 257 Time Update 427 db 155 Title Colina 162 Title HOME cassssiccacsvactscvassnwcdterdnnessendanesseadaneess 162 Title Adi 162 ET pio ei 162 Toolbars oooooococonononononcnoncnnnncncnnnnnnnnononononnnns 350 AKE E EE EEE 327 Tools Menn 278 A ili nied ke 355 Touch Cell Keyboard Macro Editor Example tia 105 Touch Cell Preview WindoW ccccccccc 104 Touch Collin da li 104 TOUCH SCHEER EEN cri catre 199 Trasladar da 268 Transfer Advanced 270 Transfer Settings 355 Transfers Menn 261 Trend Buffer AAA 462 Trend Buffer 250 462 Trend B ffet iii iia 462 Trend Buffer memory s es 199 Trend Buffers on PC 465 Trend Limitations oooccccnncnnnconononononinoninnnns 468 Trend Macros 467 Trend Prnpng siirinsesi 467 Trend Time beid 16
23. me Vox Mah An Special characters may be added to text by clicking on the Special Characters button This will bring up the Special Characters dialog box in which you can select the character s to be used by double clicking on them or by single clicking on them and pressing Insert The characters will appear in the last position the cursor was in before entering the special characters dialog box 4 4 306 Import Bitmap Graphics 4 4 307 Import Bitmap Graphics When using a UniOP graphics capable panel you may import display and manipulate graphics in a project file Once the graphic is imported into the project file it may be easily moved or resized Click on the Import Graphics icon on the toolbar or select Import Bitmap Graphics from the Insert menu The Open dialog box appears with a list of files or folders Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 175 E AS D BR Tech note Look in IMAGES DI e EI ex Eee IV Preview ALXSIG BMP f ASTRNAUT IPG E blessina ipa Y annuncit jpg BN BABEL JPG 8 brfamiglia ipg B anmunci2 ipg WY BACKGR BMP Su pe P ANTSY ipg Y bear bmp E Bv2 IPG f antsys jpg EF Billbora ing WY cab football bmp F ARNOLF JPG W blessing bmp W calendar bmp D File name Files of type Supported Image Formats DI Cancel Select a graphic image to import and click on the Open button Bitmap Settings Image Panel Dither D Floyd Steinberg
24. 4 8 94 Keypad Designer 4 8 95 Keypad Designer KeypadDesigner KeypadDesigner1 Of xj File Edit View Window Help jOsa seseloo Slew lanas Raso KeypadDesignerl For Help press F1 x 496 y 391 F E The Keypad Designer utility is a Windows based application that allows you to design manage and download custom keypads to a UniOP panel It is possible to define customized floating popup keypads for four different types of fields by using the Keypad Designer utility These fields are numeric fields with a decimal base numeric fields with a hexadecimal base ASCII fields and message fields These popup keypads are dynamic objects that are displayed by the UniOP firmware over the current page whenever Data Entry is started on a field for which a popup keypad is defined Note Touch Data Entry Keypads are only supported by firmware type 58 starting from version 4 40 A Keypad Designer keypad can contain two types of objects Buttons Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 306 EXOR Tech note Value Objects Buttons can represent any of the keys that are present on a standard keyboard i e F1 Enter A Keypad Designer button is merely a button programmed to execute a certain action Value objects are rectangular areas inside the keypad where the UniOP firmware displays different information related to the field that is being edited A value object is a field that is able to display a value To cre
25. 5 31 2004 15 56 8 jon 6 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 9 jon 7 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 7 12 21 Upload Alarm List The command Upload Alarm List allows UniDataExchanger to retrieve the Alarm List from the panel This command is available only with the Ethernet connection The Alarm List data will be saved to a disk file in csv format The content of the file will be as shown in the figure below The following is the meaning of the various fields Static Flags Attribute of alarms as defined in the project file ALUSED Alarm Enabled ALCLR Alarm requires acknowledgement ALPRON Print Alarm on Event ALPROF Print Alarm off Event ALPRAC Print Alarms Acknowledgement ALWARN Message Only Alarm does not turn on Alarm LED ALLOGEV Events for this alarm Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Cc D E F G its 3 q On time Off timo Value Link flags Log fags 2 ALUSED ALCLR ALUSED ALCLR 120 2004 1103 1 1 1995 0 00 i O NONE 3 ALUSED ALTIMD ALUSED ALTIMD 7 20 2004 11 03 1 1 1995 0 00 0 0 NONE 4 ALUSED ALTIMD ALUSED ALTIMD 7 20 2004 11 03 1 1 1995 0 00 O NONE 5 ALUSED ALTIMD ALUSED ALTIMD 7 20 2004 11 03 1 1 1995 0 00 0 0 NONE 6 ALUSED ALCLR ALUSED ALCLR 7120 2004 1103 1 1 1995 0 00 0 0 NONE Fg bg color Fb bg ack color ODO DM IG DH DM 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 484 E ADR Tech note Dynamic Flags Current Status of the alarm at the moment of the upload
26. ALON Alarm is ON ALACK Alarm requires Acknowledgement ALSILENT Silent Alarm set for events only alarms On time Time when the alarm went on Off time Time when the alarm went off Value Not used Link Flags Specifies if the alarm is linked to an help screen 0 Alarm non linked to alarm page Alarm linked to alarm page Log Flags Not used Fg Bg Colors Foreground Background colors defined for the alarm 00 00 means no colors used Fg Bg ACK colors Foreground Background colors defined for the alarm when acknowledge is required 00 00 means no colors used 7 12 22 Selecting Ethernet Communication in UniDataExchanger To select Ethernet communication in UniDataExchanger select Options gt Communication and choose Ethernet Port as shown in the figure below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 485 E AS DR Tech note x C Serial Port Comi C Com2 C Com3 Com 4 7 Set max speed to S600 Ce Ethernet Port 192 168 1 A 75 Pick UniP Cancel You can enter manually the IP address of the panel you want to connect to UniDataExchanger If you do not know the IP address of the panel open the Pick Panel dialog box and select one of the panels in the list Note If you want to communicate with a certain panel you must enter its IP address Unlike the normal serial communication between UniDataExchanger and panels Ethernet connectivity allows you to have multiple panels networked wi
27. Command Response Word The possible codes are listed below ro e Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 386 E AS UR Tech note 1 Error screen saver not enabled in the project 7 3 33 Enable Screen Saver Function in Alarm Mode The controller can use this command to enable the default behaviour of the screen saver in Alarm Mode If UniOP is in Alarm Mode and the time for screen saver activation has elapsed the screen saver function will start Simply touch a key to stop screen saver activity This command code can be used following command 148 to go back to the default setting Command code 147 No parameters are required by this command The panel will respond with a code in the Command Response Word The possible codes are listed below fo OK 7 3 34 Disable Screen Saver Function in Alarm Mode It is possible to automatically reactivate the screen whenever an alarm has to be displayed The controller can use this command to disable the screen saver function when UniOP is in Alarm Mode If UniOP panel has the screen saver activated because of the elapsed programmed time and an alarm is activated the UniOP panel will automatically turn off the screen saver and display the alarm page The alarm page will be displayed until at least one alarm condition is active Use command code 147 to go back to the default behavior Command code 148 No parameters are required by this command The panel will respond with a code in t
28. Dynamic Graphics Data Fields 00 00 0 94 Dynamic Graphics Example 99 100 E Edit Dynamic CGrapbtcg eee eeeeeeseeeeeees 98 Edit Men cc cisssics incaico R der c 299 Editing Characters 2 eeegttr eun d t oieee 304 PUUN oranini stasdenes ohustdearbsddess thane 304 Eight User LEDs LED Map EE 430 Bight User LEDS isiesciicaiescciiisdatesncciiinn te 430 A ee gebiede 228 Enable Auto Scroll Control 152 Enable Double Protoco 191 216 Enable Indycator 143 Enable RDA amp visevs tccecsseaveiessvacccteaansieveen dees 219 500 Enable Screen Saver ocococcconcninonononininininonos A Enable UniNET Network Enabling Interlock Mailbox Multiple Protocol Configuration Enabling sesion idad ELEEe Enabling iii cid decai A a SEN Erase Nice bont Erase Protocols A TN Escape Sequences c ccceeccessteeeeseceeeeeees Ethernet Conf Uring s irienna BH Loi a ee ee EE 209 EI E Ethernet Board Ethernet Communication ee iii ate Ethernet Communication ococcccccncncncninnnnns Ethernet Control Panel Ethernet Network Event List SIZE csioiono coco conai c con cido caia icon oct Event Page wcs isiiidiecicisientislavsieaiebeaaieiee Events Backup 198 428 Events Run time Backup Example Export Export Tags Step eee 286 287 Exporting Tags 286 Extending Connectivity siseses Extending osne External Devices ob External Memory Types cococccn
29. Ethernet network panels are connected to a hub using standard UTP Ethernet patch cables This network type is only available if the optional TCM10 board is built into the panel When the TCM10 communication module is used to extend the UniNET connectivity capabilities the network setup follows the basic concepts of a normal UniNET network In addition with the optional TCM10 card you can implement a UniNET over Ethernet connection The UniOP panel still communicates serially to the control device but the communications between each UniOP are over a 10Base T Ethernet connection TCM10 is intended for connection to 10Base T networks 10 Mbit twisted pair cables The TCM10 requires an external network adapter The network adapter must be plugged into the Aux port of the UniOP panel The TCM10 external network adapter is equipped with a standard RJ45 connector The TCM10 can be directly connected to a hub using standard Ethernet twisted pair patch cables The TCM10 external network adapter is equipped with a standard RJ45 connector The TCM10 can be directly connected to a hub using standard Ethernet twisted pair patch cables The TCM10 external network adapter has two diagnostic LED indicators Description RED Link When ON indicates that Ethernet link is missing In this condition the GREEN LED is normally OFF GREEN Activity ON No network activity for the UniOP panel Blink Network activity detected for the UniOP panel
30. Index R_ G B Index R G B NN 0 o 1 WW Au o o E o o 123 ME 4 o 8 E O o 192 ME TI o 12 20 0 25 WW 4 0 LS Oo O Au WW Aa O OSA H 4 125 a ss ss 18 6 o 4 192 Ee 44 44 192 ETS H LA 255 39 ua a LS E Bes Esch H 166 125 Ee ss 166 128 E O 166 192 WW 44 Tee 192 AS O 166 255 SCH ss 166 255 ETE sa 192 0 poate H 192 18 EST wv 192 128 E 00 12 192 ME 4 192 192 23 H 12 25 LS wa 192 25 A o 224 0 56 ss 224 0 Poa 0 224 120 ESCH wa 224 128 REECH ss 224 192 RA H 224 25 zw Au 224 LS 8 0 255 0 e ss IZ 0 E O 255 128 WW A 255 128 E O 255 192 WW 44 255 192 AA o 255 25 ES ua 255 25 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual E AS DR Tech note OP Coos _ Colors Index R_ G B Index R G B NN e Oo O WW vs o 0 NN es o 125 MEA 178 o 178 E e o 192 ME 18 o 192 LD 0 255 lps 0 25 68 ge La o 7100 18 Aa 69 es 44 125 EI 128 44 128 O es LA 192 EI 44 192 A 86 LA 25 103 128 44 25 A EA Bess A es 128 16 WW 128 128 128 78 e 128 192 m0 128 128 192 O e 125 25 MEA 125 125 25 E 86 165 O WW 128 166 0 eee e 166 125 MMMM 128 166 128 eee es 166 19 WW 178 166
31. Lock Active Layer 41 Logout Timeout ceecceceeeeessteeeeneeeeenees 244 M Mailbox 502 SIUCLULS visita ae 375 Multipage Oreantzaton cee eeeeeeeeeeee 446 ASA sess ioheosrvactecsesnseaeie 375 Multipage Recipe Support 445 Mall box EE 467 Multipage Recipes Mailbox Programming cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 387 Recipe Menu sssr 446 MS ege srl iii deis Rugg 165 Multipage Recipes n se 185 Make Same Size ceccssesseeessecseeetseceeneeees 26 Multipage Recipes s es 446 Make Same Size Both 27 Multiple Project Support 456 Make Same Size Heiebt eee eee 27 Multiple Protocol Configuration Make Same Size Width eee eeeeeees 27 Bnabling tcs ina cision Gok 368 Mar EE 232 Multiple Protocol Configuration 368 MAXIDIZES ssiru rasieren deere 342 N MAA ETE 160 AA ies Ri EE 315 325 Maximum Node Number 212 WISEN 166 Memory Location Needle ColOriuriinirinaiamaruiaada 167 Iren E 270 Net COMMMiesisriiidrensinidiiaccdn erstes 213 ProtOCOl AA tcdeasinsseedonniehe Cen 270 Network Memory Location 270 Comm Port unnssidiidd anita 216 Memory Location 270 A 416 Memory TY Pe icccsssscosssccccrsccscsevsenccecssnevses 199 Network icscasssctesrieiestestiassversnieset iia tees 216 Memory Hee dcsssetsccsevess cried cc 257 NEE 400 Memory Usd cecoccrionocooriasnic tias isc izo 360 INGEWOLK AAA 407 Message Data Fields AA 78 NEtWOT AA e 416 Message Example n se 85 Network Cable Message Table 81 Install iii 404 Message Toolbar ce
32. Properties Ports Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibility with version 1 C Serial Port Ports Available Parity Stop Bits Ce z o e Baud Rate H Ethernet Port Server IP 192 168 H 100 Pick Panel Port Number M Panel in LAN Cancel Help You can enter manually the IP address of the panel you want to connect to Designer If you do not know the IP address of the panel open the Pick Panel dialog box and select one of the panels in the list Note If you want to communicate with a certain panel you must enter its IP address Unlike the normal serial communication between Designer and panels Ethernet connectivity allows you to have multiple panels networked with Designer and you need to select the one you want to program The port number used by the Designer Ethernet protocol to communicate with the panels can be changed by un checking the check box Panel in LAN this can be usefull in case the UniOP default port needs to be changed according to the LAN configuration and routing tables 7 12 11 Pick Panel The Ethernet Control Panel Pick Panel is the tool provided by Designer to efficiently manage UniOP panels connected to an Ethernet network Using Pick Panel you can Select one panel in the network Change the IP address the Subnet Mask and the Default Gateway of the panel you have selected Change the mode of the panel from Configuration to Operation or from Operation to Configuration 7 12 12 Select
33. Remove Add all gt gt lt lt Remove all Properties Zz Margins Left fi Top 1 Right f Bottom f New Delete Cancel Help All of the pages of a project file are shown within the left hand box Pages in the current report are shown in the right hand box Use the buttons between the boxes Add Remove Add all Remove all and Properties to set up the reports You can also specify margin measurements 4 6 167 Add To add a page to the current report select a page from within the left hand box and click on the Add gt button Doing so will place the page name into the right hand box 4 6 168 Remove To remove a page from the current report select the page name from within the right hand box and click on the lt Remove button Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 231 EXOR Tech note 4 6 169 Add All To add all of the pages of your project file to a report select the Add All gt gt button 4 6 170 Remove All To remove all of the pages from the report click on the lt lt Remove All button 4 6 171 Properties By selecting a page of interest and pressing the Properties button you can specify what part of the project file page to print and the font for printing in the UniOP page Property dialog box 4 6 172 Panel Page Property The Panel Page Property dialog box is accessed by clicking on the Properties button under the General tab from Project Report on Panel Printer
34. Select Format Copy Exit gt Panel Memory 32MB 2 used Flash Card 32MB 6 used When the menu is activated a cursor will blink over one of the four available options Select Format Copy and Exit Select selection the active memory Format formatting the active memory Copy copy from the active memory to the other one Exit exit from the Memory Setup menu to Configuration Mode To Select a memory type place the blinking cursor over he Select option and confirm with OK the blinking cursor will move the memory indicator represented with the arrow symbol the cursor can be moved using the up down keys once selected the desired memory type confirm with OK When doing a Copy process all the contents of the source memory will be copied to the destination memory The currently active memory location is always considered as the source 7 13 6 Firmware 60 Files Firmware Type 60 has only three components please note this is different from the older FW58 Boot Firmware MIPS The MIPS file is the only one that must always be present in the active user memory either this is the internal memory either it is the flash card Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 489 EXUDR Tech note The Firmware Upgrade menu will only show the Boot and the Firmware components they are the only two components the system will need to copy from the active user memory to the internal System Flash 7 13 7 Video Input Op
35. Server Client Multiple Servers Configuration Serial Connectivity Panel 4 Client Ethernet Multiple Servers Configuration Ethernet Connectivity In the Multiple Servers Configuration which may use Serial or Ethernet Connectivity many controllers are accessed The panels that are connected to a controller can function both as Servers and Clients Therefore they can read data from the controller to which they are directly attached and also from the controllers attached to other Servers The Client panel can also read data from the controllers attached to the Servers In this way every single panel in the network has access to every single controller attached to the Servers in the network Note in the Serial Connectivity an external RS 232 to RS 485 converter is required for each panel used as a Server This is because Servers must be connected to the network using their PC Printer port which in the current hardware version only has an RS 232 interface The Client panels do not need an external converter to be attached to the UniNET network because they can be attached to the network using their PLC port which has an RS 485 interface as well as an RS 232 interface Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 392 EXOR Tech note The TSI01 Bus Terminal and Converter provides additional optical isolation between the panel and the UniNET network If you are using a Client panel attached to the network through a si
36. The Panel tab in the preview window shows how the graphic will appear on your panel while the Original tab shows the appearance of the original file graphic Click on the Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame icon above the list of frames to select a graphic to represent the highlighted frame frame 1 The graphic will be shown in the frame for frame 1 Click on OK to return to the dialog box in which the address and the number of frames were selected Click on OK from within this dialog box to complete the procedure and return to the project page Repeat Steps 1 12 for the pump in a different location on the page 4 4 79 Time 4 4 80 Time Data Field This option is used to add a time data field to the current page in the format HH MM SS To insert a time data field click on the Time Field icon from the toolbar select Insert Data Fields Time or use the Ctrl T keys then use the cursor to define the area in which the time field is to be placed Once the time field is created a dialog box will appear where the text may be configured for displaying the time data field Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 101 E AS DR Tech note Time Field Properties EK 2 x Text Attributes Cancel Apply Help To change the time display from 12 hour format to 24 hour format or vice versa choose Panel Setup from the Project menu Under the Settings tab there is a Time Format field where this setting may be changed
37. They are called Boot Firmware MIPS Code and MIPS service files A copy of the Boot and the Firmware files is also stored inside the internal panel FLASH memory Storing a copy of these files inside the SSFDC card is not mandatory but it is necessary when the internal FLASH memory must be updated A copy of the MIPS Code file must always be stored in the SSFDC memory card In fact this code is always loaded from the SSFDC memory card when the UniOP panel switches from the Configuration Mode state to the Operating Mode state MIPS Service is not necessary for normal panel operation It is necessary only for running in Service Mode Information is provided on the following topics Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 363 EXOR Tech note Procedure to Upgrade the Internal Flash Memory Check Firmware Versions Firmware Files Directory FW Rescue Mode 7 1 2 Procedure to Upgrade the Internal Flash Memory To check the firmware versions that are stored inside the panel memory it is necessary to put the panel in Configuration Mode and hold the Up Arrow key for 2 seconds A table similar to the one shown below will appear RELEASE VERSION UPGRADE FLASH SSFDC Boot 04 30W 04 35D 0001 Fw 04 35D 04 35D Press Enter to continue The FLASH column shows the active firmware version The column SSFDC shows the version stored inside the SSFDC card After pressing the ENTER key the message shown be
38. Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 139 EXOR Tech note Designer testagain dpr Page 1 Of x la x DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help OSH Ae Pose Jee zwepeoel 7 m bei e Hee GE IkoOAx D RE BDO Ok Ba Fr a testagain CC Pages m 1 Page 1 H E Special Pages ZS Grap ADR EI Project Po 1 1 Row 14 Cok BI Simatic 5 5 0x0 Default 4 4 151 Generic Command Button 4 4 152 Generic Command Button The Generic Command Button dialog box is used to create a touch cell as a generic command To insert a selector switch touch cell click the Generic Button icon from the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells Generic Command Button then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed The Generic Button Properties dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a generic command button touch cell may be configured Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 140 E AS D BR Tech note Generic Button Properties EK Ax General Layout Attributes Cu stom Style Action Panel Key 5 3D Round C Macro Cmd Rectangle C ASCII Key 3D Rectangle No Graphics Key P LC windows wv Windows Cus vB Custom Cancel Help There are four tabs in the Generic Button Properties dialog box They are General Layout Attributes a
39. Trends can be sampled in three different ways The first option All Pages is to continuously sample the trend buffer regardless of whether or not the trend associated with the trend buffer is being displayed The second option Current Page is to sample the trend buffer only when the page where the trend associated with the trend buffer is being displayed The third option On Page is to sample the trend buffer only when a particular page is being displayed Note The number of trends that can be sampled in background is limited Note When a trend is sampled in the background All Pages the sample size reflects the number of old samples that will be shown when the page that contains the trend associated with the trend buffer is displayed When a trend is sampled in real time Current Page you will never see any old samples because sampling begins when the page that contains the trend is displayed In this configuration the sample size is useful only when using the macros to scroll the trend along the X axis If these macros will not be used you can save UniOP memory by setting the sample size to 1 7 10 7 Scaling Scaling allows for a linear transformation of the data being sampled This allows you to scale the data before storing it inside the trend buffer 7 10 8 Sampling Methods The Sampling tab in the Configure Trend Buffers dialog box allows you to define when the trend samples will be taken and the buffer is cleared Sample
40. Using UniDataExchanger cocoococnnoconoccconanns 483 V Validate Project Data 338 Value Objects Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Creatina E 321 Value ODJeCt8 csccesiecscessssacsteusenscetsacnsvaeseecsete 321 Vanable ini aiii 50 Ke AA 271 Vertical Align coonccnncinincnnenconnccnnnccn ninas 321 Vertical Position oooooonoonononoononanananananononon 316 Video Input Option 490 View MENU incidir alias 30 W NG ed eege de EES vil WAGED iis vcisccdavasdveiavasivotevorsvens sass seaseenvocsenss 156 Width Men 301 AAA EEN E 342 Wrap LIE csi iaa 237 X AARIS Ee 151 X Axis Maximum 153 X Axis Mimmum nana nanananano nono 153 Kee EE 153 A A saan sviesasedoresiunsienes 156 X Grid ele 156 X Grid Marke 156 Y Y ALS iii ada 149 Y Axis Maximum 151 Y Axis Mmmm 150 K TT 150 DA Ei RE 156 Y Grid Color oooonnnnononoooooonnnnnnonononononononononos 156 Y Grid Mark nina ie beca 156 Z ZOOM Ih sercos dai darias 30 ZOOM Olt esas case dun aan duen n aa dun aan aida nl bi 31 509
41. cursor box and then double click on the correct character in the font bar When the symbol Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 303 E AS UR Tech note contains all the correct characters click in the small upper box Give the symbol a name by typing it in this box and clicking on OK 4 8 88 Symbol Browser The Symbol Browser allows browsing among the symbols you have created in the Font Editor To create a new symbol use Options Define Symbols Symbol Dimensions Select the size of the new symbol in number of characters When you select the enabled item Draw new Symbol the Font Editor represents a preview of the new symbol in a map of 2 by 2 characters The preview consists of the current character plus the next 3 characters Since in our example we selected a symbol size of 2 by 2 characters we need in fact 4 characters in total When the new symbol is modified using the bitmap editor the Font Editor automatically changes all the involved characters 4 8 89 Help Menu The Help menu is constructed in the typical Windows manner with a list of the Contents of the help text and information about the Font Editor 4 8 90 Font Editor Example 4 8 91 Font Editor Example Creating or modifying a font using the Font Editor consists of two parts editing the character s and then saving the new or modified font 4 8 92 Editing Characters Select Font Editor from the Tools menu The font will appear on the displa
42. depends on the length of the ASCII string one byte per character A Recipe Name Example is provided 7 8 19 Recipe Name Example This example of creating a Recipe Name assumes that the current page is the page with defined recipes and that it is the page for which you want to add a Recipe Name Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu or by clicking on the New icon on the toolbar Name the new file and click OK Insert an ASCII data field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or clicking on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page Select the data field style as ASCII and set the Reference to be Recipe Click on the button to set the Reference value Verify the Data Field Properties settings or change if necessary Click OK Click on the Range tab Select Read Write to make recipe names editable Click OK A data field placeholder will appear using R as a placeholder for the actual recipe values From the Page menu choose Recipe Configuration Set the Number of Parameter Sets as appropriate For example set to 4 to define four recipe parameter sets if you also plan to also enter four numeric style recipe data fields on the page Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 442 EXOR Tech note Find the Recipe Item with the location of the Recipe Name field This will normally be the row with empty boxes Fill in the bo
43. is listed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 105 EXOR Tech note Now we need to turn the attribute off From the Commands toolbar select Attribute again Make sure that none of the attributes Reverse Highlight Blink are checked Click OK The command Attribute clear at location is listed From the Commands toolbar select Write to Controller Specify the memory address in the Data Field Properties dialog box Click OK Enter a value to be written to the controller Click OK The command Write value to Controller memory is listed The macro screen should appear similar to that shown below Macro Editor Attribute reverse at A 15 C 42 Wait for a 3 1 10 of a second Att ibute clear at R 15 C 42 Write value to Controller memory Click OK The result should resemble the figure below When the panel user presses this touch cell the value 25 will be written to the controller Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 106 4 4 89 Panel Key Button 4 4 90 Panel Key Button Panel keys represent all of the function keys numeric keys and arrow keys as well as the help key the clear key the Enter key the key and the decimal point key To insert a panel key touch cell click on the Panel Key Button icon from the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells Panel Key then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed The Panel Key Button Properties dialog bo
44. numeric field This enables you to monitor the values of many memory locations while using only one field An example of using indexed addressing is given To configure the indexed data field properties either click on the appropriate icon in the toolbar or select Numeric ACSII Bargraph or Message under Insert Data Fields then use the cursor to specify the location of the item In the Properties dialog box click the Index radio button under Reference and then click on the button The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears Indirect Addressing Fields Indirect Addressing Fields S RE 2 x ZC Selector D I Det Reference Scaiin E 0 DB10Dw0 Data Type DB Offset Address Data Block fo Bf peniw Data Format Left Right Byte WORD Bin DI IU Min 0 Count D Cancel Help Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 62 EXOR Tech note The Selector area lets you specify which controller memory location s contents will be displayed when a particular value is written Please note that the memory locations are controller specific The Count determines the total number of locations listed and Min minimum is the value of the first location listed The Reference section is similar to the Data Field Properties dialog box Indexed Addressing Example Indexed Addressing Example For this example assume we have a plant in which industrial equipment is washed The wash pr
45. 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 415 EXOR Tech note Note The panel may need to be attached to the network through its PLC port depending upon the network port selected for the client in the project Continued in Running the Network 7 4 53 Running the Network Continued from Creating the Project File for the Second Client Once all three panels are in Operation Mode they should display the variable on the screen In the case of the client panels the variable is read from the controller after the server receives a request from the client to read the data Verify that none of the three panels report any communication errors The variable itself may be modified using the Data Entry Mode Changing the value of the data from any operator panel will change the display on the other panels 7 5 Panel Fonts 7 5 1 Panel Fonts It is possible to have up to 4 different panel fonts on certain UniOP panels The Select Font dialog box lets you select a font from a pull down list Select Font E k OK Font Name Cancel ddi Help Font Size Regular Double Large Extralarge Note If a project file contains panel font components switching to a standard font not an enhanced font will erase all of the panel font components in the project Installing New Panel Fonts Downloading Panel Fonts Compressing Panel Fonts Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 416 EXOR Tech note 7 5 2 Installing New Pan
46. 17 Get Parameter Set Number The controller can use this command to get the current recipe parameter set number Command code 5 Only one parameter is required by this command Page Number 1 max number of pages in the project file After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Description Error Recipes not defined in project file Error Error in project file Error Illegal page number requested 7 3 18 Get Recipe Transfer Priority The controller can use this command to get the current recipe transfer priority level Command code 6 This command requires no parameters After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below oo Normal SSCS Highest Error Recipes not defined in project file 7 3 19 Set Recipe Transfer Priority The controller can use this command to set the current recipe transfer priority level Command code 7 Only one parameter is required by this command Priority Level 0 Normal 1 Highest After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below ro SOK Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 380 EXOR Tech note 2 Error Recipes not defined in project file Error Illegal priority setting requested 7 3 20 Request Data Entry Mode The controller can use th
47. 2007 UniOP User s Manual 138 EXOR Tech note 4 4 149 Custom The Custom tab is only selectable when the Custom style is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom indicator light Custom indicator lights can be created for multiple states defined under the Action section of the General tab Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box The width and height can be specified Color options may also be selected according to the selected panel s support of colors 4 4 150 Indicator Light Touch Cell Example In this example we will configure a selector switch with two 2 states Select Insert Touch Cells Indicator Light Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Indicator Light Properties dialog box select 3D Round as the Style Under Action set the number of states to 3 Set the color for the first state to Red Click on the tab for state 2 and set the color for the second state to Yellow Click on the tab for state 3 and set the color for the third state to Green Under Assign click on the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the indicator light Select the Layout tab and in the Label box type Indicator Light Adjust the Font if necessary Click OK The screen should appear similar to the figure below
48. 255 192 WW 255 255 192 SI 224 255 25 CZ 25 255 25 Example Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note 166 86 255 Idx 139 192 224 128 Idx 185 Note 256 colors mode can be use only when the 256 Colors support for Object is enabled on the setting tab of the panel setup dialog box Warning Transparent text objects overlapped with dynamic color attributes are not supported To avoid unexpected results text objects over dynamic color attributes should no be transparent 4 4 62 Size These entry boxes define the size of the static or dynamic data field Note The field width height cannot exceed the width height of remaining panel from the current cursor row column position Note Size is adjusted depending on the current font size Double font takes twice the width height of regular font size etc Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 93 ES UH Tech note 4 4 63 PLC Reference The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used and is dependent upon the type of controller selected The field data type data format and address reference are all configured in this area Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be configurable PLC is the only reference option 4 4 64 Attribute Example Select Insert Data Fields Attribute Use the cursor to outline an area for the attribute Select Dynamic as th
49. 4 140 Selector Switch Touch Cell Example In this example we will configure a selector switch with two 2 states Select Insert Touch Cells Selector Switch Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Selector Switch Properties dialog box select 3D Round as the Style Under Action set the number of states to 3 For state 1 click on the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to state 1 Set the color for the first state to Red Click on the tab for state 2 and click on the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the state 2 Set the color for the second state to Yellow Click on the tab for state 3 and click on the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the state 3 Set the color for the third state to Green Select the Layout tab and in the Label box for state 1 type State 1 Click the tab in the Label box for state 2 and type State 2 Click the tab in the Label box for state 3 and type State 3 Adjust the Font if necessary Click OK The screen should appear similar to the figure below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 134 E AS DR Tech note Designer testagain dpr Page 17 Of x DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help lej sl D Wee 556 58 EEN E AMARA PI AP RoE ANOOS BMF 009007 o
50. 4 6 216 Languages i Configure Languages de Default Chinese This feature lets you create a single project file that contains multiple languages The language that the project file uses can be selected at run time Note You must type in the text in each language Designer does not have the ability to translate from one language to another In other words if you enter text in English and then select Spanish as the language the text must then be entered in Spanish By storing the appropriate text translated into various languages you can easily change the language as needed at run time Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 246 EXOR Tech note Note The standard ASCII character set is used for all languages Other symbols may be inserted using Special Characters To set up languages select Languages from the Project menu Doing so will bring up the Configure Languages dialog box where you can define the languages to be used Insert Delete Move Up Move Down and Set As Default icons help you manage the list of languages A counter displays the number of languages defined for the project A Languages icon is available on many toolbars in Designer to make it easy to switch to another language To change the language that a project file uses once it has been downloaded to the UniOP panel you can create a control variable with a data type of Language 4 6 217 Insert Use the Insert icon to add a new lan
51. A e RPS1 Data Format WORD Bin DI Cancel Help The purpose of the Recipe Page For Selection field is to show the number of the page containing the actual recipe data referred to by the Recipe Menu It can be placed on the same page with a Recipe Menu field to show the recipe page number It can also be edited to change the page for which the Recipe Menu field displays information If the Recipe Page For Selection contains the page number of a page without a defined Recipe Name field the Recipe Menu field will display asterisks After powering up the UniOP the Recipe Page For Selection is set to zero Recipe Key Data Field Properties e E 2 xi Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Recipe Key mer E aer Data Format asci y The Recipe Key field is an ASCII field and is only available under Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII when ASCII is chosen as the Style The Recipe Key field displays the currently selected Recipe Parameter Set name for the referred page Note The page to which a Recipe Key field refers in the Data Field Properties dialog box must have a defined Recipe Name field This is done by adding a Recipe data field with an ASCII display format on the page where the recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item values in the Recipe Configuration box with an ASCII name for each parameter set This ASCII field is called a Recipe N
52. A1 A2 x B Where y Scaled value displayed x Controller data value A1 A2 B Scaling operators these are the three entry boxes located within the scaling equation There are two important concepts to understand about scaling First and foremost the scaling operators A1 A2 and B are 16 bit integers Internal calculations are done using 32 bit arithmetic which allows the panel to report a more precise result than if it were using only 16 bit arithmetic Secondly the maximum and minimum fields refer to the scaled value not the value that is in the controller Two examples of using scaling are provided The first is an example in which a user has a Celsius temperature in the controller and wishes to display a Fahrenheit temperature on the UniOP panel The second is an example in which a user has a controller memory location that can range in value from 0 to 4095 Depending upon the value in the controller you may wish to display that value as a percentage of the maximum possible value on the panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 70 EXOR Tech note 4 4 22 Scaling Examples Scaling Example 1 Assume that we have a controller that displays the temperature of a motor in Celsius The person operating the UniOP panel is only familiar with temperatures in the Fahrenheit scale By using scaling we can have the Celsius temperature from the controller appear as a Fahrenheit temperature on the display panel Select
53. By checking the Des5 compatibility dithering option user can simulate the Des5 dithering in Designer 4 9 Window Menu 4 9 1 Window Menu This chapter provides information about the Window menu The Window menu provides choices in the appearance of project windows New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 340 E SD BR Tech note 4 9 2 New Window The New Window command opens a new blank window This option is currently disabled 4 9 3 Cascade Selecting Cascade from the Window menu displays all open windows in an overlapping fashion with each new window opening lower and to the right of the previous window 4 9 4 Tile Horizontally Choosing Tile Horizontally from the Window menu displays all open windows simultaneously on the same screen with each new window displayed below the other open windows 4 9 5 Tile Vertically Choosing Tile Vertically from the Window menu displays all open windows simultaneously on the same screen with each new window displayed beside the other open windows 4 10 Application Menu 4 10 1 Application Menu This section provides information on the Application menu The Application menu is the one appearing when the user right clicks on the title area and provides access to familiar Windows commands for management the application itself Restore Move Size Minimize Maximize Close 4 10 2 Restore The Restore command on
54. Compatibility information for the TCM10 module is available as is information on configuring an Ethernet network 7 4 18 Compatibility Information FW Type Ethernet MDOOR 02 32 MDOOR 04 MD00G 04 MDO3R 02 MDO3R 04 MDO2F 02 MDO2R 04 CP01R 04 CP02R 04 x lt CP02F 02 CP04F 04 CP10G 04 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 398 EXOR Tech note CP11G 04 32 X X ECT VGA PELTVGA 8 PETTVGA 88 SE 88 PMKDO VGAT Je IN PMKDL VGA T 88 PMKDT VGA T Je IN emeng IN eton o o EI ES eoa Je ES Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 399 X X X X X X X X X lt x lt EXOR Tech note eTOP30 58 eTOP31 EI E x gt eTOP32 EE EE eTOP40 58 TX 7 4 19 Configuring Ethernet When a TCM10 communication module is used to connect a UniOP panel to an Ethernet based PLC network the Designer configuration is fully dependent on the protocol type used over the network From the Designer point of view the project needs to know the IP address of the TCM10 card and the IP addresses of the devices connected on the network with which the panel has to exchange information Configure Controller from the Project menu will normally allow configuration of the IP address of the communication partners of the UniOP that are connected over the Ethernet network The Access Multiple Controllers checkbox in the Controller Setup dialog box accessed by clicking the button in the Configure Controllers dialog
55. Compatibility with version 1 Al Download Project only Protocol only Both 9 Donot download protocol if exists in the target M Download Graphics MV Download Tags new Y Download Fonts MV Download Text Object Info Iw Compress Fonts Y Download Object Format Info V Download Tags old MV Download SVG Files Cancel Help Uncheck the Download Fonts checkbox and the panel fonts will not be downloaded 7 5 9 Compressing Panel Fonts In order to save memory in the UniOP panel Designer automatically compresses the panel font files that it downloads If necessary you can disable this optimization by selecting Transfer Options CA 21 Ports Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibility with version 1 af Download Project only Protocol only Both L Do not download protocol if exists in the target M Download Graphics JV Download Tags new M Download Fonts M Download Text Object Info Iw Compress Fonts Y Download Object Format Info IV Download Tags old M Download SG Files Click on the Transfer Advanced tab and uncheck the Compress Fonts checkbox Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 419 EXOR Tech note Note Font optimization will be automatically disabled when PLC references in ASCII format are used 7 6 Printing 7 6 1 Printing You can use Designer to configure your UniOP panel to print reports either cyclically or upon a trigger event You can defi
56. Designer screen provides information on project pages and lists various graphics and objects that can be placed in a project If Workspace is checked in the View menu the workspace will be visible Designer SYG dpr Page 1 z 308 Chal o x CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 159 x joea amp Ba 1 Pace 1 aa fora Gm FE EG CU pa 5 6 Pages oro rr AN lola Bi 1 Page 1 A Hea Oe ne E EE EE ay oe ec Ovo mia EX A Special Pages Se E Workspace Pe Sees Pear rans ae E ke EE an Re EE Ob e BE I bys Ae E Ja EHE Pa 1 1 pn vn DEMO Controller 75 0x0 Default a Be Me AE I 10 ih The default position of the workspace is to the left of the main Designer screen however the workspace can be moved anywhere on the Designer screen To hide the workspace uncheck it under the View menu To make it visible again simply check it again Note Right clicking in the frame of the workspace box brings up a number of options for viewing the workspace Select Allow Docking to dock the workspace against any of the four sides of the application If the check box is removed then the workspace will act as a mini window which can be placed anywhere and resized On the other hand clicking Float in main window causes the workspace to occupy the entire application window and minimize the
57. Display Page on Communication Error This lets you specify a page for the panel to go to whenever a communication error is reported or communications between the panel and PLC are lost Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 206 ES UH Tech note 4 6 72 Time Out for Panel Menu The period of time the panel will wait for a keystroke before returning to normal operation This lets you return to Operation Mode from the Panel Command Menu if there are no keys pressed for the specified amount of time 4 6 73 Time Out for Data Entry The period of time the panel will wait for a keystroke before returning to normal operation This lets you return to Operation Mode from the Data Entry screen if there are no keys pressed for the specified amount of time 4 6 74 Time Out for Field Selection The time period the panel will wait for a field selection to be made before returning to normal operation This lets you return to Operation Mode from Data Entry if there are no fields selected within the specified amount of time 4 6 75 LCD Screen Saver This option lets you turn off the back lighting on an LCD panel when no keys or touch cells have been pressed for a certain amount of time 4 6 76 Panel Upload Protection This feature lets you password protect the project file so that unauthorized uploads cannot occur You can enter a case sensitive password of up to eight characters When this field contains a value the defined password will be r
58. E 2 xi General Text Messages Attributes Bep Min fo Messages fi Message Cancel Apply Help Message parameters minimum and number of messages can be configured on the Messages tab and the messages can be entered The Minimum setting determines the Value of the initial message Once the parameters are configured begin entering messages for the different data values 4 4 50 Minimum The Minimum setting determines the Value of the initial message 4 4 51 Number of Messages The number of messages to be displayed is set by the Messages value 4 4 52 Message Table Once the parameters minimum and number of messages are configured begin entering messages for the different data values Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 81 EXOR Tech note 4 4 53 Toolbar Options Message Toolbar Text Message Properties E E 21 General Text Messages Attributes Cancel Apply Help Various icons on the messages toolbar keep tools within easy reach They include Copy Paste Special Characters and Languages Copy Text Message Properties a ax General Text Messages Attributes Rep Min fo Messages fi E Message Cancel Apply Help The familiar Windows features Copy and Paste are available for use in editing messages If you have several messages that are similar you can use the Copy and Paste features to copy messages and then make any necessary c
59. Editor Properties Brings up the Properties dialog box appropriate for that type of object or item where settings for the object or item can be changed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 354 E SD BR Tech note 6 2 8 Tooltips As part of the Designer software s help system help prompts are available to identify the various icons These help prompts are called tooltips To view a tooltip simply place your cursor over an icon and hold it there for a few seconds without clicking A small box will appear with a brief description of the icon Tooltips are enabled by default If you should need to disable or enable tooltips you may do so under Tools Customize On the Toolbars tab is a checkbox for Show Tooltips 6 2 9 Getting Help If you are unsure about the meaning of an item or unsure what to do next help is never far away Many dialog boxes include a Help button which you can press to read information about that dialog box Help text is also always available under the Help menu 6 3 Designer Setup 6 3 1 Designer Setup The first thing you should do upon starting the Designer software is to configure Designer to work with your particular panel and controller In Panel Setup you input all the parameters such as panel model firmware version available memory etc before creating any projects Then use Configure Controller to specify the type and model of controller to be used Note The panel must be in Confi
60. LED s that can be monitored and controlled by your application logic The control of these LED s is carried out through the Controller Update Area Each of the registers found there can be copied to bit address contacts so that the status bits can be referenced as control relays 7 7 25 LED Control Bits 7 7 26 LED Control Bits Bits L1 through L32 control the LED indicators that can be found on various panel models The mappings of these bits are listed below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 429 EXOR Tech note Two tables show how LED s are mapped the LED Map for All Panels Except Eight User LED s and the LED Map for Eight User LED s For example the F1 key is mapped to L1 and the 0 numeric key is mapped to L17 All of the panels except those that have eight user LED s are mapped according to this table 7 7 27 LED Map for All Panels 7 7 28 LED Map for Eight User LEDs The mapping in the following table represents panels that have eight user LED s Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 430 7 7 29 Page Request Register The page to be displayed can be selected either by the operator from the front panel keypad or by the controller itself The controller selects the page to be displayed by writing the corresponding page number into the PR register in the Controller Update Area Note that once the panel has changed to the corresponding page the user needs to write a O back into the PR register i
61. MACKOS arial aria taa 467 FAO TS Trend Rn Le TT 467 AAN ee A 467 7 10 21 Trend Umttattons naco cnn 468 7 11 Working with Graphic 468 7 11 1 Working with Graphic 468 111 2 Simple NADOS iii 469 7411 3 Eeler 470 ONE Meel Ee 472 7 115 Color BOxeS iii ea 474 7 12 Ethernet Connectivity A 475 7 12 1 Assigning IP Address to Panel 475 7 12 10 Selecting Ethernet Communication in Designer 479 7 12 11 Pick Panel The Ethernet Control Panel 480 7 12 15 Clock Synchronization with the SNTP Protocol cc eeeeseeeeeeeeeereeeneeeeees 482 7 12 16 Using UniDatatvchanger ee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneecaeeeneeeneesnaecnaeseaeeeeeeaeee 483 7 12 23 Basic Ethernet Diagnostic with Ping 0 ccsccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaes 486 7 13 Getting Started with B Series Panels nara nanc cnn 486 7 13 1 The New Hardware Platform for UniOP Panels 486 7 13 3 Support for 64K Colors ooooooonnccconiciconcccconncononcnanoccnnncn nono sinana rara 487 7 13 4 The FW60 Memory Architecture oooocccnnncinnccnnncccconccnnnnnnnnannanc cc nanrnnn anna cnc 487 7135 The Internal MEMO isicciciranicnic tac da ita dai 488 LAS Vide INPUT ODIO ensucia lan ici tale 490 1 13 139 Backlight DIMMING icsvscirtiadar titanes 496 113 14 Compatibility ISSUES puiseen issnin ainankaan edana dc tia 497 8 ae EE EE 498 1 Welcome Developing applications for a UniOP panel is quick and painless when using Designer software The common functionality found among many Windows app
62. Multipage recipe feature in the Designer software define the desired number of single page recipes in your project and for each of these pages check the Multipage recipe checkbox in the Recipe Configuration dialog box Marking the checkboxes links all multipage recipe pages together and any recipe related action parameter set selection upload and download done in run time Le on the UniOP panel on any linked page will result in the same action being done for all the pages In other words parameter set selection upload and download process can be done by referring to any page contained in the multipage recipe The Multipage recipe checkbox must be checked for all pages belonging to the multipage recipe For any recipe page not contained in the multipage recipe simply leave the checkbox unchecked as it is by default The recipe name should be defined in only one page of the multipage recipe If you want to display names in the recipe menu for the multipage recipe the Recipe Page for Selection field must refer to the page that contains the ASCII field declared as the Recipe Name Note The definition of parameter set numbers and values for a multipage recipe is still done one page at atime as it is for standard single page recipes Note An equal number of parameter sets in all pages belonging to the multipage recipe should be defined otherwise recipe upload and or download may be aborted in the middle In addition make sure that the
63. Network Setup 7 4 35 Network Setup It is easy to configure a UniNET network using Designer The configuration entails determining the type of network RS 485 or Ethernet specifying the number of clients and or servers on the network etc The Network Protocol Network Selection and Network Configuration sections describe the steps necessary to configure the UniNET network Select Network Setup from the Project menu or click the Network Setup icon on the toolbar to configure or modify the network for your application If a network is not yet defined for the project this brings up the Network Media amp Protocol Selection dialog box If a network is already defined for your project selecting Network Setup takes you directly to the Network Configuration dialog box 7 4 36 Network Protocol The first step in configuring the network is selecting the network type The Designer software supports two types of UniNET network an RS 485 network or an Ethernet based network Select the type of network click the Next gt button and the Network Selection dialog box appears 7 4 37 Network Selection Select the appropriate network configuration for your project Choices include Single Server Multiple Clients Multiple Servers Multiple Clients Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients Once you have made your selection click the Next gt button If you choose Single Server Multiple Clients or Multiple Servers Multiple Clients you wi
64. Operation Mode In this manner you can remotely upload or download a project file start the panel or use passthrough mode to access the programming port on the PLC and issue commands The communication parameters for any particular controller are set automatically when the selection is made However if there is a need to change the default settings you can do so by changing the port settings under the Passthrough tab in the Panel Setup dialog box Note The UniOP panel must contain firmware version 4 10 or later to use this feature Note The PC Printer port cannot be used for printing when passthrough is configured 4 6 54 Port Settings 4 6 55 Port Settings Different models of controllers require different parameters in order to communicate properly with the operator interface panel Configure the passthrough serial line parameters If the optimum settings for baud rate parity data bits and stop bits to be used for communication between the target panel and the controller differ from those shown under the Port Settings you can change the settings Note All UniOP panels are capable of communicating with a PC at a speed of at least 9600 baud Some panels will communicate at speeds of 19 200 baud and 38 400 baud With Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 203 EXOR Tech note some Pentium based computers a speed of 19200 baud may prove to work more efficiently than 38 400 baud 4 6 56 Baud Rate This option specifie
65. Passthrough Miscellaneous Y Graphics Memory Type SSFDC J Touch Screen s EES Project Memory 704K C Disable Buzzer Trend buffers 20K Y Enhanced Fonts Recipe Backup Recipe Size 32KByte Events Backup Available Alarms 1024 _ Disable Battery LED Y Auxiliary Port Event List Size 1024 Y PC Printer Port Colors AS v Y Multi Language a E 16 Colors Y Report Printout Time Format 256 Colors Z M Nbianta High Colors Date Format DD MM AY OK Cancel Help Selecting 64K color support in Panel Setup The High Colors option can be used only in the following screen objects Dynamic graphics Bitmap editor Imported images Video input windows All the other screen objects such as text and touch objects support 256 colors 7 13 4 The FW60 Memory Architecture The memory organization of the T2003 hardware platform is shown in the block diagram of below figure The picture shows the relation between the internal user memory the external SSFDC memory card contents and the system level memory storage in the panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 487 EXOR Tech note The reference to this picture may be useful to understand the subsequent chapters of this document with particular reference to the chapter on Internal Memory When htemal Memory When Extemal Memory has been selected has been selected External SSFDC Flash Card Optional Copy Extemal to Internal Project Pr
66. Ports Ethernet Port Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibilty with Version 1 Modem commands and Modem messages Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 266 EXOR Tech note 4 7 12 Serial Ports 4 7 13 Ports Ports Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibility with version 1 Serial Port m Ports Available Parity Stop Bits None Gi Com DI C Odd EN C Even Baud Rate 38400 I P Use modem C Ethernet Port Server IP 100 Sick Pass Port Number V Panel in LA Cancel Help The communications parameters between Designer and the UniOP panel are set during installation However they should be checked by selecting the Ports tab under Transfers Options From this tab you can configure the ports to be used the parity and stop bits whether a modem is used to communicate with the panel and the baud rate Unless otherwise noted communication is possible with all panel models by setting the following parameters 38400 Data Bits IP Stop Bits Not all panels are capable of communicating at this speed 4 7 14 Ports Available Indicate the PC port to be used for communication with the panel When Designer is started it first checks to see if the requested COM port is available If the requested COM port is currently occupied by some other program Designer will automatically switch to the next available port When this occurs a message box w
67. Previous Page ES Data Entry Screen T Next Page E Command Menu El System El Password El Direct Access Frequency User lt q DB Direct Sec Number ofrows to scroll fi b sent me Scroll IT Enable page scroll The Page Options dialog box lets you Select a page from a page list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 183 E AS UR Tech note Access tools from a convenient toolbar Link to other pages and Enable page scroll 4 5 10 Page List This section lists all the pages in the current project You can rename a page by single clicking on the page name then typing a new page name 4 5 11 Toolbar The toolbar includes icons that allow you to cut copy paste insert special characters and select a language 4 5 12 Link Link the current page to the previous page or to the next page 4 5 13 Scroll This command enables a page scroll frequency and the number of lines to scroll This allows you to see lines that may be off the screen without having to use the arrow keys to scroll through the information When pages are linked the left and right arrow keys on the display panel may be used to scroll between pages By default the current page is linked to both the previous page and the next page Note lf you are having problems using this feature check the RDA setup under Panel Controller Interface in the Project menu Make sure that the PR box within the section
68. Ref entry box in the Assign section shows the currently selected memory location Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box which allows you to select the exact memory location to be reflected Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 137 EXOR Tech note 4 4 148 Layout The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in which you wish to work The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cell Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on to
69. Reports Panel Page Property Spacing before ng Ok Starting row LS Cancel Lines to print 40 Spacing after 10 Page break after Y Graphic Mode W Font Font 1 v This dialog box lets you set the number of line spaces before and after the report the starting row the total number of lines to print whether to put a page break after printing the report whether to enable graphics printing and which font to use for printing 4 6 173 Margins Set the amount of space in characters to be allotted as left right top and bottom margins on the printed reports Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 232 E AS DR Tech note 4 6 174 Header 4 6 175 Header El Reports Report 1 General Header Footer Advanced Height 2 E Fields Date US Field Type Report Name 7 Add _Delete Row iz Col fi Align lett sl Argument Report The structure of the header and the footer are the same The header and footer both remain consistent throughout the report i e the header on page 1 of a report will be the same header that appears on page 9 of a report You can define the height of the header A number of predefined fields can be inserted into a header such as the time and date the page number the report name and a label which allows the user to enter static text It is also possible to specify where the fields are
70. Status Code Panel Restart to inform the controller that the panel itself has been reset Both the panel and the controller can write to the Status Word and the Command Response Word however they must not write at the same time to the same memory location Proper operation of the mailbox is ensured if the sequence described in the figure is followed The controller program must always wait for the completion of the current Mailbox session before attempting to start a new one The controller program should always check the status returned by the UniOP panel on completion of a session Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 388 E AS D BR Tech note Sequence for the Panel Sequence for the Controller Set Status Code Panel Restart Set Command Code and Parameters Status Code Pending Request Set Status Code Pending request Command Code Legal Status Code Illegal Command Set Status Set Status Code Mailbox Code Panel Busy Restart Status Code Command Complete Execute Command and Set Response Read Response Data Set Status Code Command Complete Set Status Code No Request 7 4 Networks 7 4 1 UniNET Networks The UniNET network is a feature of the operator panels that enables them to be connected together and to communicate with each other This offers the ability to display on one panel either the data from the controller attached to the panel its
71. Title Font The font in which the gauge title will be displayed Can be selected from installed Touchscreen fonts 4 4 255 Labels Color The color in which the title text will be displayed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 162 EXOR Tech note 4 4 256 Labels Font The font in which the numeric labels on the gauge will be displayed Can be selected from installed Touchscreen fonts 4 4 257 Frame The color of the box frame around the gauge Note A frame color is not used when the background is a custom bitmap 4 4 258 Rim The color of the gauge scale and ticks Note A rim color is not used when the background is a custom bitmap 4 4 259 Background The background color of the gauge box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 163 EXOR Tech note 4 4 260 Gauge 4 4 261 Gauge General Layout Attributes Gauge Needle Background Rotation Ticks Direction Clockwise DI Style Middle DI Origin West DI Major 5 Minor 5 Start E Sie fro Range p fiso Arc Colors Cancel Help On the Gauge tab you can format the Rotation and Ticks on the dial and set the Arc Colors 4 4 262 Rotation 4 4 263 Rotation Under the Rotation section you can set the rotation direction the origin point start position and range 4 4 264 Direction The rotation direction of the gauge needle Can be clockwise or counterclockwise 4 4 265 Origin The position
72. Undeclared Client Access When checked this box specifies that partners of the UniNET network cannot be accessed by aclient not expressly declared to be a member of the network Note this field is only available when the UNINET Network employs Ethernet Connectivity Note A general configuration where the UniOP UniNET node is set to 1 and several servers are configured with a different IP address is allowed if it corresponds to several UniNET networks each one composed of only one panel working as a server These UniNET networks are part of the same Ethernet network the UniOP servers are independent from each other and the use of a similar layout is useful when a UniNET client running on a PC may be required to collect data coming from several different controllers Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 212 EXOR Tech note 4 6 89 UniNET TCPIP Represents the port number from which the UniNET protocol services respond The default value is normally correct However it may be changed in case the default port is already assigned to another service Note this field is only available when the UNINET Network employs Ethernet Connectivity 4 6 90 Enable UniNET Network Click the Enable UniNET Network checkbox to activate enable the configured network configuration If the UniNET network is enabled then the panel to which the project file will be downloaded will act as part of the network If it is disabled the panel will function
73. UniOP User s Manual 150 E AS UH Tech note 4 4 184 Y Axis Maximum The maximum value of the defined Y axis To the right of the dialog box you can define the default value Y axis range that will be used when the trend viewer is displayed If you put this internal panel control variable on the UniOP as a read write field its value can be modified on line allowing you to dynamically change the Y axis range 4 4 185 X Axis 4 4 186 X Axis Trend Window Properties F 2 xi Y Axis Axis Layout Attributes Style ei C Samples C OnPLC Range 00 00 01 00 dd hh mm ss Scroll 00 00 10 hh mm ss Scrolling Direction Left DI Iw Enable auto scroll control Cursor x Cursor X Axis Min X Axis Max Use this index tab to define the X axis properties Style Scrolling and Cursor of the trend viewer Note A single X Axis exists for all of the curves that have been inserted inside the same trend viewer window 4 4 187 Style 4 4 188 Style The format of the X Axis Time Samples or On PLC is defined from the curves that are inside the trend viewer When no curves are defined all of these radio buttons are disabled After adding one or more curves only the appropriate radio button is enabled Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 151 EXOR Tech note 4 4 189 Time The X axis range is time defined This will be enabled when the trend buffers inside the trend viewer are sampled cyclic
74. UniOP panel retrieves these values Selecting Project Panel Setup and clicking on the Settings index tab will reveal a checkbox called Update PLC References If this checkbox is marked the dynamic variable references will be updated on a continuous basis If this checkbox is unmarked the dynamic variable references will be updated only after a page change when the destination page contains variable reference fields Note When the continuous mode is used to get dynamic variable references from the controller communication performance can be reduced due to the increasing number of variables being transmitting through the communication channel between the UniOP panel and the controller Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 69 EXOR Tech note 4 4 20 Scaling 4 4 21 Scaling tab Numeric Field Properties E 21x General Text Range Scaling Attributes y A1l A2 x B Al B Ge Constant Reference Constant Reference I Y f l A2 e Constant Reference j yl Cancel Apply Help Scaling lets you change the appearance of the values being displayed onto the panel For example if the controller is reporting values in Celsius but the operator is familiar with Fahrenheit performing a scaling operation on the data can convert it with the result being displayed in Fahrenheit With this option any data from the controller can be manipulated however you wish The scaling equation is defined as y
75. User s Manual 59 XOR Tech note Data Field Properties i 2lsl IN Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Address PLC Port module numb PP3 Data Format BYTE Bin x Cancel Help This variable provides information about the status of the PLC Port Module Number assignment Assigned to Panel SCMO03 Module Assigned to Internal Controller User Mode A A SCMO03 Module Assigned to Internal Controller Service Mode Number Note The SCM03 Module Number is the SCM03 Module address as displayed in the UniOP panel System Menu PC Printer Port Mode Data Field Properties oe Ax Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Address PC Printer Port module Y PP4 Data Format BYTE Bin z Cancel Help This variable provides information about the status of the PC Printer Port Module Number assignment Assigned to Panel SCM03 Module Assigned to Internal Controller User Mode Number SCM03 Module Assigned to Internal Controller Service Mode Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 60 E AS D BR Tech note Number Note The SCMO03 Module Number is the SCM03 Module address as displayed in the UniOP panel System Menu Recipe Data may be stored inside a panel in data retentive memory The amount of data retentive memory available varies depending on the panel model This data retentive memory can be used to permanently store
76. Video Input Properties dialog box shown in the below figure Video Input Properties General Layout Attributes Input Control ar Channel Video Inputt x YDO1 Vdolmput Video Inputl DonotrelodYideo Input2 Video Input3 Display VGA Control Var Display Mode On y DO1 WdoFlag Property Sheet for Video Input Objects Note The Video Input Type can be selected also from the panel screen using the appropriate Control variable 7 13 10 Display Mode Display Mode defines how video input objects are initialized Two options are available for the Display Mode On Off Display Mode can be set in the Video Input Properties dialog box as shown in the below figure Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 491 EXOR Tech note Video Input Properties General Layout Attributes Input Control Var Channel Video Inputt x VD Vdolnput Do not reload control variables Display Control Var Display Mode On y YDO1VdoFlag On Of OK Cancel Help ok On makes the input image immediately visible in the Video Object after project download Off the image from the video channel is not shown in the Video Object and needs later to be in case enabled using the dedicated Control Variable Note The Display Mode can be selected also from the panel by using the apposite Control variable 7 13 11 Color and Video Options The Layout tab of the Video Input Proper
77. add a new trigger 4 6 195 Delete Click on the Delete button to the selected trigger from the list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 239 EXOR Tech note 4 6 196 Trigger Properties 4 6 197 Trigger Properties The trigger Type can be set as cyclic which will print the Report at certain specified intervals up to 99 hours apart or every day at a specified time The specified interval or specified time is set under Time 4 6 198 Report The name of the report to which the trigger will apply 4 6 199 Trigger Time Any report can be printed cyclically in two different modes cyclically after an interval of time every day at a specific time 4 6 200 Time For cyclic triggers this is the number of hours up to 99 between triggers For daily triggers this is the time of day when the report will be triggered 4 6 201 Passwords 4 6 202 Passwords Data entry enable Password CONF TIME ACK PRINT PAGE ALOGIALOGO From page To page ba EE E ET PF ff fp 4321 WO E NO O A E IIS Ps de E EEMI v W dle tees ie ie ae TE BA A W ceecee eE ac tie AL fig ade vlt GE e AS AA ll c ece eE e a re A RE E Aa e AMES ME Logout timeout em Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 240 EXOR Tech note This feature lets you password protect the project file so that unauthorized uploads cannot occur Four digit passwords are used Once a password is specified every time a user attempts to uploa
78. an Open File type dialog box is displayed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 457 EXOR Tech note and you can select the desired data source from which to import tags After the tags are imported the tag names and logical addresses are displayed in the Tag Editor grid When the Export menu item is selected a Save As dialog box is displayed and you can select the desired export format and enter the file name to which to export the tag data The Import and Export operations are dependent on the format of the data being imported or exported 7 9 11 Using Tags in Designer Once you have a tags dictionary set up for a project there are a few additional steps necessary to configure the project to work with the tags The controller for the project Project Configure Controller should be the same controller specified in the tag dictionary From the Project menu select Configure Tag Dictionaries Click the Enable Tags box and select the tag database you created for this project Then for any applicable field Numeric ASCII data field meter instrument etc click under Reference to bring up the Data Field Properties dialog box In the Data Field Properties box check Enable Tags and select the tag dictionary to be associated with the reference You may wish to use the Tag Validation feature in the Project menu before downloading the project 7 9 12 Tag Validation 7 9 13 Tag Validation Tag Validation allows you to sw
79. and the selected file name is entered in the box The following file formats are supported Excel files xls CSV files Comma delimited csv CSV files Semicolon delimited csv Text Tab delimited txt When you have completed Step 2 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 3 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 283 EXOR Tech note 4 8 13 Import Tags Step 3 Tag Import Wizard 28 x Step 3 Column configuration Database Columns Available columns in Tag name Up Logical address Data format VE IOWA Comments Down D ged Group name Tag name GN address Add gt ata format Comments Skip column Start import at row ft coca teo In Step 3 you will configure the columns in your imported files In the left box are the columns available in the database being imported Specify the value in the edit box of Start import at row in order to specify the first row of the data user want to import You may need to scroll to see all of the available column names In the right box are the columns normally available in a tag database If you want to add columns to this list you may do so Simply click on a column name in the left box and click the Add gt button The column name appears in the right box Column names are appended to the bottom of the list Select a column name and use the Up and Down buttons to rearrange the list order if necessary If you c
80. as a normal non networked panel If the UniNET network is enabled then one of the already configured nodes can be selected thus assigning the node number for the current project file and for the panel to which the project file will be downloaded A checkmark appears next to a node number when the UniNET Network is enabled This is used to determine which UniNET node is assigned to the current project Right mouse click on the name and then Set as Current Panel node 4 6 91 Broadcast Periodic Clock If the UniNET network is enabled then you can specify whether the panel is to broadcast periodic real time clock synchronization messages across the network The purpose of these messages is to synchronize the clocks in the different panels attached to the UniNET network If the check box Broadcast Periodic Clock Synchronization Messages is checked then the panel will broadcast a clock synchronization message across the network every 60 minutes If the check box is not checked then the periodic clock synchronization messages will not be broadcast by the panel The best way to ensure clock synchronization across the UniNET network is to configure only one panel as the broadcaster of the periodic clock synchronization messages Note The check box Broadcast Periodic Clock Synchronization Messages only controls the periodic clock synchronization broadcasts However every panel in the UniNET network regardless of the setting of this check box will alw
81. automatically configured if it is selected to be of either the Single Server Multiple Client type or of the Multiple Server Multiple Client type However Designer lets you make modifications to the network parameters by clicking on the Configure button If you chose Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients you must specify all of the configuration parameters for the network by clicking on the Configure button 4 6 85 Network Configuration 4 6 86 Network Configuration The parameters for the network are automatically configured if it is selected to be of either the Single Server Multiple Client type or of the Multiple Server Multiple Client type However Designer lets you make modifications to the network parameters by using the Network Configuration dialog box If you chose Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients you must specify all of the configuration parameters for the network The Network Configuration dialog box may be accessed by clicking on the Configure button in the Network Selection process or by selecting Network Setup from the Project menu or clicking on the Network Setup icon on the toolbar after a network has been configured for a project Network Configuration Maximum Node Number J Disable undeclared client access K E a UniNET TCPAP 6917 Enable UniNET Network Broadcast Periodic Clack Synchronization Messages Yet Comm Cancel Configured Nodes Controller Driver Controller Model 1 DE
82. box then clicking on the Controller Setup button from the Select Controller dialog box can be used when connection to more than one device is required Because the UniOP panel is a partner of the Ethernet network like all of the other devices a proper IP address must be assigned to the panel An IP address can be assigned to an Ethernet board from the External Devices tab in Panel Setup from the Project menu The IP address used in Configure Controller and in Panel Setup External Devices has to be chosen according to the overall Ethernet configuration 7 4 20 Connecting Panels to the Network 7 4 21 Connecting Panels to the Network The way panels are connected to the network depends on the connectivity adopted by the UniNET Network i e if panels are to be connected via an RS485 UniNET Network or via an Ethernet UniNET Network 7 4 22 RS485 7 4 23 Connecting Panels to an RS485 Network The following sections describe how to connect panels to an RS485 UniNET Network Pinout for the PLC Communications Port Pinout for the PC Printer Communications Port Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 400 EXOR Tech note The TSI01 Bus Terminal with RS 232 to RS 485 Converter The TSIO2 Bus Terminal RS 232 Cable to TSIO1 Bus Terminal with Converter Printer Port RS 232 Cable to TSIO1 Bus Terminal with Converter PLC Port RS 485 Cable to TSIO2 Bus Terminal Information is also provided on installing the network cable 7 4 24 Pino
83. by a communication module a combination of one Ethernet based communication driver and a driver requiring any other communication module cannot be supported The internal controller module plugs into the same socket as the communication modules Thus if an internal controller is plugged into the panel it not possible to plug ina communication module Therefore a communication driver requiring a custom communication module including Ethernet based cannot be supported Note Two Ethernet based communication drivers can normally be used simultaneously because they will both communicate through the same Ethernet communication module Ethernet based UniNET can also be used in addition to one or two Ethernet based communication drivers 4 6 6 Controller The currently selected controller s is listed If this is not correct click on the button to activate the Select Controller dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 192 E AS DR Tech note 4 6 7 Select Controller 4 6 8 Select Controller Select Controller E E 2lsl Current Driver DEMO Controller Name Drive DLL Name Cancel Atos 4 00 D32Uplc068 DLL 5 01 BCM Passive 4 00 D32Uplc081 DLL 5 00 a Remove CANopen 4 01 D32Uplc107 d 5 04 See CT Dinverter_b 4 00 D32U plc067 DLL 5 00 Refresh CT UNIDRIVE 4 00 D32Uplc073 DLL 5 01 gen Cegelec 80 4 00 D32Uplc044 DLL 5 03 Hel CompressorControl Am D32Uple085DLL 5 00 ep Compumotor 6000 4 00 D32Uplc0
84. can put this variable on the panel by selecting the Time Date icons located on the toolbar 4 4 200 X Axis Maximum This variable contains the maximum value of the defined X axis You can put this variable on the panel by selecting the Time Date icons located on the toolbar 4 4 201 Cursor Color Color used to draw the X axis cursor 4 4 202 Layout 4 4 203 Layout Y Axis X Axis Layout Attributes Title Legend Fg CR Font Height 10 Ba Jr Fiansparen Window width 7 i Fame MN Ba J V Transparent X Grid H Marks Y Grid Maks 4 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 153 EXOR Tech note Options in the Layout section define the visual appearance of the trend viewer window such as the title and window A layout toolbar is also available 4 4 204 Layout Toolbar 4 4 205 Layout Toolbar The layout toolbar contains icons to keep frequently used commands easily accessible These include the following commands Special Characters Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character Select Language It is possible to integrate multiple languages Clicking on the Select Language button brings up the Languages dialog box that allows you to choose the language in which you wish to work Alignment Title alignment Can be Left Right or Center 4 4 206 Special Character
85. ccsessancesteinseaeebeaeets 232 A ciel centeviteretvidete 291 Replace Images 339 Report Header Footer 421 Report Listin aid 230 Report on Panel Printer eee eee 226 Report Printout A dhe eege eege 421 Report Prmtout cecceceeseeeeeeceesteeeeeeeee 421 Reports BUE ieir nanao a aii 13 REPOTIS ceicicoiincccninia nario ninan 13 RepoOT S csi circa 240 AA TT 420 Request Data Entry Mode 381 Request Masked Data Entry Mode 381 Reserved Data Area coooonicccinococionnnnnaccnancnnnns 407 A A aise eee 181 Reset Delete siones 326 IT 341 Retries Communications Number 269 Keb s egehge eerzteEetde eg Deeg 269 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Right Click Menu 354 te TT 163 ROM File EXPO VE 311 ROM Pile econo tries ee 311 Rota uscar 164 A O 234 236 ROW Menu siennes ninii 301 RS232 A Geearristhstes ieee de 403 TSION Bs ciirciasinicisa pri 402 RS litio ii 402 IIA ia wiedeiaderyeset novia adden tele 403 RS232 Cable Ke 402 R S232 Cable aroei tsacischvechveraiiaae 402 RS485 CIA iorn EEEE STE 403 RS S ucirniiiniecennareeninaieia 210 397 RS485 EE 403 RS485 Cable e KR E 403 RS485 Cable caninas 403 RS485 Network ooccoocconocccococoncconoconccanccnnnannss 400 Running NetWork usina 416 RUNNIDE ndice 416 S SO Link Status Monitor Flag 427 S1 Data Entry Active seres 427 S12 RECIPES ia anni 428 S13 Recipe Upload ooococcnnccnconnccnncnnncccnnnos 428 S14 Recipe Download 429 S15 Recipe Fil
86. create new layers delete them and change their reciprocal order Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 38 Name Layer 1 Background Layer These are the available commands Insert Delete Move Item Up Move Item Down Show and Lock Active Layers Only Show Active Layers Note Layers are a Designer feature introduced to easily configure the Z ordering of objects and graphics on the panel screen The UniOP panel only supports the relative Z ordering of objects and graphics no layers 4 3 17 Insert IV Only Show Active Layer Layer 1 Background Layer Inserts a new layer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 39 Background Layer Deletes the selected layer 4 3 19 Move Item Up Background Layer Moves the layer occupied by an item forward 4 3 20 Move Item Down Background Layer Moves the layer occupied by an item downward Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 40 E AS DR Tech note 4 3 21 Show and Lock Active Layers Layers N E x MV Only Show Active Layer Name Layer 1 Background Layer The Show option controls if a given layer can be displayed or not The Un Lock option controls if a layer can be moved 4 3 22 Only Show Active Layers Layer 1 Background Layer This option makes Designer show only the active layers 4 4 Insert Menu 4 4 1 Insert Menu This section provides information about the Insert menu Th
87. data for use by an attached controller This data can be written to the controller and conversely the data can be read from the controller and then placed in the data retentive memory This concept is termed Recipes and offers a powerful way to extend the capabilities of the controller This is especially true for controllers that have a limited amount of internal memory Some panel models do not support non volatile recipe storage please refer to specific product datasheets for more information Recipes are configured by adding the required controller data items to a page as recipe data fields A recipe can be associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data items on that page Recipe data items contain all the information associated with normal controller data items but rather than the data being read and written directly to the controller during the course of normal operation the data is instead read from and written to the panel memory that is reserved for the data item Only when you explicitly ask the panel to write data to the controller is the data sent to the controller Similarly only when you explicitly ask the panel to read data from the controller is the data actually read from the controller To configure recipe data field properties either click on the appropriate icon in the toolbar or select Numeric ACSII Bargraph or Message from Insert Data Fields then use the cursor to specify the location of the i
88. driver is using both serial communication ports the PLC and the PC Printer port it cannot be used in multi protocol configurations If two communication drivers are both serial there will be no ports left to connect the serial UniNET network You can still use the Ethernet based UniNET of course Since only one communication module can be plugged into the panel a combination of two communication drivers each requiring such a module cannot be supported As the Ethernet protocol is supported by a communication module a combination of one Ethernet based communication driver and a driver requiring any other communication module cannot be supported The internal controller module plugs into the same socket as the communication modules Thus if an internal controller is plugged into the panel it not possible to plug ina communication module Therefore a communication driver requiring a custom communication module including Ethernet based cannot be supported Note Two Ethernet based communication drivers can normally be used simultaneously because they will both communicate through the same Ethernet communication module Ethernet based UniNET can also be used in addition to one or two Ethernet based communication drivers Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 217 E AS D BR Tech note 4 6 110 Controller The currently selected controller s is listed If this is not correct click on the button to activate the
89. either a Serial RS485 connection or an Ethernet connection This offers the ability to display on one panel either the data from the controller attached to the panel itself or data from other controllers attached to other panels on the network Information about UniNET networks clients and servers connecting operator panels to the network advanced network programming and network setup is available An example is provided that describes the steps required to set up a UniNET network composed of a single server operator panel connected to a controller and two client operator panels which will access the controller data via the server through the network services If a network is not defined for a project selecting Network Setup from the Project menu or by clicking the Network Setup icon on the toolbar brings up the Network media amp protocol selection dialog box If a network type is already defined for a project selecting Network Setup takes you directly to the Network Configuration dialog box 4 6 80 Network Media and Protocol 4 6 81 Network Protocol The first step in configuring the network is selecting the network type The Designer software supports two types of UniNET network an RS485 network or an Ethernet based network Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 208 Network media amp protocol selection E 2lsl Select Network Media amp Ge R5485 Network Ethernet UDPAP protocol If optional
90. entitled PLC is unchecked 4 5 14 Recipe Configuration 4 5 15 Recipe Configuration A recipe is associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data fields on that page However there can be a number of different parameter sets for a recipe The Recipe Configuration dialog box is accessed by selecting Recipe Configuration from the Page menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 184 E AS DR Tech note Recipe Configure ES A xi Number Of Parameter Sets fi E Multipage recipe Set As Recipe name Cut Copy Paste Cancel Recipe Parameter Set Ee DB10 DWO Ltrs WE VIE mt UE Im Le The Recipe Configuration dialog box lets you Specify the number of parameter sets for the recipe on the current page Specify default values for all recipe data items on the current page Note Recipe data items must be defined on the current page before the Recipe Configuration dialog box can be activated To do so insert a Numeric ASCIl Bargraph or Message data field and select Recipe as the Reference 4 5 16 Number of Parameter Sets Indicate the number of parameter sets That number of columns is activated in the Recipe Parameter Set section 4 5 17 Multipage Recipe Data which are logically part of a single recipe can be scattered over several project pages and still be selected downloaded or uploaded with a single command A recipe spanning several pages is c
91. font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 114 EXOR Tech note Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed while Off indicates the color that the touch cell will be when it is in the not pressed state 4 4 106 Attributes Note This page is used to show the Attribute tab for all
92. footer These will be common to each and every page of the report The second is the display page that is the body of the report Creating a New Report Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 420 E AS UR Tech note Setting Up Report Headers 8 Footers Advanced Report Parameters Triggering a Report Printout 7 6 5 Creating a New Report To define a report select Project Report on Panel Printer Reports Add a report by clicking the New button You can rename the report with a more descriptive name if you wish by single clicking on the report name then typing in a new name All of the pages of your project file will be shown on the General tab in an Available Pages box on the left To add a page to the report you are creating select the page and click on the Add gt button Doing so will place the page name into the Report Pages box on the right By selecting a page from the Available Pages box and pressing the Properties button you can specify what part of the project file page to print and where to start printing on the page 7 6 6 Setting Up a Report Header and or Footer The structure of the header and the footer are the same It is possible to define the height of the header and the footer and several predefined fields that can be inserted into the header or footer Under the Header and Footer tabs you can specify the height of the header footer the fields that are inserted into the header footer where they a
93. for the display backlight The brightness of the backlight can be controlled using the macro commands shown in the below figure Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 496 EXOR Tech note Macro Editor All Pages Page 1 Data Entry Alarms System Power Up Command Menu Event List Time Date State Key Pressed Key Released C Key Fast Autorepeat Commands S r AHO Rx L HEH DIE Bic Delete e Append C Insert OK Cancel Help The brightness can be decreased increased and changed in cycle with steps using the macro Dimming The display brightness can be reduced up to 2 of the maximum value 7 13 14 Compatibility Issues The B generation units are delivered without removable memory card user memory is the internal 32MB Flash memory as a factory setting From the point of view of transferring a new project file to the panel there are no differences in handling the download whether you use internal memory or Flash card The memory selection is done in Configuration Mode and no settings are required at Designer level The Copy option of the Memory Setup menu can be used to transfer the entire contents of an external SSFDC card to the internal flash The external card must be of course prepared with proper firmware files Type 60 and correct project matching the hardware type according to the Designer Panel Setup selection SSFDC cards already programmed for units with firm
94. forced to allowed limits Additionally the hardware interface will round off the specified scaling factors to match its internal calculation capabilities this will result in a picture on panel slightly smaller than programmed one Offset The top left position of a window within the video stream that will be displayed Into the Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 493 EXOR Tech note Video Object the input stream will be displayed starting from the specified position and cropped on right bottom borders Fixed aspect ratio Scaling will be performed in a way that original stream s aspect ratio is preserved vertical scaling factor will be ignored Fit to scale If set all offset and scaling parameters will be ignored a stream will be scaled in a way that it is completely visible 7 13 12 Control Variables Video Input parameters can be adjusted also at run time using the dedicated Control Variables to select a Control Variable select Variable in the Numeric Field Properties dialog box as shown in the below figure Numeric Field Properties General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Numeric e Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Ce i r P Size Width E Height Reference C PLC e Variable Recipe Index EE OK Cancel Help Then select Internal variable for the Data Type as shown in the below figure Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 494 EXOR Tech
95. from the Field Type list Add and Delete buttons are available You can also specify row column alignment and argument parameters for headers and or footers Field Type A list of predefined fields available for insertion into a header or footer Selecting the field type Label activates the Argument entry box where the label text may be inserted Add Clicking on the Add button inserts the item currently displayed in the Field Type list into the list of Fields to be included in a header or footer Delete Clicking on the Delete button removes the currently selected item from the list of Fields to be included in a header or footer Row The number of the row where the currently selected items in the Fields list will be inserted into the header or footer Column The number of the column where the currently selected items in the Fields list will be inserted into the header or footer This option is only available when the alignment is set as Custom Align The alignment for the header or footer Choices include Left Center Right and Custom If Custom is selected then a Column value may be entered Argument Selecting the field type Label activates the Argument entry box where the label text may be inserted Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 236 E AS D BR Tech note 4 6 182 Advanced 4 6 183 Advanced tab General Header Footer Advanced Reports Report 1 I Wrap Lines Attribute Tran
96. group of registers in the controller memory from a minimum of 2 registers to a maximum of 20 The mailbox can be placed anywhere in the controller memory at an address you select When the mailbox is enabled the operator panel cyclically reads the contents of the mailbox from the controller The controller can command the UniOP panel to perform certain tasks by placing data in the memory area used by the mailbox When the panel detects that the controller has written data in the mailbox it interprets the data as a numeric code for a required command If the panel recognizes the command it immediately executes it If the command requires a response from the panel then the panel places the response back into the mailbox itself Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 373 EXOR Tech note Note The Interlock Mailbox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from the controller In general the Interlock MailBox works by writing a command into the Command Response Word Available commands can be seen in the table of available mailbox commands Depending upon the command certain parameters may have to be entered Once the parameters are entered a code needs to be written to the Status Word When the command written into the Command Response Word is attempted executed a Response Word will be written into the Command Response Word indicating the status of the command If you have the mailbox set up to be cyclically
97. information directly from the UniOP panel that is connected to the PC To access the Panel Setup dialog box select Panel Setup from the Project menu or click the Panel Setup icon on the toolbar The tabs in the Panel Setup dialog box include Panel Model Settings External Devices Passthrough and Miscellaneous 4 6 21 Recognition of Old Panel Models Designer recognizes a model code that is inside the panel or inside the project file When using an older panel or an older project file the model code may not be found In this case Designer tries to guess the panel model that was initially used by comparing the panel capability information stored inside the panel device or inside the project file with the panel capabilities that are defined inside the panel database within Designer It is possible that Designer will find more than one panel that fits the available capability description In this case Designer will show a warning message to advise you to manually enter the model in the Panel Setup dialog box When Designer cannot determine the UniOP model associated with a project file the GENERIC panel model will be selected In this mode all of the available panel capabilities will be enabled Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 195 EXOR Tech note It is also possible to manually select the GENERIC panel model This is useful if you have a new UniOP panel that has not been defined within the Designer panel datab
98. into the working folder Warning Be sure to save a backup copy of your project before run this command 4 8 183 Connect to Tags The Connect to Tags command connects the active project with the selected tags database This command checks the controller reference of each field in the project and compare it with the logical addresses from the selected tag dictionary linking the first hit in the tag database If the controller reference is not found in the tags database then the field will not be tied to any tag If the same controller reference is found in the tags database twice the second instance will never be tied Note This command is active only when no tags database is already linked to the active project 4 8 184 Swap Protocols Swap Protocols command is available only when the current project is double protocol enabled Using this command you can swap the order of the Primary and Secondary drivers This will phisically resutl in a port swap on the panel between the two channels Swap Protocol A x Primary Modbus ATU Secondary Modbus TCP Swap Of Cancel e Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 338 EXOR Tech note 4 8 185 Replace Images The Replace Image dialog box provides an easy way to work with the images of the currently opened project Replace Project Images o xl Bitmap Info Name Venturi Width pixels 199 Height pixels 155 Resolution bits 4 16
99. least two passwords defined with one of them setup to be automatically logged in This means that whenever the panel goes from Configuration Mode to Operation Mode the specified password is logged in Once the passwords are defined in the project file an ASCII control variable field is needed for each password that the panel user will be able to change An example of the automatic login feature is provided Note In order to use this feature the panel must be equipped with firmware version 4 10 or later Note Only one password per project can have the automatic login feature enabled 4 6 212 Password Automatic Login Example To program a control variable field to perform the password automatic login function you need to perform two basic steps create the password file and create control variables to manipulate the passwords The individual steps are as follows Select Passwords from the Project menu Set up four passwords 1234 4321 6574 and 9809 Check the ALOGI box for password 6574 The Passwords dialog box will resemble that shown below Note that there are eight possible passwords and that ALOGI is checked for password number three in the list Passwords Data entry enable Password CONF TIME ACK PRINT PAGE ALOGIALOGO From page To page MY VW WP WP RP PF Th i 4321 ES oe ee ee en en A fi Cancel c57 WI ve E ho ceos nnnn nn sn S Im Mar aoa poo oe eS Bs a A SNA BE E EHS ES EE ey ee SS Boss atacada oe
100. longer because two drivers must be downloaded instead of one The Controller type section of the Panel Resources Dialog Box is now two lines wide In the first line there will be the name of the First Driver and in the second one the name of the Second Driver In the case of single protocol configuration the second line will be empty 7 2 6 Configuring UniNET Networks There is no major difference in configuring UniNET network for single protocol applications and for multi protocol applications First two steps choosing the network media and the network type are the same However if one of the network types Single Server Multiple Clients or Multiple Server Multiple Clients is selected it is worth noticing that all the UniOP network server nodes will inherit the current configuration of the project In other words if the project in which the network is being setup is currently configured for single protocol all the UniOP node servers in the UniNET network will be configured to use only this protocol If the project is configured for multi protocol all the UniOP node servers will again be configured to use both protocols If the Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients network type chosen the Designer will pop up the Network Configuration Dialog Box This is the way to configure the UniNET network completely freely It is possible to configure UniOP nodes in different ways Some UniOP nodes may stand for bare
101. menu Select Time Date as the Style Remove the checkbox from the Years box to display only the days and months The date display format is now DD MM Assume that we wish to have the date displayed as MM DD This will be set in step 6 Under Assign select a Control Variable Click OK to accept the settings and return to the project page where the new trend time field is now displayed To change the date display format select Panel Setup from the Project menu Select the Settings tab Under Date Format choose the setting MM DD YY Click OK The trend time field date is now displayed as MM DD Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 171 EXOR Tech note 4 4 296 Recipe Menu 4 4 297 Recipe Menu A recipe menu is a feature that simplifies recipe parameter set selection on UniOP panels through a user friendly interface It provides a menu like field that can contain names to describe the parameter set instead of using numbers Each name represents one recipe parameter set To add a recipe menu select Recipe Menu from the Insert menu or press Ctrl R Recipe Menu Properties K 5E izi x General Text Attributes Style Attributes I Blink V Reverse Highlight Size Width 30 Height E Display MV Show Record Numbers Cancel The Recipe Menu Properties dialog box appears containing two tabs General and Text The General tab controls the size and appearance of the recipe menu whil
102. of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include round and rectangular buttons both flat and 3D It is also possible to create and insert a Custom button Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab 4 4 137 Action In the Action section you can set the number of states The minimum number of states is two 2 and the maximum number of states is four 4 You can also configure which memory location in the controller is affected by each state of the selector switch as well as the color scheme for each state The Ref entry box shows the currently selected memory location Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box which allows you to select the exact memory location to be written to You also have the option to disable the cyclic refresh Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 132 E SD BR Tech note 4 4 138 Layout The Layout tab of the Selector Switch Properties dialog box lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used Select the tab with the number of the state to be configured The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the L
103. other Ethernet settings when it is in Configuration mode The following is the information shown in panel when in Configuration Mode Se 7 12 2 Manual Definition of IP Address When the panel is in the Configuration Mode the user can manually enter the value of the IP address and other network parameters The activation of the manual address entry procedure depends on the type of the HMI Touchscreen If the HMI has a touchscreen just touch the address you want to edit The HMI will show the address entry page When the introduction is complete confirm with the Enter button The procedure can be aborted pressing the Clear button Keypad If the HMI has a keypad you can enter the address entry mode pressing the two arrow keys Up and Down at the same time Pressing the two arrow keys multiple time will cycle the data entry focus through all the available parameters When the introduction is complete confirm with the Enter key The procedure can be aborted pressing the Clear key The new IP address or Subnet Mask or Gateway IP becomes immediately effective when the data entry is confirmed with Enter The address assigned defined manually in Configuration Mode is persistent once the IP address has been defined it will be used by the panel until a new address is defined by the user To remove a manually defined IP address define the IP address 0 0 0 0 Note Before assigning an IP address to the panel make sure it is a unique addre
104. parameters are set automatically when the controller selection is made However if there is a need to change the default settings you may press the Comm button in the Controller Setup dialog box available for certain controllers This will bring up the Communications Parameters Setup dialog box where you can check the parameters used in Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 356 EXOR Tech note panel to controller communication including baud rate parity and stop bits To change the settings click on the selection arrows and pick a different setting from the pull down lists 6 3 7 Panel Selection and Setup 6 3 8 Panel Selection and Setup Before you begin working on a particular project you need to specify the type of display that your panel contains The physical size of the screen as well as its type backlight LCD passive color must be specified Failure to do this may result in the loss of text and data when you attempt to download the project file into the panel This can be done automatically using the Get Panel Resources command from the Transfers menu or manually using Panel Setup from the Project menu 6 3 9 Get Panel Resources The easiest way to set up Designer to work with your panel is to use the Get Panel Resources command in the Transfers menu This command prompts the Designer software to automatically retrieve the configuration of the connected panel This includes the physical size of the screen as wel
105. protocol and the second communication driver used to communicate using the second protocol The Configure Controllers dialog box contains a checkbox for Enable Double protocol Checking this box lets you specify a second controller Under the Controller 1 box another box will appear where you can specify Controller 2 Designer will issue a warning if an illegal combination is chosen and will not close the dialog box until an allowable configuration is selected If a configuration is specified in which a switch to new driver s was made Designer will prompt the user to accept the change If both drivers are changed Designer will prompt twice If at least one of the drivers is a serial driver the decision which driver will be set as the Controller 1 and which one as Controller 2 is important Controller 1 will use the PLC port and the Controller 2 will use the PC Printer port If one of drivers is using the current loop it must become Controller 1 to ensure that it uses the PLC port because the current loop Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 191 EXOR Tech note capability is only implemented on this serial port Also as the PC Printer and the PLC port connectors are of different genders careful selection of Controller 1 and Controller 2 can make cabling easier and less expensive There is no major difference in configuring UniNET networks for single protocol applications and for double protocol applications However if on
106. report is printed to configure a key or touch cell to print a report or to request a printout by using the Interlock MailBox Note In order to use these features the panel must contain firmware version 4 10 or higher 4 6 142 Printer Setup 4 6 143 Printer Setup To log alarms and messages a serial printer may be connected to the panel Note The same port is used for both programming the panel while in Configuration Mode and for logging information to a printer during Operation Mode To configure a serial printer select Project Report on Panel Printer Printer Setup Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 226 21x Text Only Edit Delete Cancel it Baud rate 1200 E ll Parity Data bits r Stop bits None Cc ei C Odd eg ca C Even Protocol Page size None Width eo characters Xon Xoff Height 66 characters f RTS CTS From the Printer Setup dialog box choose a printer and set the communication parameters such as baud rate parity stop bits data bits and protocol It is also possible to define the page size See the Printing section for additional information on printing 4 6 144 Printer 4 6 145 Printer Select a printer type from the pull down list If the printer to be used is not listed use the Add button to add a new printer to the list of available printers Doing so will bring up the Printer Properties dialog box in w
107. round and rectangular buttons whether flat or 3D It is also possible to insert a Windows button a touch cell with a look similar to the standard buttons you find in a typical Windows application or to create and insert a Custom button Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab 4 4 94 Action The panel key that the touch cell is to represent is indicated in the Key box under Action To select a panel key click on the button to bring up the Change View Panel Key Assignment dialog box 4 4 95 Layout Note This page is used to show the Layout tab for all the Touch Cells Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 108 IN XOR Tech note Panel Key Button Properties E 21x General Layout Attributes Custom ed aa Label Font Fixed Custom Font Text Text Bkgd Je Transparent Line Cd Bkad IV Transparent Off CH On CH Cancel Help The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the langua
108. s Manual 37 E AS DR Tech note 4 3 14 Disk Graphics Library Manager SC j Of xi A amp ab x amp GWW HNKZ 03 icu wj 64 23 IDAPI GH IMAGES MY ALXSIG BMP 8 annuncil jpg 8 annunci2 jpg EY ANTSY jpg Bf antsys jpg Bf ARNOLF JPG ASTRNAUT JPG El BABEL JPG BACKGR BMP w w w Name JASTRNAUT Spe 523 x 478 A Project E Library Al Dh Image Disk CAIMAGES ASTRNAUT J This tab allows to select a new graphic symbol a new picture from the file system The button Import puts the currently selected graphic symbol into the Project Screen area 4 3 15 Layers 4 3 16 Layers Each UniOP page is actually divided into layers Layers define a set of planes stacked along the Z axis of the screen i e the axis that goes form the screen to the eye of the user observer Thanks to layers it is possible to control in an easy way the Z ordering that is the position along the Z axis of a group of objects and graphics For instance by changing the position of a layer relative to the others also the position of all the objects and lines belonging to that layer are modified Objects and graphics are inserted into the currently active layer The active layer can be selected by using the layers toolbar usually positioned at the bottom of the work area bei HAM The layers dialog controls how layers are displayed allows to
109. sSSSCSsS When pressing the button associated to a given controller the Designer will show a list of controllers with the associated controller in pre selected status zx Current Driver DEMO Controller Cancel BCM Passive D32Uplc081 DLL Dee Baldor 4 00 D32Uplc130 dll 5 02 El Remove CANopen 4 01 D32Uplc107 dil 5 04 Remove CT Dinverter_b 4 00 D32U plc067 DLL 5 00 Refresh CT UNIDRIVE 4 00 D32Uplc073 DLL 5 01 Peteh Cegelec 80 4 00 D32Uplc044 DLL 5 03 Hel CompressorContol 4 00 D32UpleD85 DLL 5 00 ep Compumotor 6000 4 00 D32Uplc047 DLL 5 01 Crouzet RPX 4 00 D32Uplc074 DLL 5 01 Controller Setup DEMO Controller 4 00 D32UplcO030 DLL 5 00 y From this list it is possible to open the Controller Setup Dialog Box by pressing the Controller Setup button It can be noted that it is allowed to have PLC networks configured for both drivers naturally if both communication drivers are able of supporting PLC networks Therefore two independent PLC network branches can be connected to a single Panel 7 2 4 Placing Fields on a Page When the user in the Designer chooses to put a field onto a page the Field Properties dialog box is displayed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 370 Numeric Field Properties d B 2 xi General Text Ranae Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Numeric Decimal 7 Hexadecimal AA ASCII Signed Unsigned T Fixed point Placement fo
110. section describes how to set up and organize trend buffers that are sampled inside the PLC Note Trend buffers on PLC are available only on a few selected communication drivers Please enquire for availability To enable a trend buffer in PLC memory select the On PLC radio button on the X Axis tab of the Trend Window Properties dialog box 7 10 15 PLC Memory Area To properly sample and store the data in the PLC the trend buffer needs to be defined as a consecutive number of words with the following structure Word 00 Trend buffer identify counter Identification number of the trend buffer being displayed The UniOP will erase its internal copy of samples when it detects a change in the value of this word Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 465 EXOR Tech note Word 01 Max number of samples size of the trend window Size of the trend window displayed on the UniOP as a number of samples The uses this information each time a page of the project file is initialized Word 02 Number of samples available to be displayed in the PLC memory Number of active samples inside the PLC memory The UniOP will draw a trend based on the number of samples entered in this memory location When this value is increased a new piece of the trend will be drawn Likewise when this value is decreased a portion of the trend will be removed If you want to freeze the trend enter a value of zero in this memory location To erase th
111. supporting Pixel Vector Support Graphics Double Protocol Support If the panel is capable of Double Protocol Support You may copy the displayed resource configuration to the current project by pressing the Yes button If you do not wish to use the reported parameters press No If for any reason Designer is unable to communicate with the panel a message box will appear explaining the problem It is also possible to manually configure the software by using Panel Setup from the Project menu 4 7 45 Check Firmware Versions Correctly setting the Firmware Download flag is necessary to give Designer the necessary information required to correctly calculate the SSFDC memory used taking into account the size of the firmware files After exchanging information with the panel to detect the version of the firmware files that are inside the SSFDC memory card a dialog box is displayed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 275 Update firmware 3 x Firmware type SSFDC Designer Boot 59 450C 01 lt Do not update gt Firmware 58 450C 01 lt Do not update e Mips code 58 150C 01 lt Do not update gt e Mips service lt Do not update gt z Update Do not update The left column displays the versions of the firmware files that are located in the SSFDC memory card The right column displays versions of firmware files only if your computer contains a newer version If a new
112. text box is small only the sizes that can fit inside the selected area are enabled 6 4 4 Inserting Page Objects Insert text on the page by clicking on the screen and typing the text Data fields touch cells etc can be placed on the page by using the commands on the Insert menu Graphics and objects may be easily placed on the page by dragging them from the workspace Simply click on a tab in the workspace click on a graphic or object and drag it onto the page Once placed on the page you may move it align it resize it using the handles around it or edit it 6 4 5 Saving a Project File To save your new project select Save from the File menu or click on the Save icon in the toolbar The cursor will be momentarily replaced with an hourglass while the file is being saved If the application has not been named the Save As dialog box will appear The Save As dialog box can also be used to save your project under a different name This dialog box shows the current directory path and the current filename A new name and path may be entered or the default parameters may be accepted If the extension is omitted dpr is assumed If a file of the same name already exists in the selected directory you will be prompted to confirm the Save As operation in order to overwrite the existing file 6 4 6 Memory Used by the Project File You can determine how much memory is used by the current project file by selecting Memory Use from
113. the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the touch cell light Select Red as the color for On and Green as the color for Off Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse color when it is pressed Select the Layout tab and in the Label box type Illuminated Push Button Adjust the Font if necessary Click OK The screen should appear similar to the figure below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 129 EXOR Tech note Designer testagain dpr Page 1 lof x EB File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help la x JO Si e ee lrot WQQ SHH ek OB z jsmerag 298158 Baa Waa aa Raan nore Meh Ok b a aI a testagain Sq Pages EI 1 Page 1 D Special Pages ZS Grap ADR DD Project Pg 1 1 Row 13 Col 53 Simatic 55 S gt A EE al a e 4 4 132 Selector Switch 4 4 133 Selector Switch The Selector Switch Properties dialog box is used to create a selector switch of N states where N represents an integer from 2 through 4 To insert a selector switch touch cell click the Selector Switch icon from the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells Selector Switch then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed A dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a selector switch touch cell may be configured Tn179 05 do
114. the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties E 21x General Layout Attributes Custom Attributes Name kg t S Layer Eaei gececcscesccesse Visible T Disabled T Blink on Touch 7 Non Printable Reverse on Touch M Non Scrollable Cancel Help When the button is pressed you can set it to Blink or for the colors to Reverse 4 4 107 Custom Note This page is used to show the Custom tab for all the Touch Cells Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 115 EXOR Tech note Panel Key Button Properties E ki x General Layout Attributes Custom State On Edit Load Image Handling Resample When Sizing use for detailed images Cancel Help The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom button Custom buttons can be created for both Off and On states Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box The button width and height can be specified Color options may also be selected according to the selected panel s support of colors The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Custom buttons This checkbox allows you to place an indicator light on the button 4 4 108 Touch Cell Panel Key Button Example In this example we will configure an ASCII key as a touch cell N
115. the arrow keys to highlight CONFIG or CFG and press Enter again Select Transfers Download from Designer to send the project to the panel Communication Status Transfer Mode 0 Program size y Bytes Last Message If the default setup of the Designer software has not been changed the project will start automatically after being downloaded After a short pause check the display Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 8 EXOR Tech note The text that was typed in previous step should be visible along with the data value read from the controller The Fault light should be off The Com and Run lights if present should be on A blinking Com light indicates a communications error 3 Installation 3 1 Overview This section provides the assumptions and conventions used in this documentation system requirements for using Designer software installation instructions instructions for solving installation problems basic instructions for connecting a UniOP panel to the PC contact information technical support contacts instructions for reporting a bug software license and disclaimer 3 2 Assumptions We assume that those reading this manual are using the Designer software to design control panel applications to run on UniOP panels We also assume that you have a basic understanding of PCs Microsoft Windows and the type of network environment in which you will r
116. the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed while Off indicates the color that the touch cell will be when it is in the not pressed state 4 4 129 Attributes Note This page is used to show the Attribute tab for all the Touch Cells Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 127 E AS D BR Tech note Panel Key Button Properties E ax General Layout Attributes Custom Attributes Name fob007 Layer Layer VW Visible J Disabled T Blink on Touch TF Non Printable IT Reverse on Touch FT Non Scrollable Cancel Help When the button is pressed you can set it to Blink or for the colors to Reverse 4 4 130 Custom Note This page is used to show the Custom tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties i F 2 x General Layout Attributes C
117. the converter is shown below The connector type is D type 15 pin female 7 4 31 Installing the Network Cable The UniNET communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together connecting all the network nodes The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1200 m It is recommended to use a shielded cable with one twisted pair Note Only a daisy chained network is recommended Other connections for example a star like connection are not recommended The bus terminals at both ends of the networks must have the termination resistance connected with the switch This connects the termination impedance 120 Ohms that is built in each bus terminal Intermediate bus terminals must not have the termination connected Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 404 EXOR Tech note 7 4 32 Ethernet 7 4 33 Connecting Panels to an Ethernet Network To connect a Panel including the TCM10 module the Ethernet Adapter ETADO1 is needed as shown in the following picture AUX PORT RJ45 UniOP panel To Ethernet ETADO1 ADAPTER The second picture here below shows the ETADO1 wire connections To UniOP AUX PORT RJ45 PINOUT To Ethernet The ETADO1 Adapter connects on one site to the Panel AUX Port and provides on the other site a standard RJ45 8 way connector The following table shows the Pinout configuration Pin Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 405 7 4 34
118. the name of the buffer from the trend buffer list and click the Delete button 4 6 237 New Insert Click the New Insert button to add a new trend buffer name at the end of the list of trend buffers Or simply type the name of a new trend buffer into the box in the Buffers list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 252 EXOR Tech note 4 6 238 General 4 6 239 General tab Configure Trend Buffers E ES 2 x Buffers al x General Sampling ID Used on 1 Free Type Ze AllPages Name 3 myTrendBuffer C Current Page C On Page Size Samples 50 Bytes Sample 2 Reference PLC Internal variable DB10 DWO SS Scaling Global buffer usage Ya fi H fi fo Used 0 10 KB Free 19 90 KB 01 1 To activate the General tab you must first select a buffer from the Buffers list Then specify the Size and Type of buffer to be defined and the Reference Variable to be sampled 4 6 240 Type 4 6 241 Type Trends can be sampled in three different ways The first option All Pages is to continuously sample the trend buffer regardless of whether or not the trend associated with the trend buffer is being displayed The second option Current Page is to sample the trend buffer only when the page where the trend associated with the trend buffer is being displayed The third option On Page is to sample the trend buffer only when a particular page is being
119. the operator will have immediate feedback Select Insert Touch Cells Panel Key Button Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box select Rectangle as the Style Under Action click on the button to identify the Key that will control the touch cell action Click on key F21 to select it Click OK Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse color when it is pressed Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On and Yellow as the color for Off In the Label box type Write to Controller Click OK Select Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu On the Page n tab select key F21 This will allow the touch cell to perform its assigned function only on this page in the project Make sure that Pressed is selected as the Key State Select the Attribute icon from within the Commands toolbar Select the Reverse attribute Since we already highlighted the area in which this attribute is to occur the dimensions are set automatically Click OK The command Attribute reverse at location is listed for panel key F21 It is necessary to set a small delay before turning off the attribute in order to give the panel user time to see the attribute Select Wait from the Commands toolbar Enter a 3 in the dialog box that appears This will add a 3 10 second delay The command Wait for a 3 10 of a second
120. the page number that contains the required recipe in the Data Field Properties dialog box A Recipe Action data field can take on only 3 values 0 1 or 2 A value of 0 indicates that the recipe is in its normal state of operation In this mode of operation the values of the recipe data fields are displayed on the screen of the panel and the values of the recipe data fields can be modified A value of 1 indicates that the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set is being transferred to the controller When the transfer is complete the value is automatically reset to 0 A value of 2 indicates that the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set is being transferred to the panel When the transfer is complete the value is automatically reset to 0 You can start a recipe transfer by entering a value of 1 or 2 for the Recipe Action data item By entering a value of 1 you can force the UniOP panel to send the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set to the controller By entering a value of 2 you can force the controller to transfer the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set to the panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 438 E AS D BR Tech note 7 8 10 Data Entry Status Data Field Properties Data Entry Status This control variable will be set to a 1 while the UniOP panel is in Data Entry Mode In all other modes it will be set to 0 7 8 11 Data Entry Field Numb
121. this example we will configure a custom generic touch cell button Select Insert Touch Cells Generic Command Button Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Generic Button Properties dialog box select Windows Custom as the Style Under Action set the Action as Panel Key Click on the button to select a panel key to associate with the button Check the Enable Indicator box to place an indicator light on the button Identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the button From the Layout tab enter a label for the button adjust the Font if necessary and select colors for the Off and On states Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 145 EXOR Tech note On the Attributes tab check Reverse On the Custom tab visible only when a Custom button style is chosen you can either press the Edit button and create your own button face or press the Load button and load an image from a file Create a button face then click OK The screen should appear similar to the figure below Designer reciptest dpr Page 17 Ox DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help x Deute roer ZJeezwepseengl y m Fei 8 ee ko ANDO BF O0 0 EE A xl 8 reciptest E E Pages EI 1 Page 1 Special Pages Obj El Project Po 1 1 Row 11 Cok 56 Simatic 5 5 0x0 Default EZS OV
122. to the printer 7 7 12 S3 Printer Status Bit S3 of the Panel Status Word contains the current logic state of the CTS clear to send line This line is being driven by the printer and indicates the printer s readiness to accept data 7 7 13 S4 Date and Time Update in Progress Bit S4 in the Panel Status Word is used to synchronize access to the panel s real time clock RTC Before writing a new time and date record the panel sets bit S4 in the Panel Status Word to indicate that it is about to update this data The panel then writes the time and date information to the Reserved Data Area RDA and resets bit S4 The controller program should always check the update flag before reading the time and date record If the bit is set the controller should not use the time and date information Note This bit is not set when the panel updates only the seconds field Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 427 E AS UR Tech note 7 7 14S5 Attempt to Access Protected Function Bit S5 of the Panel Status Word is set when the panel user tries to access a function that is not accessible with the current password Since in this case no message is displayed by the panel itself the controller can be used to check this status bit and notify the user that the function they are trying to access is protected 7 7 15 S6 Battery Low Bit S6 of the Panel Status Word is set when the backup batteries become weak These batteries maintain recipe
123. toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed The Numeric Field Properties box appears On the General tab select the Reference as PLC and click the button to specify the controller location Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box Click OK A placeholder of 9 s appears 4 4 25 ASCII Data Field Example Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 72 EXOR Tech note The Numeric Field Properties box appears Under Style select ASCII On the General tab select the Reference as PLC and click the button to specify the controller location Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box Click OK A placeholder of A s appears 4 4 26 Bargraph 4 4 27 Bargraph Data Fields Bargraphs provide a visual representation of a controller value To create a bargraph field either select the Bargraph icon from the toolbar or select Insert Data Fields Bargraph Then use the cursor to define the area in which the message field is to be placed The Bargraph Field Properties dialog box will appear Bargraph Field Properties 8 2lsl General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format ol Signed Unsigned ZS Horizontal Size Width 20 Height E R
124. touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed while Off indicates the color that the touch cell will be when it is in the not pressed state 4 4 159 Attributes Note This page is used to show the Attribute tab for all the Touch Cells Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 144 EXOR Tech note Panel Key Button Properties 2 xi General Layout Attributes Custom Attributes Name kg CS si C Layer Eaei groecesosssoesos I Visible I Disabled Blink on Touch Non Printable Reverse on Touch IT Non Scrollable Cancel Help When the button is pressed you can set it to Blink or for the colors to Reverse 4 4 160 Custom By choosing Custom you can select the source of the graphic that is to be used on the face of the touch cell This feature gives you the ability to import separate graphics for the pressed and not pressed states These graphics can be imported either from an external file or from a library 4 4 161 Generic Command Button Touch Cell Example In
125. valid range is 10 700 seconds 4 6 214 Password Example Assume there are three users who will have access to the operator panel User 1 is to have access to all areas of the project at least one user must have this type of access in every Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 244 EXOR Tech note project User 2 is only allowed to acknowledge alarms and enter data on pages 2 3 and 4 User 3 is capable of entering data throughout the project and is allowed into Configuration Mode It is also desired to have User 3 automatically logged out of the system after 10 minutes Select Passwords from the Project menu This will bring up a dialog box similar to the one shown in the figure below in which we will configure our passwords for the project Data entry enable Password CONF TIME ACK PRINT PAGE ALOGIALOGO From page To page PY FP PF FP FETT py Lo WK eee ass ere aie oouo A o EIS Ve m ri ga a o o a o a e a ee Eege a ie Wee Cae at Se re al e ical w oo GER a o oa o F re CSS KSE BS EE RE lia DE Ales Logout timeout Jeng Since User 1 is to be allowed full access to all areas of the panel we can assign the highest level password to him Simply click in the top password box and enter a four digit password for User 1 By default User 1 has access to all areas of the project User 2 is allowed to acknowledge alarms and enter data on pages 2 3 and 4 Click on the second password box and ente
126. verified the corresponding code is the sum of the single codes Description Causes 0001 The SSFDC header is missing The format process of the SSFDC card was not completed successfully The card should be reformatted by downloading the project again or by using the Format Utility with the SSFDC Programmer software 0002 Graphic file in the project is Graphic information in the missing downloaded file is missing The option Download Graphics should not be inactivated the first time a project is downloaded 0004 Project file is missing Project information in the downloaded file is missing The option Download Protocol Only should not normally be used when downloading Designer projects Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 264 EXOR Tech note 0008 Application file is missing Communication protocol in the downloaded file is missing The project should be completely downloaded again or the option Download Protocol Only should be used Project and graphic file do not The last download was probably done match they have different time with the option Download Graphics reference inactivated but the graphic information has changed in the Designer project The file should be completely downloaded again The hardware software consistency should also be checked 0020 SSFDC card is not present The memory card is not present or it is not correctly inserted 0040 The downloaded project file The project is the memory requi
127. visible If it is unchecked then the status bar is hidden 4 8 56 Tools Menu 4 8 57 Tools Menu The Tools menu contains the commands Customize and Options which allow you to set the toolbars and colors of the Tag Editor to your own preferences Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 294 XOR Tech note 4 8 58 Customize Toolbars Command m 00 Toolbars J Show Tooltips New Y Cool Look Reset Large Buttons Pese Toolbar name Cancel Apply Help The commands on the Toolbars tab and the Command tab allow you to customize the appearance of the toolbars and the commands contained on the various toolbars within the Tag Editor 4 8 59 Options Colors Background Color Text Color Alternate Row Color Background Color Text Color ay ay Cancel Apr Help In the Options dialog box you can set text and background colors To have alternating lines in different colors for improved readability check the Alternate Row Color box and set the colors for the alternating row Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 295 E AS DDR Tech note 4 8 60 Window Menu 4 8 61 Window Menu The Window menu contains familiar Window commands for managing multiple windows These include New Window opens a new window Cascade places each new window slightly below and to the right of the current window Tile places each new window below the current w
128. when time is between the two defined time values After Date Before Date After Time Before Time Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 259 EXOR Tech note When all four parameters are defined the trigger is active only after the defined After Date and After Time until the defined Before Date and Before Time After Date When only the single After date parameter is defined the trigger is active all days after the specified day After Time When only the single After time parameter is defined the trigger is active all days after the specified time Before Date When only the single Before date parameter is defined the trigger is active all days until the specified day Before Time hen only the single Before time parameter is defined the trigger is active all days until the specified time After Date After Time When After date and After time parameters are defined the trigger is active all days starting from the specific time and date Before Date Before Time When Before date and Before time parameters are defined the trigger is active all days until the specific time and date Time Scheduler Control Variables To be able to edit the trigger parameter values from the panel operator it is necessary to put the desired trigger parameters on a panel page using the new Time Scheduler Control variables as shown in the below figure Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP Us
129. 07 UniOP User s Manual 467 EXOR Tech note The Mailbox command used to print a trend buffer is OxO0A1 The first mailbox parameter is the trend ID number You can find the ID number assigned to the trend buffer by looking under Project Trend Buffers The mailbox command response codes are LO OK Command executed successfully 1 ERROR Printer is busy another print job in execution ERROR Invalid trend buffer ID An example of using a mailbox command to start a trend buffer print is shown below DB10 lt 161 0x00A1 Write the mailbox command DBO1 code DB10 lt 1 Write the trend ID ose ee DB10 lt 1 Start the mailbox command DBOO 7 10 21 Trend Limitations Some limitations of using trends are listed below In addition the available memory area in the PLC that can be used to store trend buffers is limited to 60 bytes Max number of trend windows inside the same page Max number of curves inside the same trend window 1 Total number of curves that can be use inside the same 20 page i d Max number of global trend buffers sampled in backgroun Cyclical sampling period 1 9999 sec The total memory reserved for trend buffer 20 KB 7 11 Working with Graphics 7 11 1 Working with Graphics This section provides information on the new Designer graphics features These features can be divided into three major categories Simple Shapes Graphics Libraries Object Libraries Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 Uni
130. 1 Page 1 3 Special Pages A Grap 5 Obj El Project Pg 1 1 Row 18 Co 59 Simatic 5 5 0x0 Default Gees OVF 4 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 449 EXOR Tech note Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or click on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box under PLC Data for Temperature Select the data field style as Numeric and set the Reference to be PLC Click on the button to set the Reference value Verify the Data Field Properties settings or change if necessary Click OK Click OK again A numeric data field placeholder will appear using 9 as a placeholder for the actual numeric values Repeat steps 6 through 10 for Pressure under PLC Data Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCIl or click on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box under Recipe for Temperature Select the data field style as Numeric and set the Reference to be Recipe Click on the button to set the Reference value Verify the Data Field Properties settings or change if necessary Click OK Click OK again A recipe data field placeholder will appear using R as a placeholder for the actual recipe values Select Recipe Menu from the Insert menu and click OK Select the option Recipe Configuration from the Page menu This will bring up the dialog box shown in below
131. 1 2007 UniOP User s Manual 112 EXOR Tech note 4 4 101 General 4 4 102 General tab ASCII Key Button Properties 3 2 xi General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action Character 13D Round a Rectangle 3D Rectangle E Windows wv Custom Cancel Help The General tab of the ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box lets you select the style of ASCII Key Button and the ASCII key character that is to represent the action 4 4 103 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include round and rectangular buttons whether flat or 3D It is also possible to insert a Windows button a touch cell with a look similar to the standard buttons you find in a typical Windows application or to create and insert a Custom button Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab 4 4 104 Action The ASCII character that is to be transmitted when the touch cell is pressed is entered in the Character box under Action 4 4 105 Layout Note This page is used to show the Layout tab for all the Touch Cells Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 113 IN X OR Tech note Panel Key Button Properties ie Axl General Layout Attributes Custom ea BE Label I Font Fixed Custom Font Text ER Text Bkgd JV Transparent Line Cd Bkad V Transparent Off CH On CH
132. 104 AA 162 Shapes neresna na aa aaa teyaves a E E a 146 4 4 167 Trend Window siccam nai aaa aaa a aaa aa a 147 4 4 228 Meter Instrument 157 4 4 286 Trend Time Held 168 4 4 296 Recipe Men 172 4 4 305 Special Characters ooonocnincccnnnccnnncnnncccconcccnnrnnn arc n rn cn narran 175 4 4 306 Import Bitmap Graphics o ccccccconnnnconncococcccnonnno nana nnnoccnnn rca 175 4 5 Page Menu eeneg EE EE 182 451 Page Menu iio a sliNnaiih bhatt eee 182 45 2 Insert Page ii nana han ee eee 182 453 Add Page sists el MAb ats Aita 182 45 4 Delete Page miniin aaa a aa A EE 182 45 5 Goto E EE 183 45 6 Previous Page aaa 183 457 Next Pagerie anena AENEA AE ARE ea aa 183 GN Elte 183 4 5 14 Recipe Confouraiton cnn nana cnn 184 4 5 26 Special Pages and Page Mod8S ocoococccccccccocicononcnoncccnoncnnno na nann cn non nn anar cn nana 187 4 6 Project Men ita art rta et 190 4 6 1 Project ENEE 190 4 6 2 Configure Controller ii cds 190 4 6 19 Panel Setup DEE 194 4 6 18 NetWork SOlUD ius italia 208 4 6 112 Panel Controller Interface oooooonninninninnnnnlnnannnnnnconncccnncccnn narra nn cnn 218 4 6 140 Report on Panel Pinter 226 4 6 201 E EE 240 4 6 215 LANQUAQES EE 246 4 6 224 Next Language 248 4 6 225 Configure Tag Dictionaries oooonnnncinncnnnccnnnnnnnccnnncccnnnnnn arar nnnc crac 248 4 6 231 Tag Vali ation E 250 4 6 232 Trend EE CEET 250 4 6 266 Memory DEE 257 4 6 267 Time Scheduled TriQQers ocoooccnncnninncnnonccononnnnnonnnn
133. 136 Alignment Specifies the alignment of the different value objects Possible options are Left Center Right and Default 4 8 137 Font Size Select the font size to be used with the value object 4 8 138 Colors The Background and Foreground controls within the Colors area let you specify the background and foreground colors for the value object Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 322 E AS D BR Tech note 4 8 139 Customize 4 8 140 Customize Customize Primary I colbar name The Customize dialog box accessible under Tools Customize or by clicking the Customize button from View Toolbars allows you to customize toolbars commands and tools within Designer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 323 E AS DR Tech note 4 8 141 Toolbars 4 8 142 Toolbars Toolbars Commands Tools Toolbars M Show Tooltips New wi Secondary Full Screen Cool Look Reset Tools Large Buttons wi Touchcells amp Objects wi Feld Objects Default Draw Commands Toolbar name Primary Cancel Help Lists the various toolbars displayed for the current project These may include the following Primary toolbar typically provides shortcuts to commonly used Windows type commands Secondary toolbar typically provides shortcuts to Designer project level commands Full Screen toolbar typically provides shortcuts to viewing preferences To
134. 179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 241 EXOR Tech note 4 6 205 ACK The ability to acknowledge alarms 4 6 206 PRINT The ability to request printouts 4 6 207 PAGE Access to Direct Page Selection Mode In this mode you can access specific pages of the project 4 6 208 ALOGO Automatic logoff This is used to automatically disable a specified password in the following cases inserting another valid password inserting a wrong password using the macro command Password logout after a specified period of time with no panel activity It is possible to specify a custom timeout for passwords configured with automatic logout using Logout timeout 4 6 209 Data Entry Enable Access to Data Entry Mode for specific pages In this mode you can edit any read write fields contained within the specified pages 4 6 210 ALOGI 4 6 211 ALOGI Automatic login This is used to automatically load a specified password whenever there is no valid password in the system e g when the panel goes from Configuration Mode to Operation Mode or when an incorrect password is entered This option can only be assigned to one password and will work only if there are no other valid passwords in the system Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 242 EXOR Tech note The automatic login feature allows users to change any of the user passwords defined in the project file directly from the panel In order to do this there must be at
135. 189 ANSI Eege 234 236 Align BOttOM sereis irrin 26 Align Horiz Center 26 Align Git irte din 25 Alion RISE arei eanise pretrei 26 Alion Ke eiior neniani 26 Align Vert Center 26 AN SNMent scsi feieren dde 322 AU Pagoda lla 254 All Panels EDM uereg sods ovaciones 430 AW Pane 8 coord eege eege 430 A ees ge ege e 242 ALOGO usina ies 242 APPSar nce eet REEEAEEK EELER 149 Arc ee 165 Argeuments si iecsosrssaisnnir tns 234 236 331 ASCII Data Field Example eee 72 ASCII Key Button 112 ASCII Key Button Touch Cell Example 116 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Assign IP AGT SS eege d e deed dee o ed 475 A 137 A d r 475 Associated Fields oooonnoccnncccnncccinnccnonccccnncnos 315 re le CR 9 Attribute Data Fields 85 Attribute Example cece eeeeseeseeneeneees 94 Attribute Transformations 0 0 0 0 cece 238 Attributes oe 110 115 121 127 144 Auto Linefeed AA 228 Automatic Cleat oooccnnnnccnncccnncccnnoncnnnoncnnnnnos 256 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure 363 Available Alarms oooonoccnnncccnocccnnoccnnncocnncno 200 OM AA utente 315 B E AA EAR 155 Background Color 156 Background oh 316 Backlight Dimming oseere 496 Bargraph Data Fields 73 Bargraph Example oooocccnncccinocicinoccconcconancn nn 77 Bargraph Preview cccccceececsteceeseeeeeeeees 74 Bar Graph sizisisssseiasci eni rniran fees 303 Basic Ethernet Diagnoete ee eeeeees 486 Ee eege eege 348 Baud Rate
136. 2 19 192 5 166 192 25 183 192 19 25 52 166 24 0 LI 224 0 Kl 165 24 128 eh 192 224 128 154 166 24 192 186 192 24 192 55 166 24 255 ter 192 24 25 256 16 25 0 188 192 25 0 Pir 166 25 198 Li 192 25 128 fee we 255 192 WW 192 255 192 A ee 25 25 Mars 192 255 25 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual E AS DR Tech note RP Coos Coos __ Index R_ G IS Uwe R_ G B ee 224 25 o 0 E 224 o 123 MMM 25 o 18 eee 224 O 192 ME 25 O 192 95 224 00 25 207 25 0 25 P19 224 La O ES 25 44 0 A 224 44 128 Sa 25 44 128 198 224 44 192 25 44 192 9 224 44 25 231 25 44 255m eee 224 e O es O 206 24 128 192 238 25 18 192 207 224 18 25 0239 255 125 25 E 224 166 O o 255 166 O0 209 224 166 128 LSC 25 166 128 20 224 166 192 SI 255 166 192 ll 224 166 25 SG 25 166 255 eee 224 192 O WW 255 192 O 282 21 12 18 245 255 192 128 A 224 192 19 oz 255 192 192 25 224 12 25 Mr 255 19 25 216 224 224 0 248 255 24 O Kl 224 224 120 Ee 255 24 128 28 224 224 192 10250 255 24 192 29 224 224 25 LI 25 24 25 E 224 255 O WW 255 255 O 2 224 25 125 10253 255 25 128 E 224
137. 2007 UniOP User s Manual 464 EXOR Tech note the trend window When no curves are defined all of these radio buttons are disabled After adding one or more curves only the appropriate radio button is enabled Note A single X Axis exists for all of the curves that have been inserted inside the same trend viewer window The X axis range can be defined three different ways Time defined when the trend buffers inside the trend viewer are sampled cyclically from the UniOP Defined by a maximum number of samples enabled when the trend buffers inside the trend viewer are sampled on PLC events Defined on the PLC the number of samples must be defined inside the PLC memory Automatic scroll control is available so that a trend window can shift when it becomes full How much the trend viewer will be shifted upon each scroll operation can be a fixed amount of time or a fixed number of samples The scroll direction defines the direction of the curve The curve can be drawn Left to Right Right to Left Up to Down or Down to Up The X cursor displays the value of the curve at a point on the X axis Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor The X axis minimum and X axis maximum variables contain the minimum and maximum values of the defined X axis Trend Buffers on PLC PLC Memory Area 7 10 14 Trend Buffers on PLC Samples can be collected and stored inside the trend buffer of the UniOP panel or in the memory of the PLC This
138. 249 IRC 189 Date Data Field A 102 Date Data Field Example eee 103 Date e E 200 Date SEIS usina di 358 Decimal Hexadecimal Base eee 48 IRC UU dE 326 Default Pont utiainiaidctiiidd 238 Define Symbol oooconnccnncnincncoccnoncnonanonacananns 303 Delete votan i 239 Delete Dictionary oonconcninncnnocnnnncnanon 289 292 PACA 182 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Delete Records 293 De SCrIPtlOD x5 euer 327 DESI MET cererea ee reepa 458 479 Designer Print Setup 18 Designer Screen ocooccnccnnocnnoncconaconncanccnnnannss 348 Designer UE 355 IR ER 277 IER EE 274 Dictionary Men 291 RI 189 Direct Page Selection 189 DION ti A es 164 Disable Battery LIDD 198 Disable Screen aver 387 Disable Undeclared Client Access 212 Dis anime E 14 TBI E ica Sees cittesvesntietcs 38 Display Page on Communication Error 206 Displaying SSFDC Error Codes A 264 A ee eeir 174 Lepage ugeet Gender tee oi 264 A A o PE REENE EERE EU 181 Double Protocol oooonccnnnnccnnnccnnnccnnncccnannnos 367 Download Pane wigs SE 311 Panel POMS cscs cosnseetesdevestendescveseneevetease 418 A eiece 263 UploadinS cintia iii 372 DOWnlOad iiecieisdiicisstadechiaciineastadeess ac tieessacdes 263 Download sinnser iersinii 271 DOWnlOad sec rnrn sasore 311 DOWilOaG AAA vascceexareatersiaecde 361 Download ici cs 372 DOWLOAD cirios 418 Download Compress Options ooooonnccnnnc 271 Dynamic Attributes 86
139. 3 10 2 Grant of LUcense nono nanannncn nono nana na nn nn nn nono nana nan nn nn nn 310 3 MEANS e iii 3 10 24 COPYRIGHT aiii did 3 10 5 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTN nora nan nanananna rancios 3 10 6 DISCLAIMER Limited Warranty oooocconnnocccnnonoccconononcnonononnnnnnno non cnnnnonnnnnannnnnnnns 4 elergenmter ici A nhs dh cea dia daveb ded id ba dadas 4 1 Flehklent ici aaa ti id AAT lO Me ii aaa A2 NOW aeae PE OPE eC A BEETS AAS OPC EE AAA ere SE CSR SAVCGIAS AE at eases aes EEEE E EA E ain cece salieta BAT le EE AAS Print POUM Wei EENS 4 1 9 Designer Print Geiup cc cnn rra 471 10 Export to tag e EENG 441 11 EXPDOM SINGS sti iia ta 41 12 IMPO ue EE 4 1 13 Recent Elei Da AA EE 4 2 Edit Men 4 2 1 Ed Men A322 Undo E EE A2323 PRedo EE EEE IES ADA e EE 42 5 ee A2pG baste 4 2 7 Select All o onnnncccnccccnononcccnccncnnonononanancn conoce roca nnnn nn nono a nana nnn nn naunan nanesenu nanne na 4 28 ANIM sis coincida 4 2 16 Make Same Gize cono conan anna cnn nono nana n rana n cnn nnnnnna 4221 A 4 3 View Men 4 3 1 View Men Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note A ul E 30 4 3 3 ZOOM O AAA o ceessavt A T 31 CEET EN A39 A A heed EN EEEREN EE EEEN ETERNE ENEE 32 4 3 8 Works pa EE 34 ABQ A O 34 4 3 10 Graphics Library ET 35 SVD EE 38 4 4 Insert MENU NEE 41 4AA Insent Men isinen oaan a a a E aa Ra 41 4A 2 EE 42 AUS Cd tia 42 AAA EE RE EE 44 44 85 Touch er EE
140. 4 4 81 Time Data Field Example Select Insert Data Fields Time Use the cursor to outline an area for the time data field Set the fonts and colors Click OK The time data field appears on the project page If you wish to change the time format choose Panel Setup from the Project menu and select the Settings tab Make a selection from the Time Format list 4 4 82 Date 4 4 83 Date Data Field This option is used to add a date data field to the current page To insert a date data field click on the Date Field icon on the toolbar select Insert Data Fields Date or use the Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 102 E AS DR Tech note Ctrl D keys then use the cursor to define the area in which the date field is to be placed Once the date field is created a dialog box will appear where the text may be configured for displaying the date data field Date Field Properties a a 2 xi Text Attributes Cancel Apply Preview DD MM YY This field may be displayed in one of two formats month day year or day month year To change the date display format choose Panel Setup from the Project menu Under the Settings tab there is a Date Format field where this setting may be changed 4 4 84 Date Data Field Example Select Insert Data Fields Date Use the cursor to outline an area for the date data field Set the fonts and colors Click OK The date data field appears on the project page If y
141. 47 DLL 5 01 Crouzet RPX 4 00 D32Uplc074 DLL 5 01 Controller Setup DEMO Controller 4 00 D32Uplc030 DLL al b Pick the controller driver to be used from the list provided Buttons within this box allow you to remove controllers from the list refresh the list or activate the Controller Setup dialog box 4 6 9 Remove Clicking the Remove button removes the highlighted controller driver from the list 4 6 10 Refresh Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the list of available controllers DLLs 4 6 11 Controller Setup 4 6 12 Controller Setup The entries and selections in the Controller Setup dialog box are customized for the particular type of controller selected Indicate the particular controller model number if necessary and any other information necessary to customize the setup for your selected controller This may include Slave ID Access Multiple PLCs PLC ID etc The Access Multiple PLCs checkbox will allow the panel to exchange data with more than one controller You must also enter the slave IDs of the different controllers from which the panel will be accessing data This option is not available with all controllers Click the PLC Driver Comm button to configure communication parameters for this particular controller Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 193 EXOR Tech note 4 6 13 Communications Parameters Setup 4 6 14 Communications Parameters Setup The communication parameters for any partic
142. 55 Default Gateway it is the address of the router that allows connection to other network segments It is a number in the usual form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255 If you do not want to define an IP address in the project file enter the IP Address 0 0 0 0 in the Ethernet Settings dialog box If you do so when the panel will be in Operation Mode it will use either the address assigned by DHCP or the address defined manually by the user 7 12 7 Priority of IP Address Definition Methods There is a fixed priority scheme defining which IP address will be valid under all conditions This priority scheme is necessary because there are multiple independent methods to define the IP address in the panel The UniOP panel will use the address that has been defined by the method with the highest priority if present Priority Configuration Mode Operation Mode Highest Manual Definition with Pick Manual Definition with Panel Pick Panel Definition in the Project File Lowest Assignment by DHCP Assignment by DHCP Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 478 EXOR Tech note 7 12 8 Example 1 A brand new panel with Ethernet interface is connected to a network that has a DHCP server While the panel is in Configuration Mode it will receive the IP address by DHCP The IP address assigned by DHCP will be shown on the display If the user wants to change this address or the Subnet Mask can activate the IP address edit mo
143. 6 4 4 Inserting Page Oblechs AAA 360 64 5 Saving a Project File EE 360 6 4 6 Memory Used by the Project File 360 6 5 PAP o E E 361 6 6 Project Upload and Download 361 6 7 Simple Data Hee E 361 6 8 Simple TOUCH Cells seccional title ddr ctas ete 362 Advanced ini A deepen eles dee ee 363 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note 7 1 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure coooococoncccccccccconcnononcnanocanannn nano nnnancncna 363 7 1 1 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure ooocincccincccnocccococnnoncccnnnnnnnnana nana ccnnnos 363 7 1 2 Procedure to Upgrade the Internal Flash Memory ooonnccinncnnnncccnocccnnonncancnccnnnos 364 7 1 3 Check Firmware Versions oocomcnncccinccnonnononnnnnocccnncc non cn nn nnn carr crac 364 7 1 4 Designer Firmware Files Directonm nora rancnnnan 366 TALS EW ROSCUG Mode cccscccedecscccctensccesdceecacetdascenevuassnacenenscetevaeseaeatcasaneacattesgatenzsare 366 7 2 Double ie e 367 1 21 Double Protocol cities 367 7 2 2 Enabling Multiple Protocol Confguraton 368 1 23 Controllers Di EE 370 7 2 4 Placing Fields on a Page ooooomcinccccocccnnonnnononnnnnoccnoncn non nn nnnnn cn rra 370 7 25 Downloading Uploading and Getting Panel ResourC8S oooccccnnnnininncncaccccccnns 372 7 2 6 Configuring UnINET Networks ooooonncconnncinncnnnncccconccnonnnnanancnnnn cc nan rca nr can nncnnnno 372 7 3 usteet 373 7 3 4 Interlock EI andaian andia 373 7 3 2 Enabling the Internet Mailbox
144. 6 key An explanation of SSFDC error codes is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 263 EXOR Tech note 4 7 6 SSFDC Error Codes 4 7 7 UniOP SSFDC Error Codes This section contains a description of the error codes displayed by the UniOP MMI products when the panel cannot go into Operation Mode for any reason The Bootstrap module of UniOP firmware includes a diagnostic system very useful for determining why a UniOP panel stays in Operation Mode without apparent reason Note This diagnostic service is available only in products with firmware type 38 and 58 with SSFDC memory card 4 7 8 Displaying SSFDC Error Codes During the system start up phase the UniOP firmware checks the contents of the flash memory to verify its integrity When something goes wrong in this phase and a valid application has not been recognized UniOP cannot start Operation Mode and remains in Configuration Mode Once the panel is unexpectedly in Configuration Mode the corresponding error code can be recalled The error code will be displayed in the 3rd row of the display below the text Configuration Mode To display the error code press the Enter key for more than 2 seconds 4 7 9 List of Error Codes There are a number of reasons why a panel does not enter normal Operation Mode as expected The following table lists the possible the error codes All the error codes in the table are in hexadecimal format If more that one condition is
145. 79 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 470 E AS UH Tech note Creates a new catalogue Open Catalogue Opens an already existing catalogue Close Catalogue Closes the currently selected catalogue IMAGE COMMANDS Export Exports the currently selected graphic symbol into a file a picture on the system Import Imports a file a picture in the currently selected catalogue ICON COMMANDS View Allows to select how the graphic symbols are represented inside the catalogue icons and names icons only names only Icon Allows to change or to edit the icon of the currently selected graphic symbol Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 471 EXUDR Tech note 7 11 4 Objects Libraries Designer NewProject dpr Page 1 E File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Winde Help Dems Es Page 1 a Q Defaut y cra 9 dc EE EE Se ee Flat Dm SmallPush1 Toggle1 eg A d suo Bitmap Settings SE E 2x1 Image Dither x Floyd Steinberg Cota de aedu ll D Smooth 7 Invert J Shapen J Flip Triangle Btn Thin Horiz Flat Round Btn Btn FO Blur Mirror Preview Flat Btn 2 Rounded Push 2 I Size to Fit ese Top Push 3 Toggle 1 Togale 4 Cancel Ma E S Objects SEELEN TASA e SE Ee EA j T EPDE Ea Z 2 4 s lo Ta Draws using a pe
146. 8 Trend Time Field Example oooonnccnn c 171 Trend WindoW sseeeeeceeeeeerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreree 147 Trend Window Example ooooonnconnncnnncinnncnn 156 Trend Window Limitati0DS occcconononocc 148 MS cidad 461 Trigger Properties oooooonnnccnonococcconnconncnanannss 240 Trigger Ty Pe vescscceciss eves ntc 240 Triggers Report Prmntout 421 Tige Suennen nara a 239 A AT 421 TSIO con ainia 403 TSIO1 Bus ELA ives thsdes 402 RS232 Cable anita 402 TSIOL BUS usina iii 402 TSIO L BUS doors di 402 TSIO2 Bus RS485 Cable 403 TSIO Buscan da 403 TSIO2 Bus Terminal oooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnincnnnnnn 404 508 Ku 150 UndO esas lis 24 290 Unt Seg Pont vtcicncrir nnnriasnialiascadeeiscarian 418 UniComic FOMt oooccononoconnnncnnnncconacononacnonanonno 417 UniNET Networks CA 372 UniNET Networks AAA 372 UniNET Networks oooooococccccocccononaconnccconcnnnns 389 UniNET OPC Semer 408 411 UMmNEL TOPIP divinos tte 213 UniNET Technical Data 0 eee 393 UniOP SSFDC Error Codes eee 264 Up S GUM tareas 412 421 459 Update Cycle vs ic fattesscisteasiiascanniiscenveese 226 Update Firmware sssrin 269 Update PLC References A 199 Upgrade e wi ccs sist sscsevessecsassescs sieaas 364 Upgrade roes neern 364 Upload Downloading sesers 372 Upload imitar 263 Upload 372 Use Modem icsssscssceccezssasvsscisssccecscdieaacaessssenes 268 LBE 460 Using KT 458 Using UniDataExchanger Access Intormanon 483
147. 9 Set the Reference as Index and click the button to specify the controller location The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears Since there are three pressure values that we wish to monitor enter the Count as 3 In the Selector list box on the left side of the Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box three memory locations will be listed with the values 0 1 and 2 since we left the Min value as 0 They will all initially show the same memory location To display the pressure in stage 1 enter the address DB10 DW3 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Click on entry 0 in the Selector list The memory location for entry O changes to DB10 DW3 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 65 EXOR Tech note To display the pressure in stage 2 enter the address DB10 DW4 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Click on entry 1 in the Selector list The memory location for entry 1 changes to DB10 DW4 To display the pressure in stage 3 enter the address DB10 DW5 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Click on entry 2 in the Selector list The memory location for entry 2 changes to DB10 DW5 The dialog box will resemble that shown below Indirect Addressing Fields X S Selector DB10 DWO Reference 8 DBIODW3 8 1 DB10Dw 4 Data Type DB Offset Address E 2 D n Dap Data Block y fio 3 3 5 DB10 DW3 Data Format Wet Aight Bite WORDEBin y Pe ASAS IF
148. C DesProjects tags mdb se Refresh Database Controller Brand Controller Model E DEMO Controller Demo Controller mod DC DIC Cancel Apply Help Tags allow symbolic reference to PLC variables Tags in a project can be imported from a description file outside Designer A discussion of the use of tags in Designer projects is provided along with an example of using tags Tag dictionaries are tools integrated with Designer accessible from Project Configure Tag Dictionaries once support for an internal controller has been enabled under Configure Controller This lets you to switch from one tag dictionary to another tag dictionary without having to change each field in the project Items in the Select Tag Dictionary dialog box include the Enable Tags checkbox the Database box the Refresh Database button and the Controller List Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 248 EXOR Tech note Note When a tag name is selected the PLC Reference information will be filled in with the reference information from the tag and the PLC Reference dialog controls will be disabled You will only be able to change tag information from the Tag Editor in the Tools menu Note Tag definition for an External Controller is allowed only if the External PLC supports tag definitions Please refer to EXOR Technical Documentation for further information about drivers that support tag definition A tag dictionary is associated with each project
149. Click on the OK button in order to confirm the numeric field properties and create the data field The following figure shows the resulting screen Designer fred dpr Page 1 DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help l x E fred Sq Pages EI 1 Page 1 3 Special Pages z x Rae ir Ski Pg 1 1 X 32 Y 80 DEMO Controller Select Save from the File menu Select Transfers Options Serial Ports Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual KE Transfer Transfer advanced Serial ports m Ports Available Parity Stop Bits Com None e 1 C Com2 C Odd CR C Com C Even C Com 4 Baud Rat 38400 Sal J Use modem See al Cancel Help Choose the communications port that Designer will use to communicate with the panel Ports that are unavailable will be grayed out Under normal circumstances use the following parameters to communicate with a panel 38400 baud no parity and 1 stop bit Power up the UniOP panel and make sure it is in Configuration Mode The panel must be in Configuration Mode to communicate with the Designer software When the unit is in Configuration Mode the words CONFIGURATION MODE will appear on the panel If you do not see the words CONFIGURATION MODE displayed on the panel Hold down the Enter key or touch an empty spot on the screen until the command menu appears Use
150. Components Communication Parameters Keyboard SSFDC 4 8 111 Components Components Symbol 1 Symbol D Symbol 2 Symbol1 D Symbol 3 Symbol GoTo OK Properties dr Delete The Components dialog shows in one single list all the object components present in a given page 4 8 112 Communication Parameters Communication Parameters x Port Comt y Baud Rate aam y Cancel Parity None y Stop Bits 2stopbts y Data Bits 8 databits y The Communication Parameters dialog allows the user to configure the setting of the communication port The communication parameters need to be set as follows in order to perform a successful keypad download Baud rate 38400 recommended Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 313 E AS D BR Tech note Parity none Stop bits 2 Data Bits 8 In addition specify the Com Port to be used 4 8 113 Keyboard 4 8 114 Keyboard Model Properties ME xj General Background Panel E Keyboard r Associated Fields De Decimal Numeric Fielc LBE ok Hex Numeric Field Pasition ASCII Message Ayoid field V Absolute coordinates D Horizontal Left z from Border bd Vertical Top b from Border Cancel Apply Help When you select Keyboard from the Keypad Designer Edit menu or clicking the Keyboard Properties icon the Model Properties dialog box is displayed al
151. E 3 10 3 Limitations You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Designer SOFTWARE except and only the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation The Designer SOFTWARE is licensed as a single product its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one COMPUTER Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 14 EXOR Tech note 3 10 4 COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the Designer SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Designer SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the Designer are owned by EXOR or its suppliers If this Designer SOFTWARE contains documentation which is provided only in electronic form you may print one copy of such electronic documentation You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Designer SOFTWARE 3 10 5 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY The Intellectual Property of the Designer SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Designer SOFTWARE is owned by EXOR 3 10 6 DISCLAIMER Limited Warranty The Designer SOFTWARE is provided as is and without warranty of any kind express implied or otherwise including without limitation any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose In no event shall EX
152. Export tags from all groups in the second step of export wizard then the user is given the option to export each group to a work sheet or export all groups to a single work sheet This is applicable only to ve file format When you have completed Step 3 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 4 4 8 21 Export Tags Step 4 Tag Export Wizard KE x You have selected to export the dictionary tagDictionary and tagGroup group s to the file C Program FilestExorDesignerttagDictionary tagGroup lt LS Click Finish to start exporting tags lt Back Cancel Help In the final step you are asked to confirm the dictionary to be exported If the information is correct click the Finish button the export the tags Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 288 EXOR Tech note The exported file will be saved in the location and with the file name that you specified 4 8 22 New Dictionary The New Dictionary command is available from the Tag Editor File menu if no tag dictionaries are currently opened If a tag dictionary is open then the New Dictionary command is available under the Dictionary menu Selecting New Dictionary from the File or Dictionary menus clicking on the New icon or right clicking on a dictionary in the workspace and selecting New Dictionary will open the New Tag Dictionary dialog box In this box you name your new dictionary and associate it with a particular controller Enter a name fo
153. F 4 4 4 162 Shapes 4 4 163 Shapes It is quite easy to add simple shapes using the Designer software including SVG line lines SVG rectangle rectangles and ovals The Shapes submenu under the Insert menu offers these options or you may click on the individual shape icons in the toolbar 4 4 164 Line SVG Line To insert a line SVG Line click on the Line SVG Line icon in the toolbar or select Insert Shapes Line SVG Line Place the cursor where the line is to begin click once then move the cursor to where the line is to end and click again The line will appear SVG Line can be drawn in any angle Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 146 EXOR Tech note SVG Line icon is enabled only for firmware version 4 50 and above The Pixel and Vector graphics option should be enabled under the Panel Setup gt Settings tab 4 4 165 Rectangle SVG Rectangle To insert a rectangle SVG rectangle click on the Rectangle SVG Rectangle icon in the toolbar or select Insert Shapes Rectangle Place the cursor at one corner of the rectangle click once then move the cursor to the opposite corner of the rectangle and click again The rectangle will appear SVG Rectangle icon is enabled only for firmware version 4 50 and above The Pixel and Vector graphics option should be enabled under the Panel Setup gt Settings tab Note A rectangle can be used to place a border around a bargraph 4 4 166 Ov
154. Field Properties settings or change if necessary Click OK Click on the Range tab Select Read Write to make recipe names editable Click OK A data field placeholder will appear using R as a placeholder for the actual recipe values From the Page menu choose Recipe Configuration Set the Number of Parameter Sets to 4 to define four recipe parameter sets Enter parameter set values as shown below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 452 EXOR Tech note s tewas a pie Recipe Configure EZ Number Of Parameter Sets la E T Multipage recipe 0 K Cut Copy Paste Cancel Recipe Parameter Set i Set As Recipe name Recipe ltem MIE Ele EA GA DB10 DWO DB10 Dwo ame0D3 ameD4 S ameDl ameD2 2 AA MATE IARU Jl UU Ls E Select the Recipe ltem for the second row by clicking on the button with the record number 2 The entire row highlights to indicate that it is selected Click on the Set As Recipe name button to set this Recipe ltem to be the Recipe Name An asterisk appears to the right of the Recipe Item to identify it as the Recipe Name Click on the OK button to accept the changes Select Insert Page from the Page menu From the new page select Insert Recipe Menu or click on the Recipe Menu icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a box on the page This area will contain the Recipe Menu field The R
155. Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCIl or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed The data field Properties box appears On the General tab select the Reference as PLC and click the button to specify the controller location Click OK to return to the data field Properties dialog box Click the Scaling tab We know that to convert a value from Celsius to Fahrenheit we need to multiply the Celsius temperature by 9 5 and add 32 to the result Consider the scaling equation y A1 A2 x B Since x is the Celsius temperature in the controller this is the value we want to multiply by 9 5 To do this we would need to set A1 equal to 9 and A2 equal to 5 Make sure that the Constant button is checked for all values and enter the value 9 for A1 and the value 5 for A2 Adding 32 to this value can be done by setting B equal to 32 so enter 32 as the value for B Click OK to confirm this operation The value displayed on the panel will be in Fahrenheit while the controller data will be in Celsius Scaling Example 2 Assume that we have a controller memory location for which the numeric value can range from 0 to 4095 We want to display the actual value in the controller as a percentage of the maximum value Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCIl or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be pl
156. KB Panel Model Settings External Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Memory Type FLASH Project Memory 448K Y Graphics Touch Screen Y Hardware Clock Disable Buzzer Recipe Size 16KByte ants Y Recipe Backup Y Events Backup Available Alarms 1024 Event List Size 256 _ Civebie sttery LED EE O Auxiliary Port Colors BAW Y PC Printer Port Time Format Multi Language Y Report Printout sl Date Format DD MM YY y Cancel Help Panel Startup Sequence With this feature enabled the following sequence is performed on power up of the UniOP Check the data inside RAM If the data is valid it will be used If the data inside RAM is invalid the data in flash memory is checked If the data inside the flash memory is valid it will be used If the data in the flash memory is not valid the recipe memory and the event list will be initialized with no data Recipes and Events Run Time Backup Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 447 EXOR Tech note 7 8 33 Recipes and Events Run time Backup Recipes and Events backup implementation is slightly different depending on the UniOP Firmware version Using UniOP Firmware version V4 40 when this feature is enabled recipes are copied to flash memory automatically from the UniOP after any recipe field modification or after any controller recipe upload operation The event list is copied to flash memory any time one even
157. M into CD ROM drive If your system has Autorun enabled the Designer installation will start automatically If so skip to step 5 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 10 EXOR Tech note Click on the Start button and select Run from the popup menu Type D setup in the box if your CD ROM drive is not drive D substitute the appropriate letter Follow the on screen prompts setup Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install Enhanced Designer in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program Filesi Browse InstallShield lt Back Cancel The default location for the Designer software is c Program Files Exor Designer 6 If you prefer to have the software at a different location on your hard drive you have that option Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 11 Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Click the type of Setup pou prefer Custom m Description InstallShield lt Back Cancel There are two types of setup available with the Designer software They are Typical The Designer software is installed with the most common options This is recommended for most users Custom You may choose the options that you want to install This
158. MO Controller Demo Controller m 2 Network Client Export Import Help FEEL RB Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 211 EXOR Tech note When the Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients option is selected you must click on the Configure button to access the Network Configuration dialog box and explicitly enter all of the parameters for the required network Network Configuration E S EI Maximum Node Number J Disable undeclared client access SE UniNETTCPAP Je Cancel I Enable UniNET Network Broadcast Periodic Clack Synchronization Messages et Lomm Configured Nodes Export Controller Driver Controller Model 1 DEMO Controller Demo Controller m Import Help The Network Configuration dialog box contains a number of commande including Maximum Node Number Enable UniNET Network Broadcast Periodic Clock Synchronization Messages a list of the Configured Nodes an Add button a Delete button a Properties button a Net Comm button an Export button and an Import button 4 6 87 Maximum Node Number The Maximum Node Number is the node number of the highest node that will be allowed to receive the network token Nodes that have a node number higher than this value will not be able to communicate over the network The Maximum Node Number should be set as low as possible to minimize the amount of time that will be required for token rotation 4 6 88 Disable
159. Numeric Field Properties dialog box Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where a single 9 now appears next to Stage Number as a placeholder Creating the Temperature Indexed Field Next we need to create a field on the screen where the temperature information for the process can be displayed Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed below the Temp label The Numeric Field Properties box appears Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 4 since the maximum value of this field is 9999 Set the Reference as Index and click the button to specify the controller location The Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box appears Since there are three temperature values that we wish to monitor enter the Count as 3 In the Selector list box on the left side of the Indirect Addressing Fields dialog box three memory locations will be listed with the values 0 1 and 2 since we left the Min value as 0 They will all initially show the same memory location of DB10 DWO Since we want the first value to display the temperature in stage 1 with value located in DB10 DWO the value of entry 0 is referenced to the default value of DB10 DWO Since we want the second value to display the temperature in stage 2 with value located in DB10 DW1 the value of entry 1 the second entry is referenc
160. OP User s Manual 468 EXUDR Tech note Additional information is provided on using Color Boxes 7 11 2 Simple Shapes Designer NewProject dpr Page 1 WS i ol xj dx CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 18 x Denge hefe e als ems M NewProject Sq Pages al 1 Page 1 Special Pages B Graphics A Objects El Project MISS EISEN Bt i Me A Z E ae Ja Pg 1 1 X 100 Y 90 7 0x0 Defaut y Double protocol Designer enables its user to insert in their project simple vector graphics simple shapes Once these simple shapes are created it is possible to change their properties by right clicking on them Alignment When two or more simple shapes are selected it is possible to align them To activate this function select the Align command from the Edit menu Size Adjustment In the same way it is possible to alter the size of a group of shapes To activate this function select the Make Same Size command from the Edit menu Grouping Finally when two or more simple shapes are selected it is possible to group them To activate this function right click on the shapes and select the Group command Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 469 EXUDR Tech note 7 11 3 Graphics Libraries Designer NewProject dpr Page 1 NES o EE ll x
161. OR be liable for any special incidental indirect or consequential damages of any kind or any damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use data or profits whether or not advised of the possibility of damage and on any theory of liability arising out of or in connection with the use of the Designer SOFTWARE 4 Reference 4 1 File Menu 4 1 1 File Menu The File menu contains familiar Windows commands for managing files and printing New Open Close Save Save As Print Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 15 EXOR Tech note Print Preview Export to TagDB Export Strings Import Strings Recent Files Exit 4 1 2 New A new project may be created by selecting New from the File menu by clicking the New File icon or by pressing the Ctrl N keys This opens the New Project dialog box Projects Project name A Location jc DesProjects oct Project mj Cancel Help Enter a name for the new project and select the file location on the PC where the project file is to be stored Click on an icon to identify the type of project file to be created Unless otherwise specified Designer files are assumed to have the dpr extension When a new Project file is created the current project configuration is carried over for use with the new project This approach relieves you from having to reset the panel and controller parameters each time a new project is created The latest configuration i
162. Project Graphics Library Manager Se lab gE Project 2 switcOO1 Name switch3_ Size fi 99 x 199 a Project Image Project switch3_ This tab allows the user to see how many graphic symbols are present in the project and if needed to change their names The button Import puts the currently selected graphic symbol into the Project Screen area Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 36 IN XOR Tech note 13 Library 4 oO Graphics Library Manager 2 Graphics Arrows 4 03 Blowers H E Buttons i btn1 1 down bmp btn11 up bmp btn17 down bmp btn1 up bmp btn18 down bmp btn18 up bmp btn24 down bmp btn24 up bmp btn2 down bmp btn2 up bmp btnS down bmp Name fswitch3_ Size fi 99 x 199 S Project E Library Image Project switch3_ This tab allows to modify update the contents of the graphics library The tab contains a toolbar providing access to the familiar Windows commands of cut copy paste rename delete and insert folder for graphics management A Properties icon leading to a dialog box with the properties of the currently selected graphic symbol is also available Users if needed can change the name of the graphic symbols used in the project The button Import puts the currently selected graphic symbol into the Project Screen area Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User
163. R Tech note 4 4 309 Preview Image Panel Dither D Floyd Steinberg Cota E Brightness Fc T Smooth 7 Invert I Sharpen IT Flip T Blur Mirror Preview IV Size to Fit Reset Cancel The bitmap graphics preview image has two tabs labeled Panel and Original The Panel tab displays the way the image will appear on the panel while the Original tab displays the original image appearance for reference The image file name appears under the preview window 4 4 310 Panel Bitmap Settings Image Panel Cancel Sets the number of colors for the image display on the panel for example black white or 16 colors Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 179 E AS D BR Tech note 4 4 311 Properties Right click on a bitmap image and select Properties to view the image properties such as the image file name the image height and width in pixels and the image resolution 4 4 312 Image 4 4 313 Image Bitmap Settings E 2lsl Image Panel Dither z Floyd Steinberg Contrast eeng Caen ae SS M Smooth 7 Invert T Sharpen J Flip T Blur I Mirror Preview IV Size to Fit Reset Cancel There are a number of controls available to change the appearance of the image They include Dither Contrast Brightness Smooth Sharpen Blur Size to Fit Invert Flip Mirror Reset Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP Us
164. Read Cycle time under Project Panel Controller Interface Interlock Mailbox specifies how frequently the operator panel will read the data in the mailbox to check to see if it contains a new command The faster the mailbox Read Cycle the faster the panel will respond to commands from the controller However the update of the variables shown on the display will be slower 4 6 128 Interlock Reference The Interlock Reference is the address of the first Mailbox register in the controller memory The address can be entered directly as a string or via the Data Field Properties dialog box displayed by clicking on the button A memory map of the Mailbox in the controller memory is shown below The Status Word and the Command Response Word are always required for the Mailbox Parameter 0 Parameter 17 Words are only used if required by the particular mailbox command Offset Item 0 SC Status Word Command Response Word Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 223 E AS D BR Tech note N Parameter 0 Parameter 17 Note When entering the starting address care must be taken to ensure that the controller memory used by the Mailbox does not overlap with the memory areas reserved for other panel functions such as alarms I O update keyboard update etc 4 6 129 Panel lO 4 6 130 Panel UO UniOP panels with hardware type 0050 are ready to house the local I O Input Output module UIM 03 It can be used in conjunc
165. Reference PLC Intemal variable DB10 DAD El Scaling Global buffer usage Y 4 ft X fo Used 0 10KB Free 19 90 KB ol 1 Cancel Help The Configure Trend Buffers dialog box is composed of a list of buffers a General tab and a Sampling tab The first step in creating a trend is to create a trend buffer You will need to define two items the PLC variable that is to be sampled and the method in which the variable is to be sampled The variable can be sampled from the UniOP panel or the variable can be sampled directly from the PLC If the variable is sampled from the UniOP panel all of the data from the trend buffer will be stored within the memory of the UniOP panel If the variable is sampled directly from the PLC the data from the trend buffer will be stored in the memory of the PLC In the latter case the only duty of the UniOP will be to graphically display the trend buffer data from the PLC There are two Keyboard Macro Editor commands associated with trending These are Trend buffer print and Trend Window Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 251 EXOR Tech note 4 6 234 Buffers 4 6 235 Buffers Provides a list of the currently defined trend buffers and statistics on global buffer usage This list has two buttons The first one is used to Insert a new buffer The second one to Delete the currently selected one 4 6 236 Delete To remove a previously defined trend buffer select
166. SYG dpr Page 1 SS E Pie o x CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 8 x H GG M A Ge Page 1 JA Q Defaut z JETS 0 CUI E Ey Pages A IA NE E AN lala EI 1 Page 1 Special Pages Workspace ee E AN Gr I p Aa DOO ECO cl Pa 1 1 moO 0 DEMO Controller 5 0x0 Default P II i If Workspace is checked in the View menu the workspace will be visible The Workspace is composed of three tabs Graphics Objects and Project The default position of the workspace is to the left of the main Designer screen however the workspace can be moved anywhere on the Designer screen To hide the workspace uncheck it under the View menu To make it visible again simply check it again Note Right clicking in the frame of the workspace box brings up a number of options for viewing the workspace Select Allow Docking to dock the workspace against any of the four sides of the application If the check box is removed then the workspace will act as a mini window which can be placed anywhere and resized On the other hand clicking Float in main window causes the workspace to occupy the entire application window and minimize the graphics view Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 343 E AS DR Tech note 5 2 Graphics Designer Fred dpr Page 1 x Oj xj CA File Edit view Insert Page Project Transfers Tools W
167. Select Controller dialog box 4 6 111 Delete Click the Delete button to remove the currently selected node from the list of configured nodes 4 6 112 Panel Controller Interface 4 6 113 Panel Controller Interface Panel Controller Interface We al si RDA Setup Interlock MailBox Panel 1 0 I Keep RDA continuous IV Enable RDA References Update Cycles RDA Elements CM Keys eeng fis keys fea M Panel peio ows 1 sec V Time Y CP JW Status Iv PLC pB100w14 Ise MPR M Ctl LEDs 32 Cancel Apply Help The Panel Controller Interface allows you to set parameters for RDA Setup the Interlock Mailbox Panel I O Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 218 EXOR Tech note 4 6 114 RDA Setup 4 6 115 RDA Setup Panel Controller Interface A ig Ax RDA Setup Interlock MaiBox Panel I 0 Keep RDA continuous V Enable RDA References Update Cycles RDA Elements Iv Keys Gen pw Jha press ea Je Panel jogioowa fisec KR Time Y CP M Status JM PLC Gen pw Je MPR M Cul LEDs 32 Cancel Apply Help The RDA Setup tab lets you specify the Programmable Logic Controller PLC address for the RDA Reserved Data Areas The RDA can be left as a continuous block of memory in which case the PLC address for the start of the RDA can be specified Alternatively the elements of the RDA can be placed in different memory locations I
168. Signed or Unsigned data format Supposing the variable s data area has a length of N bits if the Unsigned option is chosen the variable is interpreted as an integer ranging from 0 to 2N 1 If the Signed option is chosen the variable is interpreted as a two complement integers ranging from 2N 1 to 2N 1 1 These choices are only active when the specified controller supports signed unsigned data format Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 74 EXOR Tech note 4 4 33 Size These entry boxes define the size of the bargraph field Note The field width height cannot exceed the width height of remaining panel from the current cursor row column position Note Size is adjusted depending on the current font size Double font takes twice the width height of regular font size etc 4 4 34 Reference The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used and is dependent upon the type of controller selected The field data type data format and address reference are all configured in this area Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be configurable The address chosen in the Reference section is dynamically linked to the bargraph In other words the value of the register corresponds to the fill level of the bargraph Reference choices for bargraph data fields include PLC Variable Recipe and Index 4 4 35 Text tab Numeric Field Properties y ES 2 x General Text Range Scali
169. Size widthf23 Height i Reference PLC Variable Recipe Index D810 Dw0 A DK Cancel Apply Help When selecting PLC in the Reference Section and pressing the button the Data Field Properties dialog box is displayed In the Network tab the user can specify which controller is to be referred by the data field Data Field Properties RS 2lsl Network Reference Configured Nodes Controller Brand Controller Model DEMO Controller Primary protocol Atos Secondary protocol 1 Atos Communication Priority C Low Priority fa High Priority This offers the user a very flexible approach It is possible to put fields from all controllers next to each other on a single UniOP page irrespective of the communication protocol they are using Moreover it is possible to scale a value from one controller with a value from the other It also enables you to keep parts of RDA and recipes in different controllers The same is with alarm triggers The best of all you can program data transfers from two totally different types of controllers or controller networks Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 371 EXOR Tech note 7 2 5 Downloading Uploading and Getting Panel Resources There is almost no difference between downloading and uploading single protocol projects and multi protocol projects Only as can be expected first downloads of multi protocol projects will last
170. Start or view the print operation Printer Setup Open the standard Windows Printer Setup dialog box Printer to use page size page orientation etc can be selected from this dialog box Cancel Close the dialog box without executing the print operation Panel Page Range Define which panel pages need to be included in the printout All pages All data on all panel pages are printed Pages Only the data that is inside the selected pages are printed To specify the panel pages to print the user needs to enter the page sequence to print A page sequence is a page range separated by commas i e 4 5 8 13 20 Valid ranges are a single page only i e 8 or consecutive pages i e 4 5 Without page breaks Any new data section starts a new page By selecting this checkbox all data will be compressed on as little number of pages as possible Suppress all cover pages This checkbox should be selected if the user wants to suppress the cover pages Hide empty tables Use this checkbox if the user wants to avoid printing tables relative to data sections that were not configured inside the project Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 19 EXOR Tech note Save change on exit When this checkbox is marked the selected Report Data Set will be saved for future use Report data sets This section of the print dialog box contains the list of project data that could be printed For any items that are listed a checkbox gives the use
171. Status Data Field Properties E 2 x Reference Control Variable Reference Data Type Address Recipe File Status RFS Data Format WORD Bin DI OK Cancel Help LBE In the UniOP panel memory there is a single memory location that is used to store the status of the entire recipe data in the panel This memory location is called the Recipe File Status The Recipe File Status cannot be modified by the panel s user it is controlled by the internal logic in the panel The Recipe File Status can take on only 2 values 0 or 1 A value of 0 indicates that all of the recipe data for every page in the project is valid A value of 1 indicates that an error in some part of the recipe data was found This means that the integrity of the recipe data is compromised It is very rare for this to happen but it can feasibly occur if the UniOP panel is powered off while the user is modifying the value of a recipe data field If the Recipe File Status has a value of 1 the panel s user must physically change the value of one of the recipe data items to reset the Recipe File Status to 0 Until this occurs the user will not be able to perform recipe transfers Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 436 EXOR Tech note 7 8 8 Recipe Parameter Set Selection Data Field Properties E E Axl Reference r Control Yariable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Parameter Set Select ls E pass Da
172. TCM10 board is not built into your panel you must use this network type Panels are interconnected using an R5495 cable connected either to PLC port or PC Printer port Network media amp protocol selection Select Network Media amp C R5485 Network Ce Ethernet UDP IP protocol You can use this network type if optional TCM10 board is built into your panel Panels are connected to a hub using a standard UTP Ethernet patch cables Bach Cancel Help Select the type of network click the Next gt button and the Network Selection dialog box appears 4 6 82 Ethernet The networking capabilities of the UniOP operator panels include connections to Ethernet based networks Ethernet is becoming a popular communication support for cell level industrial controllers There is no standard set in the industry for the application level protocol but there are several non compatible protocols As the only common point they are all based on the TCP IP or UDP IP protocols Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 209 E AS D BR Tech note There are two main classes of applications where Ethernet networking capabilities can be successfully used Direct connection to Ethernet based PLC networks Extending the UniNET network Note UniOP panels can be successfully connected to an Ethernet based PLC network only if the specific application layer protocol has been implemented The UniOP UniNET ne
173. Tech note Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse color when it is pressed Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On and Yellow as the color for Off Click OK 4 4 99 ASCII Key Button 4 4 100 ASCII Key Button The ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box is used to create touch cells as ASCII characters To insert an ASCII button touch cell click the ASCII Key Button icon from the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells ASCII Key Button then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed A dialog box appears where an ASCII button touch cell may be configured ASCII Key Button Properties he 2 xi General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action amp 3D Round Character A Rectangle 3D Rectangle E Windows B Custom Cancel Help There are four tabs in the ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box They are General Layout Attributes and Custom The General tab allows you to select the style of button and the ASCII key that is to be represented The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the ASCII panel key button The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It lets you create a custom button An ASCII touch cell example is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 0
174. Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 450 EXOR Tech note Recipe Configure X Number Of Parameter Sets lu E Multipage recipe Set As Recipe name Cut Copy Paste Cancel Recipe Parameter Get i WE Juli WATE A DB10 DAD DB10 Dw 0 EA CH ke FS CH J AAA Wi EE E la SS Enter 4 for the Number of Parameter Sets Enter the recipe values as shown above Note that the Recipe Item addresses are the reference addresses of the fields that were defined earlier Click OK to confirm the operation From the Project menu select the Keyboard Macro Editor On the Page 1 tab click on F1 It will display a different color from the other keys to show that it is selected For Key States select Pressed From the Commands bar select the command Recipe Control Click the arrow to view additional commands if this command is not visible on the command bar In the Recipe Upload Download Select parameter set dialog box click Download For Parameter set insert 1 Repeat steps 24 and 25 for Parameter sets 2 3 and 4 Click OK Download the project to the panel by pressing the F2 key on the computer keyboard by selecting the Download icon on the toolbar or by choosing Download from the Transfers menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 451 EXOR Tech note When the download is finished the panel will go into Operation Mode The variables in the left colu
175. U Link 3 09 D32Uple0390 DLL 5 02 L Remove CANopen 4 00 D32Uplc107 dll 5 04 Eres CT Dinverter_b 4 00 D32U plc067 DLL 5 00 Refresh CT UNIDRIVE 4 00 D32Uplc073 DLL 5 01 Peteh Cegelec 80 400 D32Uplc044DLL 503 Hel CompressorControl 4 00 D32UplcO85 DLL 500 e Compumotor 6000 4 00 D32Uplc047 DLL 5 01 Crouzet RPX 4 00 D32Uplc074 DLL 5 01 Controller Setup DEMO Controller 4 00 D32UplcO030 DLL 5 00 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual E AS D BR Tech note If required set up the panel to controller communication parameters by pressing the PLC Drive Comm button Set the parameters then click on OK to confirm your selections and close the open dialog boxes Select Project Panel Setup Select the type of display representative of your UniOP panel Panel setup A Panel Model Settings External Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Panel Model fi y XVGA 256 Colors 48x128 Color LCD Panel Memory E MBytes y Firmware Version 4 50 Cancel Help This step could be eliminated by placing the panel in Configuration Mode and selecting Get Panel Resources from the Transfers menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Si D R Tech note Panel Resources Recipe memory 32K vent list length 1024 upport for graphics if olor display hu ouchscreen present code Yes 8 VD a m a a ixel Vector Graphics Support Y
176. User s Manual 367 EXOR Tech note If two Communication Drivers are both serial there will be no ports left to connect the serial UniNET network You can still use the Ethernet based UniNET of course Since only one communication module can be plugged into the Panel a combination of two Communication Drivers each requiring such a module cannot be supported As the Ethernet protocol is also supported by a communication module a combination of one Ethernet based Communication Driver and a Driver requiring any other communication module cannot be supported either Note Two Ethernet based Communication Drivers can normally be used simultaneously because they will both communicate through the same Ethernet communication module Ethernet based UniNET can also be used in addition to one or two Ethernet based Communication Drivers Information is provided on the following topics Enabling Multiple Protocol Configuration Controllers Setup Placing Fields on a Page Downloading Uploading and Getting Panel Resources Configuring UniNET Networks 7 2 2 Enabling Multiple Protocol Configuration After choosing the Configure Controller menu option in the Designer software the Configure Controllers Dialog Box will pop up It is used for selecting the communication drivers both in single protocol and multi protocol configurations To select the Second Driver check the Enable Double Protocol check box A new text box and a button
177. a Height E Display Y Show Record Numbers Cancel Apply Help The General tab allows you to set the recipe menu style attributes size and includes the option to show the record numbers 4 4 300 Style Recipe Menu is the only choice available 4 4 301 Attributes The currently selected Recipe Parameter Set may be indicated using user defined attribute combinations blink highlight reverse 4 4 302 Size The size in pixels of the Recipe Menu display Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 173 E SD BR Tech note AA 203 Display Click the Show Record Numbers checkbox to show record numbers which are just the parameter set numbers together with the recipe name 4 4 304 Text Recipe Menu Properties ii E 2lsl General Text Attributes Text Bkgd JV Transparent Cancel Apply Help The Text tab allows you to set the font size and color and the background color and transparency Designer will not let you select a size that is too large to be displayed in the designated area If Transparent is selected then text background colors are not available Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 174 EXOR Tech note 4 4 305 Special Characters Special Characters E x 91 Y Y d J Ps iD OD Oli mB 8 x x 5 3 Bo elo lol re Boro 4 A e 0 r
178. a checkbox or a list box and can be modified These settings will vary depending upon the panel model specified Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 197 EXOR Tech note The Settings tab lists various information about the project such as the memory type the amount of project memory the trend buffer memory setting the recipe size the available alarms the event size list and the number of colors This tab also allows you to specify the time and date format for Time and Date data items 4 6 30 Settings List 4 6 31 Settings List The left side of the Settings index tab lists the capabilities supported by the selected panel You can modify these selections when they are supported by the currently selected UniOP model Commonly selectable items include Buzzer Disable Battery LED Events Backup Firmware Download Recipe Backup Touch Screen Update PLC References Extended Data Entry 4 6 32 Buzzer Enables Disables the panel buzzer when available 4 6 33 Disable Battery LED Enables Disables the battery LED indicator 4 6 34 Events Backup Enables Disables the events log backup inside the internal FLASH memory This is used by the Recipes and Events Backup macro Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 198 EXOR Tech note 4 6 35 Firmware Download New panels that contain the T2000 board have the ability to manage firmware downloads from within Designer without using the UniDataExchanger ut
179. a network file and assign dictionaries to each node You can create a list of tag names in the Tag Editor and then assign the tag names to the fields of your project by simply selecting a tag name in the Data Field Properties dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 456 EXOR Tech note Using the Tag Editor you can assign a tag name to fields such as Numeric Text Alarm blocks etc When the Data Field Properties dialog box is displayed a box is included listing the available tag names You can select a tag name from the box and the field address will automatically be set to the PLC address associated with the tag When a tag is displayed in the Define Field dialog box the tag data is retrieved from the tag database As such if you change the PLC reference for a tag in the Tag Editor the PLC reference information displayed in the Define Field dialog box will be up to date You can also change the tag dictionary for the project When the tag dictionary is changed the address for the tags in the project will be automatically updated based on the new tag dictionary information Additional information is available on the following topics Tag Groups Tag Editor Synchronization Importing and Exporting Tags 7 9 8 Tag Groups A Group field is provided for categorizing tags The group name is assigned when creating the tag and used to more easily manage large groups of tags For example you may want to group tags accordi
180. a valid project file it will be changed to Operation Mode Changing the panel to Operation Mode may take a few seconds Warning Please note that the Switch to Configuration Mode command will work whatever is the current status of the panel The panel will change to Configuration Mode even if it is showing alarms or even if it is in the middle of a data entry session Special care is needed if Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 481 EXOR Tech note the panel connected via Ethernet is not visible from the operator using the Designer software and it all cases it is operating any kind of machinery 7 12 14 Definition of IP Address Pick Panel allows you to change online the IP address and its properties From the Pick Panel dialog box select the Change IP Address Properties icon The dialog box shown in the figure below will appear xi Physical Address 00 30 08 00 05 82 Cancel IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway The dialog box includes the following elements Physical Address MAC ID of the Ethernet hardware in the panel This number cannot be changed by the user IP Address The current IP address of the panel You can enter here a new IP address in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255 Subnet Mask it is a number in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number with value either O or 255 Default Gateway it is the address of the router that allows connection to other network se
181. aaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeessaeeseneeeeaes 425 7 7 3 Panel Status Area ENEE 426 7 7 23 Controller Update Area 429 7 8 A chs Aged ececesiedacvase eh cbtevtal acyeacebthnadacceeAanadeetateaaces 433 PBA ROCIDCS EE 433 7 8 2 Working with Heclpnes nana cnn carr annrrannncnn 434 7 8 3 Inserting Recipe Data Pelde narran rana cnn 434 7 8 4 Configuring Recipe Parameter Sets oooocinnnncinncinnnccnnncnnnncnnnncccnncn nan nnnann cnn 434 7 8 5 Recipes and Control Variables oooncccnnnnninnnnnnnnccnnnccnnnccnnccnnnnccc narran nannccnnn 435 7 8 14 Recipes and the Keyboard Macro Editor oocncccinccnnnnnnnccnnncccncncnnnnarnnano cnn 441 7 89 15 Recipe ET 441 7 8 25 Recipes and the Interlock MallbOX oomninnnnnnnnccnnnccnnncnnnccnnnnccccnrrnnnnrrnnanc cnn 445 7 8 26 Multipage Recipe Gupport nentet 445 7 8 31 Recipes and Events Backup in Flash 447 7 89 34 Recipe Example coros aaa Aaaa A EAAS 449 7 9 TOS alitas 454 T91 TAGS ET 454 7 9 2 Tag Dictionaries 455 ECK Tag Edi TEE 456 7 9 11 Using Tags in Desoner A 458 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note 7 9 12 Tag Validation 0 ceecccccceceeeeeeneeeeeeee cee eecaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeedeaaeseeeeeseaeessaeeseaeeeeeas 458 T915 Tag EXAMPle ricino toa 459 e LOA Me po e O OP O E boc etxdadeaeedabdews 461 TADA TONOS EE 461 K ler 462 TAO Trend WINDOW TEEN 464 7 10 17 Internal Panel Control Variables oooooonnnconnnnnnnccnnccnnocannnccanancccnnrrn nana 467 7 10 18 Trend
182. aced The data field Properties box appears On the General tab select the Reference as PLC and click the button to specify the controller location Click OK to return to the data field Properties dialog box Click the Scaling tab Since we want to display the actual value in the controller as a percentage of the maximum value we need to use scaling If the actual value in the controller is 0 then the panel should display 0 If the actual value in the controller is 4095 the panel should display 100 Simply divide the value in the controller by the maximum possible value and multiply this result by Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 71 EXOR Tech note 100 to turn it into a percentage Make sure that the Constant button is checked for all values and enter the value 100 for A1 4095 for A2 and 0 for B Click OK to confirm this operation The value displayed on the panel will be a percentage of the actual numeric value 4 4 23 Attributes Numeric Field Properties E 2lsl General Text Range Scaling Attributes Attributes Name fob001 Layer Layer 1 pececsecsescooes IV Visible Disabled Tl Blink FF Non Printable IT Reverse IT Non Scrollable T Highlight Cancel Apply Help Use this tab to control the display print attribute of the Numeric ASCII Data Field 4 4 24 Numeric Data Field Example Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or click on the Numeric Field icon in the
183. after form feed is indicated in seconds 4 6 152 Graphics Checking the Enable box indicates that the current page must be printed in graphic mode The printer control code comes from the printer documentation The ratio of the character width in text and graphic mode depends on the resolution of the graphical printout 4 6 153 Baud Rate This option specifies the baud rate to be used in communication between the panel and the printer 4 6 154 Parity Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the panel and the printer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 228 E SD BR Tech note 4 6 155 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits to be used in communication between the panel and the printer 4 6 156 Stop Bits Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the target panel and the controller 4 6 157 Protocol The protocol used for the panel and printer to communicate Xon Xoff is also known as software flow control RTS CTS is also known as hardware flow control 4 6 158 Page Size Specifies the width and height of the print area in characters Note If reports are to be printed the paper height must be defined here before the report is defined If the paper height is changed after some reports have already been defined the previously defined report layouts will not automatically be rearranged 4 6 159 Reports 4 6 160 Reports A report is a collection of project file page
184. age of the trend window Set to 0 for no frame 4 4 220 Background Color Trend frame window background color 4 4 221 X Grid Check the box to enable a horizontal grid in the viewer window 4 4 222 X Grid Color Color of the horizontal grid 4 4 223 X Grid Marks Number of horizontal grid lines 4 4 224 Y Grid Check the box to enable a vertical grid in the viewer window 4 4 225 Y Grid Color Color of the vertical grid 4 4 226 Y Grid Marks Number of vertical grid lines 4 4 227 Trend Window Example A trend buffer must be created before a trend window can be created Select Trend Buffers from the Project menu Click on the Insert Item button above the buffers list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 156 EXOR Tech note Name the new buffer Click OK to accept the default settings for the trend buffer and return to the project page Select Trend Window from the Insert menu Use the cursor to define an area for the trend window In the Trend Window Properties dialog box click on the Add button From the Choose Trend Buffer list select the trend buffer that you created in steps 1 4 Click OK to return to the Trend Window Properties dialog box Select the Layout tab Enter a label for the trend window in the Text box Click OK to accept the trend window settings and return to the project page where the trend window is now displayed 4 4 228 Meter Instrument 4 4 229 Meter Instrument Meter i
185. al To insert an oval click on the Oval icon in the toolbar or select Insert Shapes Oval Place the cursor at one side of the oval click once then move the cursor to the opposite side of the oval and click again The oval will appear Oval icon is enabled only for firmware version 4 50 and above The Pixel and Vector graphics option should be enabled under the Panel Setup gt Settings tab 4 4 167 Trend Window 4 4 168 Trend Window The trend window displays the trend buffer Note Before creating a trend window you must define the Trend Buffer To create a trend viewer select the Trend Viewer icon from the toolbar or select Trend Window from the Insert menu Use the cursor to define an area for the trend window Once the trend window is defined double clicking on the trend window brings up the Trend Window Properties dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 147 EXOR Tech note Trend Window Properties E 21x Y Aris X Axis Layout Attributes Curves Appearance Type Line y Style Solid y Size Thin el Color E Cursor Y Cursor 11W 1 C1 YCur Y Axis Min Tw 1 01 YMin fo Y Axis Max ITA 1 Y Max 50 Add Delete The Trend Window Properties dialog box may also be accessed by right clicking on the trend field area and selecting Properties Within the Trend Viewer Properties dialog box you can define the main trend viewer properties for the X Axis the Y Axis
186. al 256 E AS UH Tech note 4 6 263 On Control Variable Change The trend buffer is cleared when the selected variable changes value 4 6 264 On Panel Startup The trend buffer is cleared upon power up of the UniOP panel 4 6 265 When Full The entire trend buffer is cleared when it becomes full 4 6 266 Memory Use You can determine how much memory is used by the current project file by selecting Memory Use from the Project menu or by pressing the Ctrl M keys Project size 5 0 KBytes Recipe size O bytes SSFDC used 40 8 KBytes The Memory used dialog box appears containing information on the amount of memory that is used by the project file how many bytes of recipe data are contained within the project file and the amount of memory used by an SSFDC memory card 4 6 267 Time Scheduled Triggers The Time Scheduled Triggers give you the possibility to program the Panel Operator to execute specific macro sequences cyclically or at specific time It may be invoked by selecting Time Scheduled Triggers from the Project menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 257 X OR Tech note Time scheduler triggers Da Triggers Edit macro Trigger ime Enable Yearly C Weekly C Daily Hourly C Single shoot Every Year 2000 Month z Day po BE BEE Day of the week Sunday Ee Hour jo Minute jo e New Triggers can be added as shown in the above figure Us
187. alled Multipage Recipe Note Multipage recipes are supported by UniOP firmware versions 4 20 and later Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 185 E AS UR Tech note 4 5 18 Set As Recipe Name A Recipe Name should be defined for all of the pages containing recipes that are going to be handled using the Recipe Menu It is also necessary for the pages that are referred to by Recipe Key field s The Recipe Name is defined by adding a Numeric ASCII data field of ASCII style on the page with recipes and filling the recipe data field values with a name for each parameter set After the recipe data field values have been inserted click the row number button to select that row then click the Set As Recipe Name button An asterisk will appear next to the Recipe Item to indicate it has been selected as a Recipe Name Note This ASCII field is not an internal variable in the panel memory It needs to be addressed to a physical location in the PLC memory The amount of memory required depends on the length of the ASCII string one byte per character A Recipe Name definition example is provided 4 5 19 Cut Cut deletes all Recipe Parameter Set entries beyond the position of the cursor 4 5 20 Copy To copy highlight a Recipe Parameter Set entry and click the Copy button Clicking the Paste button pastes the copied entry into the box currently occupied by the cursor 4 5 21 Paste Clicking the Paste button pastes the copied ent
188. ally from the panel 4 4 190 Samples The X axis range is defined by a maximum number of samples This will be enabled when the trend buffers inside the trend viewer are sampled on PLC events 4 4 191 On PLC The X axis range is defined by a maximum number of samples The number of samples must be defined inside the PLC memory 4 4 192 Scrolling 4 4 193 Scrolling The scroll parameters direction and auto scroll control defines how much the trend viewer will be shifted upon each scroll operation The scroll parameter can be a fixed amount of time or a fixed number of samples 4 4 194 Scroll Direction This parameter defines the direction of the curve The curve can be drawn Left to Right Right to Left Up to Down or Down to Up 4 4 195 Enable Auto Scroll Control Use this checkbox to enable a trend viewer shift when the trend viewer becomes full 4 4 196 Cursor 4 4 197 Cursor This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the X axis The X Cursor can be activated and the X Axis Minimum and Maximum values and color can be set Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 152 E SD BR Tech note 4 4 198 X Cursor This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the X axis Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor 4 4 199 X Axis Minimum This variable contains the minimum value of the defined X axis You
189. alog box From this box you can name a new database and specify its location Click the button next to Location if you want to store the database file in another folder or drive Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 280 E AS D BR Tech note 4 8 7 Open Open Tag database 21xj Look in Y DesProjects y rh E taas mdb tags1 mdb File name Files of type Tag Database Files mdb DI Cancel P A This familiar Windows box allows you to choose a file to open in the Tag Editor Tag database files are normally in the format mdb The selected database will appear in the workspace on the left of the page 4 8 8 Save As Save Tag Database as 29 zi xj Save nfa DesProjects D e DI ex EJ tags mdb tags1 mdb Save as type Tag Database Files mdb DI Cancel 4a This familiar Windows box lets you save a file in the Tag Editor Enter a file name and specify where the file is to be saved Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 281 E AS DR Tech note 4 8 9 Import Tags 4 8 10 Import Tags It is possible to import tags from external sources such as an ExcelTM database Select Import Tags from the File menu of the Tag Editor and the Tag Import Wizard steps you through the process lt Back and Next gt buttons help you navigate through the process A Cancel button is available if you want to exit the Tag Import Wizard A Help button provides access to help text a
190. alog box in which the address and number of frames were selected Click on OK from within this dialog box to complete the procedure and return to the project page 4 4 78 Dynamic Graphics Example 2 In this example we want to have a graphic appear in one of three different locations on the screen depending upon what is happening Assume there are four possible occurrences a blower can be on a pump can be on both can be on or neither can be on If there is nothing on the display screen will be blank If the blower is on the graphic of the blower will appear in the second screen location If the pump is on the graphic of the pump will appear in the third screen location This can be accomplished by using a different memory location for each graphic that is to be displayed If both the blower and the pump are on then both will appear in their respective screen locations Since there is to be nothing displayed on the screen when neither the pump nor the blower is on we only need to create two dynamic graphics fields in the project file one field for the graphic of the blower and the other field for the graphic of the pump To create the first dynamic graphic field for the blower select Insert Data Fields Dynamic Graphics or click on the Dynamic Graphics icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define a box where the graphic is to be displayed The Dynamic Graphic Properties dialog box appears Click on the button under PLC Re
191. alues in addition to zero to be shown on the gauge The values shown will be computed by dividing the maximum value by the count 4 4 239 Precision The precision or number of digits to the right of the decimal point that are to be displayed on the gauge A value of zero means that only integer values will be displayed 4 4 240 Reference Defines the variable that is to be graphically represented Variables can be PLC references or internal panel variables Clicking on the button for PLC references brings up the Data Fields Properties dialog box where the reference location may be set 4 4 241 Scale The scaling parameter may be used to perform a linear transformation on the value to be displayed Specify the scaling operators A1 A2 and B for the equation Y A1 A2 X B in the boxes Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 160 E AS DR Tech note 4 4 242 Layout 4 4 243 Layout General Layout Gauge Needle Background a Y Title CR Font Labels E Font Frame EE pe D Title Ti E Xx N Title Y O Labels o Fas Gauge Gauge Y r z Bkad Y IV Transparent Size AAA z CEBBEE Cancel Help The parameters within this index tab are used to define the layout of the gauge These include the Title text the Title X size the Title Y size the Labels the Gauge X size the Gauge Y size the overall gauge Size the Title color and F
192. ame field If the referred page has no Recipe Name field defined the Recipe Key field will display asterisks Passthrough Status Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 56 IN X O H Tech note Data Field Properties ec 2lsl Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Address Pass through status e PTS Data Format WORD Bin DI Cancel Help When passthrough mode has been activated the UniOP panel does not communicate with the controller and the dynamic data displayed on the screen may no longer be correct lt may be useful to inform the user when the passthrough option is active A new control variable has been defined for this purpose The control variable name is Passthrough Status This variable can take on two values zero meaning that passthrough is not active or one meaning that passthrough is active Internal Variable Data Field Properties ea 21x Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Variable name Address Internal variable y UNI Data Format DELE WORD Bin DI The internal panel control variables associated with trending can be defined and used from the trend viewer Alphanumeric values of these variables can be displayed on the UniOP To access these variables it is necessary to create a numeric data field with a reference type Variable Select the UniOP variable from the Data Field Properties Type list box Th
193. and defines the model and attributes of the PLC You can select a dictionary for your project when you enable the tag feature in the project for the first time You can create multiple tag dictionaries inside a tag database and add tags to each dictionary Each dictionary is configured for a specific PLC controller and model name Each project is assigned to a dictionary You can create multiple dictionaries in a database in order to support a project that has a PLC Network and or UniNET Network To be able to use tags for a project that supports the UniNET PLC Network at least one dictionary must exist in the database for each of the nodes in the network Note If a project supports a UniNET PLC network each UniNET node PLC Node must be tied to a tag dictionary in the database You will be required to assign a tag dictionary for all the nodes during the configuration of UniNET PLC network Each node must have at least one dictionary in the database If PLC network is enabled and you change the PLC Node the Tag Name controls will be initialized with the tags from the dictionary tied to the current PLC Node 4 6 227 Enable Tags Checking this box enables the use of tags 4 6 228 Database The location of the tag database to be used is listed Click on the button to select the location of a tag database file file format mdb Tag dictionaries are tied to controller brands and models 4 6 229 Refresh Database Click on the Refr
194. and the overall layout A list of trend window limitations is provided 4 4 169 Trend Window Limitations 10 10 20 20 1 9999 sec 20 KB Available memory area in the PLC for storing trend buffers 60 bytes 4 4 170 Preview The Preview window allows you to see how the trend window will look before it is actually created and placed into a project file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 148 E AS DR Tech note 4 4 171 Y Axis 4 4 172 Y Axis Trend Window Properties 3 E 2 x Y Axis X Axis Layout Attributes Curves Appearance Type Line DI Style Solid y Size Thin y Color Cursor Y Cursor Tw1 C1 YCur Y Axis Min TW1 C1 YMin Y Axis Max Tw1 C1 YMax Add Delete Cancel Help Selecting the Y Axis index tab will allow you to select the trend buffers curves to be displayed inside the trend viewer You can also set the appearance of the Y Axis and configure the trend cursor 4 4 173 Curves Selecting the Y Axis index tab will allow you to select the trend buffers curves to be displayed inside the trend viewer Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or remove trend buffers The Add button opens a dialog box that contains a list of all the active trend buffers that can be used To remove a previously inserted curve select it from the Curves list and click the Delete button Note Once a curve is added to the trend viewer you will only be able to add a
195. anguages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in which you wish to work The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cell Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transpar
196. aphics tab in the workspace Select Tanks from the pull down list at the top of the workspace Click on the image of a tank and drag it to the project page Select Insert Data Fields Bargraph Use the cursor to outline an area on top of the tank for the bargraph Select Vertical as the bargraph Style Select PLC as the Reference type and click on the button to set the memory location for the fill level value in the Data Field Properties dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 77 EXOR Tech note Click OK to return to the Bargraph Field Properties dialog box Click on the Text tab and make sure that Transparent is selected Click OK The bargraph now appears on top of the tank and will reflect the fill level value 4 4 39 Message 4 4 40 Message Data Fields Message fields can be used instead of numerical values to inform the user that an event is occurring For example assume the message Voltage too high is attached to the value 32 Whenever the value of the register in the controller reaches 32 the message will be displayed In this manner a text message is displayed on the panel which is often more beneficial and meaningful to the operator than displaying a numerical value Note The maximum number of messages that can be displayed is 1024 Message fields can be created in one of two ways Either select the Text Message icon from the toolbar or select Insert Data Fields Message then use the
197. arameter Set name for the referred page Note The page to which a Recipe Key field refers in the Data Field Properties dialog box must have a defined Recipe Name field This is done by adding a Recipe data field with an ASCII display format on the page where the recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item values in the Recipe Configuration box with an ASCII name for each parameter set This Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 440 EXOR Tech note ASCII field is called a Recipe Name field If the referred page has no Recipe Name field defined the Recipe Key field will display asterisks 7 8 14 Recipes and the Keyboard Macro Editor The Keyboard Macro Editor provides a way to configure panel keys to perform recipe functions When doing so use Page n mode where n is the page on which the recipe of interest is located Keyboard Macro Editor commands that pertain to recipes include Recipe Control can be used to download upload or select a parameter set Go to Recipe Menu can be used to jump to a page with a Recipe Menu Scroll Recipe Menu can be used to scroll to a selection in the Recipe Menu Confirm Recipe Menu Selection can be used to accept the selected parameter set name Recipes and Events Backup can be used to back up recipe data as well as the event list into flash memory inside the panel Step Control Variables can be used to assign a key or touch cell to toggle through the different param
198. are shown After selecting particular Driver from the list below you simple click at the adequate Set button to set the First or the Second Driver To go back to the single protocol configuration case simply uncheck the Enable Double Protocol check box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 368 EXOR Tech note Configure Controllers Controller Mode e Extemal controller only Internal controller only Cancel C intemal External controllers Help Iw Enable Double protocol Controller 1 PLCpot Select protocol Modbus RTU Controller 2 PC Printer port OmonFINS SER It can be noted that once the Enable Double Protocol check box is checked the contents of the list box showing all available drivers may be somewhat changed After checking the check box only drivers that have the multi protocol capability enabled are shown in the list box Thus if there are such drivers installed that do not allow combining with other drivers into multi protocol configurations these will be excluded from the list and the list will be shortened After un checking the check box all the drivers will be re displayed in the list box By pressing the OK button the configuration is accepted The Designer will issue a warning if an illegal combination is chosen and will not close the Dialog Box until an allowed configuration is selected After the multi protocol application is successfully configured the status l
199. are stored Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 334 E AS DR Tech note 4 8 168 Layout 4 8 169 Layout General Layout Grid V Snap to Grid M Show Grid Type Point Line Spacing Character e Custom X fro DG fio pixels Text Entry Cancel Apply Help The Layout tab allows you to control the Grid and the Text Entry behaviours 4 8 170 Grid 4 8 171 Grid The options under the Grid section let you display a grid on the screen align items with the grid and set the spacing of the grid 4 8 172 Show Grid Check this box to display a grid on the screen for the current project 4 8 173 Snap to Grid Check this box if project items are to align with the grid 4 8 174 Spacing The grid spacing may be based on character size or you may set a custom grid size by setting the number of pixels for the grid in both the X and Y directions Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 335 EXOR Tech note 4 8 175 Text Entry Check the Word Wrap box under Tools Options to enable word wrapping which automatically continues a sentence on additional lines if it does not fit on the current line If word wrapping is not selected then the portion of any lines that are too long for the display will not be viewable 4 8 176 Advanced 4 8 177 Advanced Commands in the Advanced submenu on the Tools menu include Format SSFDC Erase Protocols in Panel Erase NiceFonts in Panel FW R
200. are will return a list of all the keyboard files currently stored in the UniOP memory To delete a particular keypad simply select the name of the keypad from the list and click on the Delete button To close the communication session click on the Close button 4 8 119 View Menu This section provides information about the View menu The View menu lets you set the screen to view the project in the most comfortable manner for various tasks The items Toolbar Status Bar and Grid may be checked in the View menu to make them visible Uncheck them if you do not want them visible in the current workspace Zoom commands on the View menu include Zoom Normal to return to normal viewing Zoom Percent to zoom in by a preset percentage of 50 75 100 or 200 Zoom Custom to magnify by a percentage that you specify Zoom to Fit to zoom to fit the defined viewing space 4 8 120 Window Menu The Window menu contains familiar Window commands for managing multiple windows These include New Window opens a new window Cascade places each new window slightly below and to the right of the current window Tile places each new window below the current window Arrange Icons arranges the visible icons in an orderly manner Currently Open File s the filenames of the currently opened files 4 8 121 Help Menu The Help menu is constructed in the typical Windows manner with a list of the Contents of the help text and in
201. ase 4 6 22 Panel Model 4 6 23 Panel Model Panel Model Settings Extemal Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Panel Model y GA 256 Colors 48x128 Color LCD Panel Memory P MBytes D Firmware Version 4 50 Use the Panel Model tab to directly select the UniOP model being used On the right side of the dialog box a preview picture of the currently selected UniOP panel is displayed You can select the panel model the panel memory and the firmware version 4 6 24 Panel Model To choose a new panel model choose a panel from the drop down list under Panel Model The page editor workspace will change in order to reflect the available screen area on the selected model Note The panel model may be changed at any time during development However be aware that some restrictions apply regarding the screen area You can change the display from a small screen size to a larger screen size without affecting the contents of the project However changing from a large screen size to a smaller screen size may delete some data fields if they are beyond the new screen boundary If this occurs you will be given the chance to cancel the operation before any fields are deleted If you are unsure of the UniOP model being used or if you have a new UniOP panel that has not been defined within the Designer panel database select the GENERIC panel model In this mode all of the available panel capabilities will be enabled Not
202. ate a new popup keypad select New from the Keypad Designer File menu The Keypad Designer utility presents a blank programming area where the keypad can be designed File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Window Menu Help Menu Buttons Value Objects 4 8 96 File Menu 4 8 97 File Menu The File menu contains familiar Windows commands for managing files and printing New Open Close Save Save As Print Print Preview Print Setup Recent Files Exit Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 307 EXOR Tech note plus the less familiar commands Export to ROM and Download to ROM 4 8 98 New A new Keypad Designer File may be created by selecting New from the File menu by clicking the New Keypad icon or by pressing the Ctrl N keys KeypadDesigner KeypadDesigner1 Mie x File Edit View Window Help osa re a tejane IS CES For Help press F1 x 496 y 391 F E The file is created with a default name You can change this name when saving the file by selecting the Save As from the File menu 4 8 99 Open To open an existing Keypad Designer File select Open from the File menu click the Open icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl 0 keys The Open Keypad dialog box will appear providing a list of the file names in each directory Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 308 File name Files of type Keypad Designer Files kbd DI Cancel E Enter the name of the file to be loaded or u
203. ays broadcast a one off clock synchronization message to the network whenever the time and date menu is exited on the panel and whenever the panel receives a mailbox command instructing it to perform a clock synchronization 4 6 92 Net Comm Pressing the Net Comm button displays the Communication Parameters Setup dialog box where you can configure the communication parameters for the network To obtain the best results the highest baud rate possible should be used Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 213 EXOR Tech note Note Network communications parameters need to be set for an RS 485 network only The Net Comm button is not activated for Ethernet networks 4 6 93 Export Click on the Export button to save the existing network configuration to a file Network configuration files have the extension NET 4 6 94 Import Any network configuration may be saved for later use or for sharing between multiple project files designed for the same network Click on the Import button to load an existing configuration Network configuration files have the extension NET 4 6 95 Configured Nodes 4 6 96 Configured Nodes This is list of the already configured network nodes Each node in the list is described by its node number controller driver and model 4 6 97 Node Number The node number of the node being selected for configuration It must be a number greater than 0 and smaller or equal to the Maximum Node Number 4 6 98 C
204. be of Reference type PLC a panel Control Variable Recipe data or Index The Control Variable offers a means of controlling and monitoring recipes Once a data field identified as a recipe type has been added to a project page you can work with other recipe commands 7 8 4 Configuring Recipe Parameter Sets A recipe is associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data fields on that page However there can be a number of different parameter sets for a recipe A parameter set is a specific block of data within a recipe A recipe parameter set is created by assigning particular values to the recipe data fields on a page With Designer it is Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 434 EXOR Tech note possible to create many different parameter sets within a single recipe Depending upon the panel model there can be up to 1024 parameter sets of a single recipe Not only is a block of memory in the panel reserved for every recipe separate blocks of memory are also reserved for each of the parameter sets contained within a particular recipe All the parameter sets of a particular recipe always contain the same recipe data items but the values of these recipe data items vary between the different parameter sets These different recipe parameter sets can control different processes One set may be used to configure the controller to control the production of 2 mm screws another set may be used to configure the co
205. bout the Tag Import Wizard 4 8 11 Import Tags Step 1 Tag Import Wizard a x Step 1 Select target dictionary Tag Driver Model tagDictionary Demo Controller model List of Controller Drivers Name Diver DLL Name Lo CompressorControl 4 00 D32Uplc085 DLL 5 00 Hd Compumotor 6000 4 00 D32Uplc047 DLL 5 01 Crouzet RPX 4 00 D32Uplc074 DLL 5 01 DEMO Controller 4 00 D32Uplc030 DLL 5 00 Danfoss FC 4 00 D32Uplc125 DLL 5 03 Refresh Controller List Retesh Coote Le coca Heo Enter a name for the new tag dictionary in the Tag box Select a controller driver from the list Select a particular driver model if necessary The Refresh Controller List button is available if it is necessary to refresh the list for any reason When you have completed Step 1 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 2 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 282 EXOR Tech note 4 8 12 Import Tags Step 2 Tag Import Wizard BS x Step 2 Select a file to import Type the file name or Click button to browse the file mmm lt Back Cancel Help In Step 2 you will select the file that you wish to import If you know the file name you can enter it in the box Otherwise click on the button to browse the system When you locate the file that you want to import click on the file name to select it the click the Open button You are returned to the Tag Import Wizard
206. box This command moves you to the last cell 4 8 50 Delete Records The Delete Records command is used to delete all the records located in the New group dialog box 4 8 51 View Menu 4 8 52 View Menu The View menu allows you to customize the appearance of the Tag Editor Commands include Workspace Toolbar Status Bar Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 293 E AS DDR Tech note 4 8 53 Workspace The workspace bar is located at the left side of the Tag Editor dialog box and displays any open tag databases If Workspace is checked in the View menu then the workspace is visible If it is unchecked then the workspace bar is hidden The workspace can be docked to a side of the Tag Editor or float in the main Tag Editor window Right click on any item displayed in the workspace brings to up a command list that controls docking Additional commands provide shortcuts to create a new dictionary or hide workspace To make the workspace visible again simply check Workspace in the View menu 4 8 54 Toolbar The toolbar is located under the Tag Editor menu bar and contains icons as shortcuts for commonly used commands If Toolbar is checked in the View menu then the toolbar is visible If it is unchecked then the toolbar is hidden 4 8 55 Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the Tag Editor dialog box and displays contextual information H Status Bar is checked in the View menu then the status bar is
207. build your RS485 UniNET Network 7 4 15 Ethernet 7 4 16 Ethernet The networking capabilities of the UniOP operator panels include connections to Ethernet based networks Ethernet is becoming a popular communication support for cell level industrial controllers There is no standard set in the industry for the application level protocol but there are several non compatible protocols As the only common point they are all based on the TCP IP or UDP IP protocols There are two main classes of applications where Ethernet networking capabilities can be successfully used Direct connection to Ethernet based PLC networks Extending the UniNET network Note UniOP panels can be successfully connected to an Ethernet based PLC network only if the specific application layer protocol has been implemented The UniOP UniNET network is able to use Ethernet when available as the communication media The advantages of this type of network as compared to conventional UniNET technology are the ability to use existing network cables and a more effective solution for connecting a computer to the UniNET network Information is available on the TCM10 board required to connect a UniOP panel to an Ethernet network the UniNet OPC Server and configuring Ethernet networks Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 397 EXOR Tech note 7 4 17 TCM10 Board UniOP panels require an additional hardware module to connect to Ethernet networks In an
208. buttons on the toolbar 4 3 7 New The New button brings up the New Toolbar dialog box where you may enter the name of a new toolbar to be created New Toolbar Y x Toolbar name Gk Cancel Help The new toolbar may then be placed in a location of your choice in the toolbar section of the Designer screen Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 33 EXOR Tech note 4 3 8 Workspace The status bar to the left of the main Designer screen provides information on project pages and lists various graphics and objects that can be placed in a project If Workspace is checked in the View menu the workspace will be visible Designer SYG dpr Page 1 Es RS ll o x CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 159 x H E EN Page 1 y QQ iaa a emeng EE Te E 2 Ey Pages Wee AN lala EI 1 Page 1 i KE E O EX SpedalPages A w e e Workspace a oa eo tada efec Iess Pa 1 1 Be ee OB pn vn DEMO Controller if 0x0 The default position of the workspace is to the left of the main Designer screen however the workspace can be moved anywhere on the Designer screen To hide the workspace uncheck it under the View menu To make it visible again simply check it again Note Right clicking in the frame of the workspace box brings up a number of options for viewing the workspace Select Allow Doc
209. buzzer control is given to PLC and the PLC switches the buzzer on off using C7 bit Two bits are used for this i e Enable bit bit 0 buzzer standard bit 1 control from PLC Control bit if Enable bit 1 then bit 0 buzzer off bit 1 buzzer on 7 8 Recipes 7 8 1 Recipes Data may be stored inside a panel in data retentive memory The available amount of data retentive memory varies depending on the UniOP model This data retentive memory can be used to permanently store data for use by an attached controller This data can be written to the controller and conversely the data can be read from the controller and then placed in the data retentive memory This concept is termed Recipes and offers a powerful way to extend the capabilities of the controller This is especially true for controllers that have a limited amount of internal memory Recipes are configured by adding the required controller data items to a page as recipe data fields A recipe can be associated with a particular page and is composed of all the recipe data items on that page Recipe data items contain all the information associated with normal controller data fields but rather than the data being read and written directly to the controller during the course of normal operation the data is instead read from and written to the UniOP memory that is reserved for the data item Only when the UniOP panel is explicitly asked to write the data to the controller
210. c 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 130 E AS D BR Tech note Selector Switch Properties 3 ax General Layout Attributes Cu stom Style Action 7 3D Round States 2 DC Rectangle D I 3D Rectangle 1 AP Cust a Custom Ref DB10 Daf E Color O Disable Cyclic Refresh Cancel Help There are three tabs in the Selector Switch Properties dialog box They are General Layout and Custom The General tab allows you to select the style of selector switch the number of states and the memory location in the controller that is affected by each state The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It lets you create a custom button A selector switch touch cell example is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 131 E AS DR Tech note 4 4 134 General 4 4 135 General Selector Switch Properties E ax General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action 4 3D Round States 2 i DC Rectangle D I 3D Rectangle 1 2 Cust w n Ref DB10 Daf P Color O Disable Cyclic Refresh Cancel Help The General tab of the Selector Switch dialog box allows you to select the Style of selector switch and the Action 4 4 136 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance
211. cation protocols will have to be available When the UniOP communicates with one or more controllers using only one communication protocol single protocol configuration then if this protocol is a serial protocol the controllers are connected to the PLC port of the UniOP panel Of course if the protocol is a non serial protocol e g Ethernet an adequate communication module must be plugged into UniOP and then the controllers must be connected to the AUX port When configuring the UniOP to communicate with controllers using simultaneously two communication protocols multi protocol configuration distinction must be made between the First Communication Driver used to communicate using the First Protocol and the Second Communication Driver used to communicate using the Second Protocol It is important to remember the following rules for serial drivers First Driver always communicates with the controllers over the PLC port Second Driver always communicates with the controllers over the PC Printer port Of course if any of the protocols is a non serial protocol its Driver will use the AUX port instead Although not many it can be seen that there must be some restrictions due to hardware reasons when two communication protocols are used If the Communication Driver is alone using both serial communication ports the PLC and the PC Printer port it cannot be used in multi protocol configurations Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP
212. ce ceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeees 82 Network Cable A 404 Messages Network Configuration 211 394 412 Number scfs sea decisies rotores eran 81 Network Example seeen 412 ESTA AAA eeben dene 81 Network Protocol 208 Messages tina dai 81 Network Selection cece cesceeeeseeeeeeees 406 Meter Instrument 157 Network Setup 208 Meter Instrument Example eee 167 Network Tvpes 397 Methods Ne Wins aaa dd adn 328 ee E 463 New Dictionary 289 292 Methods aiii 463 New File Microsoft Excel E E 359 Interfacing e eekeegeEEEAEEEEEENEEENERUEEEen 411 New Pl necinisicas insta mascota 359 Microsoft Excel 411 New Group 289 292 MUN AAA ENEE H 342 NeW INSEL occiso egen Cheese 252 Mint seeniorid 81 New Panel Fonts rie 165 AA 417 A ieacesteds nnsseveeneee 181 New Panel Fonts ossessioni 417 Miscellaneous Panel Senge 359 New Report Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients 396 Credos 421 Mode cnica raices estaria depa 204 NeW RepOT cecicorcioricinnarosdongenicradcdinondo ias 421 Modem Commande AA 272 New Window cee cesecssecesecsteceseceeeeeeeeeees 341 Modem Messages 272 Next Language sssri 248 Modules concilio 226 Next Page scstiisisiessetesect ins sieoasteavinetacsteessenees 183 le 342 Next RECOM csciciiiomesiaida tadas 293 Move DOWI EE 247 Node Number cnsriseccrrscrriiiscinereiseiiseie 214 Move Item DOWN cooooccnnconononnninonacinanacananinnnos 40 Nonprintable Characters ooooonnconnnnnnncnnoninns 238 Move Item UD cevioc
213. ces with page references Report Contents Table of the Report Contents with page numbers 4 1 10 Export to tag database This option is used to export all the tags defined in the currently opened project to a database specified by the user If the project doesn t have any tags associated with it this option will be disabled 4 1 11 Export Strings Strings used in a project can be exported into a CSV Comma Separated Values a data format used by various applications e g Microsoft Excel TM file by selecting Export Strings from the File menu This opens the Export Strings dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 21 File name H est Save as type csv file csv DI Cancel ANSI D ANSI Encoding The information stored in the file has the following format Filename DemoFul2 csv Created Friday May 03 2002 10 49 Project C Designer Projects DemoFul2 dpr 2 English Default Prenecht PG 1 o Main Menu y WI Men Pri nn ST 1 1 Created by EXOR Cr par EXOR 21 12 05100 Project Funcional te EIER ST 1 3 Tech Support Tel Tech Support Tel The first section contains information about the exported file its name the date of creation and the original project file The second section specifies the number of languages and their names The third section contains a line for each string in th
214. cking the property button Ethernet Settings dialog will be displayed as shown below Ethernet Settings k 2 x IP Address 4 0 0 0 Cancel Network Mask O70 0270 Gateway Mask OF JO ett The above dialog box allows to specify network parameters such as Network Mask and Gateway Mask 4 6 50 Ethernet Board Using the optional external TCM10 the UniOP can be connected to an Ethernet UDP IP network Check the Ethernet Board box if there is such an Ethernet board associated with the panel to enable network support 4 6 51 IP Address Enter the board s IP address in the entry box The IP address used has to be chosen according to the overall Ethernet configuration This address will be disabled when the Network Setup configuration is used In that case the panel node IP Address and the protocol must be selected from the Network Configuration dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 202 E AS UH Tech note 4 6 52 Passthrough 4 6 53 Passthrough Panel Setup E 2j xi Panel Model Settings Extemal Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous m Port Settings Mode Baud Rate EMMI OR Parity Data Bits Stop Bits C Remote Hardware None z fe y fi Commands Request Response a A a i A CigModee II Cancel Help The Passthrough tab lets you configure the panel passthrough feature parameters This lets you remotely put a UniOP panel into either Configuration Mode or
215. client network nodes having no controllers connected to them Other nodes server nodes can be configured to communicate over one protocol single controller configuration or two protocols multi protocol configuration where any UniOP server be configured to support any allowed combination of drivers The Network Configuration Dialog Box looks as in the illustration below Minor differences are possible depending on the selected network type Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 372 x Maximum Node Number OK 1 Cancel TT Enable UniNET Network _ Broadcast Periodic Clack Synchronization Messages Net Comm Configured Nodes Export Controller Driver Controller Model 1 DEMO Controller Demo Controller m Import dd Help E Edit Panel Node Panel Node Comm Port For Network H le Printer PLC Cancel Printout Node Num Comm Retries Comm Time Out fi 3 fi O sec IT Enable PLC V Enable Double protocol Controller 1 DEMO Controller EN Controller 2 Atos B By selecting a node and requesting its properties i e by pushing the Properties it is possible to have access to the Double Protocol configuration of that node 7 3 Interlock Mailbox 7 3 1 Interlock Mailbox The UniOP Interlock Mailbox is designed to allow the operator interface panel to interact with the controller s ladder logic program The Interlock Mailbox is simply a
216. cnnncnnncnonaconacns 238 ageseent 229 Panel Conpectng seese 12 400 405 Download recia cani 311 A INTO 12 Pane aiii dai 179 A TA 311 A dE Eege 337 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Palin 337 Palin ida 400 Paella 400 Ern e be 405 Pane lt fet dla 475 Panel Font A 419 Downloading seeen 418 Panel Fotocasa 27 416 Panel ont 418 Panel Pente EEN noticia cie 419 Panel Font Character Size 417 Panel Font Name 28 Panel Font SIZE surisi nenaon 28 Panel lO 224 Panel Key Button 107 Panel Key Button Touch Cell Example 111 Panel MeEMOTY svisis eisiccesstesccneadsbedsstavatesnansses 197 Panel Menu Time O le riers esen Ea ES 207 Panel Men 207 Panel Model 358 Panel Model ob 196 Panel Node ici id 215 Panel Page Property s es 232 Panel Selectnon 357 Panel A AO 317 Panel Startup EE 257 Panel Status Area 426 Panel Status Word 426 Panel tad idea 316 Panel Tie nicas 358 Panel Upload Protection eee 207 Panel via EPtbermer 483 Parameter Sets else 185 Parameter Sets oooonononocococncnnnonononononononononos 185 ParaMeters neren renee e E eE da s 377 eh 228 Passthrough Settings oonoconoconoconocnconncnnnannno 358 Passthrough Status ooooonnncnnncinoccnocononcconacananns 56 Passthrough oh 203 Password Automatic Login Example 243 Password Example oooooocnncccnncccnnnccnonccccnnnnos 244 Password Stats 382 Pass WOT S sidad 55 240 Pastora aora 186 Pra
217. communication errors 4 6 108 Comm Time Out Value of the time out interval used in the network communication 4 6 109 Enable Double Protocol A single UniOP panel can communicate with Controllers simultaneously using different communication protocols When configuring the UniOP to communicate with controllers simultaneously using two different communication protocols double protocol configuration distinction must be made between the first communication driver used to communicate using the first protocol and the second communication driver used to communicate using the second protocol The Configure Controllers dialog box contains a checkbox for Enable Double protocol Checking this box lets you specify a second controller Under the Controller 1 box another box will appear where you can specify Controller 2 Designer will issue a warning if an illegal combination is chosen and will not close the dialog box until an allowable configuration is selected If a configuration is specified in which a Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 216 EXOR Tech note switch to new driver s was made Designer will prompt the user to accept the change If both drivers are changed Designer will prompt twice If at least one of the drivers is a serial driver the decision which driver will be set as the Controller 1 and which one as Controller 2 is important Controller 1 will use the PLC port and the Controller 2 will use the PC Printer
218. components needed for the server and can be freely distributed with your products Once the required software components are correctly installed the VBA Visual Basic for Application interface available in Excel can be easily used to give access to the UniNET OPC Server The read operation can be implemented using a simple form where a button is programmed to perform the following Get OPC Data subroutine Private Sub GetOpcData_Click Get OPC Automation Reference Set opcauto CreateObject OPC Automation 1 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 411 EXOR Tech note Connect to the server opcauto Connect EXOR UniNETOPC Plays with groups and items Set groups opcauto OPCGroups Set group groups Add Device1 Group group IsActive True Set Items group OPCltems Set Item Items Addltem Device1 Group tag1 1 Item Read 1 value Wem value Display value Sheet1 Range a1 value value End Sub A working sample program is available on request 7 4 47 Network Examples 7 4 48 Network Example Most of the features of the UniNET Network can be tried by using a very simple configuration This example will describe the steps required to set up a simple UniNET network composed of a single server operator panel connected to a controller and two client operator panels that will access the controller data via the server through the network services The complete network system is composed
219. consistency of the parameter sets stored in the different nodes It is recommended that in a network configuration only one node be assigned for the storage of the recipe data 7 4 43 UniNET OPC Server 7 4 44 Extending the connectivity with the UniNET OPC Server The implementation of the UniNET network using Ethernet technology allows for an easy extension of the connectivity options of the system One of the most important advantages of the Ethernet based technology is the availability of a UniNET Client for a computer The UniNET Client for a computer consists of a software component designed to work as a Client in the network The software component is a program based on the OPC technology OLE for Process Control working as OPC Server Once the software component is installed on the computer all of the OPC Client programs will have full access to data coming through the UniNET Network They can also fully interact with the Controllers connected to the UniNET Server panels This section provides information on the UniNET OPC Server and shows how this server can be accessed via OPC Automation Clients 7 4 45 UniNET OPC Server The UniNET OPC Server is a program that is distributed separately from Designer The UniNET OPC Server program has the following minimum requirements Microsoft Windows 98 NT ME or XP 15MB of free hard disk space Ethernet card The installation procedure of the UniNET OPC Server software components will aut
220. ct Download to SSFDC from the Transfers menu or press the F6 key From time to time you may wish to transfer an existing application from a UniOP panel to your PC This is termed an upload To upload data select Upload from the Transfers menu click on the Upload icon in the toolbar or press the F3 key 6 7 Simple Data Fields Data fields are those items that the Designer software uses to display information from the controller These dynamic data items come in the form of numeric fields which can be displayed in numeric format or in ASCII format bargraphs message fields attributes dynamic graphics time and date fields These fields can be created by either selecting one of the seven types of fields from the Data Fields submenu in the Insert menu or by clicking on the various data field icons in the toolbar This brings up the data Field Properties dialog box for the appropriate data field type Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 361 EXOR Tech note For most data fields it is possible to specify the size and style of the data field as well as the controller reference location Depending upon the type of data field it may be possible to specify the data format the range and whether not to apply scaling to the data Designer uses placeholders to indicate the presence of data fields on a project page These placeholders include Data Field Type Placeholder A s Numeric s ASCII AA A number of examples ar
221. ct it to be entered in the Bitmap box The Color list box allows for selection of the desired background color Border Check the box to include a border Allows you to specify the color of the border of the keypad 4 8 117 Panel Panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 316 Predefined models Grid Size wu f pix Width Height f 6 pix Height 480 pix 640 Cancel Apply Help Options on the Panel tab allow you to set the type of panel model or the panel size and the grid size Predefined Models Lets you specify the display type of the panel to which the keypad will be downloaded This is especially useful when absolute coordinates are used to place the overlapping keypad Panel Size This can be used to set the dimensions of the UniOP panel when the Predefined models option is not defined Specify the panel width and height in pixels Grid Size Specifies the character grid size in pixels of the panel where the keypad will be downloaded Correct values for the grid size can be derived from Designer by selecting one character and reading the pixel size of the selected area in the Designer Status Bar 4 8 118 SSFDC SSFDC files ES Keyboard Mu Seyboard Delete Decimal with Background Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 317 EXOR Tech note When the UniOP panel is in Configuration Mode selecting SSFDC from the Edit menu within the Keypad Designer softw
222. ction 3D Round Ce Momentary Maintained WB Rectangle C On C Off 3D Rectangle B E windows Liin a Custom Ref DB10 DWO E Disable Cyclic Refresh Cancel Help The General tab of the Push Button Properties dialog box allows you to select the style of push button the push action and the button reference location 4 4 113 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include round and rectangular buttons whether flat or 3D It is also possible to insert a Windows button a touch cell with a look similar to the standard buttons you find in a typical Windows application or to create and insert a Custom button Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab 4 4 114 Push Action The Push Action section allows you to select the action of the touch cell button The different radio buttons within this group box represent the attribute that the touch cell will have whenever it is pressed Note The press indicator can be used with touch cells that have graphics associated with them however attributes can best be seen on touch cells that are not associated with graphics Note When Off is selected as the push action there will be no attribute associated with the touch cell when it is pressed You will not be able to tell when the key has been pressed Therefore this option should be used only when there are graphics associated w
223. ctionaries 7 9 3 Tag Dictionaries A tag dictionary is a database of file format mdb These databases may be imported to or exported from Designer The file to be used as the project tag dictionary is set under Project Configure Tag Dictionaries This is also where you can set the Enable Tags checkbox Click on the button to select the location of the tag database file of choice Tag dictionaries are tied to controller brands and models If you do not have a tag dictionary the Tag Editor in the Tools menu allows you to create one A tag dictionary is associated with each project and defines the model and attributes of the PLC You can select a dictionary for your project when you enable the tag feature in the project for the first time You can create multiple tag dictionaries inside a tag database and add tags to each dictionary Each dictionary is configured for a specific PLC controller and model name Each project is assigned to a dictionary You can create multiple dictionaries in a database in order to support a project that has a PLC Network and or UniNET Network To be able to use tags for a project that supports the UniNET PLC Network at least one dictionary must exist in the database for each of the nodes in the network Note If a project supports a UniNET PLC network each UniNET node PLC Node must be tied to a tag Dictionary in the database You will be required to assign a tag dictionary for all the nodes during t
224. cursor to define the area in which the message field is to be placed Once the message field is created the Text Message Properties dialog box will appear Text Message Properties 338 2 x General Text Messages Attributes Style Format E Ge Signed Unsigned Access ReadOnly Read write Size Width 30 Height H Reference Ge PLC Variable Recipe Index DB10 Dwo E Cancel A number of items can be configured from this dialog box These include Style Field dimensions Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 78 E AS D BR Tech note Reference configuration Text properties and Messages An external small window allows to Preview the Message 4 4 41 Preview preview MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM The message field is represented by M s in the panel 4 4 42 General 4 4 43 General tab Text Message Properties ie 3 2lsl General Text Messages Attributes Style Format EX Signed Unsigned Access ReadOnly Read Write Size Width a Height fi Reference PLC Variable Recipe Index DB10 Dwo Ml OK Cancel Apply Help __ Caneel e The Style and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific These areas are used to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data The Reference area is controller specific Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 79 EXOR Tech not
225. d Custom If Custom is selected then a Column value may be entered Argument Selecting the field type Label activates the Argument entry box where the label text may be inserted Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 234 E AS DR Tech note 4 6 178 Footer 4 6 179 Footer General Header Footer Advanced Height 2 Fields El Reports Report 1 Field Type Page Number y Add _Delete Row 2 Col 7 Align Right 7 Argument The structure of the header and the footer are the same The header and footer both remain consistent throughout the report i e the header on page 1 of a report will be the same header that appears on page 9 of a report It is possible to define the height of the header and the footer Several predefined fields can be inserted into a header or footer such as the time and date the page number the report name and a label which allows the user to enter static text It is also possible to specify where the fields are inserted and how they are positioned 4 6 180 Height The height in inches of the header or footer 4 6 181 Fields Fields The list of fields to be included in the header or footer such as the time and date the page number the report name or a label which lets you enter static text To add a field to the list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 235 EXOR Tech note select an entry
226. d the memory location that has its status shown on the face of the button 4 4 124 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include round and rectangular buttons whether flat or 3D It is also possible to insert a Windows button a touch cell with a look similar to the standard buttons you find in a typical Windows application or to create and insert a Custom button Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab 4 4 125 Push Action The Push Action section allows you to select the action of the touch cell button The different radio buttons within this group box represent the attribute that the touch cell will have whenever it is pressed Note The press indicator can be used with touch cells that have graphics associated with them however attributes can best be seen on touch cells that are not associated with graphics Note When Off is selected as the push action there will be no attribute associated with the touch cell when it is pressed You will not be able to tell when the key has been pressed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 125 E AS D BR Tech note Therefore this option should be used only when there are graphics associated with a touch cell 4 4 126 Button The memory location that the illuminated push button affects when it is pressed can be set up in the Button section The Ref entry box shows the c
227. d the project from the panel onto a computer the password is requested If the password entered matches the one that was defined in the project file the upload operation will be performed properly However if a password is entered that doesn t match the one that was specified in the project file the panel will not start the upload process Note Panels must contain firmware version 4 10 or later to use this feature UniOP panels have eight different levels of passwords enabling supervisors to restrict the amount of control an operator has over the functionality of the panel The person having the highest level password has access to all of the panel functions This is done by default so as to allow at least one person the ability to change the project file contained within the panel If a checkbox is selected the panel user will have access to the respective area providing the correct password is entered If an incorrect password is entered asterisks will be displayed on the panel and the previous valid password is lost An example is provided Available password options include CONF TIME ACK PRINT PAGE ALOGI ALOGO and Data entry enable 4 6 203 CONF Access to Configuration Mode In this mode you may choose to alter the project file and re download it from the PC 4 6 204 TIME Access to the Time amp Date Mode In this mode you may change the time and date information that is stored within the panel Tn
228. data as well as time and date information which is stored in RAM 7 7 16 S7 Alarm Active Bit S7 of the Panel Status Word is set when at least one alarm is active Bit S7 is reset when all alarm bits are reset to zero 7 7 17 S8 Unacknowledged Alarm Active Bit S8 of the Panel Status Word is set whenever there is at least one active alarm that requires acknowledgment It is reset when all alarms have been acknowledged Note Enabling the Operator ACK Required attribute when creating alarm messages guarantees that bit S8 will remain set until the alarm is acknowledged It does not guarantee that the bit associated with the alarm in the RDA will remain set Those alarm bits are controlled by application logic not by the panel 7 7 18 S13 Recipe Upload in Progress Bit S13 is set whenever a recipe is being uploaded from the controller into the panel It is reset whenever the upload process is complete 7 7 19 S12 Recipe and event backup in progress The S12 bit of the RDA area is used to communicate to the controller when a backup operation to flash memory is in process The UniOP will set this bit to 1 just before the backup operation begins When the backup operation is complete UniOP will set this bit to 0 Recipe Event Backup 0 Standby 1 Backup operation in progress Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 428 EXOR Tech note 7 7 20 S14 Recipe Download in Progress Bit S14 is set whenever a recipe is being download
229. data item is displayed at the far left hand side of the row enabling you to tell which row is associated with which recipe data item Each column is associated with a particular parameter set of the recipe Each parameter set is identified by a number The first column corresponds to parameter set 1 the second column to parameter set 2 and so on 7 8 5 Recipes and Control Variables 7 8 6 Recipes and Control Variables Control variables offer a means of controlling and monitoring the Recipes Control variables are special data fields that are stored in the UniOP panel memory You can control certain operations of the panel by modifying the values held in these internal variables There are six types of control variables that affect recipes Recipe File Status Recipe Parameter Set Selection Recipe Action Data Entry Status Data Entry Field Number Recipe Page for Selection and Recipe Key Control variables can be added to the project in the same way as other data fields Control variable data fields can be added to a page from the Data Fields submenu under the Insert menu From the Data Fields submenu select either Numeric ASCIl Bargraph or Message In the Properties dialog box set the Reference type as Variable Click the button to set Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 435 EXOR Tech note the reference location data type and format page number etc in the Data Field Properties dialog box 7 8 7 Recipe File
230. date information from the panel s Real Time Clock a two byte Panel Status Word and a Current Page Register 7 7 6 Real Time Clock The real time clock contains the time and date information 7 7 7 Panel Status Word 7 7 8 Panel Status Word The panel sets and resets bits SO S8 and S13 S15 in the Panel Status Word to indicate its current status Your application logic can monitor these bits to determine how and when it should interact with the panel The following table has a brief description of each status bit Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 426 EXOR Tech note 13 Recipe upload in progress Recipe download in progress Recipe file status 7 7 9 SO Link Status Monitor Flag Bit SO in the Panel Status Word can be used by the controller to monitor the communication status between the panel and the controller The value of this bit is changed by the panel with a cycle time of approximately one second If a transition is not detected within one second the controller should consider that the panel is either not connected or not operating properly Note If the cycle time of the controller program is longer than one second or if there are numerous communication errors one transition of the Link Status flag can go undetected 7 7 10 S1 Data Entry Active Bit S1 is set whenever the panel is in Data Entry Mode 7 7 11 S2 Printing in Progress Bit S2 is set whenever the panel is in the course of sending data
231. dditional curves of the same sampling method to that particular trend viewer 4 4 174 Appearance 4 4 175 Appearance For any curve you can choose the appearance properties such as Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 149 E AS UH Tech note Line Type Line Style Line Size Line Color 4 4 176 Type Curve type Can be Line Step or Filled bar graph 4 4 177 Style Curve style Can be Solid Dotted Dashed Dash Dot or Dash Dot Dot Note The style type is applicable only when curve is line type 4 4 178 Size Curve size Can be Thin Medium or Thick 4 4 179 Color Curve color The basic 16 colors are supported 4 4 180 Cursor 4 4 181 Cursor This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the Y axis The Y Cursor can be activated and the Y Axis Minimum and Maximum values can be set Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor 4 4 182 Y Cursor This variable can be used to display the value of the curve at a point on the Y axis Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor 4 4 183 Y Axis Minimum The minimum value of the defined Y axis To the right of the dialog box you can define the default value Y axis range that will be used when the trend viewer is displayed If you put this internal panel control variable on the UniOP as a read write field its value can be modified on line allowing you to dynamically change the Y axis range Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007
232. de and enter the new address manually Once the IP address has been defined manually it will be persistent and will be maintained even when the power is cycled The only way to reset the manual definition and return to DHCP is to enter the IP address 0 0 0 0 7 12 9 Example 2 A brand new panel with Ethernet interface is connected to a network that has no DHCP server While the panel is in Configuration Mode it will show the on the display the IP address 0 0 0 0 Start Designer and recall the Pick Panel dialog box The Pick Panel dialog box will show one panel in the list the Physical Address will be present but there will be no IP Address Select Change IP Address Properties and enter a valid IP Address The new address will be define in the panel when you will press the confirmation button Once the IP address has been defined by Designer it will be persistent and will be maintained even when the power is cycled The only way to reset the manual definition and return to DHCP is to enter the IP address 0 0 0 0 Note Ethernet connectivity requires panel firmware V5 30 or greater and Designer 6 04 or above Ethernet connectivity is NOT supported for units with firmware type 33 and 37 7 12 10 Selecting Ethernet Communication in Designer To select Ethernet communication in Designer select Transfer Options and choose Ethernet Port as shown in the figure below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 479 EXOR Tech note
233. dialog box that lets you choose the language in which you wish to work The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cell Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked otherwise
234. displayed Note The number of trends that can be sampled in the background is limited Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 253 E SD BR Tech note 4 6 242 All Pages The trend buffer will be sampled regardless of what page is being displayed 4 6 243 Current Page The trend buffer will be sampled only when the page containing the trend associated with the trend buffer is displayed 4 6 244 On Page The trend buffer will be sampled only when the identified page is displayed 4 6 245 Size Indicate the buffer size e the number of samples that will be kept during the background sampling Note When a trend is sampled in the background All Pages the sample size reflects the number of old samples that will be shown when the page that contains the trend associated with the trend buffer is displayed When a trend is sampled in real time Current Page you will never see any old samples because sampling begins when the page that contains the trend is displayed In this configuration the sample size is useful only when using the macros to scroll the trend along the X axis If these macros will not be used you can save UniOP memory by setting the sample size to 1 4 6 246 Reference 4 6 247 Reference The variable to be sampled This can be a PLC variable or an internal UniOP control variable You can scale this variable if desired 4 6 248 PLC If the variable to be sampled is a PLC variable click on the b
235. ditor includes the File menu the Edit menu the Font menu the Fill menu the Row menu the Column menu the Width menu the Options menu and the Help menu 4 8 68 File Menu 4 8 69 File Menu The Font Editor File menu contains familiar Windows type commands such as Open Save Save As and Exit Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 297 E AS DR Tech note In addition the command Install View installed Panel Fonts lets you view Panel Display Types and corresponding Installed Fonts with the font width and height The Install Font button lets you select the display panels with which this font is to be used The font will then be listed in the Installed Fonts box The Remove Font button lets you delete the currently highlighted font from the Installed Fonts list An example of saving and installing a new font is available 4 8 70 Open File name Folders OK RES c progra 2 exor designer Cancel CP2 lt 20 FON EG_PNEW FON Ee Meed k ELI6NEW FON er Fi etwor EL16x40 FON mee ERL25x80 FON E Graphics FUTABA FON Cg Panels LCDEX8G FON rel SHIG4015 FON z C Samples g List files of type Drives Panel font c Local Disk v This familiar Windows box allows you to choose a file to open in the Font Editor Font files are normally in the format fon 4 8 71 Save To save a project select Save from the File menu The cursor may be momentarily replaced with an hour
236. e 4 4 44 Style Message is the only style choice available 4 4 45 Size These entry boxes define the size of the message field The width and height of the field is equivalent to the maximum number of characters the message field can contain Note The field width height cannot exceed the width height of remaining panel from the current cursor row column position Note Size is adjusted depending on the current font size Double font takes twice the width height of regular font size etc 4 4 46 Reference The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used and is dependent upon the type of controller selected The field data type data format and address reference are all configured in this area Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be configurable Reference choices for message data fields include PLC Variable Recipe and Index 4 4 47 Text tab Numeric Field Properties E Be 2lsl General Text Range Scaling Attributes Cancel Apply Help The Text tab allows you to set the font size and color and the background color and transparency of a data item Designer will not let you select a size that is too large to be displayed in the designated area If Transparent is selected then text background colors are not available Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 80 EXOR Tech note 4 4 48 Messages 4 4 49 Messages tab Text Message Properties
237. e When using the GENERIC selection you must specify all the panel definitions Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 196 4 6 25 Panel Memory Appropriate memory choices for the specified Panel Model are listed Select the amount of memory available in the panel 4 6 26 Firmware Version Choose the appropriate version of the panel firmware If you have a panel with a newer firmware version that is not yet defined inside the Designer package please select the highest Designer firmware version Selecting the All firmware version will enable only the basic panel capabilities that are supported with all panel firmware versions 4 6 27 Preview The Preview area shows a typical panel screen for the selected Panel Model 4 6 28 Settings 4 6 29 Settings Panel Model Settings External Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Y Graphics Memory Type SSFDC Touch Screen Se z ZE Project Memory 512K C Disable Buzzer Trend buffers D 2K a Y Enhanced Fonts E e Recipe Backup Recipe Size 32 KByte Events Backup Available Alarms 1024 _ Disable Battery LED Y Ausiliary Port Event List Size 1024 Y PC Printer Port Colors 256 Colors y Multi Language Report Printout Time Format 24 Hour D Y 3D Objects R sl Date Format DAMM DI Cancel Help The Settings tab shows the capabilities of the selected model Some capabilities are fixed and cannot be changed by the user Others have
238. e current cursor row column position Note Size is adjusted depending on the current font size Double font takes twice the width height of regular font size etc 4 4 14 Reference Reference The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used and is dependent upon the type of controller selected The field data type data format and address reference are all configured in this area Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be configurable Numeric Field Properties E 21x General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Signed C Unsigned Fixed point Placement o Size Width 33 Height fi Reference PLC Variable Recipe Index DB10 Dw0 E OK Cancel Apply Help CIA Reference choices for numeric data fields include PLC Variable Recipe and Index Index references are not available for ASCII data fields Data Field Properties This feature can be accessed by selecting the button whenever a PLC Variable or Recipe reference is set If Index is selected a similar box named Indirect Addressing Fields appears The contents of the Data Field Properties dialog box will vary depending upon the type of controller being used and the type of reference specified Elements to be configured may include the File or Data Type the Data Format File or Page Number Element Offset and Left Ri
239. e Controller 4 6 3 Configure Controller Designer supports many different controller manufacturer types Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 190 IN XOR Tech note Configure Controllers lt O 2 x Controller Mode o External controller only C Internal controller only Cancel Internal External controllers Help WI Controller 1 DEMO Controller Bi By selecting Configure Controller from the Project menu or by clicking on the Configure Controller icon on the toolbar or by pressing the Ctrl Alt P keys you can access the Configure Controllers dialog box and select the controller mode and the brand of controller with which you will be working You can also enable double protocol if desired Note Designer uses the current controller setup and applies this setting to all subsequent projects until changed 4 6 4 Controller Mode Indicate whether external internal or both internal and external controllers will be used Note The appropriate choices for your system are activated during system initialization 4 6 5 Enable Double Protocol A single UniOP panel can communicate with Controllers simultaneously using different communication protocols When configuring the UniOP to communicate with controllers simultaneously using two different communication protocols double protocol configuration distinction must be made between the first communication driver used to communicate using the first
240. e Insert menu gives you the means to easily place text and or objects onto a project page Some of these objects such as numeric fields or bar graphs display information from the controller Other objects such as the various types of touch cells allow a panel user to interact with the panel Text Bitmap Data Fields Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 41 EXOR Tech note Touch Cells Shapes Trend Window Meter Instrument Trend Time Field Recipe Menu Special Characters Import Bitmap Graphics 4 4 2 Text To insert a Text Field either click on the Text icon in the toolbar or select Text from the Insert menu Use the cursor to specify the location of the text box Once a text box is created click to place the cursor inside the text box and type the text that is to be inserted Note The text uses the font selected in the Select Font dialog box This dialog box can be accessed by clicking on the Font icon in the toolbar or by selecting Edit Fonts Panel Font The font must be specified before the text is created If the font is too large for the selected area Designer will not allow the text to be entered To edit a text field select the field by left clicking on it then right click on the text field to bring up an edit menu for the text field Text can be cut copied or pasted edited foreground and background colors can be set or text can be resized 4 4 3 Bitmap To insert a custom bitmap image either c
241. e Mates tte Asc 364 NA eei e 364 PEO TOS at 427 428 429 Project Conf SUNS oirre ninini 460 A Eege ineine 359 Memory Locaton 270 A Eed gel 270 Projet dsidenialcale 346 A deet Eege 359 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual e 460 Project File A tere Ae EE AE 414 415 SENAT T e E EENS tasers 360 Project D 360 Project E 360 Project E 414 Project File sc isiiii cs cece naticiestccntieasantieances 414 Project TE 415 Project Memor 199 Project Menn stccratsccdevatssccssaasbeased bugesrassnes 190 Project Cr ege eu i ege 352 Project Upload ioocioincicniciiciiiee da 361 Properties EE 180 Protocol Memory Location 270 Protocol iia lali 229 Eeotopol egestadeee attert ere casitas 270 Push Acton 119 125 Push Button eicere norane ornen 117 Push Button Touch Cell Examnple 122 Q Quick Start Tutorial cooooocnnnnnccnnnononcnononnns 3 Quick Start Tutorial Introduction 2 R A pinnana ii ea 69 Range tab unimarc 68 76 RDA oaeee ace peace 423 RDA Reference A 220 Read Cycle iaicicsssessissetaisiendeeisiveslstive 223 375 Read Modesto nada si 223 Real Time Clock comisionista ers 426 Recent Piles accionaria encinas 290 Recipe Action soren iiinis 53 438 Recipe BacKUp iionaciiradcn riders 199 Recipe Configuration 184 Recipe Data Fields Jaseri enaere aeneis 434 Recipe Data Fields AA 434 Recipe Event Backup 57 Recipe Examples ooooonoconncnnoconoconocnconncnanannss 449 Recipe File Status
242. e Print command in the File menu refers to printing from the Designer software whereas the print items in the Project menu are used to set up print functionality in the UniOP panels Selecting Print from the File menu or pressing the Ctrl P keys brings up the Print Setup dialog box from which the Designer project information may be printed 4 1 8 Print Preview Selecting Print Preview from the File menu brings up the Print Setup dialog box from which the Designer project information may be previewed for printing 4 1 9 Designer Print Setup Designer contains a printing routine for printing project file information This module is able to print graphical previews of the project pages variable cross references and much more Selecting File Print or File Print Preview will bring up the following dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 18 EXOR Tech note Designer Print Setup x Bi oo A Report template ae Report data sets a Panel Pages Range Project Information Project Summary E Panel display preview Display Preview C Pages f Cancel E E Panel Key Macros All pages Pictures Graphics Components IV Without page breaks E paa ici BS Iw Suppress all cover pages Y Recipes Global Key Macros IV Hide empty tables Trend Buffers IV Save changes on exit Multipage Recipes Data Transfer Reserved Data Area fe EES gt Select all Print or Print Preview
243. e Stats 429 ER ne 427 S3 Printer Status onoconccnncninononcconnanennnannncnnno 427 NR 427 S5 Attempt Access Protected Function o occ 428 SD eh E 428 S6 Battery LOW wc ccccesesscceetsessssessesseesseeesees 428 S7 Alarm Active ccccsccssestsesssessscesseeeresees 428 S8 Unacknowledged Alarm Active 428 Samples Methode oesstuteuEuree d se be shears 463 o A 255 Samples iii laicas 152 Samples isc anita 255 Samples iii 463 SIVE eege geet d EE dE 17 Saving emt eregteeeeeg eeekebt Ee dee 305 Project File viciosas 360 506 A TA 298 A csetssoh eeyinesieisianste 305 TE 360 Scaling DAA RN 71 o E TO 70 76 AAA LATE ge 70 Scaling o need 71 A TT 71 CAME egene eege tides 76 A E E E 160 e 184 Scroll DirectiON ooonnocnnocnnocinmmmmmmssmess 152 Second ClieMt oooconnccnnccnnccnnocinnncnananananancnnro 415 H EE 25 Select Controller ooooonncnnncnnccnoncconnconncnanannss 193 Select Language oooonccnnccnnocconncnnncnnncnnnconnnonanos 84 Selecting Ethernet Communication 479 A egene eggebe iere 360 EE geg dee Eed e 360 AA degen Ee 479 Selection Recipe Pages iiccnvessscevtessccevesesiesees 55 440 KT EE 55 Select iros ee 440 Selector Switch oooooooconocococcconcconncnananananns 130 Selector Switch Touch Cell Example 134 SENA DOS miii 267 A pni iaslensasea ye a Eaa 390 414 Set As Detalla ninas 247 Set As Recipe Name cerere 186 Set Current Language eee ee eee
244. e Style Click on the button under PLC Reference to set the memory location in the Data Field Properties dialog box Click OK to return to the Attribute Properties dialog box Click OK 4 4 65 Dynamic Graphics 4 4 66 Dynamic Graphics Data Fields This feature lets you display graphics based upon a numeric value in the controller For example a user may want to display two graphics one when a blower is on and one when a pump is on Depending upon which machine is on the respective graphic will be displayed at a single screen location If neither machine is on then no graphic will be displayed In another scenario a user may wish to have a graphic appear at a different location on the screen depending upon which machine is on Examples of both situation 1 and situation 2 described above are given It is possible to position dynamic graphics fields over static background bitmaps to create animated images Transparent and three dimensional touch cells can be defined over static bitmap images To place a dynamic graphic over a static bitmap image import a static bitmap image into a project then create the dynamic graphic fields over the static bitmap Dynamic graphics may be inserted by either selecting Insert Data Fields Dynamic Graphics or by selecting the Dynamic Graphics icon from the toolbar Use the cursor to specify the location of the item Once the dynamic graphics field is created the Dynamic Graphics Properties dialo
245. e and date format that the panel will display identify the address of an Ethernet board if one is in use specify communication settings set the panel up for remote passthrough set time out periods and set panel upload protection if necessary Panel Model Panel Time Date Settings Passthrough Settings Miscellaneous Panel Settings 6 3 13 Panel Model If the correct panel model is not shown you can choose a different panel model from the Panel Setup dialog box on the Project menu From the Panel Model tab click on the down arrow located to the right of the Panel Model window A drop down list will appear that shows the available panels that can be selected Single click the left mouse button on the name of the panel that you will be using The page editor workspace will change in order to reflect the available screen area on the selected model Similarly you can change the specified panel memory and firmware if necessary 6 3 14 Panel Time Date Settings Click on the Settings tab in the Panel Setup dialog box to set the time and date formats Pick the format that you prefer to use in your project from the pull down lists 6 3 15 Passthrough Settings If you wish to be able to put your UniOP panel remotely into either Configuration Mode or Operation Mode via a modem under Mode on the Passthrough tab under Project Panel Setup click on the button for Remote Hardware passthrough Otherwise select Hardware passthrough In the Reques
246. e area blink 4 4 59 Dynamic Attributes If Dynamic is selected as the Style the screen attribute will be fixed to a value of a word or bit in the controller The address of the controller s memory location can be entered in the PLC Reference area If the attribute is referenced to a word the attribute will be dependent upon the three least significant bits in the controller s memory location Attribute ro Normal roid L it HO Pligg PO OT Reverse If the attribute is referenced to a bit there will be no attribute displayed when the bit has the value of 0 The blink attribute will be displayed whenever the bit has a value of 1 Note Keep in mind that not all attributes are supported on every panel 4 4 60 Color Attributes All color panels support a new type of dynamic attribute field that will allow the user to dynamically control the color of an area on the display The color attributes have been introduced as an extension to the existing monochrome dynamic attributes blink reverse and highlight Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 86 EXOR Tech note The word in the controller memory referenced by the dynamic attribute will be interpreted as shown in the table below Bit 0 1 2 Monochrome Attribute C this enables color attribute mode Bit 4 5 6 7 Bit 8 9 10 11 BO B3 Background color Bit 12 13 14 15 FO F3 Foreground color C is the bit that enables the color attribute mode The Co
247. e available to help you better understand the data field creation process Numeric Data Field Example ASCII Data Field Example Bargraph Example Message Field Example Attribute Example Dynamic Graphics Example 1 Dynamic Graphics Example 2 Time Data Field Example Date Data Field Example 6 8 Simple Touch Cells A touch cell allows a panel user to interact with the panel The user is able to touch a panel in an indicated position and receive a visual cue The various types of touch cells available and their functionality are Panel Key Button Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key i e Enter Panel keys represent all of the function keys numeric keys and arrow keys as well as the help key the clear key the enter key the key and the decimal point key An example of creating a panel key button is provided ASCII Key Button Used for creating a touch cell as an ASCII character An example of creating an ASCII key button is provided Push Button Used for creating a touch cell as a push button These push buttons mimic mechanical push buttons in that one logic value represents open contacts and another logic Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 362 E AS UR Tech note value represents closed contacts An example of creating a push button is provided Illuminated Push Button Used for creating a touch cell as an illuminated push button The only difference between an illuminated pushbutton and a pushbutto
248. e entire trend from the UniOP this value must be set to zero AND the value of Word 00 must be changed The address of the first PLC word Word 00 needs to be entered in the Reference field under Project Configure Trend Buffers The settings to initialize the PLC operation mode are Initialization Wworaoo fo Word 01 lt Buffer width in samples gt Word02_ In O Sampling loop Word Add samples 03 nn Word 02 Update the number of ready samples New trend Word 02 Set to 0 to invalidate the PLC trend buffer UniOP can continue to use and display the samples already displayed but it cannot display new samples Word Add new samples 03 nn Word 00 1 UniOP detects this change and erases the trend Word 02 Update the number of ready samples Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 466 EXOR Tech note 7 10 16 Layout From the Layout index tab of the Trend Window Properties dialog box you can define the main trend viewer properties such as the title colors border grid etc Options in the Title section define the visual appearance of the trend viewer window title Options in the Window section define the appearance of the trend viewer window 7 10 17 Internal Panel Control Variables Internal panel control variables associated with trending can be defined and used from the trend viewer Alphanumeric values of these variables can be displayed on the UniOP To access these variables it is neces
249. e frequency of updates and the Reference location may be specified 4 6 133 Update Cycle Specifies the average update cycle time used by the UniOP firmware to update the external controller memory area assigned to the input points This memory area can be specified in the Reference address Note The Update cycle time needs to be selected with care as the UniOP panel uses the same communication channel to update the local I O as it does for communication with the external controller If the Update cycle time is set to a value that is too small communication performance between the UniOP panel and the external controller could be sacrificed 4 6 134 Reference Specifies the starting address for copying the image of the input data Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box where more detailed PLC programmable logic controller information may be entered Note The panel I O feature requires a minimum offset between the starting addresses of the input and output area The difference between the starting addresses must be at least of 16 bytes The data format used to specify the initial address can be byte word or double word depending on the protocol 4 6 135 Output 4 6 136 Output The Output area allows you to specify the configuration parameters for the digital output points of the UIMO3 board Check the box to enable panel output The frequency of updates and the Reference location may be specified
250. e its IP address from a DHCP server if this is present in the network The panel will use the IP address assigned by the DHCP server unless another address has been defined using a method having higher priority than DHCP assignment The address assigned by DHCP is persistent that is once the IP address has been assigned it will be used by the panel even id the DHCP server is no longer present in the network An IP address assigned by DHCP can be canceled either defining an address using a method that has higher priority 7 12 6 Definition of IP Address in the Project File You can define the IP address of the panel in the project file To define the IP address open Panel Setup and select the External Devices tab The Ethernet Settings dialog box is shown in the figure below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 477 E AS DR Tech note Ethernet Settings ax IP Address 192 168 0 75 Cancel Subnet Mask 255 255 259 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Note that the IP address defined in the project file will be active only when the panel is in Operation Mode When the panel will switch to Configuration Mode it may change its IP address depending on previous settings IP Address The current IP address of the panel You can enter here an IP address in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255 Subnet Mask It is a number in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number with value either O or 2
251. e mailbox When the panel detects that the controller has written data in the mailbox it interprets the data as a numeric code for a required command If the panel recognizes the command it immediately executes it If the command requires a response from the panel then the panel places the response back into the mailbox itself Further information on the Interlock Mailbox is provided Note The Interlock Mailbox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from the controller Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 222 E AS UR Tech note 4 6 125 Enable To enable the Interlock Mailbox select the Interlock Mailbox tab from the Panel Controller Interface dialog box under the Project menu The Mailbox is disabled by default To enable it simply mark the checkbox entitled Enable 4 6 126 Read Modes The Mailbox can be enabled in one of two ways Read in cycles Read in cycles if PCW PLC Control Word flag is set If the Mailbox is read in cycles you may specify a read cycle time The faster the read cycle time the more often the Mailbox gets checked however the slower the rest of the system will become Or you may set the Mailbox up such that it is only read when bit C15 in the PLC programmable logic controller Control Word is set The purpose of this mode is to reduce the overhead of the communication time when there is no need for the controller to send commands to the panel 4 6 127 Read Cycle The
252. e of either network type Single Server Multiple Clients or Multiple Server Multiple Clients is selected all the UniOP network server nodes will inherit the current configuration of the project In other words if the project in which the network is being set up is currently configured for single protocol all the UniOP node servers in the UniNET network will be configured to use only this protocol If the project is configured for double protocol all the UniOP node servers will be configured to use both protocols It is important to remember the following rules for serial drivers The first driver always communicates with the controllers over the PLC port The second driver always communicates with the controllers over the PC Printer port Of course if any of the protocols is a non serial protocol its driver will use the AUX port instead There are a few hardware restrictions when two communication protocols are used If the communication driver is using both serial communication ports the PLC and the PC Printer port it cannot be used in multi protocol configurations If two communication drivers are both serial there will be no ports left to connect the serial UniNET network You can still use the Ethernet based UniNET of course Since only one communication module can be plugged into the panel a combination of two communication drivers each requiring such a module cannot be supported As the Ethernet protocol is supported
253. e project Each line contains a string identifier not to be modified then the string value for each one of the different languages supported by the project This way it is possible to modify the strings stored in a given project ANSI Unicode Encoding is supported Using Unicode feature characters of different languages can be added in the projects page by editing the string value of the exported file Restrictions Unicode character is defined using two bytes this means we can have until 65 536 different characters UniOP panel instead can manage 256 characters code Using the Unicode feature you have the possibility to mapping a subset of 256 Unicode characters inside the UniOP panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 29 EXOR Tech note Typical application To enable Unicode support it is necessary modify the panel font file to have some Unicode characters inside For example you can use ANSI characters inside the first 128 bytes and Russian Unicode characters inside the other 128 bytes Then you have to configure the new 2unicode parameter inside the display32 ini file to define the ANSI code 256 lt gt UniCode 65 536 character correspondence Example is shown below RUSSO Font BargraphStart 226 BoxChars 218 191 192 217 196 179 196 179 180 194 193 201 187 200 188 205 186 205 1 86 0 0 0 BigCharStart 128 Linefeed 127 2Unicode 0x8F 0x0444 0x90 0x0438 0x91 0x0441 0x92 0x0432 Note Modifying the s
254. e the Text tab controls the appearance of the text Apply Note In order to use the Recipe Menu each Recipe Parameter Set must be given a name This is done by adding a recipe data field with an ASCII display format on the page where the recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item values in the Recipe Configuration box with an ASCII name for each parameter set This ASCII field is called a Recipe Name field This field is not a field type name it only describes the field s purpose A set of keyboard macro commands support recipe menus The Go To Recipe Menu macro jumps to a specified page and sets the value of the Recipe Page For Selection The Scroll Recipe Menu macro is used to move the selection in the recipe menu field This is the way that a new recipe parameter set name is chosen from the list The Confirm Recipe Menu Selection macro changes the current recipe parameter set to the one selected in the recipe menu field Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 172 E AS DR Tech note Note If a control variable data item set as Recipe Page For Selection contains the page number of a page without a Recipe Name field defined the recipe menu field will display asterisks An example of adding a recipe menu field is provided 4 4 298 General 4 4 299 General Recipe Menu Properties E 2 x General Text Attributes Style Attributes Tl Blink V Reverse TT Highlight Size Width
255. eaaE SE EER EaR EAEE 355 Graphical Svmbols eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 394 501 A nanesiete 344 468 Graphics Library s 35 470 Grid DMAP E 335 Grid isi ceed ecto ieee iar dice ieee axe 335 GIGS A 335 A ariii 317 H Hang Up iscitanconnaitdo stella 278 Hani UPa ai 273 Hard Ware mission dida 204 Header iii a tos 233 Heightsin 233 235 Help E E 355 Heli 355 Help Men gegen ac 296 Horizontal Align oooonoonnncnnnnnnoccnoccnoncnonccnncnns 321 Horizontal Position oconconccnnncnnccnnoncnancnnnoon 316 I Illuminated Push Button oe eee 123 Illuminated Push Button Example 129 A a eanu isien as iii 99 ri 214 Import Bitmap Graphics ooonoocnocnnoconocaconanos 175 Import Bitmap Graphics Example 177 Import Strings ooocoocccnoccnoncnonononanonaconacanccnnnannos 23 IMPpoOrt KG 282 Import Tags Step 282 283 284 285 A adele ites 62 Indexed Addressing Example ooonccnnnnnnc 63 Indicator Light corista timida 135 Indicator Light Touch Cell Example 139 Indirect Addressing Fields oooonccnnncninnc 62 Initial Director 332 A e e ENN 225 Insert Page Obiects cee eeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeenees 360 Recipe Data Fields eee 434 AP asus cnpeesdesenceanteeeeearsnere 247 A E eg eN 360 iii diran cita 434 Insert Mensies sos inei essesi 41 AA ege 182 OS AAA eEEEKNEE eg 9 Installing Network Cable 404 New Panel Ponts 417 Installing ue sedsint Beashseasdieleeiiiendiien 404 AA sit c
256. eate a custom button An indicator light touch cell example is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 136 EXOR Tech note 4 4 143 General 4 4 144 General Indicator Light Properties E 2 xi General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action 3D Round States 2 HB Rectangle 3D Rectangle 1 2 wv Custom Color O E Assign Ref DB10 DWO E Cancel Help The General tab of the Indicator Light Properties dialog box lets you select the style of panel button the number of states and the memory location for each state 4 4 145 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include round and rectangular buttons whether flat or 3D It is also possible to insert a Custom button Selecting the Custom style activates the Custom tab 4 4 146 Action In the Action section you can set the number of states The minimum number of states is two 2 and the maximum number of states is four 4 You can also define the color scheme for each state Note that the indicator light can be configured to handle up to four 4 different states A different color can be assigned to each state in order to reflect the contents of the memory location in the controller 4 4 147 Assign You can also configure which memory location in the controller is reflected by each state of the indicator light The
257. eate many different parameter sets within a single recipe Depending upon the panel model there can be up to 1024 parameter sets of a single recipe Not only is a block of memory in the panel reserved for every recipe separate blocks of memory are also reserved for each of the parameter sets contained within a particular recipe All the parameter sets of a particular recipe always contain the same recipe data items but the values of these recipe data items vary between the different parameter sets These different recipe parameter sets can control different processes One set may be used to configure the controller to control the production of 2 mm screws another set may be used to configure the controller to control the production of 5 mm screws and yet another to control the production of 7 mm screws Each set of parameters is stored in a different parameter set within the same recipe Note The default values entered for a particular recipe parameter set item are in the format that was specified in the Field Properties dialog box for that data item For example if a numerical format of hexadecimal was entered in the data Field Properties dialog box for a recipe data field then all the values entered in the Recipe Configuration dialog box for that recipe data field would also be in hexadecimal If you specify a numeric data format of hexadecimal base 16 for a recipe data item and then enter a value of 10 in the Recipe Configuration dialog box t
258. eature when UniOP goes back to Operation Mode if a valid list is stored in Flash this is retrieved and copied to RAM if the Flash memory does not contain any valid data the Event list will be empty The use of the Clear Event List macro commands erases the content of the Event list stored in RAM and in Flash memory Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 448 EXOR Tech note 7 8 34 Recipe Example 7 8 35 Recipe Examples Two examples are provided to experiment with recipes One is a straightforward example of defining and downloading a simple recipe while the other uses a more complex configuration 7 8 36 Simple Recipe Example It is not necessary to create a complex project to try recipes This example will illustrate how to define a very simple recipe Make sure that the panel is in Configuration Mode Connect the panel to the PC and the controller using the correct cables Start the Designer software Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu or by clicking on the New icon on the toolbar Name the new file and click OK Click on the page and insert text PLC Data Recipe Temperature and Pressure to resemble the figure below Designer testagain3 dpr Page 1 Of x DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help lej sl Den BA fer AQQ ZuNBHRKOG d m Pei G8 aaa Jl testagain3 Eq Pages m
259. ecipe Menu dialog box appears Adjust the Width and Height of the Recipe Menu field if necessary Choose the attribute combination blink highlight and or reverse for indicating the selected recipe name Check Show Record Numbers if you want to show the record number which is just the parameter set number along with the recipe name Click on the OK button Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 453 EXOR Tech note Select Project Keyboard Macro Editor or click on the Keyboard Macro Editor icon From the Page 1 tab select the command Scroll recipe menu Specify the step size as 1 in the Scroll recipe menu dialog box Select the command Confirm recipe menu selection Click OK Go back to Page 2 the first page that you created From Page 2 select Project Keyboard Macro Editor or click on the Keyboard Macro Editor icon Repeat steps 32 and 33 for Parameter sets 2 3 and 4 Click OK Make sure that the panel is in Configuration Mode Download the project to the panel by pressing the F2 key on the computer keyboard by selecting the Download icon on the toolbar or by choosing Download from the Transfers menu When the download is finished the panel will go into Operation Mode The variables represent the content of the first recipe parameter set once the F1 key is pressed Press the F1 key to make the panel start downloading the current recipe parameter set which is parameter set 1 After a few seconds
260. ect on a page to select it then right click to activate the right click menu for that item or object Menus are customized for the particular item or object selected but common menu items include Cut The Cut command removes the selected item from the current page and places it on the Windows clipboard This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl X keys Copy The Copy command makes a copy of the selected item from the current page and places it on the Windows clipboard This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl C keys Paste The Paste command places items from the Windows clipboard onto the current page at the current position of the cursor This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl V keys Select Covered Object If one object is on top of another this command selects the object underneath This is handy if it is difficult to left click on the bottom item to select it Order Sets the position of an object in relation to other objects that are covering it and or covered by it Align If there are two or more currently selected objects items this command allows to align them Group Ungroup If there are two or more currently selected objects items these command allow to respectively group un group them Group will always be created in the current layer The current layer name is always displayed in the edit control part of the active layer combo box Edit Brings up the Bitmap
261. ed from the panel into the controller It is reset whenever the download process is complete 7 7 21 S15 Recipe File Status Bit S15 displays the Recipe File Status A 0 indicates that the recipes contain valid data A 1 indicates that the recipe data is corrupt or still contains the default values defined in the project file 7 7 22 Current Page Register The panel writes the number of the currently displayed page into the CP register whenever the panel is in Page mode or Data Entry Mode In all other modes a zero is written into this register indicating that page data is not currently being displayed Note Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format depending on the controller being used 7 7 23 Controller Update Area 7 7 24 Controller Update Area The Controller Update Area allows the controller to access and control certain aspects of the panel All front panel LED s can be controlled from this area to provide feedback to the operator The controller may also request a specific page to be displayed by writing the appropriate value into the Page Request Register The Controller Control Word allows the controller to request the printing of a page disable data entry select an alarm mode or enable the mailbox function All panels include a standard set of dedicated indicators that allow the user to monitor the status of the panel Along with these dedicated indicators certain models include a subset of user defined
262. ed to the value of DB10 DW1 Enter the address DB10 DW1 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 64 EXOR Tech note Click on entry 1 in the Selector list The memory location for entry 1 changes to DB10 DW1 To display the temperature in stage 3 enter the address DB10 DW2 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Click on entry 2 in the Selector list The memory location for entry 2 changes to DB10 DW2 The dialog box will resemble that shown below Indirect Addressing Fields X Selector DB10 Dat _ Reference S o DB10Dw0 g 1 DBIODW1 Data Type DB Offset Address pasea fo Bj pmo Data Format Left Right Byte WORD Bin zl tl gee Walt Count 3 4 Cancel Help Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where Is now appears under the Temp label placeholders Creating the Pressure Indexed Field Next we need to create a field on the screen where the pressure information for the process can be displayed Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed below the Pressure label The Numeric Field Properties box appears Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 4 since the maximum value of this field is 999
263. eeeeeeee 386 Set Parameter Set Number cece 379 Set Recipe Transfer Drot 380 SEERTC usina tra ibi get 384 Setting Win strabist Lares dieionc rai n rg 412 421 459 SOI reci ir 412 O tico calidad 421 E E 459 Settings Listones assi 198 e DEE 356 357 OPS intra dee 146 Sharpei eiiie errei teienei iieiea 181 O bitrates 41 Sh w Grid cnisia 335 Show Tooltips ooooococonoconocanoncconccanncnnnaninannos 325 Signed Unsigned viii dracin di ienten 48 Simple Data Fields 361 Simple Recipe sample 449 Simple Shapes cessssccsscesseesseesseeeeseeeee 469 Simple Touch Gelle 362 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Single Server Multiple Clients 395 Size Eegeregie 181 e 165 EE 181 ee EE 181 Snap Grid EE 335 A E 335 SNTR Protoeel ode KENE e 482 Software Installation 0 0 0 eeeeeeeseeseeeneees 10 Software License oooconccccnonccnnonanonococoncconnnan n 14 Special Characters 0 cc ceeceeeeseeseeseeees 175 Special Formats cee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 238 Special Pages wo ciisec5 vecvsissdddaisssacesdeoteahiaviseens 187 SSFDC Download 263 eh KE 263 SSEDG A riii 317 SSFDC Error Codes Displaying e ives sivsetzassiveceesttsidessrte ae 264 SSFDC Error Codes 264 Stage Numeric Data Field A A deetssiacseieniserss 64 Stage Numeric Data Field eee 64 Star E 164 Start Program After Download 269 Start Recipe Download 378 Start Recipe Upload 378 Start Report Printout eee ee
264. eeseeeeee 385 Start Screen aver 386 Start Transici n 383 Start Transfer No Confmaton 382 Static Attributes eresse irsrissisisiie esii 86 Status Dalila eli 294 Status Word niciciionciincacrsic ici 376 SLOP neie aee EEE A ER 277 Stop gees ege ein sce 194 Stop Report Printout oocconcnncnnccnnnnncnnnns 385 Stop Samp lM E 256 Stop Screen Saver ereere 386 Structure SA mc 375 ell ET 375 A eeneg ged EE EEN 86 Support 64K Coos o2estazgerkt deeg Ze 487 A dressed neces viais 487 SWap Protocols sssssccsiesidenssacessdesiehia assets 338 Switch Configuration mode s 276 Operation mode bm 276 e e ciai ccszssasazeessntcsiunssevavevscnccetsseadvievenscees 276 507 SWITCH E 276 Symbol Browser 304 Sy Steieroasen aan a 188 System Regourements 10 T Tab AA 255 Cal conoci oler caidas 70 76 TDdi 70 Vaart 76 VAD E 255 Tag Dictionary seene 455 459 Tag Editor venis acidic 456 Tag Editor Svnchron zapen 457 Tag Example cnn ici 459 Tag Groups cooconcccnncnnnnnonnnonnncnnnconnconnccnncnnnanns 457 Tag Validation A tee use Eekeie ct 461 Tag Validation scccscccscsstsccstssnicssivecresssivsoneee 458 Tag Validation s es 461 Tags Connes teeseen anait sed Gene 338 PAP A ked ergesZeeges ge eE eege 338 RT 454 Tags UniNETand PLC Networks 455 EU 166 TCM10 Board cooconoccnocnnncnnnnncnnncnnncnnnononacnnann 398 Technical Support 13 Temperature Indexed Field Creamy viii ait ennai 64 Temperature Indexed Field
265. eference PLC Variable Recipe Index D810 Dwo E Cancel Apply Help A number of items can be configured from this dialog box These include Style vertical or horizontal Display format Field dimensions Reference Text properties Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 73 EXOR Tech note Data access read only read write field Min amp max values read write field only Data scaling The Bargraph dialog box lets you create a bargraph and specify the controller memory location that the bargraph is to monitor The maximum value of the field is represented when the bargraph is full Likewise the minimum value is represented when the bargraph is empty An external small window allows to Preview the Bargraph 4 4 28 Bargraph Preview Preview A The bargraph Preview dialog box displays a basic bargraph of the appropriate orientation horizontal or vertical and size width and height 4 4 29 General 4 4 30 General tab The Style Format and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific These areas are used to instruct the panel in the manner in which to display the data The Reference area is controller specific 4 4 31 Style Bargraphs can be presented either vertically or horizontally 4 4 32 Format The Format area allows you to format the data field The availability of Format options will vary according to the capabilities of your controller Options are
266. el Fonts 7 5 3 Installing New Panel Fonts Panel fonts as all of our standard fonts are associated with the various display types To add a new font copy the FON file inside the working directory that contains the Designer EXE file You must also modify the DISPLAYS INI file as described below DISPLAYS INI DTYPE25 CharHeight 16 CharWidth 8 DTYPE25 Fonts ERL25X80 ERL25X80 FON UniCOMIC UniCOMIC fon Uni7SEG Uni7SEG fon Uni7SEG Font BargraphStart 226 BoxChars 218 191 192 217 196 179 196 179 180 194 193 201 187 200 188 205 186 205 1 86 0 0 0 BigCharStart 128 7 5 4 Character Size 7 5 5 Panel Font Character Size Some panels use an 8x16 character size and other panels use an 8x15 character size A font that has an 8x16 character size cannot be used on a UniOP that supports only an 8x15 character size and vice versa The panel characters size can be found inside the DTYPEnn section The DTYPE code used for a particular panel can also be found by reading the panel database file All new fonts must be declared inside the DT YPEnn Fonts section and a new lt Font Name gt Font section with the necessary graphic character codes must be added The necessary graphic character codes to be used are shown below Uni7Seg Font UniComic Font 7 5 6 UniComic Font Normal Courier New only first 127 characters Double Comic Scans MS Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 417 EXOR Tech note Large Com
267. eld Objects Default Draw Commands Deot K IIA Toolbar name Primary Cancel Help The Toolbars dialog lists the various toolbars displayed for the current project These may include the following Primary toolbar typically provides shortcuts to commonly used Windows type commands Secondary toolbar typically provides shortcuts to Designer project level commands Full Screen toolbar typically provides shortcuts to viewing preferences Tools toolbar typically provides shortcuts to user specified tools TouchScreen toolbar typically provides shortcuts to touchscreen specific commands Commands available from the Toolbars dialog box include Toolbar Name Shows the name of the selected toolbar Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 32 E SD BR Tech note Show Tooltips Provides a short description of a toolbar icon when the cursor pauses above the icon Cool Look Gives the buttons on the toolbars an invisible edge making for a smoother appearance on the toolbars Large Buttons Makes the buttons appear twice as large as normal for easier viewing and use New Reset Delete The Reset button returns the toolbars to their default state If you have added any toolbars the Reset button becomes a Delete button so that user added toolbars can be removed Default Click the Default button to align and dock the toolbars to the installed state It also reloads all
268. eld is a panel internal control variable related to trend components It shows the trend sampling time used on the x axis To insert a trend time field in Designer click on the Trend Time Field icon and use the cursor to define an area where the field is to appear or select Trend Time Field from the Insert menu The Trend Time Field Properties dialog box will appear where the contents and layout of a trend time field may be configured Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 168 IN X OR Tech note Trend Time Field Properties a 2 x General Text Attributes Style Contents Ea Time Date EJ Date Time V Seconds IV Days WEB Time Date Iw Minutes IV Months Y Hours IV Years IT Use AM PM Assign Control ariable v Cancel Apply Help There are two tabs in the Trend Time Field Properties dialog box They are General and Layout The General tab allows you to select the style and contents of the trend time field and the memory location that is to be represented The Layout tab lets you select the colors font etc to be used An external small window allows to Preview the Trend Time Field 4 4 288 Preview Preview DO MM YY hhinn ss The Preview window shows how the field will look on the panel screen Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 169 E AS DR Tech note 4 4 289 General 4 4 290 General Trend Time Field Pr
269. eld would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 7 You can also change the parameter set of a recipe on a particular page by modifying the value held in the Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable This is done in the same way as changing the value of a normal controller data field For example to make recipe parameter set number 3 the current parameter set enter a value of 3 in the appropriate Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable In order to do this the Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable must be set as a Read Write variable on the Range tab of the Properties dialog box under Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII Bargraph or Message Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 437 EXOR Tech note 7 8 9 Recipe Action Data Field Properties E 2 xi Reference m Control Yariable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Recipe Action ls 5 RACS Data Format WORD Bin DI For each page that contains a recipe the UniOP panel reserves a separate memory location for the Recipe Action for that recipe page The Recipe Action memory location stores the current status of operation of the recipe for the page Recipe Action data fields can be added to the project These data items can then be used to visually display the current state of the various recipes in the project When these data items are added to the project they must specify which recipe is to be monitored by the data item This is done by specifying
270. elf or data from other controllers attached to other panels on the network First the General Characteristics are introduced Then the various possible Network Configurations and the two supported Network Types Later detailed instructions on Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 389 EXOR Tech note Connecting Panels to the Network and on the Network Setup are given Finally a Network Example is given 7 4 2 General Characteristics 7 4 3 General Charatceristics This section presents the concepts of Clients and Servers and the common Technical Data of all Uninet Networks The reader should be comfortable with the Graphic Symbols used throughout the chapter 7 4 4 Clients and Servers The operator panels attached to the UniNET Network can be classified in two categories depending on the type of communication that they can support once they are placed in the network Server type panels and Client type panels A panel is a Server when it is connected directly to a controller It makes available to other panels in the network the data in the controller It makes available to other panels in the network the data in the controller to which its attached A panel is a Client when it requests data from a controller attached to a Server on the network Note Some UniOP panel have only one serial connection they do not have a PC Printer port So you can attach the panel via this serial connection either to a PLC or as a client
271. em This section also provides information on Extending the Extending the Connectivity with the UniNET OPC Server 7 4 41 Reserved Data Area The UniNET network fully supports the use of all panel Reserved Data Areas RDA including alarms and mailboxes These Reserved Data Areas can be placed in any controller attached to any server on the network This is especially helpful since the RDA concept offers a simple and efficient method to have the controller program interact with the operator panel Note Most RDA activities are carried out on a cyclical basis so even with a small number of nodes in the network most of the network traffic may be for RDA updates This may cause an exceedingly slow update time for displayed variables 7 4 42 Network and Recipes Recipes may be used in a UniNET network system A single recipe may contain data items for different controllers attached to different servers on the network Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 407 EXOR Tech note The following considerations should however be taken into account Recipe transfers may be considerably slower when they contain data items for controllers attached to other servers in the network than when they only contain data items for the controller attached directly to the operator panel The panels in the network can be configured so that they each store copies of the same recipe parameter set In this case special care must be taken to ensure the
272. emory there is a single memory location that is used to store the status of the entire recipe data in the panel This memory location is called the Recipe File Status The Recipe File Status cannot be modified by the panel s user it is controlled by the internal logic in the panel The Recipe File Status can take on only 2 values 0 or 1 A value of 0 indicates that all of the recipe data for every page in the project is valid A value of 1 indicates that an error in some part of the recipe data was found This means that the integrity of the recipe data is compromised It is very rare for this to happen but it can feasibly occur if the UniOP panel is powered off while the user is modifying the value of a recipe data field If the Recipe File Status has a value of 1 the panel s user must physically change the value of one of the recipe data items to reset the Recipe File Status to 0 Until this occurs the user will not be able to perform recipe transfers Recipe Parameter Set Selection Data Field Properties E E 4 x Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Parameter Set Select ls E Pass Data Format WORDIBin y OK Cancel Help LBE The UniOP panel reserves a separate memory location for the Recipe Parameter Set Selection for each recipe page The Recipe Parameter Set Selection memory location stores the numeric identifier of the currently selected recipe parameter set for the
273. en three network configurations Single Server Multiple Clients Multiple Servers Multiple Clients same controller types Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients different controller types Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 394 E AS D BR Tech note 7 4 9 Single Server Multiple Clients Network Selection HE Select the network configuration Single Server Multiple Clients Multiple Servers Multiple Clients C Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients In this configuration a Single Panel the Server is attached to a Single PLC Other Panels the Clients can access data in the PLC via the Server lt Back Cancel Help This network type consists of a single panel that is attached to a controller the server and one or more panels that are not attached to any controller the clients In this type of network all of the clients and the server can read and write data to and from the single controller attached to the single server You will be prompted to enter the number of clients The network is automatically configured based on the default settings for the type of network In general these default settings should be sufficient for most needs However if it is necessary to modify these default settings you may do so by clicking the Configure button to access the Network Configuration dialog box 7 4 10 Multiple Servers Multiple Clients Network Selection E Select the network confi
274. end Limitations 7 10 2 Trend Buffer 7 10 3 Trend Buffer The first step in creating a trend is to create a trend buffer For this you need to define two items the PLC variable that is to be sampled and the method by which the variable is to be sampled The variable can be sampled from the UniOP panel or directly from the PLC If the variable is sampled from the UniOP panel all of the data from the trend buffer will be stored within the memory of the UniOP panel If the variable is sampled directly from the PLC the data from the trend buffer will be stored in the memory of the PLC In the latter case the only duty of the UniOP will be to graphically display the trend buffer data from the PLC Configuring a Trend Buffer Sampling Methods 7 10 4 Configuring a Trend Buffer 7 10 5 Configuring a Trend Buffer Trend buffers are configured under Project Trend Buffers Click the New Insert icon to define a new trend buffer name Give the trend buffer a name then select the Reference that is to be sampled To remove a previously defined trend buffer select the name of the buffer from the trend buffer list and click the Delete icon Buffer Types Scaling Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 462 EXOR Tech note 7 10 6 Buffer Types Under the General tab of the Configure Trend Buffers dialog box you should select the size number of samples that will be kept during the background sampling and type of buffer to be defined
275. ent checkbox is not marked otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed while Off indicates the color that the touch cell will be when it is in the not pressed state 4 4 139 Custom The Custom tab is only selectable when the Custom style is selected on the General tab H enables you to create a custom selector switch Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 133 EXOR Tech note Custom selector switches can be created for multiple states defined under the Action section of the General tab Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box The width and height can be specified Color options may also be selected according to the selected panel s support of colors 4
276. equested in order to upload the project file from the panel Once this password is specified every time you attempt to upload the project from the panel onto your computer Designer will ask you to enter the password If the password that you enter matches the one that was defined in the project file the upload operation will be performed properly However if you enter a password that doesn t match the one that was specified in the project file the panel will not start the upload process Note Your panel must contain firmware version 4 10 or later to use this feature 4 6 77 Command Menu Access The time out for access to Command Menu is programmable This feature requires firmware 5 02 and above Access to Command Menu can be disabled and manually handled by means of a macro command Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 207 EXOR Tech note 4 6 78 Network Setup 4 6 79 Network Setup Network media amp protocol selection d z E 2 x Select Network Media amp Ge R5485 Network C Ethernet UDP IP protocol If optional TCM10 board is not built into your panel you must use this network type Panels are interconnected using an R5485 cable connected either to PLC port or PC Printer port The UniNET Network is a feature of the operator panels that enables them to be connected together and to communicate with each other It is possible to connect two or more panels the maximum number is 32 with
277. er Data Field Properties Data Entry Field Num This control variable simply contains the field number of the selected data entry field whenever the panel is in Data Entry Mode Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 439 EXOR Tech note 7 8 12 Recipe Page for Selection Data Field Properties S pe 2 xi Reference Control Variable Reference Data Type Address E e JRPS1 Data Format WORD Bin sl The purpose of the Recipe Page For Selection field is to show the number of the page containing the actual recipe data referred to by the Recipe Menu It can be placed on the same page with a Recipe Menu field to show the recipe page number It can also be edited to change the page for which the Recipe Menu field displays information If the Recipe Page For Selection contains the page number of a page without a defined Recipe Name field the Recipe Menu field will display asterisks After powering up the UniOP the Recipe Page For Selection is set to zero 7 8 13 Recipe Key Data Field Properties o Eo 2 xi Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Recipe Key H 5 Ip Kri Data Format fasci DI Cancel Help The Recipe Key field is an ASCII field and is only available under Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII when ASCII is chosen as the Style The Recipe Key field displays the currently selected Recipe P
278. er control word allows the controller to request the printing of a page disable data entry select an alarm mode or enable the mailbox function All panels include a standard set of dedicated indicators that allow the user to monitor the status of the panel Along with these dedicated indicators certain models include a subset of user defined LED s that can be monitored and controlled by application logic The control of these LED s is carried out through the Controller Update Area Each of the registers found there can be copied to bit address contacts so that the status bits can be referenced as control relays Page Request Register The page to be displayed can be selected either by the operator from the front panel keypad or by the controller itself The controller selects the page to be displayed by writing the corresponding page number into the PR register in the Controller Update Area When the panel detects a page request from the controller it checks the front panel keyboard and the Expanded Keyboard if present If no key has been pressed for the last three seconds the page selected by the controller is displayed Note Once the panel has changed to the corresponding page you need to write a 0 back into the PR register in order to return control back to the keys on the panel If this is not done you will be stuck on that page Note While a controller page request is active PR not 0 the operator will not be able to change pag
279. er s Manual 180 E AS D BR Tech note 4 4 314 Dither Various methods to dither the image are available including Floyd Steinberg Bayer etc 4 4 315 Contrast A sliding bar lets you adjust the image contrast 4 4 316 Brightness A sliding bar allows you to adjust the image brightness from darker to lighter 4 4 317 Smooth Smooths jagged pixel edges in the image 4 4 318 Sharpen Sharpens the image 4 4 319 Blur Blurs the sharp lines in the image 4 4 320 Size to Fit Sizes the image to fit the available space 4 4 321 Invert Produces a negative image 4 4 322 Flip Turns the image upside down 4 4 323 Mirror Turns the image backwards 4 4 324 Reset Resets the image appearance to the default settings Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 181 EXOR Tech note 4 5 Page Menu 4 5 1 Page Menu This section provides information about the Page menu The Page menu contains Commande that let you easily move from one project page to another and to configure the various pages within a project Insert Page Add Page Delete Page Go to Page Previous Page Next Page Page Options Recipe Configuration Special Pages and Page Modes 4 5 2 Insert Page This option lets you insert a blank page in front of the page that you are currently viewing For example if you are on page 3 of a project file and select Insert Page the present page 3 would become page 4 and a blank page would be in
280. er s Manual 260 X OR Tech note Numeric Field Properties 2lsl General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Numeric Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Ge Signed Unsigned 7 Fixed point Placement p Size width Height fi Reference C PLC Variable Recipe Index TSD Start Hour Trigger El Data Field Properties C C S i Reference Control Variable Reference aera nr at Data Type TST variable SE Time scheduler Start Hour Data Format Trigger list WORD Bin DI Trigger y Cancel Help 4 7 Transfers Menu 4 7 1 Transfers Menu This section provides information about the Transfers menu Options in the Transfers menu let you set the parameters to communicate with a target system panel Control functions that can be performed from the Transfers menu include Download Upload Download to SSFDC Get Panel Resources Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 261 EXOR Tech note Check Firmware Versions Switch to Operation mode Remote Passthrough Dial and Hang Up plus various transfer Options may be set To communicate with a panel you must have The Designer software installed correctly The Designer communication cable connected between the PC and the panel The correct communications parameters set The panel placed in configuration mode 4 7 2 Download Communication Status Transfer Mode Transferring projec
281. er version is not detected lt Do not update gt is displayed 4 7 46 Switch to Operation mode Selecting this option causes the application in the panel s memory to begin running Note Communication with the panel is interrupted until the panel returns to Configuration Mode 4 7 47 Switch to Configuration mode Selecting this option causes the panel to switch to Configuration mode 4 7 48 Remote Passthrough 4 7 49 Remote passthrough This entry lets you select one of three remote passthrough commands Configuration Mode Start or Stop This feature lets you remotely put a UniOP panel into either Configuration Mode or Operation Mode via a modem In this manner you can remotely upload or download a project file start the panel or use passthrough mode to access the programming port on the PLC Note The UniOP panel must contain firmware version 4 20 or later to use this feature Note The Remote passthrough commands are active only when Remote Hardware mode has been selected under the Passthrough tab of Project Panel Setup Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 276 EXOR Tech note 4 7 50 Configuration Mode If no project file has been downloaded to the panel the panel will default to Configuration Mode when power is applied To re enter Configuration Mode after the panel is in operation press and hold the Enter key for a few seconds The System Menu will appear Use the arrow keys on the display panel to high
282. erent PLCs of different Manufacturer brands Other Panels the Clients can access data in any of the PLCs via the Servers lt Back Cancel Help This advanced network type consists of more than one panel that is attached to controllers of different manufacturer brands the servers and one or more panels that are not attached to a controller the clients In this type of network all of the clients and all of the servers can read and write data from and to every controller attached to a server in the network With this type of network you have full control and flexibility over the network configuration using the Network Configuration dialog box This allows you to make full use of the powerful capabilities of the network such as adding multiple servers for different controller manufacturer brands This complete control over the network is gained at the expense of having to explicitly specify all of the configuration parameters for the network Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 396 EXOR Tech note 7 4 12 Network Types 7 4 13 Network Types The Designer software supports two types of UniNET network an RS485 network or an Ethernet based network 7 4 14 RS485 This network type must be used if the optional TCM10 board is not built into the panel In this type of network panels are interconnected using simple RS 485 cables Please refer to the Connecting Panels to a RS485 Network section to see how to
283. erlock Mailbox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from the controller There are seven mailbox commands available to function with recipes Start Recipe Download Start Recipe Upload Recipe Status Get Parameter Set Number Set Parameter Set Number Get Recipe Transfer Priority Set Recipe Transfer Priority The mailbox commands allow the choice of the recipe page and also of the parameter set All mailbox Commande related to recipes return a completion code describing the results of the operation The mailbox interface to recipes is particularly useful if it is necessary to transfer a sequence of recipes to and or from the panel 7 8 26 Multipage Recipe Support 7 8 27 Multipage Recipe Support Data which are logically part of a single recipe can be scattered over several project pages and still be selected downloaded or uploaded with a single command A recipe spanning several pages is called Multipage Recipe Note Multipage recipes are supported by UniOP firmware versions 4 20 and later Multipage Organization Multipage Configuration Recipe Menu for Multipage Recipes Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 445 EXOR Tech note 7 8 28 Multipage Organization You can define one multipage recipe and as many standard single page recipes as you wish per project The multipage recipe can contain any number of pages even all the pages in the project 7 8 29 Multipage Configuration To enable the
284. es Double Protocol Support No Copy resources to current project No Cancel Help You are now ready to begin designing the project page Click somewhere on the project page and using the PC keyboard type the words This is a data value on the first page of the project Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII The cursor will turn into crosshairs Use the cursor to define the boundaries of a small box following the phrase you typed on the page The Properties dialog box will appear on the screen Numeric Field Properties General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Numeric Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Signed Unsigned 7 Fired point Placement fo Size weil Height fi Reference PLC Variable Recipe Index DB10 DwO E DK Cancel Apply Help Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 6 E AS D BR Tech note Click the button under Reference The Data Field Properties dialog box will appear on the screen Data Field Properties Reference Data Type DB Offset Address Data Block fio o De10 00 8 PS Format Left Right Byte Ia y eL R o it Index Fill in the Data Field Properties dialog box with the appropriate data The data reference MUST already exist in the controller Keep in mind that this dialog box is controller specific Click on the OK button in order to confirm the controller information
285. es the last action This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl Z keys 4 2 3 Redo The Redo command reapplies the actions that were previously canceled by the Undo command This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl Y keys 4 2 4 Cut The Cut command removes the selected item from the current page and places it on the Windows clipboard This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl X keys Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 24 E AS D BR Tech note 4 2 5 Copy The Copy command makes a copy of the selected item from the current page and places it on the Windows clipboard This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl C keys 4 2 6 Paste The Paste command places items from the Windows clipboard onto the current page at the current position of the cursor This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl V keys 4 2 7 Select All The Select All command selects all of the various items on a page This makes it easy to cut copy or paste a group of objects 4 2 8 Align 4 2 9 Align Use the Align commands on the Edit menu to arrange objects items on a page Select an object or item by single clicking on it then hold down the Shift key while clicking on other objects or items to be aligned with it When all of the objects or items to be aligned are selected choose one of the commands in the Align submenu Left Horiz Center Right Top Vert Center Bottom N
286. es using the arrow keys Note Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format depending on the controller being used LED Control Bits Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 221 EXOR Tech note Bits L1 through L32 control the LED indicators that can be found on various panel models The mappings of these bits are provided Note The LED s can be controlled via the Keyboard Macro Editor 4 6 123 Interlock Mailbox 4 6 124 Interlock Mailbox Panel Controller Interface A E 2 x RDA Setup Interlock MailBox Panel 1 0 MV Enable Read in cycles C Read in cycles if PCW flag is set Read Cycle fi sec A Interlock Reference De1 D DM Sl Cancel Apply Help The Interlock Mailbox tab lets you enable the Interlock Mailbox determine the read modes and the read cycle and specify the controller address for the Interlock Mailbox The UniOP Interlock Mailbox is designed to allow the operator interface panel to interact with the controller s ladder logic program The Interlock Mailbox is simply a group of registers in the controller memory from a minimum of 2 registers to a maximum of 20 The Mailbox can be placed anywhere in the controller memory at an address you select When the mailbox is enabled the operator panel cyclically reads the contents of the mailbox from the controller The controller can command the UniOP panel to perform certain tasks by placing data in the memory area used by th
287. escue Mode Validate Project Data Connect to Tags Swap Protocols 4 8 178 Format SSFDC Communication status BE xj Transfer Mode EE Finished es Last Message Block 342 of 512 0 bad blocks The SSFDC card comes formatted for use inside of a UniOP panel If it becomes necessary to format the SSFDC card the Format SSFDC command can be used This refers to a special feature that allows you to format the panel memory card using the UniLOD programmer It is an external device for memory card programming via PC parallel port Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 336 EXOR Tech note 4 8 179 Erase Protocols in Panel From the point of view of the UniOP panel a project consists of project data graphics optional enhanced fonts optional Keypad Designer keyboards optional protocol or communication driver This command allows to you to delete via the serial line link ONLY the protocol part of the project Without the protocol a panel cannot start in Operation Mode 4 8 180 Erase NiceFonts in Panel From the point of view of the panel Nice Fonts consist of files downloaded to the panel memory card This command allows you to delete them via the serial line link 4 8 181 FW Rescue Mode UniOP panels use the boot file that resides inside the internal FLASH memory to load firmware code When the internal boot file is corrupted or missing the firmware file cannot be loaded and the UniOP panel displa
288. esh Database button to reset the tag database to the default settings for the specified controller 4 6 230 Controller List Lists the selected brand and model of controller and the matching tag dictionary Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 249 EXOR Tech note 4 6 231 Tag Validation By using this feature you can switch from one tag dictionary referring to one set of PLC addresses to a different dictionary referring to different set of PLC addresses in the same controller and update all the fields in the project without needing to update the individual PLC addresses used in the whole project Also you can switch from one tag dictionary referring to Controller A to a different dictionary referring to controller B and update all the fields in the project without updating the individual PLC addresses used in the whole project This feature can also validate the PLC addresses used in a project with respect to the PLC addresses used in the tag dictionary and finds and lists any discrepancy items with all details such as location etc This feature supports updating the tag database with regard to PLC Address used in the project and updating the project field with regard to PLC Address used in the tag dictionary When a dictionary is changed Designer will scan each field in the project retrieve the tag name for the field and then check if the tag name exists in the new dictionary If the tag name exists in the new dict
289. eta cyclical trigger by selecting Project Report on Panel Printer Triggers The third way to start a report printout is to use the Interlock Mailbox This can be accessed from Project Panel Controller Interface then selecting the Interlock Mailbox tab and using the mailbox command Start Report Printout Use the command Stop Report Printout to stop printing 7 6 9 Printer Setup Example In this example we will add a new printer and set up a print sequence using the Keyboard Macro Editor Select Project Report on Panel Printer Printer Setup Initially only a generic printer is listed so we will add a new printer to the list Press the Add button and the Printer Properties dialog box appears Enter a name for the new printer in the Printer name box Enter an escape sequence for the new printer in the Escape sequences box Click OK Enter a file name for the printer file Click OK Verify the communication parameters Set the page size Click OK Now we need to define a report to print Select Project Report on Panel Printer Reports Add a report by clicking the New button Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 422 E AS UR Tech note Single click on the report name then type in a new more descriptive name Click on a report page on the left side of the General tab to select it Press Add gt to add that page to the report list on the right side of the tab Click on the page name in the right hand li
290. eter sets 7 8 15 Recipe Menu 7 8 16 Recipe Menu The Recipe Menu is a feature that simplifies recipe parameter set selection on UniOP panels through a user friendly interface It provides a menu like field that can contain names to describe the parameter set instead of using numbers Each name represents one recipe parameter set Note A Recipe Name field must be defined to enable Recipe Menu support Recipe Names Recipe Menu Support Fields Creating a Recipe Menu Field Recipe Menu Keyboard Macros Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 441 EXOR Tech note 7 8 17 Recipe Names 7 8 18 Recipe Names A Recipe Name should be defined for all of the pages containing recipes that are going to be handled using the Recipe Menu and also for pages that are referred to by Recipe Key fields This is done by adding a Numeric ASCI data field with an ASCII display style and Recipe type Reference on the page where the recipe is located and filling the Recipe Item values in the Recipe Configuration box with an ASCII name for each parameter set This ASCII field is called a Recipe Name field This field is not a field type name it only describes the field s purpose If the referred page has no Recipe Name field defined the Recipe Key field will display asterisks Note This ASCII field is not an internal variable in the panel memory It needs to be addressed to a physical location in the PLC memory The amount of memory required
291. ey al Logout timeout 600 Click OK Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 243 EXOR Tech note Create an ASCII control variable field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCIl or by clicking on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Set the Style as ASCII Set the Reference as Variable Click the button under Reference Set the Data Type as Password If Password is not available as a data type go back to step 6 and set the Style as ASCII In the Password box enter 3 The arrows can be used to scroll from 2 through 8 That is because there are eight possible passwords as noted in step 3 above Automatic login is only available for passwords 2 through 8 Our example has automatic login set for password 3 9809 The Data Field Properties dialog box will resemble that shown in the figure below Data Field Properties X Reference Control Variable Reference Data Type Password Address P Data Format fasci D Cancel Help Click OK to close the Data Field Properties dialog box Select the Range tab in the Numeric Field Properties dialog box Select Read Write so that you can change the value of this field the actual password Click OK to close the Numeric Field Properties dialog box The automatic login control variable field is indicated on the project page by CCCC 4 6 213 Logout Timeout The period of inactivity that will trigger an automatic logoff The
292. f pre defined parameter sets After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Note A recipe transfer may take several seconds depending mainly on the number of bytes that have to be transferred 0 LO Transfer completed successfully 222222222 2 Error There are no Recipes defined 3 Error Error in project file ___________________ 4 Error Illegal Page number has been requested js Error Illegal number of parameter set has been requested A Error The requested parameter set is locked that is it is being used by the operator panel for a data entry operation Error A communication error occurred during the transfer 7 3 16 Set Parameter Set Number The controller can use this command to select a given recipe parameter set Command code 4 Two parameters are required by this command Page Number 1 max number of pages in the project file Parameter Set Number 1 max number of pre defined parameter sets After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below CN 2 Error Recipes not defined in projecte C S S B Error Emorin projectile O OC OC oS 4 Error Illegal page number requested 5 Error Illegal record number requested 6 Error Requested record locked Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 379 EXOR Tech note 7 3
293. fect on certain types of graphics 4 7 23 Communications Number of Retries The number of times Designer will try to establish a connection with a panel 4 7 24 External Memory Types Select the type of external memory being used Note This option is only available when external memory is specified under Configure Controllers in the Project menu 4 7 25 Update Firmware It is possible to update the firmware on some panels by checking this box Some UniOP panels are able to accept new firmware files through the serial line or through the SSFDC memory card For these panel models the firmware files can be stored in the SSFDC memory card The setup procedure installs a firmware subdirectory inside the Designer working directory This directory contains all the necessary firmware files used by Designer to check and update the panel SSFDC memory card New firmware files have to be copied inside this directory to be accessible from Designer Note A special key sequence is necessary to complete the firmware update This special key sequence ensures that inexpert users cannot update the panel firmware unintentionally Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 269 EXOR Tech note Note Designer checks the firmware version before beginning any download operation When an old firmware file version is detected inside the panel a dialog box is displayed to give you a chance to upgrade the firmware file 4 7 26 Memory Location for Project
294. ference to set the memory location in the Data Field Properties dialog box Select the Frames index tab Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 100 EXOR Tech note There are two different values that may be written into the controller 0 1 Either the blower is off or it is on Therefore our minimum value is O and the number of frames is 2 Enter 0 in the Min box and 2 in the Frames box Click on the Edit button This will bring up another dialog box in which you can associate a graphic with a value The two frames are shown on the right of the dialog box with their assigned values 0 and 1 Since we do not need a graphic for the value of 0 remember a 0 indicates that neither the blower nor the pump is operating leave this frame blank Frame 1 needs to have a graphic associated with it to indicate that the blower is on Click in frame 1 to select it Since we are using graphics that are available from the Graphics Library Manager click on the Library tab Note that if the graphics were not located in the Graphics Library Manager we would need to click on the Disk tab and select the proper location of the graphic as well as its filename Click on the graphics folders to open them and select a graphic to represent the blower You can preview the various graphics by clicking on their filenames in the list The image will appear in the preview window in the center of the dialog box with the graphic name listed below
295. figure They can pick the percentage from the combo box or pick the best fit or specify any within valid range Zoom size will be changed to best fit once the Panel setup is changed 4 3 3 Zoom Out Zoom Out makes more of the screen area visible although items on the screen will appear smaller This is useful for getting an overall view of the page You can also access this feature by pressing the Ctrl key with the key of the numeric keypad 4 3 4 Status Bar The status bar across the bottom of the Designer screen provides interactive information on various screen items Designer SYG dpr Page 1 SS ll x ER File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 8 x H gt amp A e Page 1 y QQ Detaut ll Ind SC FE xl Si svc E Ey Pages EI 1 Page 1 Special Pages A Gr 20b E Pr EPHE e Ko 0 DEMO Controller 75 Oxo If Status Bar is checked in the View menu the status bar will be visible across the bottom of the screen To hide the status bar uncheck it under the View menu To make it visible again simply check it again Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 31 EXOR Tech note 4 3 5 Toolbars 4 3 6 Toolbars A Toolbars Command Tools Toolbars MPrmary Y Show Tooltips New Secondary MV Cool Look Full Screen Reset Tools Large Buttons Pese Touchcells amp Objects Fi
296. formation about the Keypad Designer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 318 EXOR Tech note 4 8 122 Buttons 4 8 123 Creating Buttons To create a Button click the Button icon and click on the screen A button appears with its upper left corner at the point where you clicked Right click on the button and select Properties to bring up the Uni Button dialog box Property Page Label UniButton Font used MS Sans Serif Horizontal align Center z Vertical align Center z Key code Button face Panel key C ASCII Key Shadow eo Line color o y 0x0021 E Picture El OK Cancel Apply Help Ceci e where you can define the functionality of the button including Colors Key Code and Label Font Used The Select font button allows to define which font has to be used for the button label including UniOP fixed fonts Ifthe UniOP standard Fixed font has been modified to include some special symbols or characters it can be directly used here for the label The font selection here is not related to the function of the button configured instead in the Key Code area Key code Specifies the functionality assigned to the button Each button can be assigned as a standard UniOP key or as an ASCII character The available selections in the list for ASCII keys comes directly from the font used specified above Note Keypad Designer does not support Unicode codi
297. g Ctrl F4 4 1 5 Save To save a project select Save from the File menu click on the Save file icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl S keys The cursor may be momentarily replaced with an hourglass while the file is saved If the application has not been named the Save As dialog box will appear instead 4 1 6 Save As If an application to be saved has not been named the Save Project As dialog box appears Or you may select Save As from the File menu This option can also be used to save a project under a different name Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 17 E AS D BR Tech note Save in DesProjects E e ES EI 22002201 dpr D Gauge dpr D test016 dpr El death dpr D NewProject dor D test017 dpr E Demo dpr D qag dpr Dl Trends dpr E DemoFul2 dpr D SmPictures dpr El TwoPictures dpr El FourPictures dpr D svG dpr E upload dpr Ei fred dpr El svn dpr File name Fred Save as type Designer Projects dpr DI Cancel hh The Save Project As dialog box shows the current directory path and the current file name A new name and path may be entered or the ones presented may be accepted Files may be saved as file format dpr Designer files or rom Designer ROM files If no extension is specified dpr is assumed If the file already exists in the selected directory you are prompted to confirm the Save As operation in order to overwrite the existing file 4 1 7 Print Th
298. g box will appear Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 94 IN XOR Tech note Dynamic Graphic Properties y 2 xi General Attributes Frames Style Format Signed Unsigned Size Width 40 Height 15 PLC Reference E Cancel Apply Help A number of items can be configured from this dialog box These include Style Field dimensions PLC Reference and Frames properties An external small window allows to Preview of the Dynamic Graphic Note Dynamic graphics cannot fully overlap static bitmaps The first columns cannot overlap at all Note Dynamic graphics fields and the bitmaps under them must snap to the page s character based grid Note ltis not possible to overlap two dynamic objects since both items are dynamically changed by the controller For example a numeric field cannot be placed over a dynamic graphic field Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 95 IN XOR Tech note 4 A 67 Preview Preview E Provides a snapshot view of an individual dynamic graphic frame 4 4 68 General 4 4 69 General tab Dynamic Graphic Properties General Attributes Frames Style Format GG Signed Unsigned Size Width 40 Height 15 PLC Reference ae Cancel Apply Help The Style and Size portions of this dialog box are not controller specific These areas are used to instruct the panel in the manner in which to di
299. g jo ANSI OEM Internal Leading fi Yersion 025 030 The Font Header dialog box lists the file name used for the selected font the face name font name for that font provides a box for entering any necessary copyright information sets the external and internal leading values identifies the character set and the version 4 8 78 Fill Menu It is possible to fill the entire character grid with either white or black or to invert the displayed colors By double clicking on a particular pixel you can toggle the appearance of that pixel For example if a pixel is initially black double clicking on it will change its color to white An example of editing characters is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 300 E SD BR Tech note 4 8 79 Row Menu The Insert and Delete commands on the Row menu of the Font Editor let you customize a character by adding or deleting a row of pixels Note The row is added or deleted from the present position of the cursor Note When a row is added all the other rows below it are shifted one pixel down 4 8 80 Column Menu The Insert and Delete commands on the Column menu of the Font Editor let you customize a character by adding or deleting a column of pixels Note The column is added or deleted from the present position of the cursor Note When a column is added all the other columns to its right are shifted one pixel to the right 4 8 81 Width Menu
300. ge A Graphics Objects e b ewe m a Ell a Pq 1 1 Xi 72 Y 105 DEMO Controller fr 0x0 Default EZ The project workspace can display commonly used objects that can be easily imported into a project Click on the Objects tab at the bottom of the workspace to view various objects Select a category of graphic custom touch cells dynamic graphics meters buttons etc from the pull down list at the top of the workspace Commonly used objects for that class of item will be shown in the workspace Simply click on the selected item and drag it over to the place on the project page where it is to be inserted Should any changes to the object be necessary click on the graphic once to select it if it is not already selected then right click on the graphic to go to the appropriate Properties dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 345 EXOR Tech note 5 4 Project 5 4 1 Project El Designer Test Project dpr Page 1 i B oO x E File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 2 x H Sas EA 2 C2 Page 1 100 Q Detaut 5 am E Fmo GE Si Test Project E Pages DI 1 Page 1 E Special Pages E Panel Controller Interface E Data Transfer ZS Graphics Objects E Project EERDERE Pg 1 1 Kap Y 16 d DEMO Controller rE 0x0 The p
301. ge in which you wish to work The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cell Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 109 EXOR Tech note Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transparent chec
302. ght Byte These options let you configure responses to the controller memory location PLC The internal PLC programmable logic controller installed on a UniOP panel is conceptually speaking a special UniNet node The appearance of the PLC Data Field Properties dialog box depends on the internal controller setup but will always be according to the UniNet configuration style Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 49 EXOR Tech note To configure the PLC data field properties either click on the appropriate icon in the toolbar or select Numeric ACSII Bargraph Message Attribute or Dynamic Graphics from Insert Data Fields then use the cursor to specify the location of the item In the Properties dialog box click the PLC radio button under Reference and then click on the button Data Field Properties i E 2 xi Reference Data Type DB Offset Address Data Block fo RE peniw Data Format Left Right Byte WORD Bin DI eL Cp OK Cancel Help Oox See Data Field Properties for more information regarding the configuration of data field properties Variable Variable Control variables are special data items stored in the UniOP panel memory that offer a means of controlling and monitoring recipes You can control certain operations of the panel by modifying the values held in these internal variables Elements to be configured include the data type the data format page number and address These
303. glass while the file is saved If the application has not been named the Save As dialog box will appear instead Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 298 EXOR Tech note 4 8 72 Save As File name Folders OK fico amp 9G FON c progra 2 exor designer fee Designer O Firmware 9 Graphics zl Network CT Panels E Samples 3G FON SHI64015 FON zl Save file as type Drives Panel font c Local Disk gt This familiar Windows box lets you save a file in the Font Editor Enter a file name and specify where the file is to be saved 4 8 73 Edit Menu The Font Editor Edit menu contains familiar Windows type commands such as Undo Copy Paste and Refresh 4 8 74 Font Menu 4 8 75 Font Menu The Font Editor Font menu lets you see the font size and see modify the font header information Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 299 EXOR Tech note 4 8 76 Font Size Fontsize Character Pixel width je Character Pixel Height 8 First Character jo Last Character 299 Pitch Fixed Variable The Font Size dialog box in the Font Editor lets you see the character pixel width and height the first and last character and the pitch for a font 4 8 77 Font Header File Name LCD6X8G FON Face Name LCD6X8G Copyright c Copyright Exor Electronics R amp D 1992 All rights reserved Character Set External Leadin
304. gments It is a number in the usual form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255 If you want to reset an IP address that has been defined manually in the pane enter the IP Address 0 0 0 0 in the IP field in the dialog box If you do so the panel will use the IP address assigned by DHCP if available or the IP address eventually defined in the project file The address assigned defined using Pick Panel in Configuration Mode is persistent once the IP address has been defined it will be used by the panel until a new address is defined with an higher priority address definition method To remove an address defined with Pick Panel enter the IP address 0 0 0 0 with Pick Panel or manually from the panel touchscreen keypad 7 12 15 Clock Synchronization with the SNTP Protocol UniOP supports the standard SNTP protocol for clock synchronization Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 482 EXOR Tech note If the network contains a time server the panel will connect to the server and will synchronize its real time clock with the server This is a simple and powerful method to ensure that all the clocks of the panels in the network are synchronized 7 12 16 Using UniDataExchanger UniDataExchanger is a simple but powerful tool that allows you to access data in the panels as well as downloading firmware updates UniDataExchanger supports both Ethernet and serial communication please note however that some options are onl
305. graphics view 6 2 5 Project Screen Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 352 ER File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help la x O S ag y elei 1 _Q oar e Fe M svc S ES Pages MM ee eee TG e A M Wl E DO A Ee 2 Ken Weeer U E A AT EE E ON ue E E E A SE e SE EE EE OD O A EE ELE SR 8 ee e pe e d o amp TTT EE Aes EEES SES LA e e ae a Po tft Ko vo DEMO Controler mgi Debat amp The project screen is the main work area where project pages are created and modified 6 2 6 Status Bar The status bar across the bottom of the Designer screen provides interactive information on various screen items Designer SYG dpr Page 1 10 x CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 91 x O S tel S y a Po Ja a fosar YT Si svc LEY Pages Bee TOO eee 1 Special Pages KEE EIS Bon 0b EJ Pr Ena Pg 1 1 O DEMO Controller Default E If Status Bar is checked in the View menu the status bar will be visible across the bottom of the screen To hide the status bar uncheck it under the View menu To make it visible again simply check it again Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 353 EXOR Tech note 6 2 7 Right Click Menus Right click menus are available to keep commonly used commands conveniently close at hand Simply left click on an item or obj
306. guage Enter the name of the language to be added The language is added to the list of languages placed at the end of the list 4 6 218 Delete The Delete icon is used to remove a language from the list 4 6 219 Move Up Click the Move Up icon to move a selected language up one position in the list of languages 4 6 220 Move Down Click the Move Down icon to move a selected language down one position in the list of languages 4 6 221 Set As Default Click the Set As Default icon to set the selected language as the default language for the project The default language is labeled as such in the list of languages 4 6 222 List of Languages Lists the languages that are currently available for the project Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 247 E AS UR Tech note 4 6 223 Number of Languages Indicates the number of languages that have been defined for the project 4 6 224 Next Language This option selects the next language from the list of available languages within the project file For example assume that there are three languages defined Italian English and German If you are currently working with Italian selecting Next Language will change the working language to English Next Language may be selected from the Project menu or by pressing the Shift Ctrl L keys 4 6 225 Configure Tag Dictionaries 4 6 226 Configure Tag Dictionaries Change Tag Dictionary BS xj Nodes V EnableTags Database
307. guration Single Server Multiple Clients Multiple Servers Multiple Clients Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients In this configuration two or more Panels the Servers are attached to different PLCs of the same Manufacturer brand Other Panels the Clients can access data in any of the PLCs via the Servers E ae Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 395 EXOR Tech note This network type consists of several panels that are attached to controllers of the same manufacturer brand the servers and several panels that are not attached to a controller the clients In this type of network all of the clients and all of the servers can read and write data from and to every controller that are attached to a server in the network You are prompted for the number of clients and servers The network is automatically configured based on the default settings for the type of network In general these default settings should be sufficient for most needs However if it is necessary to modify these default settings you may do so by clicking theConfigure button to access the Network Configuration dialog box 7 4 11 Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients Network Selection KE 2lsl Select the network configuration C Single Server Multiple Clients Multiple Servers Multiple Clients Ce Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients In this configuration two or more Panels the Servers are attached to diff
308. guration Mode in order to communicate with the PC 6 3 2 Transfer Settings To verify the transfer settings between the PC and your panel check under Transfers Options Serial ports for communication parameters between Designer and the panel All UniOP panels are capable of communicating with a PC at a speed of at least 9600 baud However several panels will communicate at speeds of 19 200 baud and 38 400 baud With some Pentium based computers a speed of 19200 baud may prove to work more efficiently than 38400 baud Set the baud rate parity data bits and stop bits to be used in communication between the panel and the PC To change the settings click on the selection arrows and pick a different setting from the pull down lists For further information on these options see the Port Settings section Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 355 EXOR Tech note Note The communication parameters that you set up here need to match the communication parameters of your modem Note Check the Use modem check box under Transfers Options Serial ports ONLY if you are using a modem to communicate between your PC and the panel This is not necessary if you have a cable between the PC and panel thus the Use modem box should not be checked Note Sometimes other programs will take up your PC communications port For example if you have a Palm Pilot it automatically loads some files upon power up of your computer that take up t
309. h a value The three frames are shown on the right of the dialog box with their assigned values 0 1 and Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 99 EXOR Tech note 2 Since we do not need a graphic for the value of 0 remember a 0 indicates that neither the pump nor the blower is operating leave this frame blank Frame 1 needs to have a graphic associated with it to indicate that the blower is on Click in frame 1 to select it Since we are using graphics that are available from the Graphics Library Manager click on the Library tab If the graphics were not located in the Graphics Library Manager we would need to click on the Disk tab and select the proper location of the graphic as well as its filename Click on the graphics folders to open them and select a graphic to represent the blower You can preview the various graphics by clicking on their filenames in the list The image will appear in the preview window in the center of the dialog box with the graphic name listed below The Panel tab in the preview window shows how the graphic will appear on your panel while the Original tab shows the appearance of the original file graphic Click on the Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame icon above the list of frames to select a graphic to represent the highlighted frame frame 1 The graphic will be shown in the frame for frame 1 Repeat Step 11 for frame 2 and select a graphic to represent a pump Click on OK to return to the di
310. hange your mind the Delete button will remove a column from the list When you have completed Step 3 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 4 4 8 14 Import Tags Step 4 For excel import only Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 284 X O H Tech note Tag Import Wizard E x Step 4 Select worksheet s to import C Import Each worksheet as a group Import Al worksheets to a default group Import Selected worksheet Select a Worksheet to lop 1 DI ap 1 coca mm If the imported file has more than one worksheet the user is given three choices as shown in the above dialog This is applicable only to xls file format For all other format this step is skipped When you have completed Step 4 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 5 4 8 15 Import Tags Step 5 Tag Import Wizard E x The Wizard is about to complete the operation You have selected to import tags from the worksheet named of the file C DESPROJECTSSEXPORTED_TAG_DATABASE XLS You have selected to import tags from the worksheet named of the file C DESPROJECTSSEXPORTED_TAG_DATABASE XLS Click Finish to create the dictionary tag groups and import tags or Cancel to abort the operation lt Back Cancel Help Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 285 EXOR Tech note The final step of the Tag Import Wizard is to create the dictionary and tag groups and to import the tags Verif
311. hanges Simply select which messages to copy by highlighting them If you want to copy several messages that are in successive order click on the first one and drag the mouse down until Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 82 E AS DR Tech note the last one is highlighted and release the mouse button If you have several messages to copy that are not in successive order hold down the Ctrl key click on each of the messages that you want to copy and release the Ctrl key All of these methods will select the text to be copied Next click on the Copy icon to copy the messages into Windows Clipboard Then use the Paste feature to copy the messages into their new locations You can also use a Windows based text editor such as Notepad to create a list of messages To do this place each message on a separate line Use the copy function of the editor to copy the text to the clipboard and then use the paste feature to copy the messages into their new locations Paste Text Message Properties Er E 2 xi General Text Messages Attributes Binz Min fo Messages fi Message Cancel Apply Help The familiar Windows features Copy and Paste are available for use in editing messages If you have several messages that are similar you can use the Copy and Paste features to copy messages and then make any necessary changes First Copy a message as described in the Copy section Highlight the me
312. hat unauthorized uploads cannot occur You can enter a case sensitive password of up to eight characters 6 4 Creating a Project 6 4 1 Creating a Project Before starting a new file for a new panel please make sure that you have configured Designer to work with the particular panel and controller that you will be using See the sections on Transfer Settings Controller Selection Set Up and Panel Selection Set Up for instructions on performing these tasks Creating a New File Selecting a Font Inserting Page Objects Saving a Project File Memory Used by the Project File 6 4 2 Creating a New File To create a new project select New from the File menu click on the New icon in the toolbar or press the Ctrl N keys Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 359 EXOR Tech note This opens the New File dialog box Enter a name for the new project and select the file location on the PC where the project file is to be stored Click on an icon to identify the type of project file to be created Click OK Note Unless otherwise specified Designer files are assumed to have the dpr extension 6 4 3 Selecting a Font To choose a new panel font select the Panel Font icon from the toolbar or choose Edit Fonts Panel Font The Select Font dialog box appears with a drop down list showing the available fonts for the current panel Click on name of the font to be used Select a font size Note When the area defined for a
313. hat contains tags for multiple projects As a result the tag database has been designed such that multiple projects can exist in the same database For these situations you can set the location of the tag database in Designer if it is not in the same directory as the project file and Designer will access only the tags that are associated with the active project 7 9 6 Tag Editor 7 9 7 Tag Editor Use the Tag Editor to create dictionaries and tags in databases that can be used in one or more projects The Tag Editor allows you to easily work with a large number of tags by creating a tag database for your project It provides the capability to add delete and modify tags as well as assign PLC addresses to each tag plus it includes import and export capabilities to exchange tags with external applications You can create a list of tag names in the Tag Editor and then assign the tag names to various fields of the Designer project by simply selecting a tag name The Tag Editor uses a grid like user interface Features of the Tag Editor include Add delete and edit tags Enter the name address data type and a comment for each tag Create one or more Tag Dictionaries for tags associated with a PLC Assign group names to tags Import and export tags to and from external data sources Cut copy paste tags using the Windows clipboard Drag and drop tags between the Tag Editor and other applications Import project specific information using
314. he Command Response Word The possible codes are listed below ro OK 7 3 35 Mailbox Programming To use the mailbox successfully the panel and the controller must interact tightly The interaction between the panel and the controller can be thought of as a short conversation between two people Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 387 EXOR Tech note The first person the controller tries to start a conversation with the second person the UniOP panel on a particular topic the mailbox command code After the first person has introduced himself and the topic of the conversation the second person decides whether he feels competent enough to join in If the second person decides not to join in the conversation he politely informs the first person that he feels he does not know enough about that particular topic to make an informed comment and waits for a change in the topic of the conversation If the second person does decide to enter into the conversation he ponders the topic and then expresses his well considered opinion The vital ingredient in a successful conversation is that nobody is interrupted while they are talking The flow chart below describes the program sequences that must be executed in parallel by both the UniOP panel and the controller ladder logic program to ensure a successful Mailbox session The following important notes should be kept in mind At system start up the UniOP panel writes the special
315. he previously used panel in the previous Designer session is used as default Basically menu items reflect the available functionality of the current panel for which you are defining a project 6 2 3 Toolbars Various toolbars may be displayed on the application area in proximity of the borders Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 350 GE m svc Sy Pages EI 1 Page 1 Special Pages Kio 0 DEMO Controller These may include the following Primary toolbar Typically provides shortcuts to commonly used Windows type commands Secondary toolbar Typically provides shortcuts to Designer project level commands Full Screen toolbar Typically provides shortcuts to viewing preferences Tools toolbar Typically provides shortcuts to user specified tools TouchScreen toolbar Typically provides shortcuts to touchscreen specific commands The appearance of the toolbars may be changed using commands under View Toolbar As is normal with Windows applications toolbars can float or be docked To undock a toolbar click on the double bars on one edge of the toolbar or simply double click on the toolbar and drag the toolbar to any position on the screen To dock the toolbar drag the toolbar so that the double bars on one edge touch the edge of the screen Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 351 EXOR Tech note 6 2 4 Workspace The status bar to the left of the main
316. he 10 will be interpreted as 10 hexadecimal Likewise if ASCII is the specified style then the entry must be in ASCII text 4 5 26 Special Pages and Page Modes 4 5 27 Special Pages and Page Modes The items located within the Special Pages and Page Modes portion of the Page menu include Data Entry Screen Command Menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 187 EXOR Tech note System Password Direct Access Direct Page Selection Time amp Date Alarm Page Event Page Current Page Mode This allows you to place any combination of static text and touch cells on these pages These items should be placed on the lower portions of the page since these modes reserve some of the area contained in the upper portions of the page for display information Whenever the panel enters Password mode or Data Entry Mode a default numeric keypad will appear on the screen In all of the other modes a row of default keys will appear that contains the arrow keys an Enter key and a Clear key Note If you create a screen in any of the special page modes the default keys for that mode will not be displayed 4 5 28 Data Entry Screen This screen will appear whenever you begin Data Entry Mode When using a UniOP touchscreen panel a numeric keypad will appear by default If anything is placed on this screen the default numeric keypad will not appear If this screen is modified make sure that an Enter key is defined somewhere in th
317. he Enable UniNET Network checkbox A checkmark appears next to node number 1 indicating that it is the server Select node number 2 Click Properties The Edit Panel Node dialog box opens Select the controller for panel node 2 a client and set the other parameters as necessary Click OK A cautionary message appears Click Yes Repeat steps 14 18 for panel node number 3 Click on the Export button Give the network configuration file a name with the net extension in a convenient folder Click Save to save the file and return to the Network Configuration dialog box Click OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box Click the Finish button to complete the network setup process and close the Network Selection dialog box Continued in Creating the Project File for the Server Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 413 EXOR Tech note 7 4 50 Creating the Project File for the Server Continued from Setting Up the Network Configuration Create a page for the application Type some text on the page then insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII Use the cursor to outline an area for the data field In the Numeric Field Properties dialog box click on the Range tab Set the Access as Read Write Click OK Save the file by selecting Save from the File menu Close the file by selecting Exit from the File menu Connect the computer to the operator panel that is designated as t
318. he communications port In the bottom right hand corner of your computer monitor make sure that all programs that may take up a communication port are closed 6 3 3 Controller Selection and Setup 6 3 4 Controller Selection and Setup Before creating your first project using the Designer software it is worth checking the controller setup to make sure that it reflects the controller that you will be using Using the Get Panel Resources command from the Transfers menu will most likely set the controller settings to be compatible with your system but sometimes changes are necessary Configure Controller Controller Setup 6 3 5 Configure Controller Different controllers require different parameters in order to communicate properly with the operator interface panel Verify the controller by choosing Configure Controller from the Project menu Make sure that the listed controller is the type of controller driver that you will be using If it is not click the button to select a different driver from a list 6 3 6 Controller Setup After selecting a controller by clicking the button under Project Configure Controller you should verify that the controller model is correctly specified This can be accomplished by clicking the Controller Setup button from the Select Controller dialog box This will bring up the Controller Setup dialog box where you can select the specific controller model that is being used The communication
319. he configuration of UniNET PLC network Each node must have at least one dictionary in the database If PLC network is enabled and you change the PLC Node the Tag Name controls will be initialized with the tags from the dictionary tied to the current PLC Node Additional information is available on Tags and the UniNET amp PLC Networks Multiple Project Support 7 9 4 Tags and the UniNET and PLC Networks With the UniNET network and a PLC network different PLC drivers can be assigned to different fields in the project Because of this Designer must support multiple tag dictionaries for a project When assigning a tag name to a network field Designer will query the tag Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 455 EXOR Tech note database for the tag dictionary associated with the network node s PLC driver You will then be able to select the tag name from the list of tags in the associated tag dictionary Note You will only be able to select a tag from a dictionary that is assigned to the given PLC node This is necessary since the format of the address associated with a tag is dependent on the PLC 7 9 5 Multiple Project Support Typically one tag database file will be used for each Designer project The tag database resides in the same directory as the project file If you want to copy the project data you must also copy the tag database with the project In some instances however you may want to create a tag database t
320. he real time clock contains the time and date information Depending upon the type of controller that is being used this information will be stored in either binary or BCD A listing of various PLC s and how the RTC Real Time Clock is stored can be found in the back of the Installation amp Operation Guide that came with the panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 220 EXOR Tech note Current Page CP Register The panel writes the number of the currently displayed page into the Current Page CP register whenever the panel is in Page Mode or Data Entry Mode In all other modes a zero is written into this register indicating that page data is not currently being displayed Note Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format depending on the controller being used Panel Status Word The panel sets and resets bits SO S8 and S13 S15 in the Panel Status Word to indicate its current status Your application logic can monitor these bits to determine how and when it should interact with the panel A brief description of each status bit is provided 4 6 122 PLC PLC The PLC programmable logic controller update area allows the controller to access and control certain aspects of the panel All front panel LED s can be controlled from this area to provide feedback to the operator The controller may also request a specific page to be displayed by writing the appropriate value into the Page Request register The controll
321. he server and download the project When the transfer is complete detach the cable from the PC Printer port of the panel and connect the RS 232 RS 485 converter Note Since the PLC port is used on the server to connect to the controller the only available port for the network connection is the PC Printer port the AUX port cannot be used The PC Printer port only has a 232 interface but the UniNET network is 485 Thus the converter is required Continued in Creating the Project File For the First Client 7 4 51 Creating the Project File for the First Client Continued from Creating the Project File for the Server Repeat steps 1 through 11 Click on the Import button in the Network Configuration dialog box Select the file created in step 21 and click Open The controller information is copied into this new file Check the Enable UniNET Network button Click OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box Click the Finish button to complete the network setup process and close the Network Selection dialog box Create a page for the application Type some text on the page then insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII Use the cursor to outline an area for the data field Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 414 EXOR Tech note In the Numeric Field Properties dialog box click on the Range tab Set the Access as Read Write Click OK Save the file by selecting Save from the F
322. hich the parameters for the newly added printer can be defined Similarly the Edit button can be used to redefine the parameters for an existing printer The Delete button removes the currently selected printer from the list of available printers Note Any new printer must also be supported by the panel firmware Simply defining a new printer in the Designer software may not be enough to get the new printer running 4 6 146 Printer Properties The Printer Properties dialog box invoked by clicking on the Add or Edit buttons from the Printer Setup dialog box lets you configure a printer You can enter the printer name escape sequences enable reversing font bitmap after rotation make automatic linefeed selections specify eject parameters and make selections for graphical printouts Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 227 EXOR Tech note 4 6 147 Printer Name Enter a name for this printer 4 6 148 Escape Sequences The list of escape sequences for text and graphic control The escape sequences can be freely assigned 4 6 149 Reversing Font Bitmap After Rotation This property allows to specify if the Font Bitmap requires to be reverted after rotation 4 6 150 Auto Linefeed Radio buttons allow for a simple carriage return CR or a line feed LF after carriage return CR LF 4 6 151 Eject Checking the Form feed box instructs the printer to eject a blank sheet of paper following every report printed The delay
323. ia dic 12 PC Printer Communications Port A a aren eae nT 401 PC Printer Communications Pott 401 PC Printer Port Mode 60 PC Printer Port Module Number 59 504 Piek Panel css is ecc 480 Pitre ii ic di 320 A nae E EEEE 486 Pinout PC Printer Communications Port 401 PLC Communications Port 401 EE 401 PIU aa 401 Placing ICIS EN 370 e TE 370 PIG E 49 152 PLC Communications Port Ne GE 401 PLC Communications Pont 401 PLC Drivers CHAN SING acia rinitis 459 PLE DIIVELS viscsdssssscssssasscsdessedessesaedestessesese 459 PLC Memory Arena 465 PLC Port Mode i isssiccssccsnssacsssncchcs cate cadbassecsens 58 PLC Port Module Number 59 PLC Reference occcccncncnccononocinininininininnnos 94 97 Port SOLES ccooirisn ciones liarla 203 Ports Available ccccccccccccccccsceeseseeeees 267 Position iii aii de 315 Pre CIS iia ri an 160 Predefined Model 317 Pressure Indexed Field AAA cuss eege e 65 Pressure Indexed beid 65 PEE VIC W sisas ed 79 Previous ageet k ier nt zeetedtegekde 183 Previous Record 293 PI EE 310 Print Drevieuw asirtirossesrensiroireoisriiresn iii uassri 18 Print Setupsesc cccscvsseesstevsieesidesniestessccesevescseees 290 et EE 227 Printer Name 228 Printer Properties ooooccnnncccnonccinonnnnnnccnanccnnns 227 Printer Setup aiis essstvsteveatinuevstesesevscteundsilaoese 226 Printer Setup Example ss cc 422 Printout NODE EE 216 Procedure prak ee eg
324. iable Recipe Index DB10 Dw0 El Cancel Apply Help The Reference area is controller specific Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 46 E SD BR Tech note 4 4 11 Style Numeric Field Properties EE Numeric OF o P Signed Unsigned Ej Placement fo ea You can choose a numeric data field that displays numbers or an ASCII data field that displays ASCII characters 4 4 12 Format Format The Format area allows you to format the data field These choices will vary according to the capabilities of your controller Numeric Field Properties OF so be Signed e Unsigned a Placement fo 3 Format choices for Numeric ASCII data fields include Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 47 E AS UH Tech note Decimal Hexadecimal Signed Unsigned Fixed Point Placement Decimal Hexadecimal Base You can choose between a decimal base base 10 or a hexadecimal base base 16 Note When the Reference is set to Recipe the initial values entered for a particular Recipe data field will be in the format specified for that data item For example if a numeric format of Hexadecimal is entered for a Recipe data field then all the values entered in the Recipe Configuration dialog box for this Recipe data field will be in hexadecimal A value of 10 entered in a Recipe Configuration dialog box under these circumstances will be interpreted as 10 hexadecimal Signed U
325. ic Scans MS Extra Large Comic Scans MS Basic font for 8x16 panel type ERL25x80 FON UniComic Font BargraphStart 226 BoxChars 218 191 192 217 196 179 196 179 180 194 193 201 187 200 188 205 186 205 1 86 0 0 0 BigCharStart 128 Basic font for 8x15 panel type SH164015 FON UniComi5 Font BargraphStart 226 BoxChars 218 191 192 217 196 179 196 179 180 194 193 201 187 200 188 205 186 205 1 86 0 0 0 BigCharStart 128 7 5 7 Uni7Seg Font Normal Courier New only first 127 characters Double Ni7Seg Large Ni7Seg Extra Large Ni7Seg Basic font for 8x16 panel type ERL25x80 FON Uni7SEG Font BargraphStart 226 BoxChars 218 191 192 217 196 179 196 179 180 194 193 201 187 200 188 205 186 205 1 86 0 0 0 BigCharStart 128 Basic font for 8x15 panel type SH164015 FON Uni7SEG5 Font BargraphStart 226 BoxChars 218 191 192 217 196 179 196 179 180 194 193 201 187 200 188 205 186 205 1 86 0 0 0 BigCharStart 128 7 5 8 Downloading Panel Fonts Designer automatically downloads panel fonts along with the project file whenever panel fonts have been used These fonts will be downloaded to the UniOP panel each time the project file is downloaded If these fonts have already been downloaded it is not necessary to re download them To save time from the Transfer menu select Options Click on the Transfer Advanced tab Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 418 X O H Tech note Ports Transfer Transfer advanced
326. icisn 2scersstscetessasviecs asisten tects 194 E A 42 Bl apoian cose sec chadeaeacesdendedaaeesscachastecs 181 Ee 316 Bri g tNesS oeeie 181 Broadcast Periodic Clock oooooonccnniccncnc 213 Butter KE 463 A AT 252 Bug Le 13 tee ee E 13 Buttons Creating italia 319 o tee tdeeeeg EELER ENEE e 319 ENEE 327 BUZZ lideradas 198 433 C CO Print Screen ieekeiedeee sterben 432 C1 Disable Data Entry neeese 432 C15 Enable Mailbox 432 C2 Select Alarm Mode 432 A O 341 Categories eege reiini i 327 A ES 167 Center Color isso desidia 167 Cte Mode sirenita ia 205 Changing PLC Diets E 459 E 459 Characters Edition daa 304 Characters cursando 304 Check Firmware VNeraiong 364 Clear Butter 256 Clear Event List 384 CMS aid 390 Clock Synchronization 482 TEE 200 A ebe ee e 320 Color BOXES oooocccccncononononononocncnoananonononcnnnns 474 E e E 150 322 Col iii 234 236 Column Men 301 Comm Port NN 216 Comm Port 216 Comm Time Out 216 Command Men 188 Command Menu ACCESS cocccccccnononanonononnnns 207 Command Response Word s es 376 Commande 205 330 Communication Parameters cconnnnononnnc 313 Communications Number KEE 269 Communications Number 269 Communications Parameters Setup 194 Compatibility ooooonconnncnincniccnonnconnconncnnacananns 271 Compatibility Information 0 0 ee 398 Compatibility Issues eee eeeseeeseeeeeees 497 Complex Recipe Example eee 452 COMPONENUS ss
327. ick Menus Tooltips Getting Help 6 2 2 Menu Bar The menu bar across the top of the Designer screen lists the pull down menus available in Designer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 349 EXOR Tech note These include File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window and Help Each of these menus and the commands contained under them are described in the reference material Designer SYG dpr Page 1 JN JIL x CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 8 x D G lle sl e Q eist A Smg re 133 X Ol a AA E iti SEET EE be ze 3 Pages E AR a EE oes loo Gan NA A E lola E 1 Page 1 AN OO DOOR OO NO GE O OM O ROO RE ma E9 1 3 Special Pages Se D A O EMIIR Menu Bar D E es ns Bs ee eee re ney tr en Ea Pra Var tar ET A e OE E Le A ak T ED a a EE E O A E O T E 2 amp Gs Am OP s fi EEES e HA iii S S layer Ja Pg 1 1 mo 0 DEMO Controller 5 0x0 Default P A Designer menu may also be present on the toolbar Depending upon the selections made under the Windows menu the Designer menu may appear at the top of the individual project screen rather than with the other menu selections across the top of the Designer screen Various features will be enabled disabled depending on the panel model and firmware version of the panel that you have selected for the project When you start a new project t
328. ile menu Close the file by selecting Exit from the File menu Connect the computer to the operator panel that is designated as the first client and download the project Note The panel may need to be attached to the network through its PLC port depending upon the network port selected for the client in the project Continued in Creating a Project File for the Second Client 7 4 52 Creating the Project File for the Second Client Continued from Creating the Project File for the First Client Repeat steps 1 through 11 Click on the Import button in the Network Configuration dialog box Select the file created in step 21 and click Open The controller information is copied into this new file Check the Enable UniNET Network button Click OK to close the Network Configuration dialog box Click the Finish button to complete the network setup process and close the Network Selection dialog box Create a page for the application Type some text on the page then insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII Use the cursor to outline an area for the data field In the Numeric Field Properties dialog box click on the Range tab Set the Access as Read Write Click OK Save the file by selecting Save from the File menu Close the file by selecting Exit from the File menu Connect the computer to the operator panel that is designated as the second client and download the project Tn179 05 doc 12
329. ility This flag will be checked for panels that support this firmware download feature Firmware Download may be enabled manually from the Settings index tab within the Panel Setup dialog box for certain situations Manual settings are necessary when a real panel is not physically connected to the PC and a Get Panel Resources command cannot be executed 4 6 36 Recipe Backup Enables Disables the recipe backup inside the internal FLASH memory This is used by the Recipes and Events Backup macro 4 6 37 Touch Screen When touch screen is not enabled the display window can be scrolled down to line 32 When touch screen is enabled the display window has the same size as the panel display and cannot be scrolled 4 6 38 Update PLC References When the UniOP panel supports referencing the data field min max range settings to a memory location in the controller PLC Reference this field determines the field update rules If this field is checked the PLC Reference will be updated continuously otherwise they will be updated only when the page is activated 4 6 39 Memory Type Can be FLASH for UniOP models with internal memory only or SSFDC for UniOP models with a removable SSFDC memory card 4 6 40 Project Memory Internal memory reserved for project file 4 6 41 Trend Buffers Memory assigned to trend buffer can be set here The trend buffer size parameter can be increased decreased with step of 32k 4 6 42 Recipe Size Internal memo
330. ill appear explaining the conflict and the action taken Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 267 E SD BR Tech note 4 7 15 Parity Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer 4 7 16 Stop Bits Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer 4 7 17 Use Modem Check the box if communication with the panel is to be via modem 4 7 18 Baud Rate This option specifies the baud rate to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer 4 7 19 Transfer 4 7 20 Transfer Ports Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibility with version 1 4 Slag ae aod Recipe Unload Iw Compress graphics Upload Original Data IM Update Firmware C Upload Modified Data Communications e Number of retries P Cancel Help The Transfer tab contains commands pertaining to communications between your PC and the UniOP panel These include Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 268 EXOR Tech note Start Program After Download Compress Graphics Communications Number of Retries External Memory Types Update Firmware Memory Location for Project and Recipe Upload 4 7 21 Start Program After Download Automatically starts a program on a panel after download 4 7 22 Compress Graphics Compresses graphics during transfer This makes for faster communications but can have a detrimental ef
331. indow Arrange Icons arranges the visible icons in an orderly manner Close All Closes all currently open windows File Identification gives the file names of the files in the currently open windows 4 8 62 Help Menu 4 8 63 Help Menu The Help menu contains helpful information about the Tag Editor You can search the contents for information about various commands within the tag editor or you can view information about the Tag Editor application 4 8 64 Contents Lists the contents of the Tag Editor help text 4 8 65 About TagEdit Provides basic version and copyright information about the Tag Editor application Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 296 E XS DR Tech note 4 8 66 Font Editor 4 8 67 Font Editor Font Editor File Edit Font Fil Row Golumn Width Options Help Character code 0 AA ea eae Height 8 Width 6 The Font Editor lets you modify the downloadable font of semi graphical displays Each font consists of 256 characters that can be edited or changed This lets you create any necessary characters for a particular project In most cases you would not want to edit any of the standard characters such as letters numbers large character blocks or bargraph blocks The Font Editor has its own menus and toolbar The characters of the currently selected font are displayed across the bottom of the Font Editor screen Click on a character to display it in the Font Editor window The Font E
332. indow Help l x bs Ba y J cal rea D AN Wi oo NS gt E H Fibergl FumeExh P E pi Pp BS eil Si El Fume Regenerative Fant Ei Exhast MR 0 A Graphics b ke Ee e a E leet Ja Po 1 1 X 80 Y 105 DEMO Controller 15 Oxo Default EZ The project workspace can display commonly used bitmap graphics that can be easily imported into a project Click on the Graphics tab at the bottom of the workspace to view the graphics selections Select a category of graphic blowers pipes tanks etc from the pull down list at the top of the workspace Commonly used graphics for that class of item will be shown in the workspace Simply click on the selected item and drag it over to the place on the project page where it is to be inserted As the graphic is dropped into place the Bitmap Settings dialog box appears so that any necessary changes can be made to the graphic Upon clicking OK the graphic will appear on the project page Should any further changes be necessary click on the graphic once to select it if it is not already selected then right click on the graphic and select Edit to go to the Bitmap Editor Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 344 l x 0 amp a 8 amp amp fro jeall x sara RS KS A kh bo 2 gt A E amp Case Meter3 Side Meter 1 Side Meter 2 a a O S a Pressure Fancy Gau
333. ine of the Designer main window shows the Double protocol string in the place where the driver name string is displayed in the single protocol case Limited space does not allow displaying both names 0 Double protocol 1 800x600 If at least one of the drivers is a serial driver the decision which Driver will be set as the First and which one the Second is not completely unimportant The First Driver will use the PLC port and the Second Driver will use the PC Printer port So if one of drivers is using the current loop it will be necessary to make it the First Driver and so ensure it uses the PLC port because the current loop capability is only implemented on this serial port Also as the PC Printer and the PLC port connectors are of different genders selecting the First and the Second Driver smartly can make cabling easier and less expensive The Configure Controller dialog box shows the port assignment resulting from the configuration Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 369 E AS DR Tech note 7 2 3 Controllers Setup The Configure Controller menu option always displays the Configure Controllers Dialog Box Configure Controllers r Controller Mode 7 OK External controller only Internal controller only Cancel Internal External controllers Help Enable Double protocol Controller 1 PLE pot Select protocol Modbus RTU Controller 2 PC Printer port JOmonFINS SER ss sss
334. ing Panels in the Ethernet Network Pick Panel will search the network for UniOP panels and will show them in a list Note that Pick Panel will not show all network nodes but only UniOP panels Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 480 EXOR Tech note xi FE ees Physical Address a 00 30 D8 00 05 B2 58 Operation 192 168 0 og 00 30 D8 01 05 FD z Configuration x Ces For each panel in the list Pick Panel will show IP Address It is the IP address assigned to the panel If no IP address has been assigned to the panel this field will show 0 0 0 0 Physical Address It is the MAC identification number of the Ethernet interface in the panel This is a fixed parameter and it is unique for each panel Hw Hardware type of the panel This is not enough to identify the panel model but it is a useful information Mode Current operating mode of the panel It can be either Configuration or Operation 7 12 13 Changing the Operating Mode of Panels Using Pick Panel you can change the operating mode of the panel you have selected You can Switch to Configuration Mode If the panel is in Operation Mode it will be changed to Configuration Mode This command is only available using Ethernet and is not available using serial communication with the panel Changing the panel to Configuration Mode may take a few seconds Switch to Operation Mode If the panel is in Configuration Mode and if it contains
335. ing the Edit Macro button each trigger can be assigned macros from the list schedule at specific time as shown below Time scheduler triggers E o xi Triggers ZC Edit macro Trigger Define Edit Macro Command Commands PERE 21 07m Z EA O Togale relay _ Delete Append Cancel E C Insert Help OK Cancel Help Time Tab Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 258 EXOR Tech note From the Time tab it is possible to specify any of the following trigger type Yearly Weekly Daily Hourly Single Shoot Every Interval time Enable Tab From the Enabled tab it is possible to define the time window when the trigger is enabled By default the Enable checkbox is not checked the trigger is always enabled When the Enabled check box is checked the trigger is enabled only inside the time windows specified inside this dialog box x x Edit macro Time Enable Triggers Trigger V Enable m The trigger is active only during the below period V After Tuesday October 07 2003 y IV After 4 46 52PM Before 1 46 52AM Cancel Help After Date Before Date When only the after date and the before date are checked the trigger is active only inside the two defined days After Time Before Time hen only the after time and the before time are checked the trigger is active all days but only
336. ins with BoxChars You will need to specify the eight character codes that make up the rectangle These codes need to be entered in scanline order left to right top to bottom of the rectangle So you would first start with the top left corner of the rectangle extending across the top You would then go to the top left corner and extend down Next go to the top right corner and extend down Finally you would go to the bottom of the rectangle Rectangle Characters Style Help Character Code 218 The above dialog box is used to define each of the eight characters that make up a rectangle To get an explanation about the function of any part of the dialog box position the mouse over the area and click the left mouse button 4 8 85 Large Characters Large Character Start Code Enter large character start code mo Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 302 EXOR Tech note The large character set must be kept continuous The Large Character Start Code dialog box in the Font Editor identifies the starting character in a large character set Note This starting character is not the same for every font Note The characters in the sequence must have a predetermined shape Characters that are larger than the standard panel character set are composed algorithmically from the set of specially shaped characters shown below You must maintain this exact sequence of shapes in order to introduce large characte
337. inserted and how they are positioned 4 6 176 Height The height in inches of the header or footer 4 6 177 Fields Fields The list of fields to be included in the header or footer such as the time and date the page number the report name or a label which lets you enter static text To add a field to the list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 233 EXOR Tech note select an entry from the Field Type list Add and Delete buttons are available You can also specify row column alignment and argument parameters for headers and or footers Field Type A list of predefined fields available for insertion into a header or footer Selecting the field type Label activates the Argument entry box where the label text may be inserted Add Clicking on the Add button inserts the item currently displayed in the Field Type list into the list of Fields to be included in a header or footer Delete Clicking on the Delete button removes the currently selected item from the list of Fields to be included in a header or footer Row The number of the row where the currently selected items in the Fields list will be inserted into the header or footer Column The number of the column where the currently selected items in the Fields list will be inserted into the header or footer This option is only available when the alignment is set as Custom Align The alignment for the header or footer Choices include Left Center Right an
338. intellectual property laws and treaties The Designer SOFTWARE is licensed not sold 3 10 2 Grant of License With this License EXOR grants you the non exclusive right to use the Designer SOFTWARE in accordance with the following terms You may install use access display run or otherwise interact with RUN one copy of the Designer SOFTWARE on a single computer workstation COMPUTER The primary user of the COMPUTER on which the Designer SOFTWARE is installed may make a second copy for his or her exclusive use on a portable computer You may also store or install a copy of the Designer SOFTWARE on a storage device such as a network server used only to RUN the Designer SOFTWARE on your other COMPUTERS over an internal network however you must acquire and dedicate a license for each separate COMPUTER on which the Designer SOFTWARE is RUN from the storage device A license for the Designer SOFTWARE may not be shared or used concurrently on different COMPUTERS The initial licensee of the of the Designer SOFTWARE may make a one time permanent transfer of this License and the Designer SOFTWARE only directly to an end user This transfer must include all of the Designer SOFTWARE including all component parts the media and printed materials and this License The transferee of such one time transfer must agree to comply with the terms of this License including the obligation not to further transfer this License and the Designer SOFTWAR
339. ionary the PLC address for the tag will be updated in the project If the tag name does not exist the address information will be set to default address of the PLC After all fields have been checked a dialog box will be displayed listing the tag names that were not found in the new dictionary and set to default address The idea behind changing the tag dictionary is to let you switch tag dictionaries for similar PLCs or PLCs that use the same tag names For example if you have two different PLCs that use the same PLC program you can change the tag dictionary in the project and Designer will automatically update the addresses for the tags in the project An example of using the tag validation feature is provided 4 6 232 Trend Buffers 4 6 233 Trend Buffers Trending is divided into two main parts trend acquisition and trend viewer The acquisition module is responsible for collecting the data into a database This is configured using the Configure Trend Buffers dialog box accessed by selecting Trend Buffers from the Project menu The trend viewer is responsible for displaying the data from this database in a graphical format This is configured using the Trend Window command from the Insert menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 250 21 xi ES JA General Sampling Name 3 myTrendButfer Type All Pages 1 C Current Page C On Page Size Samples 50 Bytes Sample 2
340. ionivnsn ica 40 Num Colors cada 315 NA cavvssussnsdevcedancessnsisevamnere 328 Num Comm Retries o ae 216 Multipage Configuration eee eee 446 Number Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 503 Dan Guages ege ressis easiness kss 248 UA AE 81 Parameter Pets 185 A re seed EEGEN 81 O geed seve 185 NUMDET ssiesreroeioerce kesin darla 248 Number Redials A 274 Numeric ASCH Data Fields eee 44 Numeric Data Field Example 72 O dl Ee 345 Objects Fobia daria 29 Objects Font Effect 30 Objects Font Font 29 Objects Font Sample ee eee eeeeseeneeenees 30 Objects Font Script eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 30 Objects Font Size oo eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaees 30 Objects Font Ste 29 Objects Libraries ninsis 472 Old Panel Models ReCOgN tION c ccoconocccoccconnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnos 195 Old Panel Modelle 195 Only Show Active Layer 41 Only When Variable Not 256 Opinado iio 17 Operation mode htm io A cose acetone tates 276 Operation mode htm n 276 Opt isaac da 266 Options Men 301 On Msn ida dz oil 164 QUtpUtisancoradaaro lemas 225 Output Reference ooooonocnnocnnccconnconncnnnananannss 226 Ovalada 147 P PAGE cnica 183 242 254 370 Page Listas ge eessen ees 184 Page MENU E 182 Page Modericiiociconnnitics diles list n 187 Page Objects AAA eg eEaegedk Age erc 360 Page ObIECIES cccccoicnaciocinncesoiiac cisnes ricardo 360 Page OPtODS senine eroen 183 Page Request Register 431 Page Separator cocooccnnccnnocononcnon
341. ired to assign a new tag dictionary for the new PLC driver Designer will then iterate through the list of tags in the project and replace the field address associated with the tag with the address information found from the new dictionary The field address associated with each tag will then be validated based on the new dictionary If the tag name does not exist in the new dictionary the address information for the tag will be set to a default address of the new PLC With this approach it is possible to change from one PLC driver to another PLC driver without having to reset the tag name for each field as long as the tag dictionaries for each driver contain the same tag names 7 9 15 Tag Example 7 9 16 Tag Example This tag example is composed of four parts Setting Up a Tag Dictionary Configuring a Project to Use Tags Tag Validation and Testing Tag Validation 7 9 17 Setting Up a Tag Dictionary Note If you already have a tag database and dictionary you may skip to step 4 Select Tag Editor from the Tools menu The Tag Editor application opens Select File New from the Tag Editor to create a new tag database Enter a name for the new database specify its location and click OK The database you just created appears in the Tag Editor workspace Right click on the new database and select New Dictionary or select New Dictionary from the File menu Enter a name for the new tag dictionary in the Tag Dictionary box Select the co
342. is command to switch the operator panel to Data Entry Mode Command code 17 Two parameters are required by this command Parameter 0 Index Number of required Page 1 max page number in project file Parameter 1 Index Number of required Data Field 1 max number of data fields in the page After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below fo OK Error Illegal page number has been requested Error Illegal field number has been requested Error Panel is not ready for Data Entry Mode 7 3 21 Request Masked Data Entry Mode The controller can use this command to switch the operator panel to Data Entry Mode using masked data entry This is similar as Request Data Entry command Paragraph 1 CommandWord 0x0011 but Numeric Keypad is shown if touch panel is used Command code 21 Two parameters are required by this command Index Number of required Page 1 max page number in project file Parameter 1 Index Number of required Data Field 1 max number of data fields in the page Parameter 2 Flags BO masked data entry B1 B15 reserved 0 After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 381 XOR Tech note IN OK 0 7 3 22 Password Status The controller can use this command to request information abo
343. is not achieved 4 7 43 Number Redials Set the number of automatic redials 4 7 44 Get Panel Resources Before beginning work on a particular project you need to specify the type of display that the target panel contains The physical size of the screen as well as its type backlight LCD passive color must be specified Failure to do this accurately may result in the loss of text and data whenever an attempt is made to download a project file to the panel The Get Panel Resources feature is provided to help set the parameters for the target panel quickly or to determine unknown information about the connected panel This option may be selected from the Transfers menu by clicking on the Get Panel Resources icon in the toolbar or by pressing the F4 button In order to use this feature the target panel must be connected to the PC and the panel must be in Configuration Mode Upon selecting this item Designer will attempt to retrieve the connected panel s configuration za o Double Protocol Support Copy resources to current project When successful the following information is displayed Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 274 EXOR Tech note Event ist ength Number of events that can be stored in Eventlist Color display Ifthe panel contains a color display Touchscreen present code If the panel has a touchscreen and the internal code if present Pixel Vector Graphics If the panel is capable of
344. is recommended for advanced users The installation procedure will create a program group entitled Designer within Windows A Designer icon will be added to your desktop Designer also appears on the Windows start menu under Start Programs Designer 3 6 Connecting the Panel to the PC Your UniOP panel should be set up according to the instructions in the UniOP Installation amp Operation Guide However most panels are quite simple to set up General setup instructions include Place the panel on a stable surface Connect one end of an appropriate connection cable to the appropriate port on the panel Connect the other end of the connection cable to the appropriate port on the computer Connect one end of the power cable to the panel Connect the other end of the power cable to the power source If the panel was never programmed before it should power up in Configuration Mode Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 12 EXOR Tech note See Panel Setup for information on how to initialize and set up the panel 3 7 How to Report a Bug The Designer development team is proud to present a high quality program with minimal bugs Despite their best efforts however bugs do occasionally appear in the software Should you notice a problem with the software that you think may be a bug please report it to techsupp exorinternational net Please include as much information as possible including a description of the irregular
345. is screen so that the panel user can always get out of Data Entry Mode 4 5 29 Command Menu This is the menu that appears when the panel user presses the Enter key on a touchscreen panel and holds it for a period of three to four seconds In the case of the keyless touch panel this menu will appear whenever the user presses any area of the screen where there is no touch cell configured You will not be able to write in the two topmost lines The reason for this is that the panel reserves this area for the Command Menu itself 4 5 30 System This page will appear when the System option is selected in the Panel Command Menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 188 EXOR Tech note This page allows the panel user to adjust the contrast or brightness on some panels and to see if there are good communications between the panel and the controller 4 5 31 Password This page is displayed when the panel user selects Passwords from the Panel Command Menu 4 5 32 Direct Access This page is in essence a snapshot of the controller s memory This page will show all of the memory locations contained within the controller This menu can only be accessed when using a panel that contains a 16 line display or a 25 line display 4 5 33 Direct Page Selection In this menu you can scroll through a list of page names and select the page to be displayed With this option it is possible to see every page of a project file even if the
346. is the data sent to the controller Similarly only when the UniOP panel is explicitly asked to read the data from the controller is the data actually read from the controller Working with Recipes Inserting Recipe Data Fields Configuring Recipe Parameter Sets Recipes and Control Variables Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 433 EXOR Tech note Recipes and the Keyboard Macro Editor Recipe Menu Recipes and the Interlock Mailbox Multipage Recipe Support Recipes and Events Backup in Flash Recipe Examples 7 8 2 Working with Recipes Setting up a recipe although not particularly complex does involve several steps These include Inserting recipe data fields Configuring recipe data fields Creating a Recipe Menu Programming the Recipe Menu using the Keyboard Macro Editor Downloading the recipe to the panel 7 8 3 Inserting Recipe Data Fields Before any other recipe actions can take place a recipe data field must exist in a project To add a recipe data field use Insert Data Fields to add a Numeric ASCII Bargraph or Message Data Field and set the Reference type as Recipe Before a recipe can be configured a recipe data field must be inserted into a project Recipe data fields can be added to a page from the Data Fields submenu under the Insert menu From the Data Fields submenu select either Numeric ASCII Bargraph or Message From the Data Field Properties dialog box you can specify that the data field
347. is will show the list of variables that have already been defined The meaning of these variables can be found inside the trend viewer Recipe Event Backup Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 57 IN XOR Tech note Data Field Properties KE 2 x Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Recipe E vent backup H E E KP Data Format BYTE Bin DI OK Cancel Help Cancel ve On some UniOP panels it is possible to back up recipe data and the event list into flash memory inside the UniOP Even if the UniOP panel loses power AND the backup battery is discharged or missing the recipe data and the event list will be preserved Please note that selecting this feature uses memory within the UniOP panel that is normally reserved for the project file Therefore the amount of memory available for the project file is reduced by the amount of memory reserved for the entire backup of both recipe data and the event list which is 128 KB When this feature is enabled recipes are copied to flash memory automatically from the UniOP after any recipe backup or recipe upload operation The event list is copied to flash memory any time one event happens A new macro can be used to perform a manually backup operations During the write operation to flash memory the panel LED 65 will flash to indicate that a write operation is in progress Some UniOP panels do not have thi
348. isplay the time in stage 2 enter the address DB10 DW7 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Click on entry 1 in the Selector list The memory location for entry 1 changes to DB10 DW7 To display the time in stage 3 enter the address DB10 DW8 into the Address Reference portion of the dialog box Click on entry 2 in the Selector list The memory location for entry 2 changes to DB10 DW8 The dialog box will resemble that shown below Indirect Addressing Fields Sq Selector DB10 DWO Sr Deng B 1 DB10Dw E 2 DB10DwS8 Data Block fio Rb 8 fommows WORD Bin Dey aati pte je ll Dir Click OK to return to the Numeric Field Properties dialog box Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the project page where Is now appears under the Time label placeholders Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 67 Cancel Apply Help The Text tab allows you to set the font size and color and the background color and transparency of a data item Designer will not let you select a size that is too large to be displayed in the designated area If Transparent is selected then text background colors are not available 4 4 16 Range 4 4 17 Range tab Numeric Field Properties General Text Range Scaling Attributes Access C ReadOnly Read write Range Mm e Constant Reference 32768 S Limit 32768 Max Constant Reference 32767 Jet 32767 DK Cance
349. itch from one tag dictionary referring to one set of PLC addresses to a different dictionary referring to different set of PLC addresses in the same controller and update all the fields in the project without needing to update the individual PLC addresses used in the whole project Also you can switch from one tag dictionary referring to Controller A to a different dictionary referring to controller B and update all the fields in the project without updating the individual PLC addresses used in the whole project This feature can also validate the PLC addresses used in a project with respect to the PLC addresses used in the tag dictionary and finds and lists any discrepancy items with all details such as location etc This feature supports updating the tag database with regard to PLC Address used in the project and updating the project field with regard to PLC Address used in the tag dictionary See also Changing PLC Drivers Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 458 EXOR Tech note 7 9 14 Changing PLC Drivers A tag name represents an address for a particular PLC As such when the PLC Driver is changed in the project the tag dictionary and the tag names must be invalidated To minimize the impact of changing the PLC driver Designer will attempt to match the tag names from the previous dictionary to the tag names in the new dictionary associated with the new PLC driver When the PLC Driver is changed you will be requ
350. ith a touch cell Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 119 E AS UR Tech note 4 4 115 Button The memory location that the push button affects can be set up in the Button section The Ref entry box shows the currently selected memory location Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box which lets you select the exact memory location to be written to You also have the option to disable the cyclic refresh 4 4 116 Layout Note This page is used to show the Layout tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties 4 k 21x General Layout Attributes Custom ed aa Label Font Fixed Custom Font Text E Text Bkgd Je Transparent Line Cd Bkad V Transparent Off ly On Cancel Help The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in which you wish to work The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cel
351. ity the type of PC and panel that you have any other software that was running when the problem occurred and the sequence of steps that led to the problem 3 8 Technical Support For questions about the Designer software contact EXOR by sending an email to the following address techsupp exorinternational net 3 9 Contact Information EXOR world wide locations are listed hereafter EXOR Electronic R amp D Inc 10150 International Blvd Cincinnati OH 45246 USA http www exor rd com EXOR GmbH Haus Gr newald 1 42653 Solingen Germany http www exor de Sitek SpA Via Monte Fiorino 9 San Giovanni Lupatoto VR 1 37057 Italy techsupp sitek it Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 13 EXOR Tech note 3 10 Designer Software License This is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and EXOR for the Designer SOFTWARE which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and on line electronic documentation By installing copying downloading accessing or otherwise using the Designer SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms of this License If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement do not install or use the Designer SOFTWARE you may however return it to your place of purchase for a full refund 3 10 1 SOFTWARE LICENSE The Designer SOFTWARE is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other
352. kbox is not marked otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed while Off indicates the color that the touch cell will be when it is in the not pressed state 4 4 96 Attributes Note This page is used to show the Attribute tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties 3 2x General Layout Attributes Custom Attributes Name kg Lauer aei gececcscesccesse Visible T Disabled T Blink on Touch 7 Non Printable Reverse on Touch M Non Scrollable Cancel Help When the button is pressed you can set it to Blink or for the colors to Reverse 4 4 97 Custom Note This page is used to show the Custom tab for all the Touch Cells Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 110 EXOR Tech note Panel Key Button Properties E ki x Gene
353. kground color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell On shows the color that the touch cell will be when it is pressed while Off indicates the color that the touch cell will be when it is in the not pressed state 4 4 117 Attributes Note This page is used to show the Attribute tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties E Axl General Layout Attributes Custom Attributes Name Jo Layer ae Disabled T Blink on Touch IT Non Printable Reverse on Touch IT Non Scrollable Cancel Help When the button is pressed you can set it to Blink or for the colors to Reverse Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 121 EXOR Tech note 4 4 118 Custom Note This page is used to show the Custom tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties f ki x General Layout Attributes Custom State On Edit Load Image Handling Resample When Sizing use for detailed images Cancel Help
354. king to dock the workspace against any of the four sides of the application If the check box is removed then the workspace will act as a mini window which can be placed anywhere and resized On the other hand clicking Float in main window causes the workspace to occupy the entire application window and minimize the graphics view 4 3 9 Full Screen The Full Screen command in the View menu and the Full Screen icon enlarges the Designer screen to occupy the full screen size A small toolbar remains on the screen with Full Screen Zoom In and Zoom Out icons to let you easily select other viewing options Clicking on the Full Screen icon again takes Designer out of Full Screen view Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 34 E AS DR Tech note 4 3 10 Graphics Library 4 3 11 Graphics Library Manager The Graphics Library Manager dialog box provides an easy way to work with graphics libraries Graphics Library Manager ajax ae Project E switcOO1 Name switch3_ Size fi 99 199 E Project i Image Project switch3_ The dialog box has three tabs Project shows the graphics libraries currently used in the project Library shows the graphics libraries currently installed and accessible to Designer Disk allows to work with file system to load save graphic files Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 35 IN XOR Tech note 4 Wi 12
355. l Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a touch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 120 EXOR Tech note Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Bac
356. l Apply Help OK Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 68 EXOR Tech note The Range tab lets you specify whether access to the project will be read only or if read write access will be allowed If read write access is allowed then you can also specify the minimum and maximum value range 4 4 18 Access This determines if the data field is to be read only or read write Keep in mind that if read only is selected the field can only monitor the data in the controller If read write is selected you can monitor data in the controller as well as write data to the controller 4 4 19 Range Minimum and maximum values can be configured for the read write field only These are lower and upper bounds to the data If a value occurs outside of this range asterisks will appear on the panel and the previous value of the field will be displayed It is possible to attach the minimum and maximum values to memory locations in the controller When dynamic references are required for the minimum maximum values then select Reference under Range Upon doing so the Data Field Properties dialog box appears allowing you to specify the memory location Note Once you have decided to use dynamic variable references for the min max values all the variables associated with the dynamic references must be assigned to memory locations in the controller When using dynamic variable references for the min max limit settings you can select how the
357. l as its type backlight LCD passive color Note In order to use the Get Panel Resources feature the target panel must be connected to the PC the transfer parameters must be correctly set and the panel must be in Configuration Mode 6 3 10 Panel Setup 6 3 11 Panel Setup After using the Get Panel Resources feature it is recommended to verify the panel settings Select Panel Setup from the Project menu or click on the Panel Setup icon in the toolbar This brings up the Panel Setup dialog box where you can configure the software for the panel that you are using You can verify the panel model memory and firmware version specify the time and date format that the panel will display identify the address of an Ethernet board if one is in use specify communication settings set the panel up for remote passthrough set time out periods and set panel upload protection if necessary Panel Model Panel Time Date Settings Passthrough Settings Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 357 EXOR Tech note Miscellaneous Panel Settings 6 3 12 Panel Setup After using the Get Panel Resources feature it is recommended to verify the panel settings Select Panel Setup from the Project menu or click on the Panel Setup icon in the toolbar This brings up the Panel Setup dialog box where you can configure the software for the panel that you are using You can verify the panel model memory and firmware version specify the tim
358. l jpg BY BABEL JPG LEF brfamialia jpg annunci2 jpg w BACKGR BMP ES Bv11 JPG ANTSY ipg W bear bmp E Bv2 IPG EY Billbora ipg W c b Football bmp Y blessing bmp Y calendar bmp Y Files of type Supported Image Formats y Cancel Check the Preview box to view files before selection Select the filename that is to be used and click on Open The Bitmap Settings dialog box shown below appears From this dialog box you can change the name of the file and change its appearance Click OK Bitmap Settings Image Panel Dither D Floyd Steinberg Coat ro a ee Smooth 7 Invert T Sharpen J Flip IT Blur Mirror Preview IV Size to Fit Reset The graphic appears in the upper left corner of the project page You can then move it to the desired position on the project page or resize it To move a graphic simply single click the left mouse button over the graphic and move it to the desired location To resize a graphic single click the left mouse button once on the graphic and use one of the selection handles that will appear To duplicate or copy a graphic within the same page hold the Ctrl key down and click on the graphic Drag the duplicated graphic to a new location and release the mouse button To delete a bitmap graphic click on the graphic to select it and either press the Delete key or click on the Cut tool Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 178 E AS D B
359. lable Modify Dynamic Graphic Frame is enabled when a user clicks on a frame that contains a dynamic graphic Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame is enabled when a dynamic graphic has been selected and is displayed in the Panel Original tabs When the Replace Dynamic Graphic Frame icon is clicked the dynamic graphic currently displayed in the Panel Original tabs is inserted into the currently selected frame to replace the current contents of the frame Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 98 EXOR Tech note Delete Dynamic Graphic Frame is enabled when a user selects a non empty dynamic graphic frame Clicking on the Delete Dynamic Graphic Frame icon removes the dynamic graphic from that frame A number of familiar Windows commands are available in the Dynamic Graphics dialog box These include Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete and Insert Folder An additional icon is available to edit the Properties of dynamic graphics including Image and Panel properties Image The Image tab of the dynamic graphics Properties box lets you change image properties such as the type of dither the contrast and brightness to smooth sharpen or blur the image to invert flip or mirror the image or to size the image to fit the preview box Close the box by clicking on the X in the upper right corner to accept the changes The Reset button returns the graphic to the default settings Panel The Panel tab of the dynamic graphics Properties box let
360. lds instructions on setting up your project to generate a printed report and how to upload and download your project 6 2 Designer Screen 6 2 1 Designer Screen The Designer software presents a screen that has elements familiar to anyone used to H Thi Windows based software Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 348 Designer SYG dpr Page 1 SE 10 xl CA File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help 8 x H LS A E Page 1 y QQ ss a ma FE x xi M svc E Ey Pages EI 1 Page 1 Special Pages y Gr gOb E Pr He bx As es E 4 En Z 2 4 Kei Je Default A Pg 1 1 moO 0 DEMO Controller 7 0x0 H il i A title bar across the top of the screen shows the program file name and page number Below the title bar is a menu bar with pull down menus Below the menu bar are toolbars with various icons that are shortcuts to commonly used commands A workspace in the lower left provides a project overview The project screen in the lower right is the working area where project pages are viewed during development As is common for Windows H based software there are Minimize Maximize and Close buttons in the top right corner The appearance of Designer may be customized to your particular needs by using the commands in the View menu Menu Bar Toolbars Workspace Project Screen Status Bar Right Cl
361. ler s I Os on the UniOP panel and also can send commande to the connected Controller s The UniOP contains a software simulated Demo Controller that allows the development and testing of applications even when real Controllers are not available To the Quick Start Tutorial 2 2 Quick Start Tutorial Connect the programming cable from the PC to the panel Connect the controller s communication cable to the panel Locate the Designer icon on your PC desktop and click on it Designer 6 Once the Designer is open create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu Give the new project a name select a file location New Project E x Projects Project name Location Cy Project Of Cancel Help and click OK Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 3 ES UH Tech note Select Project Configure Controller Configure Controllers ES Enable Double protocol A DK Controller 1 AB D I E c ancel Help The currently selected controller is displayed Click on the button to select a different driver if necessary Select Controller Current Driver A B DF1 AB DFI D32Uplc010 DLL ce E ro gop eee ates oo GEI sor me April JBUS 400 D32Uplc102DLL 5 01 Atos 4 00 D32Uplc068 DLL 5 01 Controller Setup BCM Passive D32Uplc081 DLL Current Driver DEMO Controller Cancel BCM Passive D32Uplc081 DLL BR
362. lications can also be found in Designer This familiar interface style helps new users to quickly learn the Designer software A completed project file of format dpr contains all the information needed to display your page images and controller data values in the formats you selected while creating your project file The panel hardware will handle all of the underlying communications necessary to transfer data to and from the controller leaving you free to concentrate on the appearance and functionality of your data and display pages Note Depending on the particular configuration of your project one or more additional files may be necessary to convey all the necessary information about a project These additional files may contain information about Keypad Designer UniSSFDC Font Editor Nice Font Editor etc The project file itself may in certain cases not be sufficient to contain all the information necessary to reproduce the application Designer makes it possible to work in a natural and intuitive way using the logic behind your control application to guide you through development You can use Designer to create one Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual vii EXOR Tech note or more display pages that outline and control your applications The multiple page capability of each panel allows any application to be broken down into as many pages as you want depending only on the amount of memory in your target system Completed pr
363. lick OK You may safely download your project Continued under Testing Tag Validation 7 9 20 Testing Tag Validation Continued from Tag Validation If the data field PLC addresses in the project do not match the PLC addresses used in the dictionary the tag validation dialog box appears with a list of the tags having a discrepancy To test this feature simulate the following changes Select Project Configure Tag Dictionaries Click on the entry under Dictionary A list of dictionaries will appear Select a different dictionary Click OK Select Project Tag Validation A list of address discrepancies appears To modify the PLC addresses right click on an item A menu appears allowing you to choose to update the field with database values update the database with field values or copy to a clipboard Select Update Field or Update Database then click OK Select Project Tag Validation again to verify that all tags match Save the project and it may be safely downloaded 7 10 Trends 7 10 1 Trends Trending is divided into two main parts trend acquisition and trend viewing Trend acquisition Project Trend Buffers collects the data into a database The trend viewer Insert Trend Window displays the data from this database in a graphical format Trend Buffer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 461 EXOR Tech note Trend Window Internal Panel Control Variables Trend Macros Trend Printing Mailbox Tr
364. lick OK to confirm the tags and controller information and close the Change Select Tag Dictionary dialog box Create a field or object on the project page such as a Numeric ASCIlI data field a push button or a meter instrument Set the Reference as PLC and click the button to bring up the Data Field Properties dialog box where you can specify the PLC address for the field or object as per the tags from the tag dictionary Click the Enable Tag checkbox Note If the Enable Tag checkbox does not appear in a Data Field Properties dialog box when you wish to use tags start again from step 12 to ensure that the controller is properly set and that tags are enabled in the Tag Dictionary dialog box Select the group and tag To change any tag information click on the Edit Tags button Make the necessary changes and click OK to return to the Data Field Properties dialog box Click OK to close the Data Field Properties dialog box Click OK to close the field or object properties box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 460 E AS UR Tech note Save the project by selecting Save from the File menu Continued under Tag Validation 7 9 19 Tag Validation Continued from Configuring a Project to Use Tags Select Tag Validation from the Project menu If the data field PLC addresses in the project match the PLC addresses used in the dictionary then the message All the tags match with the field address values will appear C
365. lick on the Bitmap icon in the toolbar or select Bitmap from the Insert menu Use the cursor to specify the location of the bitmap image The Bitmap Editor dialog box then appears Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 42 E AS D BR Tech note Bitmap Editor zm xi EIN 5 EEE mee es W O A sliding bar lets you zoom in or out for easier editing Familiar Windows drawing tools are available to create a custom bitmap image On invoking the Foreground color and Transparency color button of Bitmap editor dialog will popup a palette with 16 colors anda More Colors button as shown in the below figures Foreground Color WE Transparency Color E Clear l None EE ER EE EEE EE OB Ui UI Si Ui UI More Colors More Colors On invoking the More Colors button a 256 color palette If 256 colors are supported dialog is shown From the this the user can select the required palette When the mouse is over a particular color box RGB values of the same is shown as tooltip as shown in the following figure Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 43 E AS D BR Tech note Foreground Color 23 Clear lx OOOBDOBEEBEEE OOUOUBDOBEBEBEE ANAND DOME AAN OMA Tira AAAMOOO SES SCOCOssBaoo EENEN NN N n n O BEETA O Doo Aaa O aa ANA DO DOOM ODODO 4 4 4 Data Fields 4 4 5 Data Fields Data fields are those items that the De
366. light the CONFIG selection in the top right hand corner of the menu and press Enter Note If the Enter key is not available touch and hold any open space on the touchscreen panel for several seconds The System Menu should appear listing the Configuration Menu as a selection Use the arrow keys on the panel to select the Configuration Menu Note If Configuration Mode is locked out hold down three 3 arrow keys power the unit down continue holding down the three arrow keys and power the unit back up Make sure that the project file is saved before attempting this Note Another method for accessing Configuration Mode from a touchscreen panel is listed below Please note that not all touchscreen panels are capable of this quick fix Make sure that the project file is saved before attempting this Begin tapping the center of the screen Power the unit down and back up when you power it up continue tapping the center of the screen You should be prompted by the panel to touch a circle on a portion of the screen Follow the panel directions After completing the panel s instructions press the Enter key displayed on the panel This process is sometimes difficult to complete as the touchscreen is particular about the area pressed You may have to do this procedure more than once to get it to work This should activate Configuration Mode Note If a project that uses passwords is locked out of Configuration Mode enter 0007 as the pas
367. links to a particular page are broken 4 5 34 Time and Date This area lets you set the time and date on the panel This information is used in the Alarm List the Event List and whenever you insert time fields or date fields into the project file 4 5 35 Alarm Page This page will appear on the panel whenever there is an active alarm present providing the C2 bit in the RDA is not set If the C2 bit is set the default alarm page will not appear 4 5 36 Event Page This page lists the previous 256 some models up to 1024 events in sequential order on the panel When more than 256 1024 events have occurred the older events will be removed in order to make room for the newer events 4 5 37 Current Page Mode This mode displays the page that you are currently on in the project file This mode is the most often used when editing the project file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 189 EXOR Tech note 4 6 Project Menu 4 6 1 Project Menu This section provides information about the Project menu The Project menu allows you to configure the panel the controller the network and your project to work together seamlessly Commands on the Project menu include Configure Controller Panel Setup Network Setup Panel Controller Interface Report on Panel Printer Keyboard Macro Editor Passwords Alarms Languages Next Language Configure Tag Dictionaries Tag Validation Trend Buffers Memory Use 4 6 2 Configur
368. ll be prompted to enter the number of clients and or servers for your project You will then be prompted to click on the Configure button to bring up the Network Configuration dialog box configured for the number of clients and servers specified Check and set the remaining Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 406 E AS UR Tech note configuration parameters for the network If you choose Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients you will be prompted to click on the Configure button to bring up the Network Configuration dialog box and specify all of the configuration parameters for the network 7 4 38 Network Configuration The parameters for the network are automatically configured if it is selected to be of either the Single Server Multiple Client type or of the Multiple Server Multiple Client same controller types type However Designer lets you make modifications to the network parameters by using the Network Configuration dialog box If you chose Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients you must specify all of the configuration parameters for the network You can use the Import and Export buttons to share network configurations between multiple project files designed for the same network 7 4 39 Advanced Network Programming 7 4 40 Advanced Network Programming The UniNET network fully supports the use of all panel Reserved Data Areas RDA including alarms and mailboxes Recipes may be used in a UniNET network syst
369. lor attributes are interpreted according to the table below C 0 Color Attributes Disabled C 1 Color Attributes Enabled 3 PO o o o a o lo o Lane o to JA Dark vello o Dark Blue o Dark Gyan ooo o Light Gray ro E Lei ro ro o bee pt fo oa SS Note that the Foreground color and the Background color can be independently controlled po po 1 po o 1 O Green po po 1 o o o o UniOP firmware 4 20 or later is required to support dynamic color attributes 4 4 61 256 Color Attributes Panel firmwares 4 30 and greater are supporting the 256 colors mode for the dynamic attributes The 256 colors mode can be enabled by setting to 1 the bit 4 of the LS Byte of the color attribute When this bit is set panel read a double word instead of a word only to retrieve the entire colors information Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 87 E AS DR Tech note When 16Colors is selected on panel setting PLC word 16 Colors palette 1 LS Byte 0 SE ae FG BG CIRJHIB When 256Colors is selected on panel setting PLC dword 16 Colors palette PGT BG CT foley Ry Hey PLC dword 256 Colors palette L Pe TG E E GE Below tables show the correspondence from the color index to use inside the color attribute and the RGB color to show on the panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 88 E AS DR Tech note OP Coos E Colors
370. lor for On and Yellow as the color for Off In the Label box type Push Button Adjust the Font if necessary Click OK The screen should appear similar to the figure below DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help TES DOGO pe fr Jaa zwepseoel 7 m Fei ee A Ai Aa LE ZEISS xi testagain Ey Pages EI 1 Page 1 Special Pages ZS Grap A Obj EI Project Do 141 Boa 8 Col 51 Simatic 5 GE 0x0 Default OVF 4 4 4 120 Illuminated Push Button 4 4 121 Illuminated Push Button The Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box is used to create a touch cell as an illuminated push button The only difference between an illuminated push button and a push button is that the face of the illuminated push button can reflect the status of a bit in the PLC Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 123 E AS D BR Tech note To insert an illuminated push button touch cell click the Illuminated Push Button icon from the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells Illuminated Push Button then use the cursor to define the area in which the illuminated push button touch cell is to be placed The Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of an illuminated push button touch cell may be configured Illuminated Push Button Properties EK y 2 xi General Layou
371. low will appear Press Up Arrow to Update Or wait to leave unchanged Pressing the Up Arrow key will cause the firmware upgrade procedure to start Waiting for 2 seconds without pressing any keys will cause the procedure to abort without substituting the active firmware files 7 1 3 Check Firmware Versions Designer will enable the download features accessible from the Transfers menu when a panel model with the T2000 board is detected Note that this menu item is not visible when the selected panel does not support the download features Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 364 IN XOR Tech note ct Transfers Tools Window Help 7 5 Download F2 3 Upload F3 Download to SSFDC Options Gi Get Pane Resources F4 Check Firmware Versions Star Remote passthrough Dial Hana Up Download features can be enabled manually from the Settings index tab within the Panel Setup dialog box Manual settings are necessary when a real panel is not physically connected to the PC and a Get Panel Resources command cannot be executed Correct setting of the Firmware Download flag is necessary to give Designer the necessary information required to correctly calculate the SSFDC memory used taking into account the size of the firmware files Update firmware E x Firmware type SSFDC Designer Boot 59 450C 01 lt Do not update gt Firmware 58 450C 01 lt Do not u
372. lowing you to define the basic parameters of the keypad The Model Properties dialog box consists of three tabs General Background Panel 4 8 115 General General tab Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 314 IN XOR Tech note Model Properties BS xj General Background Panel Nene Keyboard m Associated Fields iG Decimal Numeric Fielc a Hex Numeric Field Position ASCII Message Avoid field V Absolute coordinates IT Horizontal Left z from Border h Vertical Top he from Border Cancel Apply Help Items on the General tab allow you to specify a name the number of colors the type of associated fields and position information Name The name assigned to the keypad This is used by Keypad Designer to identify different keypads Number of Colors Lets you select the number of colors used to represent the keypad Associated Fields Specifies the types of fields that can be edited using the selected keypad Note A field type i e numeric field with decimal base can have only a single keypad associated with it Position Position The Position area contains the controls used to define where the keypad will appear on the display including Avoid Field Absolute Coordinates Horizontal Position Vertical Position Avoid Field When checked this specifies that the keypad will be displayed in a p
373. lt may be that most of the network traffic will be for RDA updates This may cause an exceedingly slow update time for displayed variables Each UniOP panel may use up to three small reserved areas of controller memory to establish an interface with the controller These three reference areas are Keys Panel and PLC You can select the starting address of each of these areas The figure below illustrates the flow of communication for each of the reserved data areas PLC Memory Sie AAA AA A A lt Keyboard Update lt lt lt Panel Status Update PLC CPU PANEL gt PLC Status Update gt gt Alarm Update GE A memory map of the entire reserved data area is shown below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 424 E AS DR Tech note KEYBOARD UPDATE AREA PANEL STATUS AREA RTC RTC RTC Panel Status Word CONTROLLER UPDATE SRES LED Control LED Control Controller Control Word ALARM UPDATE AREA pits 14 13 12 11 a8 Fe S E A E tbo 10 del e e 1 ez F30 F20 F28 F27 F26 F25 F24 F23 e ele F19 F18 F17 2 7 6 s 4 3 2 4 0 ra 05 e ale jawnfian ien a i16 i 15 14 ic K12 ere ele le ke us ojs es Sc s oo GE o e 0 Mite e 8 H CP Current page 10 Reserved Word 11 Reserved Word 12 Reserved Word 13 Reserved Word 14 PR Page request 1s Jrs esfera ix Jero o fe 7 us us 16 2 122 L21 L2 i eraje
374. mes by using Display Previous Frame Display Next Frame To see the frames in a continuous loop click the Play button The play speed may be set by sliding the indicator or by entering a value in the box Click the Stop button to stop the Play display Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 97 EXOR Tech note Click the Edit button to edit the individual dynamic graphic frames 4 4 75 Edit Dynamic Graphics Edit Dynamic Graphics Dynamic Graphics RK 2 Ioj xl Y B x ar cor GR Ey Graphics e CC Backgrounds No Image Selected Panel A Original Name Sr Su Cancel Ob The Dynamic Graphics dialog box allows users to edit dynamic graphic frame This box can be accessed by clicking the Edit button from the Frames tab of the Dynamic Graphics Properties dialog box Dynamic graphics may be selected from either the library of graphics provided with Designer as shown on the Library tab or from another file on your system as shown on the Disk tab An image selected from either source will appear on the Panel Original tabs where it may be renamed if necessary using the Name field The Original tab displays the image in its original form for reference purposes while the Panel tab displays the image as it will appear on the panel The various frames making up the dynamic graphic are displayed on the right side of the box Three commands are avai
375. mn represent the content of the controller memory The column on the right will represent the content of the first recipe parameter set once the F1 key is pressed Press the F1 key to make the panel start downloading the current recipe parameter set which is parameter set 1 After a few seconds the operation will be completed and the content of the controller memory will show the same values as those that are stored in parameter set 1 7 8 37 Complex Recipe Example Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu or by clicking on the New icon on the toolbar Name the new file and click OK Insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCIl or clicking on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page Select the data field style as Numeric and set the Reference to be Recipe Click on the button to set the Reference value Verify the Data Field Properties settings or change if necessary Click OK Click OK again A data field placeholder will appear using R as a placeholder for the actual recipe values Insert an ASCII data field by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or clicking on the Numeric Field icon on the toolbar Use the cursor crosshairs to define a data box on the page Select the data field style as ASCII and set the Reference to be Recipe Click on the button to set the Reference value Verify the Data
376. mple TSI02 Bus Terminal there is no optical isolation Optical isolation is recommended whenever panels are to be operated in a noisy environment or powered by different power sources A completely optically isolated network can be obtained using a TSIO1 Bus Terminal and Converter for each panel attached to the network Note The network configuration shown in the above figure works even if the controllers are of different model types or if they are of different manufacturer brands Designer allows the user to specify the addresses of the data items added to the project file using controller specific addressing It is also possible to transfer data from one controller to another using the Data Transfer feature supported by the operator panels The transfer of data can be performed even if the controllers are of different manufacturer brands The panels act as bridges connecting different controller worlds 7 4 5 UniNET Technical Data The UniNET network has been designed to pass information between operator interface panels operating on the plant floor The UniNET network features are the following interconnection of up to 32 operator panels multi master capability token passing capability All operator panels connected to the network may initiate a message transfer The network protocol uses a token passing algorithm to determine which initiator has the right to transmit A node holding the token is allowed only one transmission each
377. n PLC Samples are collected from the trend buffer and stored inside the memory of the PLC 4 6 256 Cyclic Samples are taken from the memory of the UniOP on a cyclical basis The cycle time in seconds must be defined 4 6 257 On Control Variable Event Samples are taken one a time when a variable PLC or internal variable changes value Tip Use a counter to trigger the sampling 000 gt 001 gt 002 gt 003 4 6 258 Only When Variable Not 0 When this checkbox is set data will be sampled only when the defined variable does not contain a value of zero Sampling is suspended when the variable contains a value of zero This checkbox can be set with any of the other sampling types 4 6 259 Stop Sampling Use the Stop when buffer is full checkbox to stop the sampling when the trend buffer is full This is a first in first out FIFO buffer Once the buffer is full older sample values will be erased to allow the new sample values to be stored 4 6 260 Clear Buffer 4 6 261 Clear Buffer This option lets you define when to clear the trend buffer Choices include no automatic clear clear on panel startup clear on control variable change and clear when buffer is full 4 6 262 No Automatic Clear The trend buffer is never cleared However if the Stop when buffer is full checkbox is not selected the oldest sample is removed and the newest sample is stored when the buffer is filled Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manu
378. n arrow Click on the arrow to bring up the Data Field Properties dialog box Specify the reference address data type and format etc Click OK to return to the New group dialog box with the logical address and data format information completed Every time you enter information on one line an additional line appears below it Fill in as many lines as you need When you have entered all the information in the New group dialog box select Save As from the File menu to save the dictionary 4 8 43 Delete Dictionary This command deletes the selected dictionary 4 8 44 Record Menu 4 8 45 Record Menu The commands in the Record menu are used to manage the records located in the New group dialog box These commands include Next Record Previous Record Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 292 E SD BR Tech note First Record Last Record Delete Records 4 8 46 Next Record The Next Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog box This command moves you to the next cell 4 8 47 Previous Record The Previous Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog box This command moves you to the previous cell 4 8 48 First Record The First Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog box This command moves you to the first cell 4 8 49 Last Record The Last Record command is used for navigating between cells in the New group dialog
379. n is that the face of the illuminated pushbutton can reflect the status of a bit in the PLC An example of creating an illuminated push button is provided Selector Switch Used for creating a touch cell as a 2 3 or 4 position selector switch An example of creating a selector switch is provided Indicator Light Used for creating an indicator lamp An example of creating an indicator light is provided Generic Command Button Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key i e Enter macro command i e show alarm list or ASCII character An example of creating a generic command button is provided A touch cell can be used to write to a controller Keyboard Macro Editor commands make this an easy task An example of doing this is provided To insert a touch cell click the appropriate touch cell icon on the toolbar or select a type of touch cell from the Touch Cells submenu in the Insert menu then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed A dialog box will appear where the touch cell may be configured 7 Advanced 7 1 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure 7 1 1 Automatic Firmware Upgrade Procedure New UniOP panels that contain the T2000 board are able to accept new firmware files through the serial line or through the SSFDC memory card For these panel models the firmware files can be stored in the SSFDC memory card There are four kinds of firmware files that can be stored in the SSFDC memory card
380. n on the data can convert it with the result being displayed in Fahrenheit With this option any data from the controller can be manipulated however you wish The scaling equation is defined as y A1 A2 x B Where y Scaled value displayed x Controller data value A1 A2 B Scaling operators these are the three entry boxes located within the scaling equation There are two important concepts to understand about scaling First and foremost the scaling operators A1 A2 and B are 16 bit integers Internal calculations are done using 32 bit arithmetic which allows the panel to report a more precise result than if it were using only 16 bit arithmetic Secondly the maximum and minimum fields refer to the scaled value not the value that is in the controller Two examples of using scaling are provided The first is an example in which a user has a Celsius temperature in the controller and wishes to display a Fahrenheit temperature on the UniOP panel The second is an example in which a user has a controller memory location that can range in value from 0 to 4095 Depending upon the value in the controller you may wish to display that value as a percentage of the maximum possible value on the panel 4 4 38 Bargraph Example Assume we want to simulate the fill level of a tank In this case a transparent graphic of a tank could be used along with a bargraph to simulate the fill level The procedure is as follows Click on the Gr
381. n order to return control back to the keys on the panel If this is not done the user will be stuck on that page When the panel detects a page request from the controller it checks the front panel keyboard and the Expanded Keyboard if present If no key has been pressed for the last three seconds the page selected by the controller is displayed While a controller page request is active PR not 0 the operator will not be able to change pages using the arrow keys Note Page numbers are stored in either binary or BCD format depending on the controller being used 7 7 30 Controller Control Word 7 7 31 Controller Control Word The bits of the Controller Control Word are set and reset by the controller according to the application logic The panel responds to these bits as shown in the following table Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 431 E AS D BR Tech note Disable Data Entry Select Alarm Mode C6 C7 Buzzer handling Enable Mailbox 7 7 32 CO Print Screen When bit CO in the Controller Control Word is set the panel sends the currently displayed page to the printer The bit must be reset to O before another print request can be processed Note If the current password enables the user to request printouts the currently displayed page can be printed directly from the front panel by pressing the Prt Scr or 9 PRT keys depending on the panel model 7 7 33 C1 Disable Data Entry When bit C1 in
382. n this case the PLC starting address for each of the different elements can be specified It also lets you enable or disable the individual elements of the RDA A more detailed description of the RDA is available 4 6 116 Keep RDA Continuous Check the Keep RDA continuous box to leave the RDA as a continuous block of memory Specify the PLC address for the start of the RDA by indicating the Reference type and location Note The Keep RDA continuous option is not supported for internal controllers The checkbox should always be always left unchecked when an internal controller is specified 4 6 117 Enable RDA It is not necessary to have a full working knowledge of the reserved data areas to complete a project It is entirely possible to toggle bits in the controller display messages and Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 219 EXOR Tech note controller data edit read write fields etc without having any areas of the RDA enabled For this reason the RDA is disabled by default This also helps to optimize communication between the panel and the controller There are however several functions that are only available through the RDA Note If you are having trouble establishing initial communication with your panel disabling the RDA is recommended Make sure the check box entitled Enable RDA is not checked If it is uncheck it and re download your project 4 6 118 RDA References 4 6 119 RDA References Each UniOP pa
383. n with the current width EZ Designer is distributed with a rich set of predefined objects Objects are a something more than graphic symbols Contrary to plain graphic symbols objects may contain behaviour objects may respond to user actions Example of objects are Buttons Lights Switches etc To use these objects just select one of them from the right category and drag and drop it on the Project Screen If necessary a BitMap Settings dialog box will pop up and allow you to adjust the symbol s graphic attributes to the panel currently selected inside the project Once the object has been put in the Project Screen area if the object is active and possess a given behaviour by right clicking on the standard properties dialog box is displayed as shown here below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 472 IN XO H Tech note Generic Button Properties E 2 x General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action Round Panel Key CH 3D Round C Macro Cmd Rectangle C Ascii Key 3D Rectangle No Graphics Key F1 E E Windows El a windows Cus Enable Indicator RE All Cancel Help By right clicking on the Objects area a set of commands are displayed They are divided into the following categories EDIT COMMANDS Copy Allows to copy the currently selected object into the clip board so that it can be pasted into the Project Screen Paste Allows t
384. ncccnnnc naar nn 257 4 7 Transfers MENU cocinan iii daa dada aida 261 4 7 1 Transfers Men 261 Ae Re ill E 262 E 01510 WEE 263 4 7 4 Download to SSFDC ooonncccccncconocinnncncnoncccnnrcnnnn cn nana cn cnn cnnnnnnnn nn cnn 263 D AO OPUN st tii add leia aa 266 4 7 44 Get Panel ResQurcesS ooconcccconcconocicnncncnoncccnnnnnnnn cn nana cn narran ranma 274 4 7 45 Check Firmware Versions c ccccccccceceeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeenaes 275 4 7 46 Switch to Operation mode ooococonccconiccconcccconnnnnonnnnnoccnnnnn naar nn rn 276 4 7 47 Switch to Configuration Mode ccceecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeesaeeeeneeeeaes 276 4 7 48 Remote Passthrough 0 ccccccecceeesseceeeeeceeeeesaeseeaeeesaeeesaaesseneeseaeeesaeeseaeeenaes 276 gy fas e 277 4 104 THAN GHD tinta ei iia 278 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note 7 4 8 Tools MON EN 278 4 8 1 Tools Menu 0 0 eececeecce cece eeececeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeedeeeeeaaeeeeaaesaeeecaaeeeeaaesdeneeseaeeseaesneaeeeeaas 278 48 2 E e HE te 278 4 8 66 Font Edtor acc cono cana nstnnssnnnstnnstnntnnstnnstnnsnnnntnnnnnnnsenn nn 297 4 8 94 Keypad Designer 306 e BN Re Ee Lu EE 323 48 165 Options EE 333 48 176 AdVaNCEd EE 336 4 8 185 Replace IMages ici da 339 4 9 Window Menti sicario Ee data etnia 340 491 Window Men 240 49 2 NEWWINGOW inenen aaa a aa a EA a Eaa 341 e Se EE 341 4 9 4 Tile Hortzontalhy crac cnn nn 341 49 5 Mile Ve
385. nd Arguments Initial Directory c0 Cancel Help This area of the dialog allows the user to specify the full file name of the application to be launched Press the button to look in the file system for the application executable file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 330 E AS D BR Tech note 4 8 163 Arguments Customize Use this line to enter the optional parameters command line parameters that have to be passed to the application Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 331 EXOR Tech note 4 8 164 Initial Directory Toolbars Commands Tools Menu Contents Command Gs Arguments Initial Directory O Use this optional field to specify the initial working directory folder in which the application is to be launched Press the button to look in the file system for a suitable directory Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 332 E AS D BR Tech note 4 8 165 Options 4 8 166 Options Selection Options from the Tools menu brings up the Layout Options dialog box This dialog box contains two tabs General and Layout Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 333 E SD BR Tech note 4 8 167 General Options hl General Layout Display Page options dialog Show page names in panel font Compatibility Draw button shading inside bitmap for Windows Custom touch cell JV Interpolate character
386. nd Custom The General tab allows you to select the style of generic command button and the action to be reflected The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the generic push button The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom or Windows Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a customized button A generic command button touch cell example is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 141 EXUR Tech note 4 4 153 General 4 4 154 General Generic Button Properties J i 2x General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action Panel Key 5 3D Round C Macro Cmd Rectangle C ASCII Key 3D Rectangle No Graphics Key Si LC Windows a Windows Cus vB Custom Cancel Help The General tab of the Generic Button Properties dialog box lets you select the style of button and the action that is to be represented 4 4 155 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include flat or 3D round and rectangular buttons no graphics Windows and Windows Custom buttons and Custom buttons Selecting the Custom or Windows Custom style activates the Custom tab The option No Graphics can create a touch cell that is entirely invisible For example
387. nds and their command codes are given The UniOP panel writes a binary value to the Command Response Word when it has executed the command requested by the controller to indicate the result of the operation Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 376 E AS UR Tech note 7 3 10 Parameters The Parameter Words are used only when required by a specific command Some commands do not require any parameters at all The Interlock Mailbox Commands section describes how to use Parameter Words and which are required for each Command Word 7 3 11 Interlock Mailbox Commands 7 3 12 Interlock Mailbox Commands Command Description Recipe Status Start Recipe Download Start Recipe Upload Set Parameter Set Number Get Parameter Set Number Get Recipe Transfer Priority Set Recipe Transfer Priority 17 Request Data Entry Mode 21 22 33 34 49 50 81 Set the Real Time Clock RTC 97 113 114 115 116 129 130 145 146 147 148 7 3 13 Recipe Status The controller can use this command to request information on the status of the recipes in the panel Command code 1 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 3 N N E AS DDR Tech note No parameters are required by this command The panel will respond with a code in the Command Response Word The possible codes are listed below OK Recipes contain valid data 1 Error Recipes contain default data as defined in the project file J 2 Error There are no Recipe
388. ne report formats and timetables upon which a report is printed configure a key or touchcell to print a report or request a printout by using the Interlock Mailbox Note In order to use these print features your panel must contain firmware version 4 10 or higher Information on setting up a new printer printing reports and a printer setup example are provided 7 6 2 Printer Setup To set up a serial printer select Project Report on Panel Printer Printer Setup This will display the Printer Setup dialog box From this dialog box you can choose the printer you will be using set the communication parameters and define the page size If you will be using a printer that is not listed you can use the Add button to add a new printer to the list of available printers Doing so will bring up the Printer Properties dialog box in which you can define the parameters for the newly added printer Similarly you can use the Edit button to redefine the parameters for an existing printer Note If you will be printing reports the paper height should be defined here before the report is defined If you change the paper height with some reports already defined the report layouts that have already been defined will not automatically be rearranged 7 6 3 Reports 7 6 4 Reports A report is a collection of project file pages or parts of project file pages Each report is divided into two parts One is a common part such as the header and
389. necessary Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 286 EXOR Tech note If you change your mind the Delete button will remove a column from the list When you have completed Step 1 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 2 4 8 19 Export Tags Step 2 Tag Export Wizard E i x Step 2 Select dictionary and group Select Dictionary TagDictionary y C Export Tags from All Groups Export tags from Selected group Select a Group Name lap 1 Ne zp 2 coca mm In Step 2 select the dictionary to be exported If the selected dictionary has more than one group associated with it then user has the option to export tags from all groups or to export tags from selected group When you have completed Step 2 click the Next gt button to continue to Step 3 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 287 EXOR Tech note 4 8 20 Export Tags Step 3 Tag Export Wizard x Step 3 Select target file name Type the File name or Click button to change the location or select other file types C Program FilestExor Designer ENT agDictionary lt LS Export Each group to a worksheet Export All groups to a single worksheet lt Back Cancel Help In Step 3 select a name for the exported file A default name is already entered in the box If you wish enter a different name in the box or click the button to bring up the Save As box If the user has selected the option
390. nel key i e Enter macro command i e show alarm list or ASCII character To insert a touch cell click the appropriate touch cell icon on the toolbar or select a type of touch cell from the Touch Cells submenu in the Insert menu then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed A dialog box will appear where the touch cell may be configured An example of using a touch cell to write to a controller is provided Note To aid in programming whenever a user touches a read write numeric field a keypad will appear allowing them to enter data Note Transparent and three dimensional touch cells can be defined over static bitmap images 4 4 87 Touch Cell Preview Window The Preview window lets you see how the touch cell will look before it is actually created and placed into a project file Clicking the left mouse button on the touch cell in the preview window simulates pressing the touch cell Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 104 EXOR Tech note 4 4 88 Touch Cell Keyboard Macro Editor Example In this example we will configure a touch cell to write a value to the controller For this example we will create a touch cell to simulate panel key F21 Then we will use the Keyboard Macro Editor to program the panel to write a value to the controller when panel key F21 is pressed Note It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are pressed so that
391. nel may use up to three small reserved areas of controller memory to establish an interface with the controller These three reference areas are Keys Panel and PLC You can select the starting address of each of these areas Each of the three reference areas lists References Update Cycles and RDA Elements Clicking on the button under References brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box where reference information can be specified The cycle time may be set as necessary under Update Cycles The various RDA Elements that pertain to the Keys Panel and PLC reference areas are discussed under those headings 4 6 120 Keys This reserved area is formatted to contain flags for each key on the panel and extended keyboard up to a maximum of 64 The maximum number must be a multiple of 16 as in essence the maximum number of keys tells the UniOP panel how many words of the Keyboard Update Area in the RDA are to be used These flags are set HIGH when a key is pressed and set LOW when released Each key status flag occupies one bit in the controller memory These bits can be used by the controller to detect when a particular key has been pressed and then in turn perform a specific operation Note Use the Keyboard Macro Editor to program keys 4 6 121 Panel Panel This reserved area is formatted to contain time and date information from the panel s real time clock a current page register and a two byte panel status word Time T
392. ng Attributes F Text MM Text Bkgd z MV Transparent The Text tab allows you to set the font size and color and the background color and transparency of a data item Designer will not let you select a size that is too large to be displayed in the designated area If Transparent is selected then text background colors are not available Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 75 XO H Tech note 4 4 36 Range tab Numeric Field Properties General Text Range Scaling Attributes Access C ReadOnly Read Write Range Mm Constant Reference 32768 a Limit 32768 Max Constant Reference 32767 Jet 32767 Cancel Apply Help The Range tab lets you specify whether access to the project will be read only or if read write access will be allowed If read write access is allowed then you can also specify the minimum and maximum value range 4 4 37 Scaling tab Numeric Field Properties General Text Range Scaling Attributes y A1l A2 x B Al B Ze Constant Reference Ze Constant Reference e A2 Ze Constant Reference Cancel Apply Help Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 76 EXOR Tech note Scaling lets you change the appearance of the values being displayed onto the panel For example if the controller is reporting values in Celsius but the operator is familiar with Fahrenheit performing a scaling operatio
393. ng IP Address to Panel Every device in an Ethernet Network must have a unique IP address A UniOP operator panel with Ethernet connection capability must be assigned an IP address before it can communicate with a computer running the Designer software UniOP is providing the users with the maximum flexibility in the assignment of the IP address In fact there are several methods to do it and some well defined priority rules to sort which way will be the one active at a certain time The available methods to assign an IP address to a panel are Manual definition of the address when the panel is in Configuration Mode Definition of IP address from Designer and UniDataExchanger when the panel is in Configuration Mode Automatic assignment of IP address from DHCP server Definition of IP address in the project file The IP address is a number in the usual form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255 Two parameters need to be defined by the user in addition to the IP address Subnet Mask it is a number in the form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number with value either O or 255 Gateway IP it is the address of the router that allows connection to other network segments It is a number in the usual form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a number from 0 to 255 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 475 EXOR Tech note A detailed description of these address input methods is given below The UniOP show the IP address and the
394. ng for characters Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 319 E SD BR Tech note 4 8 124 Colors The Colors area contains three list boxes that let you select the colors for the button face the button shadow and the button line Using a proper combination of the three colors will result in a three dimensional aspect of the button The button can also be made to appear as a flat button by assigning the same color to the Shadow and Line color 4 8 125 Key Code The functionality assigned to the button Each button can be assigned as a standard UniOP key or as an ASCII character The available selections in the list can be fully personalized by modifying a configuration file in the Keypad Designer installation directory called KeyCodes txt This file contains the ASCII codes and the UniOP key definition used by the Keypad Designer software to build the Key Code list of available functions and can be modified by any text editor 4 8 126 Label 4 8 127 Label The Label area contains the necessary selections required to customize the button label 4 8 128 Text The text that will appear on the face of the button 4 8 129 Font The font in which the label is displayed This can be any Windows font that is installed on the computer that is running the Keypad Designer utility 4 8 130 Picture This lets you specify a background bitmap image for the button Use the Browse button to select a bitmap image Tn179 05 d
395. ng to a PLC program The program name can be inserted into the Group field and you will be able to sort tags by program name 7 9 9 Tag Editor Synchronization At start up after a project upload and before a project download Designer will synchronize the project tag data with the tag database To perform the synchronization Designer will scan the fields of the project and verify that the tag addresses in the project file match the tag addresses in the tag database If there are any differences between the project data and the tag database a dialog box will be displayed This dialog box will include a list of the tags that are different between the tag database and the project data and provide options to update the project data update the tag database or leave the tag information unchanged The tag data between Designer and the tag database is also synchronized when the Define Field dialog box is displayed When the Define Field dialog box is displayed for fields that have tag names the tag database will be queried to retrieve the field address information The address information for the database is then updated in the field and displayed in the dialog box Using this approach the latest information in the tag database will always be displayed in the Designer project 7 9 10 Importing and Exporting Tags The Tag Editor provides the capability to import and export tags to and from external data sources When the Import menu item is selected
396. noccconoccnonccnnns F Field Selection Time QUtiviio statics eels Field Selection ooooonccnnncnnncnnocnnoccnocanonacnnann Field PE iii alicia 234 Fields A A e AA ies 233 A Eege Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual File_Exporttotagdb AAA 21 EM Men isaac 300 E ici 291 Firmware Download 199 Firmware Files Drectorg eee 366 Firmware Version oooonncccccnnononononononononononos 197 ErstiChedtui iii 414 First Record ui 293 Fit EE 181 E SE 181 Fixed Point Placement 48 Hasan aia ee EE 447 MAD 53 deedsacaceies ences ir shes r Eei Eea 181 Font e 305 ele autacai niidi aa 360 EKO n i AS EEE SEE A E 27 155 Etude id 305 EoMtinaninn noia liada 360 Font Pdtor eieiei 297 Font Editor Baxample cece eeeeeeeeeees 304 Font Header 300 Ont MGR EE 299 Fentange EEN Ee 300 FOET neersien as ici 235 POTS PTOUNG irienna 155 Ree 47 Format SSEDC ccecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeteees 336 o ee 155 Frames taba ias 97 EIN 257 A E 34 FW Rescue Mode 337 366 FW60 Memory Archttecture 487 G GU sien ccs isi riada 164 A A tae 162 A dee dente 162 GENEL al A E 132 General Characteristics ooononocononcococonononnnns 390 General at eege E Gu 231 Generic Command Button 140 Generic Command Button Touch Cell Example incida exes eissstvasshvendeasbsenstiaee 145 Get Current Language 385 Get Panel Resources ooooonoconononononannnnn 274 372 Get Parameter Set Number 380 Get Recipe Transfer Pont 380 Getting GIP EE 355 O E
397. note Data Field Properties Reference Control Variable Reference Data Type Variable name Address Internal variable e D01 Brightness e UNI Data Format DBLE WORDIBin Mee bah YDO1YScale Lon Cancel Help The following Control Variables are available for use with Video Input objects VDOx XOffsetV DOx YOffset Specify the top left position of a window within the video stream that will be displayed Only positive values are allowed VDOx XScale VDOx YScale The picture can be scaled belong both dimensions The value is measured in per mills of the original video stream meaning that a value of 1000 returns the image in the original size values greater than 1000 will zoom in while values smaller than 1000 will zoom out Scaling limits are resolution dependent the scale values will be anyhow forced to allowed limits Additionally the hardware interface will round off the specified scaling factors to match its internal calculation capabilities this will result in a picture on panel slightly smaller than the one that has been programmed VDOx Vdolnput Selection of the Video Input channel to be displayed in the Video Input object valid values are the following 0 Video Input 1 CVBS 1 Video Input 2 CVBS 2 Video Input 3 CVBS 3 RGB Input VDOx VdoFlag This variable contains some status flags to identify the status of the Video Input object bit 0 0x01 do not reload internal variable
398. nsigned Options are Signed or Unsigned data format Supposing the variable s data area has a length of N bits if the Unsigned option is chosen the variable is interpreted as an integer ranging from 0 to 2N 1 If the Signed option is chosen the variable is interpreted as a two complement integers ranging from 2N 1 to 2N 1 1 These choices are only active when the specified controller supports signed unsigned data format Fixed Point Placement The fixed point option permits you to select how many decimal points if any are displayed on the panel This feature parallels with scaling Enter the number of decimal places to be displayed in the Placement box Note Keep in mind that the decimal point will take up one position in the field i e a field with a width of four and a placement of 1 can display at most the number 99 9 4 4 13 Size Numeric Field Properties S KE El x General Text Range Scaling Attributes Style Format 99 Decimal Hexadecimal AA ASCII Ce Signed Unsigned Fixed point Pl Size Wwidh 33 Height T elerence Ge PLC Variable Recipe Index DB10 Dw0 El OK Cancel Apply Help Cancel Aen He This is the width and height of the field Each number or letter is one unit wide Numbers are one unit high as well Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 48 EXOR Tech note Note The field width height cannot exceed the width height of remaining panel from th
399. nstruments are simple instruments such as gauges that display numerical values by moving a needle to the appropriate position over a labeled scale The look of a meter instrument can be changed to suit your the needs Up to ten 10 meter instruments can be displayed on a single page within a project To insert a gauge in Designer click on the Meter Instrument icon and use the cursor to define an area where the gauge is to appear or select Meter Instrument from the Insert menu The Meter Instrument Properties dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a meter instrument may be configured Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 157 E AS UH Tech note General Layout Gauge Needle Background Style Range Custom Min fo Max f oo E Full Circle M Half Circle Count 5 Prec fo Quarter Circle CR SE 73 Three Quarte e 3 Right Side PLC Variable DB10 Du El Scale Y 41 52 X B a a2fi elo Cancel Help There are five tabs in the Meter Instrument Properties dialog box They are General Layout Gauge Needle and Background The General tab allows you to select the style and range of the meter gauge the memory location that is to be represented and scale the output if necessary The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used On the Gauge tab you can set the rotation direction format the ticks on the dial and set the arc colors
400. ntroller driver to be used from the list under Controller Driver Select the particular model of that controller driver from the list under Driver Model Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 459 EXOR Tech note Click OK The New group dialog box appears Fill in the grid with tag names comments and any other necessary information To specify the logical addresses associated with the various tags click on the Logical_address box and an arrow appears Click on the arrow to bring up a Data Field Properties dialog box Complete this box for the particular reference address and click OK The information appears in the Logical_address box The Data_Format box will also be automatically completed When the grid is completed select Save As from the File menu to save the dictionary Close the New group dialog box and select File Exit to close the Tag Editor Continued in Configuring a Project to Use Tags 7 9 18 Configuring a Project to Use Tags Continued from Setting Up a Tag Dictionary From the Project menu select Configure Controller Make sure that the controller specified for the project is the same as the controller specified for the tag dictionary Click OK Select Configure Tag Dictionaries from the Project menu if the Change Select Tag Dictionary dialog box does not automatically appear Click in the Enable Tags box Under Database click on the button Select the tag database you created and click Open C
401. ntroller to control the production of 5 mm screws and yet another to control the production of 7 mm screws Each set of parameters is stored in a different parameter set within the same recipe You can specify the number of parameter sets to be contained within a recipe as well as assign the initial values to the different parameter sets of a recipe From the Page menu select Recipe Configuration This brings up the Recipe Configure dialog box where initial values may be entered for recipe data items These initial values will be in the format that was specified for that data field in the Data Field Properties dialog box For example if a numerical format of hexadecimal was entered in the Data Field Properties dialog box for a recipe data item then all the subsequent values entered in the Recipe Configuration dialog box for this recipe data item will also be in hexadecimal If you specify a numeric data format of hexadecimal for a recipe data item and then enter a value of 10 in the Recipe Configuration dialog box the 10 will be interpreted as 10 hexadecimal base 16 Note Recipe data items must be defined on the current page before the Recipe Configuration dialog box can be activated To do so insert a Numeric ASCII Bargraph or Message data field and select Recipe as the Reference Note The recipe values section is in the form of a spreadsheet Each row is associated with a particular recipe data field The controller address of the recipe
402. nual 366 EXOR Tech note 7 2 Double Protocol 7 2 1 Double Protocol A single UniOP panel can communicate with Controllers simultaneously using different communication protocols Configuring UniOP panels to support such operation is easy Multi protocol support is provided by the Designer software and is natural and easy to learn and use Different controllers are connected to the UniOP panel in different ways Some are connected through a serial line either RS232 RS422 RS485 or current loop other through an Ethernet based LAN using UDP IP or TCP IP protocol stack and still other can be connected to the UniOP only after a custom communication module is plugged into it Most UniOP models are delivered with two serial ports The PLC port supports RS232 RS422 RS485 and current loop communication The PC Printer port supports only RS232 communication The AUX port can be used for various purposes depending on the type of the communication module plugged into the UniOP If this is one of the Ethernet modules TCM10 SCM11 the AUX port is used as the Ethernet port But other communication modules can be plugged in enabling connecting the UniOP to a wide diversity of controllers Of course except for the necessary hardware needed to establish communication to a particular controller an adequate Controller Driver has to be present in the Designer for Windows software In the multi protocol configuration case drivers for both communi
403. o oooocccccnnnninnnnnnncccncccnnccnnncrnnnnrcc ran rnnnnrcnnancccnnn 374 7 3 6 Structure of the Mailbox 375 7 3 11 Interlock Mailbox Commande 377 7 3 35 Mailbox Programming ccoocccinnnnnonocononcccnonnnononannno cc cnn cc nano 387 7 4 K NT e 389 7 4 1 UmiNET Networks coran cnn nora 389 7 4 2 General Characteristics oooonnininnidinnnininnnnnnncnnncrccnnccnnnorn naar crac narran ran 390 7 4 7 Network Conitgurations ran nnnn cnn rca 394 7 4 12 Network TyPe s oooococoonccccnccnnnocononnccnoncccnnnnnn anna 397 7 4 20 Connecting Panels to the Network 400 7 4 34 Network Getp cnn 406 7 4 39 Advanced Network Programming coccccioccconocinoncccconccnnonananonnnano cnn nana na nannccnnnr 407 7 4 47 Network Examples AA 412 7 5 Panel POMS OPC 0 et EeE et D ARE ea EAA aa 416 Tak e PP o deeteeg NEUE ya cuties severed Ea 416 7 5 2 Installing New Panel Fonts ooconnccnnccnnnnccnnocnnnncccnoncnnonnn canon cnn ncc narrar anni 417 7 5 8 Downloading Panel Font ooooocinncccncccnnncnnnocnnnnccccnncn non nan nnn cn rn r arrancan cnn 418 7 5 9 Compressing Panel Fonte oooccnnccnnccnnnccnnnocnnnncccnoncnnnnnnnnnnn cnn nc narrar anna 419 7 6 La LU a To ppoPPPPPOCOOO O locals EA 420 AA O cect bancedenthacenghbabaseuehiaas 420 76 2 Prior liinda 420 LOS ROOM Sri ti 420 7 6 9 Printer Setup Example Abu 422 7 7 A e II O 423 LEE 1 D statis E E T iach ban E Hi Divard caee fate and ca 423 7 7 2 Keyboard Update Area cceceeeceeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeec
404. o paste into the currently selected catalogue an object previously copied into the clip board Note this feature is not available for graphics libraries Note The union via grouping of one or more entities in the Project Screen is considered an Object Remove Removes the object from the catalogue Rename Changes the name of the object CATALOGUE COMMANDS New Catalogue Creates a new catalogue Open Catalogue Opens an already existing catalogue Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 473 E AS UR Tech note Close Catalogue Closes the currently selected catalogue IMAGE COMMANDS Export Exports the currently selected object into a file on the system Import Imports a file in the currently selected catalogue ICON COMMANDS View Allows to select how the objects are represented inside the catalogue icons and names icons only names only Icon Allows to change or to edit the icon of the currently selected object 7 11 5 Color Boxes By selecting the icon shown here below Ceci DI E CH gn the user can insert a Color Box in the Project Screen area By right clicking on the Color Box it is possible to change its properties Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 474 Color Box Properties 229 21x General Attributes Style Color Cancel Apply Help Color Box are useful to create backgrounds of a given color 7 12 Ethernet Connectivity 7 12 1 Assigni
405. o the mailbox the mailbox will read the command word and the parameter The panel will then send a response word back to the controller and execute the command Command code 49 This command requires only one parameter Job Number 1 255 After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below o Lo Error Controller to Controller not defined at all Error Illegal job number Error Queue is full 7 3 24 Start Controller to Controller Transfer with Confirmation This command is set up in the same manner as the command Start Controller to Controller Transfer With No Confirmation Command code 50 This command requires only one parameter Job Number 1 255 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 383 EXOR Tech note After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below Description Error Controller to Controller not defined at all Error Illegal job number Error Not used Error Communication error while reading source data Error Communication error while writing destination data 7 3 25 Set RTC Real Time Clock This command enables the controller to set the Real Time Clock RTC located within the panel Command code 81 This command requires six parameters Day 1 31 Parameter 1 Month 1 12 Year 94 99 00 Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59
406. oc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 320 EXOR Tech note 4 8 131 Horizontal Align Specifies the horizontal position of the label right center left 4 8 132 Vertical Align Specifies the vertical position of the label top center bottom 4 8 133 Value Objects 4 8 134 Creating Value Objects Creating Value Objects is done in much the same manner as creating a Button Simply click the Value icon and click on the screen An object appears with its upper left corner at the point where you clicked Right click on the object and select Properties to bring up the Value Box dialog box Property Page Type edt y Colors Alignment Right y Background Font size Regular e Foreground En D Cancel Apply Help From the Value Box dialog box you can set the following Type Alignment Font Size Colors 4 8 135 Type The type of value object being created Edit current value The field is configured for the editing process Old value Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 321 EXOR Tech note The field is configured to display the old value of the controller variable being edited Min minimum value The field is configured to display the minimum allowable value that has been programmed for the controller variable being edited Max maximum value The field is configured to display the maximum allowable value that has been programmed for the controller variable being edited 4 8
407. ocess is comprised of three stages We want to be able to monitor the water temperature the water pressure the amount of time the equipment is in a particular stage and the stage the process is in as shown in the figure below all without pressing a key on the panel The numeric values will be written into the controller by the machine and will change constantly The controller memory locations and their contents that we will use for this example are as follows DB10 DWO Temperature in Stage 1 ranges between 0 and 9999 DB10 DW1 Temperature in Stage 2 ranges between 0 and 9999 DB10 DW2 Temperature in Stage 3 ranges between 0 and 9999 DB10 DW3 Pressure in Stage 1 ranges between 0 and 9999 DB10 DW4 Pressure in Stage 2 ranges between 0 and 9999 Pressure in Stage 3 ranges between 0 and 9999 Time in Stage 1 ranges between 0 and 9999 Time in Stage 2 ranges between 0 and 9999 Time in Stage 3 ranges between 0 and 9999 DB10 DW9 The stage the process is currently in ranges between 1 and 3 Note The memory locations are controller specific those listed above are done so only to be able to more easily explain the procedure of using indexed addressing This example assumes that we have a Simatic S5 controller set under Project Configure Controller This example can be broken down into four basic steps Creating the Stage numeric field Creating the Temperature indexed addressing field Creating the Pressure indexed addre
408. of the gauge origin point zero Choices are East North West and South 4 4 266 Start Scale start angle It can be from 0 to 360 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 164 E SD BR Tech note 4 4 267 Range Scale range It can be from 0 to 360 with 0 being a single point and 360 a full circle 4 4 268 Ticks 4 4 269 Ticks In the Ticks section you can set the style for the ticks the number of major and minor ticks and the size of the ticks 4 4 270 Style The position of the ticks on the gauge scale Can be Outside or in the Middle of the scale 4 4 271 Major Number of major ticks on the scale Note If a number less than the Range count is entered the Range count becomes the default value 4 4 272 Minor Number of minor ticks ticks between major ticks on the scale 4 4 273 Size Size in percentage of the gauge circle of major ticks Minor ticks are generally half the size of major ticks 4 4 274 Arc Colors These parameters are used to define different colored zones on the gauge To define a color range on the gauge enter the Begin and End label values in the boxes provided Select a color for that zone Boxes for an additional zone are created whenever a value is entered in existing boxes To delete a color zone remove the label values from the Begin and End boxes Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 165 EXOR Tech note 4 4 275 Needle 4 4 276 Needle Meter Inst
409. of three operator panels Thus we will have to create individual project files for each of the three panels All three project files must include the same network configuration information in order for the three panels to exchange information To ensure that the project files contain the same network configuration information we will define the network configuration once in the first project file and save the configuration Then we will import the configuration into the other two project files The example is broken down into the following steps Setting Up the Network Configuration Creating the Project File for the Server Creating the Project File for the First Client Creating the Project File for the Second Client Running the Network 7 4 49 Setting Up the Network Configuration Select New from the File menu and create a new file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 412 EXOR Tech note Select the Configure Controller from the Project menu and choose the controller type required for the server Select Network Setup from the Project menu Select RS485 as the type of network Click Next gt Choose the option Single Server Multiple Clients Click Next gt Enter 2 for the number of clients Click Next gt Click Configure to change the default node settings and complete the network configuration The Network Configuration dialog box appears showing the network configuration with the list of nodes Click on t
410. oject Graphics GM geheie Graphics SVG Keypads ema Keypads Automatic copy at start up Automatic copy at start up GEMIPS GEMIPS A required when memoryis required selected System Flash Manual copy 0 ep ep ep Firmware Firmware optional optional Firmware Boot Boot optional optional Copy performed only after manual Firmware Designer download Designer download Upgrade command T2003 Memory Organization 7 13 5 The Internal Memory The B series units have 32 MB internal Flash memory dedicated to project file components and firmware files in the same way as the SSFDC card is used on the T2000 platform This memory will be the standard storage location for both user application and firmware files The SSFDC socket is still present in the T2003 CPU and can hold an additional SSFDC memory card Note B series units are delivered without the SSFDC card in the external socket Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 488 EXOR Tech note The Firmware Type 60 includes some new controls to handle the two memory locations At any time only one memory can be considered active The run time software will run the project and the firmware components only from the active memory The memory selection can be done using a special memory setup menu activated in Configuration Mode by pressing and holding down for 2 seconds the right arrow key The menu is shown in below figure Henory setup
411. ojects can be recalled from disk or from the panel itself for further modification For information regarding hardware operation please see the UniOP Installation amp Operation Guide Internal Manual Code 05 011 2 Quick Start 2 1 Quick Start Tutorial Introduction The Quick Start Tutorial shows how the Designer software is used to develop applications for the UniOP panel Though the chosen example is very simple it goes through all the steps that are normally used to develop normal applications even the most complex ones At the end of the tutorial you will not be able to perform the single steps in detail you will not know all the Designer features how and when to use them What you will have is a general feeling of what is required to develop an application which tasks have to be performed and how easy is their execution thanks to the Designer software Note The tutorial assumes that you have already installed the software 2 1 1 Development Environment Setup serial lineslan fieldbus etc Operator Panel Demo Controller Programming Software The above figure shows a typical complete setup for the development of applications Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 2 E AS DR Tech note Users develop their applications with the Designer software and download them into the UniOP panel The panel in turn is connected to one or more Controllers PLCs The developed applications can display the Control
412. oller does not know when or if the requested job will be executed To set up a transfer select Project Panel Controller Interface Data Transfer The Job No field is used to select between the different jobs Click on the Source Reference button to specify the register to be read The fields will be slightly different depending on the controller that is being used Use the fields to specify the type of data format and address of the register that is to be read Once this information is entered press OK to return to the Panel Controller Interface dialog box Enter the number of words to be transferred in the appropriate box Click on the Destination button brings up a dialog box in which you can enter the address to which the data is to be written If the Job Execution Mode is set to In Cycles the panel will automatically transfer the data on each cycle The cycle period can be set between 1 second and 127 seconds Remember that the faster the cycles the faster the panel will transfer data but this will slow down the rest of the system If the Job Execution Mode is set to On Request the controller must send a request to the Interlock Mailbox before the data will be transferred After completely setting up the dialog box click on OK Now select the Interlock Mailbox tab from Project Panel Controller Interface Set up the mailbox as described within the section entitled Enabling the Interlock Mailbox When the controller sends a request t
413. ols toolbar typically provides shortcuts to user specified tools TouchScreen toolbar typically provides shortcuts to touchscreen specific commands Commands available from the Toolbars dialog box include Toolbar Name Shows the name of the selected toolbar Show Tooltips Provides a short description of a toolbar icon when the cursor pauses above the icon Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 324 EXOR Tech note Cool Look Gives the buttons on the toolbars an invisible edge making for a smoother appearance on the toolbars Large Buttons Makes the buttons appear twice as large as normal for easier viewing and use New Reset Delete The Reset button returns the toolbars to their default state If you have added any toolbars the Reset button becomes a Delete button so that user added toolbars can be removed Default Click the Default button to align and dock the toolbars to the installed state It also reloads all buttons on the toolbar 4 8 143 Toolbar Name Shows the name of the selected toolbar 4 8 144 Show Tooltips Provides a short description of a toolbar icon when the cursor pauses above the icon 4 8 145 Cool Look Gives the buttons on the toolbars an invisible edge making for a smoother appearance on the toolbars 4 8 146 Large Buttons Makes the buttons appear twice as large as normal for easier viewing and use 4 8 147 New The New button brings up the New Toolbar dialog box where y
414. omatically provide the registration of the Server at the system level It will make the server visible to all of the OPC Clients that are already installed Likewise any OPC clients that are installed after the UniNET OPC server software is installed will also see the server The UniNET OPC Server main window appears as is shown here below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 408 EXOR Tech note E Untitled UniNETOPC File Add Edit View Help The OPC Server has to be properly configured in order to collect data coming from the UniOP panels working as UniNET servers on the network The software uses the concepts of Device and Tag to identify the controllers connected to the server panels and the variables requested by them These variables will be available to any OPC Client that may require their values Please refer to specific OPC documentation for any additional detail regarding the theory of OPC technology Note OPC Client programs installed on the computer will only have access to the Data Sets configured in the OPC Server application To create a new Device select Add New Device or click on the New Device icon The Device Properties dialog box will be displayed as is shown in the next figure Name Devic Device Modbus Slave y ES Timeout fi 000 m Network Setup TCP IP access Iv IPAddress fi 92 168 0 0 Socket port fest e Cancel Name Represents a mnemonic descripti
415. ommands to put the panel into Configuration Mode to send the start command and to send the stop command in the Request boxes Likewise enter the responses to be received back from the panel in the Response boxes Note The Commands section is only activated if Remote Hardware is selected as the Mode 4 6 66 Start Command and response string to be used to send the start command 4 6 67 Stop Command and response string to be used to send the stop command 4 6 68 Cfg Mode Command and response string to put panel in configuration mode Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 205 E AS DR Tech note 4 6 69 Miscellaneous 4 6 70 Miscellaneous Panel Setup E 21xi Panel Model Settings Extemal Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Display Page on Comm Errror Page fo I Time Out for Data Entry Timeout sec I Time Out for Panel Menu Timeout fi sec 2 Time Out for Field Selection Timeout sec IT LCD Screen Saver Wait 11 sec z Commend menu access on delay 2 sec macro command only Panel Upload Protection The Miscellaneous tab lets you configure several different panel parameters Selecting any of the checkboxes enables the entry boxes associated with those selections These selections include Display Page on Comm Error Time Out for Panel Menu Time Out for Data Entry Time Out for Field Selection LCD Screen Saver Panel Upload Protection Command Menu Access 4 6 71
416. on of the Device Device Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 409 EXOR Tech note The list box contains the list of all available drivers for the different controller types Because OPC Server is a UniNET Client the application needs to know the data structure of the controller connected to the UniOP UniNET Server panels Timeout Period of time that the OPC server will wait to receive requested information before reporting a timeout error for the Device TCP IP Access Specifies if the UniNET network is Ethernet based When the TCP IP checkbox is not marked the OPC server can be used to prepare a configuration file usable with the Windows CE OPC Server Please refer to the specific documentation for further details IP Address Represents the IP Address assigned to the UniOP Panel working as UniNET Server that is connect to the controller specified by the Device item Please refer to the Networking with Ethernet section for a detailed description Socket Port Represents the number of the socket port used by the UniOP panel to relay requests coming through the Ethernet network When the Device setup is completed the OPC Server program has to be configured to read a certain amount of specific data from the UniNET network Only this data will be available to an eventual OPC Client connected to the UniNET OPC Server Required data from UniNET can be specified by inserting the Tags definition for the Device To insert a Tag f
417. ont the Labels color color and Font the Frame color the Rim color and the Background color A Layout Toolbar keeps the Special Characters and Languages commands handy 4 4 244 Layout Toolbar The Layout Toolbar keeps the Special Characters and Languages commands handy 4 4 245 Layout Properties 4 4 246 Title This is the title for the gauge Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 161 EXOR Tech note 4 4 247 Title X The position of the title on the x axis A value of 50 is in the middle of the box area 0 is on the left border and 100 on the right border 4 4 248 Title Y The position of the title on the y axis A value of 50 is in the middle of the box area 0 is on the upper border and 100 on the bottom border 4 4 249 Labels The position of the numeric labels on the gauge A value of 100 is on the gauge scale circle Greater than 100 is outside the scale and less than 100 is inside the scale 4 4 250 Gauge X The position of the gauge on the x axis A value of 50 is in the middle of the box area 0 is on the left border and 100 is on the right border 4 4 251 Gauge Y The position of the gauge on the y axis A value of 50 is in the middle of the box area 0 is on the upper border and 100 is on the lower border 4 4 252 Size The size of the gauge as a percentage 0 100 of the smallest side of the box 4 4 253 Title Color The color in which the title text will be displayed 4 4 254
418. ontroller Driver During the configuration process all the client panels must be assigned the Network Client protocol and all the server panels must be assigned the protocol of the controller they are directly attached to 4 6 99 Controller Model The controller panel model Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 214 EXOR Tech note 4 6 100 Add Click this button to add a new node to the list of configured nodes using the Add Edit Panel Node dialog box To activate the Add button change the Maximum Node Number 4 6 101 Properties 4 6 102 Properties To modify an existing node you must first select the required node from the list of already configured nodes Click Properties from the Network Configuration dialog box to view the network properties associated with that node as listed in the Add Edit Panel Node dialog box or click Add to add another node to the list Panel Node IP Address Printout Node Num Comm Retries Comm Time Out 3 1 m H 00 msec a Enable Double protocol Controller 1 El A number of items can be specified in the Add Edit Panel Node dialog box These include the Panel Node the IP Address the Printout Node the Number of Communication Retries the Communication Time Out setting whether to Enable Double protocol and the controller setting 4 6 103 Panel Node Represents the UniNET node of the panel Ethernet networks are still based on the UniNET application layer protocol
419. ontroller Update Area 429 Controllers Setup 356 370 CONVENIOS Bs incicacsnncssavsnncdscadnnesscrdaneeecasunesscsan 9 Converter PLC Pont 402 Converter Printer Port 402 Cool Look 325 Es A dan cetendes lacs Has EE 82 E ee EE 160 Creating Eu rte E 319 NeW Files tesoro 359 New Report renierons einiino 421 Pressure Indexed Field 65 Le 359 Project Bile scccseccccnseesceiesceesseeesets 414 415 499 Recipe Menu Field 0 0 0 eee 443 Stage Numeric Data Field 64 Temperature Indexed Field 64 Time Indexed Field oo eee eeeeeeeeeee 66 Value Objects oooooonccnnncnincnocnnaccnancnanoss 321 A debeves slawsa stuneuses 64 A Eege 64 AA EE 65 E A O 66 VE ies iris 319 A dents 321 E iii ali 359 CEAN inpia annia 359 E E 414 EE atico 414 Creatin tisside are eiaeaen Erian 415 A ein ir aaeei e inais 421 E E 443 Current Page cccciconnesii nneicia scada cisnes 254 Current Page Mode 189 Current Page Register oooonconccinnnnoconoccnonnnn 221 A gege ge 150 Cursor WE 153 A A nii 149 ston 208 ENEE REESEN 145 ER eer EE 295 A EA EE 24 291 Cyc liO siecia E 256 D Data Bits iciss cients netlticnie 229 Data Entry Time Otilia eebe 207 Data ENY AA sete stuovendee 207 Data Entry Enable AAA 242 Data Entry Field Number 54 439 Data Entry Screen seeen 188 Data Entry Status eener 53 439 Data Field Properties 49 Data Piel caciones 44 Data Ke 346 IR
420. operties a E 2 x General Text Attributes Style Contents Time Date MV Seconds Y Days Date Time E Time Date IV Minutes M Months Y Hours IV Years IT Use AM PM Assign Control ariable v The General tab includes commands Style Contents and Assign that let you customize the appearance of the trend time field 4 4 291 Style The Style section lists several options for the appearance of the trend time field These include Date Time in which the date is followed by the time in a horizontal format Time Date in which the time is followed by the date in a horizontal format Date Time in which the date is listed above the time and Time Date in which the time is listed above the date 4 4 292 Contents Checkboxes allow you to include seconds minutes or hours in the time and days months or years in the date You also have the option of specifying an AM PM format for the time 4 4 293 Assign Choose the appropriate control variable from the list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 170 EXOR Tech note 4 4 294 Text Trend Time Field Properties Y 2 x General Text Attributes d Text Bkgd Iw Transparent Cancel Apply Help The Text tab allows you to set the Panel Font the text text background and background colors or to make the background transparent 4 4 295 Trend Time Field Example Select Trend Time Field from the Insert
421. options allow you to configure responses to the controller memory location To configure Variable data field properties select Numeric ACSII Bargraph or Message under Insert Data Fields then use the cursor to specify the location of the item The Properties dialog box appears Click the Variable button under Reference and then click on the button to configure the data field properties for control variables Data Field Properties e Th xj Reference r Control Variable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Recipe Action H 5 DAC Data Format WORDEBin DI Cancel Help Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 50 EXOR Tech note Note To change properties of an existing variable data field right click on the data field and select Properties There are various types of control variables Recipe File Status Recipe Parameter Set Selection Recipe Action Data Entry Status Data Entry Field Number Language Password Recipe Key Recipe Page for Selection Passthrough Status Internal Variable Recipe Event Backup PLC Port Mode PC Printer Port Mode PLC Port Module Number PC Printer Port Module Number Recipe File Status Data Field Properties i E 2 x Reference m Control Variable Reference Data Type Address Recipe File Status RFS Data Format WORDEBin y Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 51 EXOR Tech note In the UniOP panel m
422. or the specific Device use the Add New tag menu or click on the New tag icon The figure here below shows the Tag Properties dialog box Tag Properties EN Description Cancel Address Numeric data IV ASCII data lenath f Name The mnemonic name used by the OPC Server to uniquely identify the variable Description Allows for the user to explain exactly to what the Tag refers Address The tag address in terms of the native data types of the controller specified in the Device list box of the Device Properties dialog box Numeric Data When marked this specifies that the tag is to be treated like a numeric variable When unmarked it specifies that the variable is to be interpreted as the starting point of an ASCII Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 410 EXOR Tech note string The ASCII data length specifies the length of the ASCII string If the ASCII representation is selected the OPC Server program will retrieve an amount of bytes equal to the number of ASCII characters specified by the ASCII data length parameter from the UniNET network The UniNET OPC Server program has a monitor function useful when a check of the Ethernet connection link is required Once the Device and the Tags are configured select View Monitor to activate the debug function The Value column of the main window see Figure 39 displays the current value of each configured tag If the OPC Server program cannot retrieve the val
423. osition such that the field being edited will not be covered by the keypad When Avoid field is checked the Horizontal and Vertical controls allow you to define the position of the keypad Absolute Coordinates When this checkbox is marked and the Panel Predefined Model has been selected the keypad will be placed by the UniOP firmware in the same position as it is displayed in the Keypad Designer utility If the Avoid field checkbox is also selected the firmware will place Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 315 E AS DR Tech note the keypad in the specified position only if the field under editing is not covered by the keypad Horizontal Position The Horizontal position can be Left Center or Right This refers to relative position the references of which can be specified in the corresponding from list box Vertical Position The Vertical position can be Top Center or Bottom This refers to relative position the references of which can be specified in the corresponding from list box 4 8 116 Background Background Model Properties RE xi General Background Panel Background T Border Bitmap A Browse Face D Color O Shadow L D Line Rm y Cancel Apply Help Allows you to specify both Background and Border properties Background You can select a bitmap image to be used as the background of the keypad The Browse button allows you to search for an image and sele
424. ot depend on each other and can be freely put on any page in the project in any combination 7 8 21 Creating a Recipe Menu Field 7 8 22 Creating a Recipe Menu Field The Recipe Menu field is the field that displays the menu with the parameter set names It displays recipe names for the page number specified by the Recipe Page For Selection internal UniOP variable The value of this variable can be displayed and changed using the Recipe Page For Selection field Its value can be automatically set by the Go To Recipe Menu macro command Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 443 EXOR Tech note The currently selected recipe name is indicated with a user defined attribute combination blink highlight reverse Note A Recipe Name field must be defined to enable Recipe Menu support Note The only field on the page needed for displaying a Recipe Menu is the Recipe Menu field Other fields can show additional information but are not necessary Note If Recipe Page For Selection contains the page number of a page without a Recipe Name field defined the Recipe Menu field will display asterisks A Recipe Menu example is provided 7 8 23 Recipe Menu Example The following procedure describes how to add a Recipe Menu field Create a new project file by selecting New from the File menu or by clicking on the New icon on the toolbar Name the new file and click OK Insert a numeric data field by selecting Insert Data Fields
425. ote It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback Select Insert Touch Cells ASCII Key Button Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the ASCII Key Button Properties dialog box select 3D Rectangle as the Style Under Action enter the character that will control the touch cell action Select the Attributes tab and select Reverse to have the touch cell reverse color when it is pressed Select the Layout tab and select Red as the color for On and Yellow as the color for Off Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 116 EXOR Tech note In the Label box type ASCII Key Adjust the Font if necessary Click OK The screen should appear similar to the figure below DN File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help la x D GRH A See fra Jaa 2mBgHAonao zj m Fei 8 Bea 3 Pages EI 1 Page 1 H E Special Pages ES Grap 5 Obj GD Project Po 141 Row 9 Col 39 Simatic 5 5 0x0 Default OVF 4 4 4 109 Push Button 4 4 110 Push Button The Push Button Properties dialog box is used to create touch cells as push buttons These push buttons mimic mechanical push buttons in that one logic value represents open contacts and another logic value represents closed contacts To insert a push but
426. ote Objects items are aligned with the last created or inserted object item 4 2 10 Left Aligns the left sides of the objects items with the left edge of whichever object item was selected first Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 25 EXOR Tech note 4 2 11 Horiz Center Aligns the horizontal center points of the objects items with the horizontal center point of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 12 Align Right Aligns the right sides of the objects items with the right edge of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 13 Align Top Aligns the top edges of the objects items with the top edge of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 14 Align Vert Center Aligns the vertical center points of the objects items with the vertical center point of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 15 Align Bottom Aligns the bottom edges of the objects items with the bottom edge of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 16 Make Same Size 4 2 17 Make Same Size Use the Make Same Size commands from the Edit menu to match the size of objects items on a page Select an object or item by single clicking on it then hold down the Shift key while clicking on other objects or items to be resized When all of the objects or items to be resized are selected choose one of the commande in the Make Same Size submenu Width Height Both Note Objects items are resized to match the size of the last created o
427. ou may enter the name of a new toolbar to be created Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 325 EXOR Tech note xl Toolbar name GK Cancel Help The new toolbar may then be placed in a location of your choice in the toolbar section of the Designer screen 4 8 148 Reset Delete The Reset button returns the toolbars to their default state If you have added any toolbars the Reset button becomes a Delete button so that user added toolbars can be removed 4 8 149 Default Click the Default button to align and dock the toolbars to the installed state It also reloads all buttons on the toolbar 4 8 150 Commands 4 8 151 Commands Eee hl Toolbars Commands Tools Categories Buttons Deng Li fg Secondary Full Screen AE e e Touchcells amp Obje py 2 a Field Objects O amp e Draw Commande Q Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to any toolbar Description Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 326 E AS D BR Tech note This section lets you customize the buttons and descriptions of various categories of items 4 8 152 Categories Lists the various toolbars onto which the various commands are grouped 4 8 153 Buttons The icons for the currently highlighted toolbar category are shown Drag a button to any toolbar Description 4 8 154 Displays a description of the activity performed by each bu
428. ou specify modem settings such as initialization strings dial or hangup strings etc Indicate if the DTR signal should be dropped for hangup 4 7 35 Modem Messages 4 7 36 Modem Messages The Modem messages tab is only visible if Use modem is selected on the Ports tab under Transfers Options Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 272 AAA sl Compatibility with version 1 Modem commands Modem messages air Connection Message CONNECT M No Connection Messages NOCARRIERM NO DIAL TONEM buech i i ssts S INOANSWER M Dial Timeout secs fi 5 MV Hangup On Exit From Program Number of Redials la Options Cancel Help This tab contains entry boxes for a connection message and no connection messages plus other modem options 4 7 37 Connection Message Enter any necessary connection messages in the box provided 4 7 38 No Connection Messages Enter any necessary messages in the case that no connection is established in the boxes provided 4 7 39 Options 4 7 40 Options Various modem options are available including the dial timeout the number of redials and whether or hang up upon exiting Designer 4 7 41 Hangup Check this box to have the modem hang up when the program is exited This prevents unnecessary use of the modem Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 273 E SD BR Tech note 4 7 42 Dial Timeout Set the timeout in seconds if a successful dial
429. ou wish to change the date format choose Panel Setup from the Project menu and select the Settings tab Make a selection from the Date Format list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 103 EXOR Tech note 4 4 85 Touch Cells 4 4 86 Touch Cells A touch cell allows a panel user to interact with the panel The user is able to touch a panel in an indicated position and receive a visual cue The various types of touch cells available and their functionality are Panel Key Button Used for creating a touch cell as a panel key i e Enter Panel keys represent all of the function keys numeric keys and arrow keys as well as the help key the clear key the enter key the key and the decimal point key ASCII Key Button Used for creating a touch cell as an ASCII character Push Button Used for creating a touch cell as a push button These push buttons mimic mechanical push buttons in that one logic value represents open contacts and another logic value represents closed contacts Illuminated Push Button Used for creating a touch cell as an illuminated push button The only difference between an illuminated pushbutton and a pushbutton is that the face of the illuminated pushbutton can reflect the status of a bit in the PLC Selector Switch Used for creating a touch cell as a 2 3 or 4 position selector switch Indicator Light Used for creating an indicator lamp Generic Command Button Used for creating a touch cell as a pa
430. ouch cell The top portion of the Layout box includes commands to create and customize a label on the touch cell For instance rather than displaying the label F1 a panel key could read Pressure A toolbar includes icons to customize the label on the touch cell by inserting a special character or by selecting a particular language and label placement The Label box lets you specify the text that is placed either on or on top of the touch cell Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the
431. p of the touch cell Note The label must be entered after the key has been selected under the General tab otherwise the default key label will override any label entered in the Label box Clicking on the Font button lets you select the font to be used for a particular touch cell Once a font is selected it will continue to be used for all touch cells that are subsequently created Note This font is not a global font and may be changed at any time without affecting any of the previously created touch cells It is possible to use different fonts on all of the touch cells in a single project file Text indicates the color of the touch cell text Text Bkgd indicates the background color of the touch cell text This color will only be seen when the Transparent checkbox is not marked otherwise the background of the touch cell text will appear either in On or in Off color for centered text and in the Background color if the text is on top The bottom portion of the Layout box lets you choose the colors to be displayed on the touch cell Line color is the color of the lines in the touch cell Background color is the color of the touch cell background The touch cell background is a part of the rectangle around the circular or elliptical touch cell not covered by the cell Rectangular touch cells have no background if the touch cell text is centered but if it is positioned on top a strip of background appears above the cell Tn179 05 doc 12 01
432. pdate X Mips code 58 150C 01 lt Do not update gt Mips service lt Do not update gt z Update Do not update After exchanging information with the panel to detect the version of the firmware files that are inside the SSFDC memory card the above dialog box is displayed The left column displays the versions of the firmware files that are located in the SSFDC memory card The right column displays versions of firmware files ONLY if the user s computer contains a newer version If a newer version is not detected lt Do not update gt will be displayed Update This will start the download procedure It does nothing when all of the Designer fields contains the lt Do not update gt strings Please note that after updating the firmware files inside the panel SSFDC memory it will be necessary to upgrade the panel s FLASH memory as previously described Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 365 EXOR Tech note Do not update Use this button to exit from this dialog box without updating the firmware files Note Designer checks the firmware version before beginning any download operation When an old firmware file version is detected inside the panel the above dialog box is displayed to give the user a chance to upgrade the firmware file 7 1 4 Designer Firmware Files Directory The setup procedure installs a Firmware subdirectory inside the Designer working directory This directory will con
433. port If one of drivers is using the current loop it must become Controller 1 to ensure that it uses the PLC port because the current loop capability is only implemented on this serial port Also as the PC Printer and the PLC port connectors are of different genders careful selection of Controller 1 and Controller 2 can make cabling easier and less expensive There is no major difference in configuring UniNET networks for single protocol applications and for double protocol applications However if one of either network type Single Server Multiple Clients or Multiple Server Multiple Clients is selected all the UniOP network server nodes will inherit the current configuration of the project In other words if the project in which the network is being set up is currently configured for single protocol all the UniOP node servers in the UniNET network will be configured to use only this protocol If the project is configured for double protocol all the UniOP node servers will be configured to use both protocols It is important to remember the following rules for serial drivers The first driver always communicates with the controllers over the PLC port The second driver always communicates with the controllers over the PC Printer port Of course if any of the protocols is a non serial protocol its driver will use the AUX port instead There are a few hardware restrictions when two communication protocols are used If the communication
434. r a four digit password for User 2 To allow access to acknowledge alarms click on the ACK box Doing so places a check mark in the box To allow data entry from page 2 to page 4 enter a 2 in the Data entry enable From page box and a 4 in the Data entry enable To page box User 3 can enter data on all pages of the project will be automatically logged out after ten minutes and can access Configuration Mode Click on the third password box and enter a four digit password for User 3 Click in the CONF box to give User 3 access to Configuration Mode Check the ALOGO box to enable automatic logout The default time in the Logout timeout box at the bottom of the dialog box is 600 seconds or ten minutes so no changes are necessary Because User 3 will be allowed data entry throughout the entire project set the entries for the Data entry enable From page box and the Data entry enable To page to span all the pages in the project For example if the project consists of 10 pages leave the default setting of 1 in the Data entry enable From page box and set the Data entry enable To page to 10 The passwords should now be configured correctly for this situation The dialog box representing this situation is shown below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 245 Passwords ql IS It E LG LG mu Vv a lv P Ja E E A E E CF as ay au aya EE ooo en v H a E E y E D COLA LLLLLEEL 4 6 215 Languages
435. r inserted object item Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 26 EXOR Tech note 4 2 18 Make Same Size Width Resizes objects items so that the width matches the width of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 19 Make Same Size Height Resizes objects items so that the height matches the height of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 20 Make Same Size Both Resizes objects items so that both the width and height matches the width and height of whichever object item was selected first 4 2 21 Fonts 4 2 22 Fonts Designer makes it easy to select a font that will appear to advantage in a particular project There are two types of fonts in Designer Panel Fonts and Objects Fonts Panel fonts are character based type of fonts and are supported by all type of panels Object Fonts are based on bit maps and are supported only by graphics panels 4 2 23 Panel Font 4 2 24 Panel Fonts Select Font E Font Name L Cancel Help Font Size Regular Double Large Extralarge It is possible to have up to four 4 different panel fonts on certain UniOP panels The Select Font dialog box lets you select a font for onscreen text from a pull down list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 27 EXOR Tech note Note If a project file contains panel font components switching to a standard font not an enhanced font will erase all of the panel font components in the project
436. r the possibility to enable or disable the table printout Project information Generic project information It contains the project name panel type and name of the controller being used Project Summary Contains some statistical information such as the project file size number of pages number of used pictures etc UniOP page layout description data List of page objects UniOP Page description Description of the pages in the project Panel Key Macros Local macro keys Pictures Static images Touch Cells List of graphic components Object oriented touch cells Trends Gauges Data Fields List of PLC data field items Recipes Recipe data set values Global Key Macros Global macro keys Trend Buffers Trend buffer parameters Recipes Table with list of recipes that have the Multipage flag set Data Transfer Data transfer jobs Reserved Data Area RDA parameters Alarms Alarm table with messages Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 20 E SD BR Tech note Designer Setup Panel Printer and Reports Printer setting and print report table parameters Panel Setup List of panel capabilities and setup configuration Controller and Network Setup List of controller drivers connected on the panel network Remote Pass through Remote Pass through parameters Password Table with list of all defined passwords and their parameters Cross Reference List of Pages Pictures and Controller referen
437. r your new dictionary in the Tag Dictionary box Select the controller driver that you plan to use from the list provided If more than one driver model is available with the selected controller select the model you plan to use from the list under Driver Model 4 8 23 New Group The New Group command is available from the Tag Editor File menu if no tag dictionaries are currently opened If a tag dictionary is open then the New Group command is available under the Dictionary menu The New group dialog box allows you to enter tag information The particular columns available may vary but will normally contain at least the tag name the logical address for the tag the data format for the tag and any comments necessary Type a tag name in the Tag box and any comments in the Comment box Clicking on the Logical_address box activates an arrow Click on the arrow to bring up the Data Field Properties dialog box Specify the reference address data type and format etc Click OK to return to the New group dialog box with the logical address and data format information completed Every time you enter information on one line an additional line appears below it Fill in as many lines as you need When you have entered all the information in the New group dialog box select Save As from the File menu to save the dictionary 4 8 24 Delete Dictionary This command deletes the selected dictionary 4 8 25 Print The Print command in the File menu allows
438. raJer crz cnr cro co x cr es os ese 18 Reserved Word 19 Reserved Word 20 Reserved Word g j N m H H Lo m i H m m ir SIM H H N E wh E jejejje se fese pese fo jp JJ Jo foe fara As shown in the two previous pictures the four Reserved Data Areas are Keyboard Update Area Panel Status Area Controller Update Area 7 7 2 Keyboard Update Area This reserved area is formatted to contain flags for each key on the panel and extended keyboard These flags are set HIGH when a key is pressed and set LOW when released Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 425 EXOR Tech note Each key status flag occupies one bit in the controller memory These bits can be used by the controller to detect when a particular key has been pressed and then in turn perform a specific operation It is recommended to use the Keyboard Macro Editor to program keys This method is easier and more efficient than programming a key using ladder logic Note In the Keyboard Update Area of the RDA the ENTER key is mapped to K1 the CLEAR key is mapped to K16 and the HELP key is mapped to K15 7 7 3 Panel Status Area 7 7 4 Panel Status Area This reserved area is formatted to contain time and date information from the panel s Real Time Clock a two byte Panel Status Word and a Current Page Register 7 7 5 Panel Status Area This reserved area is formatted to contain time and
439. ral Layout Attributes Custom State On Edit Load Image Handling Resample When Sizing use for detailed images Cancel Help The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom button Custom buttons can be created for both Off and On states Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box The button width and height can be specified Color options may also be selected according to the selected panel s support of colors The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Custom buttons This checkbox allows you to place an indicator light on the button 4 4 98 Panel Key Button Touch Cell Example In this example we will create a touch cell to simulate panel key F21 Note It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback Select Insert Touch Cells Panel Key Button Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box select Rectangle as the Style Under Action click on the button to identify the Key that will control the touch cell action Click on key F21 to select it Click OK Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 111 EXOR
440. rameter 17 Words are only used if required by the particular mailbox command You can determine the controller memory addresses of all the data elements in the mailbox by using the starting address of the mailbox area set under Project Panel Controller Interface Interlock Mailbox and the memory map shown below The Interlock Reference is the address of the first Mailbox register in the controller memory The address can be entered directly as a string or via the Data Field Properties dialog box displayed by clicking on the button 0 Siss Word Command Response Word Parameter 17 Note When entering the starting address care must be taken to ensure that the controller memory used by the Mailbox does not overlap with the memory areas reserved for other panel functions such as alarms I O update keyboard update etc 7 3 8 Status Word The Status Word is the main handshaking register of the mailbox Both the controller and the panel can write to this register The status word contains a binary number the meaning of which is described below 0 No request Mailbox is available Controller rt Pending requet L ontee 12 Mailbox busy fand 3 Error code Illegal command 4 Command completed 5 Panel restart 7 3 9 Command Response Word The controller specifies which mailoox command it wants to execute by placing the command code of the desired command in the Command Response Word The available mailbox comma
441. re inserted at and how they are positioned Fields that can be inserted include the time and date the page number the report name and a label which allows you to enter static text 7 6 7 Advanced Report Parameters Under the Advanced tab you can set up various parameters that are common for every page in the report These include whether or not to wrap lines the default font how to transform various attributes what to do with non printable characters etc 7 6 8 Triggering a Report Printout A report printout can be triggered in three different ways With a macro that is associated to a function key or a touch cell Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 421 EXOR Tech note Cyclically at a specified time From a PLC request issued through the Interlock Mailbox To set up a report to be printed when a function key or touch cell use commands from the Insert menu to create the touch cell select Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu In the Macro Editor dialog box there is a macro command entitled Print Report Select a tab to correspond to the page where you want the trigger to be placed From the Commands toolbar select the Print Report icon The Choose Report dialog box appears where you can select which report is to be printed when this key or touch cell is pressed Any report can be printed cyclically in two different modes any day at a specific time or cyclically after an interval of time You can s
442. read this is all that needs to be done If bit C15 is active then one additional step is necessary Since this bit must be a logic high in order for the mailbox to be read you need to write a value of 1 to this bit Once it is set a 1 needs to be written to the Status Word to indicate a pending request in the mailbox Details of enabling the Interlock Mailbox the structure of the mailbox Interlock Mailbox commands and mailbox programming are provided 7 3 2 Enabling the Internet Mailbox 7 3 3 Enabling the Internet Mailbox To enable the Interlock Mailbox select the Interlock Mailbox tab from the Panel Controller Interface dialog box under the Project menu Panel Controller Interface 2 x RDA Setup Interlock MailBox Panel I O V Enable Read in cycles C Read in cycles if PCW flag is set Read Cycle 1 sec Interlock Reference De1 D DM El Cancel Apply Help The mailbox is disabled by default To enable it simply mark the checkbox entitled Enable Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 374 EXOR Tech note Details about the read cycle modes and the interlock reference are provided 7 3 4 Read Cycle The Read Cycle time under Project Panel Controller Interface Interlock Mailbox specifies how frequently the operator panel will read the data in the mailbox to check to see if it contains a new command The faster the mailbox Read Cycle the faster the panel will respond to command
443. recipe page Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields can be used to visually display the currently selected recipe parameter sets of the various recipes in the project When these data fields are added to a project they must specify which recipe is to be monitored by the data fields This is done by specifying the page number that contains the required recipe in the Data Field Properties dialog box For example a project might contain three recipes one on page 2 one on page 3 and the other on page 7 To monitor the currently selected recipe parameter sets of these three different recipes three Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields must be added to the project One of these data fields will be used to monitor the recipe on page 2 one to monitor the recipe on page 3 and the third to monitor the recipe on page 7 These three Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields could all be placed on any page of the project Regardless of where they are placed in the project the address of the first data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 2 the address of the second data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 3 and the address of the third data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 7 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 52 EXOR Tech note You can also change the parameter set of a recipe on a particular page by modifying the value held in the Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable This is done in the same wa
444. res supports different hardware type different hardware 0100 The firmware is missing in the Only the Bootstrap software module is panel loaded in UniOP The firmware is either missing or it is damaged 0200 Communication session is in Attempting to go into Operation Mode progress during a project file download This happens if the Enter key is pressed during the download process 0400 Bad checksum in the project The global consistency checks of the downloaded project failed The project should be downloaded again 0800 Wrong application type or itdoes The protocol present in the memory not match the project file card is not consistent with the downloaded project This could happen if a project is downloaded with the option Download Project Only activated without erasing the previous protocol still present in the memory 1000 MIPS FW code Graphic Engine The MIPS part of the FW code on the is missing card is missing corrupted or not compatible with 8051 FW This error is possible only on boards using MIPS T2000 or later o o o Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 265 E AS DR Tech note 4 7 10 Options 4 7 11 Options PS El om KR Panelin LAN Selecting Options from the Transfers menu lets you choose the panel memory location for both the project and the protocol and set communication parameters display preferences Tabs in the Options Properties dialog box include Serial
445. rminal Use the cable CA75 to connect the PLC port of a client panel to the TSIO2 bus terminal The maximum length of the cable is 1 m TSIDA Panel Panel connector D type 15S TSIO2 connector D type 15P 7 4 29 TSIO1 Bus Terminal with RS 232 to RS 485 Converter The TSI01 bus terminal is a special module designed for use in the UniNET network It is an optically isolated RS 232 to RS 485 converter that can be directly connected to the Printer port of an operator panel The power supply is derived from the panel connector an on board isolated DC DC converter provides the power for the RS 485 section of the converter The converter additionally provides the possibility of properly terminating the line with a simple switch The pinout of the RS 232 connector of the converter is shown below The connector type is D type 15 pin male A o AA i os a a a a a 3 RXD gt 4A 5Vextermal 2 5 SignalGround 18 PB E S O A B Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 403 EXOR Tech note 7 4 30 TSIO2 Bus Terminal The TSI02 bus terminal is a special module designed for use in the UniNET network The use of the TSI02 bus terminal makes it easier to wire a panel to the network and additionally provides the possibility of properly terminating the line by means of a switch The TSIO2 has been designed for connection to the PLC port of an operator panel equipped with RS 485 interface The pinout of the RS 485 connector of
446. roject workspace can be used to display a tree of the currently open project Click on the Project tab at the bottom of the workspace to view various all the pages in that project All pages are listed by title To open a page in the project simply double click on that page in the project workspace 5 4 2 Data Transfer The Data Transfer feature lets you exchange data between two controllers or between registers within a single controller A job refers to one complete data transfer The data transfer configuration allows you to set the job execution mode the source and destination references the number of words to transfer Right click on Data Transfer item to add a new Data Transfer Job Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 346 E AS D BR Tech note El Designer Test Project dpr Page 1 File Edit View Insert Page Project Transfers Tools Window SEET E A 1s x Page 1 Job Execution Mode Bo On Request InCycles fi sec EI TT IA Source Reference 3 D DAD H GE Test Project EN Destination Reference o B30 DWO H o 1 Page 1 TA EI Special Pages l f f l j j No of Words to transfer E Panel Controller Interface Y MU AS Gi SE EE OO O A Ap DB10 EEN RRR lll C cc mp DB15 SES 11 aa Float In Main Window Sq Pages BEN a di El 6 4 il lee be
447. rol Panel and using the Install New Font command from the File menu This is the Windows Control Panel File menu not the Designer File menu 4 2 30 Objects Font Style Text may be bold italic or both Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 29 EXOR Tech note 4 2 31 Objects Font Size Select a font size in points 4 2 32 Objects Font Effects Text may be displayed as strikeout or underlined It is also possible to display text in various colors 4 2 33 Objects Font Sample The sample window gives a preview of the selected text settings 4 2 34 Objects Font Script Western and various other scripts Hebrew Greek Cyrillic etc are available 4 3 View Menu 4 3 1 View Menu This section provides information about the View menu The View menu lets you set the screen to view the project in the most comfortable manner for various tasks Commands on the View menu include Zoom In Zoom Out Status Bar Toolbars Workspace Full Screen Graphics Library Manager Layers 4 3 2 Zoom In Zoom In enlarges items on the screen although the whole project page may no longer be visible This is useful for checking fine details You can also access this feature by pressing the Ctrl key with the key of the numeric keypad Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 30 EXOR Tech note Project Transfers Tools Window Help Users can define the view size as a of the panel size as shown in the above
448. rom the File menu can be used to terminate the Designer program You are prompted to confirm the operation if the current application has not been saved 310 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note 4 8 107 Export to ROM File Save in tmp DI e DIr ES skinpreview_0 al KeypadDesigneri kbd al Twunk002 MTX a cov32E mp links txt la download rom pv222 htm JET121 Emp E TWAIN LOG a JET225 tmp al Twain001 Mex JETSBBC tmp al Twunk001 MTX File name Save as type DI Cancel 4 This creates a binary file with extension ROM that can be used to program the memory card directly using a programmer 4 8 108 Download to Panel Floating keypads created with the Keypad Designer software need to be downloaded to the panel in addition to the standard project file Once the keypads have been downloaded the UniOP panel will use them for editing when in Data Entry mode Note If you created a custom Data Entry screen using the Special Pages section in Designer the keypads created in the Keypad Designer software will not be used Keypad Designer keypads can be downloaded to the UniOP panel by using the standard download cable connected to the PC Printer port Selecting the Download icon will start the communication session between the Keypad Designer utility and the UniOP panel TT x IV New File K di EA Cancel Overwrite existing file Decimal Numeric F Hex N
449. rs into your font 4 8 86 Bargraphs Bargraph Characters Start Code Previous code 226 New character code 228 The Font Editor start code for bargraphs is the first non blank character within the bargraph character set Keep in mind that the bargraph character set must be kept continuous i e the characters must be kept in numerical order Note The character code will not be the same for each font 4 8 87 Define Symbol The Designer software offers you the ability to create your own symbols using the Font Editor While still included in the software this feature has become obsolete with the current graphical release To select symbol mode select Define Symbol from the Options menu Select Symbol Dimensions and enter the height and width of the symbol you would like to define Select OK Select Define Symbol Draw New Symbol from the Options menu The display will then change to the symbol dimensions that were selected The editor will put the selected number of characters from the font in this symbol edit box starting with the character that was highlighted Select Define Symbol Compose Symbol from the Options menu Double click on each character that makes up the symbol Start with the character is in the upper left hand corner and move across The light gray character box will automatically move to the next character location If you make a mistake simply single click on the character location to move the
450. rtical EE 341 4 10 Application Men csiceeseccsisccsstiesaccersatisaeatesasecevas ccnssated depcnvancawagtahaseeadenssngytcnvaaes 341 4 10 1 Application Men 341 410 2 EE 341 41053 Oe 342 E EE 342 4 10 5 MINIMIZO ico A A a ieee 342 4 10 6 MaxiMiZO ico da 342 410 7 Close iii aa 342 GIN 342 5 1 Workspace cialis E 342 5 2 o e 344 5 3 A eee rer pre erree heer rer pee er ereerereeer ere etree terre E rrr cree rere ek ere eerrrree 345 5 4 PO lucir toi dez 346 DAT Projet as ada 346 542 Data Trasteros 346 SE 348 6 1 ELE 348 6 2 Designer SOON EE 348 6 2 1 A ENEE cence csadeenshahcasaces cadceervanenavategacoes daatesqanenteats 348 6 22 Menu LEE 349 6 2 3 TOODA Siaa sec agen E EE aE OTE EARE AA TRAS 350 6 24 W rkSpaC Eesen edan Ee iaaa a aa aE EAE AE 352 6 25 Gite ET 352 GETT E 353 6 2 7 Right Click MenUS oooccccnnccononcnonoccconccccnrn cnn nn nano coran nana 354 GER Ee le iii ia 355 6 2 9 Getting Help iicioniin ia da 355 6 3 Designer Setup iii a ad oca 355 6 3 1 Designer Setup EEN 355 6 3 2 Transfer Settings narran cc cnn 355 6 3 3 Controller Selection and Setup oococccccnnnccinncnnnncccconccnnnnnnnnann nano cn rara ranma 356 6 3 7 Panel Selection and Geiup cn nancnrnn rar ran ccnn 357 6 4 Creating a Project A 359 6 4 1 Creating a Project oooncccnnininnnninninnnncconrnnccnancn rn cra 359 6 4 2 Creating a New Elei 359 6 4 3 Selecting akont ccc cscs eeeseeeeeeee cece eeeeaeseceeeeseaeeeeaaeseeaaesseeeeseaeeseaeeseeeeeeaes 360
451. rument Properties gt 3 2 xi General Layout Gauge Needle Background Needle Style FiledTrianale y Needle MN Length so E Center E De ie Thickness E gt Center Ko p z Cancel Help On the Needle tab you can format the needle Style Length Tail size tail Thickness Center size Needle color and Center color 4 4 277 Style The style of needle to be used Choices include Thick Triangle and Filled Triangle 4 4 278 Length Needle length expressed as a percentage of the gauge radius 4 4 279 Tail Needle tail length expressed as a percentage of the gauge radius 4 4 280 Thickness Needle thickness expressed as a percentage of the gauge radius Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 166 E SD BR Tech note 4 4 281 Center The circle that highlights the needle rotation point The size of this circle is defined as a percentage of the gauge diameter 4 4 282 Needle Color Color of the needle body 4 4 283 Center Color Color of the needle center 4 4 284 Background Meter Instrument Properties Ee EJES General Layout Gauge Needle Background Custom Background Backgrounds a mf ArmowDown E CN ArrowFourwe cy ArowLeft bm No Image Selected tg ArrowRight bi E ArowUp bmp mg Bannerl bmp mg Banner2 bmp Banner3 bmp Y gt Edit Load Check the Custom Background checkbox to enable the custom background commands This lets
452. ry into the box currently occupied by the cursor 4 5 22 Recipe Values 4 5 23 Recipe Values The recipe values section is in the form of a spreadsheet Each row is associated with a particular recipe data field The controller address of the recipe data item is displayed at the far left hand side of the row enabling you to tell which row is associated with which recipe data item Each column is associated with a particular parameter set of the recipe Each parameter set is identified by a number The first column corresponds to parameter set 1 the second column to parameter set 2 and so on Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 186 EXOR Tech note The initial values for a particular parameter set can be fully specified by entering a value for each row in the column The first column corresponds to parameter set 1 the second column to parameter set 2 and so on The number of columns activated in the spreadsheet corresponds to the number entered for Number of Parameter Sets 4 5 24 Recipe Item The number of rows activated on the spreadsheet corresponds to the number of recipe data fields defined on the page An asterisk next to a Recipe Item indicates that the item has been set as a recipe name 4 5 25 Recipe Parameter Set A parameter set is a specific block of data within a recipe A recipe parameter set is created by assigning particular values to the recipe data fields on a page With Designer it is possible to cr
453. ry reserved for recipe data Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 199 E AS UR Tech note 4 6 43 Available Alarms Number of available alarms 4 6 44 Event List Size Number of available events 4 6 45 Colors Number of supported colors This list box is enabled only for panels that support 256 colors For those models that do not support 256 colors a fixed value is shown 4 6 46 Time Format Specify whether the panel will display time data fields in a 24 hour format for example 20 10 or a 12 hour format for example 10 10pm 4 6 47 Date Format Specify whether the panel will display date data fields in a month day year format or a day month year format Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 200 E AS DR Tech note 4 6 48 External Devices 4 6 49 External Devices tab Panel Model Settings External Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Ethernet Board 0 Day a Cancel Help Under Panel Setup the options available under the External Devices index tab can be used to specify the presence of the TCM10 communication module Ethernet Board and assign an IP address to it For firmware 5 00 and above the External Devices tab will have an additional property button as shown in the below dialog Panel Model Settings Extemal Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous VK EthemetBoard 0 0 0 0 Cancel Help Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 201 EXOR Tech note On cli
454. s Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character 4 4 207 Select Language It is possible to integrate multiple languages Clicking on the Select Language button brings up the Languages dialog box that allows you to choose the language in which you wish to work 4 4 208 Alignment Title alignment Can be Left Right or Center Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 154 EXOR Tech note 4 4 209 Title 4 4 210 Title In the Title section you can enter title text and format the appearance of the title by setting the font foreground and background colors and title height 4 4 211 Text The text that will be the trend window title or label 4 4 212 Font Title font 4 4 213 Height Height of the area reserved for the trend viewer title as a percentage of the trend viewer 4 4 214 Foreground FG Title foreground color 4 4 215 Background BG Title background color 4 4 216 Window 4 4 217 Window In the Window section you can format the appearance of the window by setting the frame color and width the background color and to enable a horizontal or vertical grid set the horizontal grid color or vertical grid color and set the horizontal grid marks or vertical grid marks 4 4 218 Frame Trend frame color Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 155 EXOR Tech note 4 4 219 Width Trend frame width as a percent
455. s if not set video object state will be saved across page changes bit 1 0x02 fixed aspect ratio scaling will be performed in a way that original stream s aspect ratio is preserved vertical scaling factor will be ignored bit 2 0x04 turn off if set video object will not display a video stream Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 495 EXOR Tech note bit 3 0x08 reserved do not use bit 4 0x10 reserved do not use bit 5 0x20 fit to scale if set all offset and scaling parameters will be ignored a stream will be scaled in a such way that it will be completely visible in the window VDOx Brightness Brightness level The range is from 128 to 127 with zero as a normal level VDOx Contrast Contrast level The range is from 128 to 127 with zero as a normal level VDOx VdoStatus Read only register containing some information related to the Video Input object status bit O 0x01 VGA signal displayed bit 1 0x02 PAL signal displayed bit 2 0x04 signal is valid VDOx Hres Read only register containing the horizontal resolution of an object s video stream VDOx Vres Read only register containing the vertical resolution of an object s video stream VDOx VFreq Read only register containing a vertical frequency of an object s video stream 7 13 13 Backlight Dimming The T2003 platform for units with TFT display adds the possibility to use the dimming function
456. s or parts of project file pages The Reports dialog box under Report on Panel Printer on the Project menu lets you define the parameters of each specific report Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 229 El Reports Report 1 General Header Footer Advanced 8 Add gt o Margins Left fi Top 1 Right fi Bottom f There are four tabs in the Reports dialog box General Header Footer and Advanced Each deals with a different section of the report A list of reports is shown on the left side of the dialog box In addition there are buttons to add a new report delete an existing report and change languages Note More than one report can be created for each project file Note If reports are to be printed the paper height must be defined in Printer Setup before the report is defined 4 6 161 Report List A list of existing reports if any is shown and is available for selection 4 6 162 New A report may be added by clicking the New button and giving the report a name 4 6 163 Delete Clicking on the Delete button removes the currently selected report from the list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 230 EXOR Tech note 4 6 164 Languages Click on the Languages icon to select a language 4 6 165 General 4 6 166 General tab El Reports Report 1 General Header Footer Advanced Page 1 Add gt lt
457. s LED For those UniOP panels that do not have this LED the control variable Recipe Event Backup can be used to give feedback to the operator on the status of the backup operation This control variable can assume the values listed below Recipe Event Backup 0 Standby 1 Backup operation in progress The S12 bit of the RDA area is used to communicate to the controller when a backup operation to flash memory is in process The UniOP will set this bit to 1 just before the backup operation begins When the backup operation is complete UniOP will set this bit to 0 PLC Port Mode Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 58 IN XO H Tech note Data Field Properties Re 21x Reference r Control Yariable Reference Data Type Address PLC Port mode PP1 Data Format BYTE Bin Cancel Help This variable provides information about the status of the PLC Port assignment 0 Assignedto Panel ss PC Printer Port Module Number Data Field Properties E 24xj Reference r Control Yariable Reference Data Type Address PC Printer Port mode PP2 Data Format BYTE Bin Cancel Help This variable provides information about the status of the PC Printer Port assignment Value 0 Assigned to Panel 1 Assigned to Internal Controller User Mode Assigned to Internal Controller Service Mode PLC Port Module Number Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP
458. s defined Error Error in project file 7 3 14 Start Recipe Download The controller can use this command to start a recipe download from the panel memory to the controller memory Command code 2 Two parameters are required by this command Page number of required recipe 1 max page number in project file Parameter set number 1 max number of pre defined parameter sets The panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below after performing the operation Note A recipe transfer may take several seconds depending mainly on the number of bytes that have to be transferred OK Transfer completed successfully Error Recipes contain default data Error There are no Recipes defined Error Error in project file Error Illegal Page number has been requested Error lllegal number of parameter set has been requested Error The requested parameter set is locked that is it is being used by the operator panel for a data entry operation Error A communication error occurred during the transfer 7 3 15 Start Recipe Upload The controller can use this command to start a recipe upload from the controller memory to the panel memory Command code 3 Two parameters are required by this command Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 378 EXOR Tech note Page number of required recipe 1 max page number in project file Parameter set number 1 max number o
459. s from the controller However the update of the variables shown on the display will be slower 7 3 5 Interlock Reference The Interlock Reference is the address of the first Mailbox register in the controller memory The address can be entered directly as a string or via the Data Field Properties dialog box displayed by clicking on the button A memory map of the Mailbox in the controller memory is shown below The Status Word and the Command Response Word are always required for the Mailbox Parameter 0 Parameter 17 Words are only used if required by the particular mailbox command Status Word Command Response Word Parameter 17 Note When entering the starting address care must be taken to ensure that the controller memory used by the Mailbox does not overlap with the memory areas reserved for other panel functions such as alarms I O update keyboard update etc 7 3 6 Structure of the Mailbox 7 3 7 Structure of the Mailbox The controller can issue different commands depending upon the values written to the mailbox Some commands require parameters which have a binary numeric format to be included with the command while other commands require the panel to respond with data Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 375 EXOR Tech note The structure of the mailbox in the controller memory is shown below The Status Word and the Command Response Word are always required for the mailbox Parameter 0 Pa
460. s may be collected from the trend buffer stored inside the memory of the PLC from the memory of the UniOP on a cyclical basis or one a time when a variable changes value Or data can be sampled only when the defined variable does not contain a value of zero Use the Stop Sampling checkbox to stop the sampling when the trend buffer is full This is a first in first out FIFO buffer Once the buffer is full older sample values will be erased to allow the new sample values to be stored You can choose to clear the trend buffer upon panel startup when the trend buffer becomes full or when the selected variable changes value You can also choose to never automatically clear the trend buffer However if the Stop when buffer is full checkbox is not selected the oldest sample is removed and the newest sample is stored when the buffer is filled Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 463 EXOR Tech note 7 10 9 Trend Window 7 10 10 Trend Window The trend window is the area used to display the trend buffer To create a trend window select Insert Trend Window or click on the Trend Window icon on the toolbar Click and drag to define an area on the project screen The Trend Window Properties dialog box will appear Note A trend buffer must be defined under Project Trend Buffers before you can access the Trend Window Properties dialog box If a trend buffer has not already been established you will be prompted to create one Y A
461. s saved on exit for use the next time Designer is started When you switch between two projects with different configurations the latest project to be opened overrides the previous and becomes the new default state for the Designer To prevent accidental reset of the configuration parameters you are prompted to confirm the New operation if there are pending modifications that have not been saved Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 16 EXOR Tech note 4 1 3 Open To open an existing project select Open from the File menu click the Open icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl O keys The Open Project dialog box will appear providing a list of the file names in each directory Look in e EI e ES E 22002201 dpr D Gauge dpr D test016 dpr E death dpr D NewProject dpor D test017 dpr E Demo dpr E ggg dpr E Trends dpr El DemoFul2 dpr El smPictures dpor El TwoPictures dpr Ei FourPictures dpr D svG dpr D upload dpr D fred dpr D svn dpr File name Files of type Designer Projects dpr v Cancel bh Enter the name of the file to be loaded or use the list box to select from the existing files If an extension is not specified dpr is assumed 4 1 4 Close To close a currently open file select Close from the File menu Files may also be closed by clicking on the lower of the two X s in the upper right hand corner of the Designer window by selecting Close from the Designer menu or by pressin
462. s the baud rate to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer 4 6 57 Parity Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer 4 6 58 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits to be used in communication 4 6 59 Stop Bits Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the target panel and Designer 4 6 60 Mode 4 6 61 Mode Define the passthrough activation mode The available choices are Hardware or Remote Hardware 4 6 62 Hardware Panel passthrough mode can be activated locally by the panel by using a macro or a mailbox command 4 6 63 Remote Hardware Panel passthrough mode can be activated remotely by sending a string command through the serial line To configure Designer for remote passthrough via a modem select Remote Hardware passthrough from the Passthrough tab under Panel Setup Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 204 EXOR Tech note Note Remote Hardware passthrough should be selected only if passthrough mode is to be used locally and not via a modem When Remote Hardware passthrough is selected in Panel Setup the Remote passthrough entry becomes available in the Transfers menu This entry lets you select one of three remote passthrough commands Configuration Mode Start and Stop 4 6 64 Commands 4 6 65 Commands In this section you can define command strings to manage the passthrough feature Enter the c
463. s you set panel color preferences Close the box by clicking on the X in the upper right corner 4 4 76 Dynamic Graphics Examples 4 4 77 Dynamic Graphics Example 1 In this example assume a situation in which there are three possible occurrences in the same area of the screen a blower can be on a pump can be on or neither can be on A graphic will be displayed on the panel to reflect the situation This can be accomplished by referencing the graphics to a single register in the controller A value of 0 in this register indicates that neither the blower nor the pump is on A value of 1 in this register indicates that the blower is on A value of 2 in this register indicates that the pump is on Select Insert Data Fields Dynamic Graphics or click on the Dynamic Graphics icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define a box where the graphic is to be displayed The Dynamic Graphic Properties dialog box appears Click on the button under PLC Reference to set the memory location in the Data Field Properties dialog box Set the data field properties then click OK to return to the Dynamic Graphic Properties box Select the Frames index tab We have three different values being written into the controller 0 1 or 2 Therefore our minimum value is 0 and the number of frames is 3 Enter 0 in the Min box and 3 in the Frames box Click on the Edit button This will bring up another dialog box in which you can associate a graphic wit
464. s you to easily work with a large number of tags by creating a tag database for your project It provides the capability to add delete and modify tags as well as assign PLC addresses to each tag plus it includes import and export capabilities to exchange tags with external applications You can create a list of tag names in the Tag Editor and then assign the tag names to various fields of the Designer project by simply selecting a tag name The Tag Editor provides a grid like user interface where you can enter a tag name assign a tag address a group name for the tag and enter a comment for the tag An example of using tags and the Tag Editor is available To open the Tag Editor select Tag Editor from the Tools menu of Designer The Tag Editor application opens The Tag Editor is a typical Windows application with menus across the top a workspace to on the left side and the currently open file shown on the right 4 8 4 File Menu 4 8 5 File Menu The Tag Editor File menu includes commands for managing tag dictionaries such as New Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 279 EXOR Tech note Open Save As Import Tags Export Tags New Dictionary New Group Delete Dictionary Print Print Preview Print Setup Recently Opened Files Exit 4 8 6 New New Tag Database E xj Database Name Location CAD esProjects eee Selecting New from the File menu of the Tag Editor opens the New Tag Database di
465. sary to switch Designer into Control Variables mode and create a numeric field You will need to select a UniOP variable from Insert Data Fields The Variable name control will show the list of variables that have already been defined The meaning of these variables can be found inside the trend window 7 10 18 Trend Macros There are two icons in the Macro Editor under Project Keyboard Macro Editor that are associated with trending The first macro Trend buffer print gives you the ability to print the trend buffer in alphanumeric format The buffer to print parameter shows all of the active trend buffers that can be printed This macro can be defined as a global macro and is thus defined on the All Pages index tab The second macro Trend window can be defined only on a local basis and must be defined from the Page n index tab This macro allows for manipulation of the trend currently being viewed 7 10 19 Trend Printing Trend buffers can be printed in either alphanumeric format or in graphic format To print a trend buffer in alohanumeric format use the Trend buffer print macro under Project Keyboard Macro Editor All Pages To print in graphic mode use Designer s report features under Project Report on Panel Printer Reports To do this it is necessary to first create a page that contains the trend window 7 10 20 Mailbox You can start a trend buffer printout by issuing a mailbox command Tn179 05 doc 12 01 20
466. se the list box to select from the existing files If an extension is not specified kbd is assumed 4 8 100 Close To close a currently open file select Close from the File menu 4 8 101 Save To save a Keypad Designer Files select Save from the File menu click on the Save file icon on the toolbar or press the Ctrl S keys 4 8 102 Save As If a Keypad Designer file to be saved has not been named the Save As dialog box appears Or you may select Save As from the File menu This option can also be used to save a Keypad Designer File under a different name Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 309 EXEE Technote Save in tmp DI e e ES e Cancel La File name Keypad Designer Files kbd Save as type The Save As dialog box shows the current directory path and the current file name A new name and path may be entered or the ones presented may be accepted 4 8 103 Print Selecting Print from the File menu or pressing the Ctrl P keys brings up the familiar Windows Print dialog box from which the currently open may be printed 4 8 104 Print Preview Selecting Print Preview from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Preview view from which the currently open Keypad may be previewed for printing 4 8 105 Recent Files The most recently opened files are listed under the File menu as a shortcut Click on the name of a file to reopen it 4 8 106 Exit Selecting Exit f
467. sed during downloading 4 7 33 Compatibility with version 1 Ports Transfer Transfer advanced Compatibility with version 1 ir Memory location for Protocol Intemal C External C Firmware Memory location for Project External Memory Types Not installed C External OK Cancel Help OK The Compatibility with version 1 tab lets you create projects that are compatible with the old version 1 of the UniOP panels In the current UniOP panels the project file and the code handling the communication protocols are stored in the same memory In old UniOP panels it was possible to specify the target memory location for both the protocol code and the project data Of course the available options were depending on the actual hardware configuration In the above dialog internal memory means Battery backed RAM and external memory means Flash or EPROM In particular UniOP models the protocol code was part of the panel firmware and could not be changed nor modified Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 271 ES UR Tech note 4 7 34 Modem Commande The Modem commands tab is only visible if Use modem is selected on the Ports tab under Transfers Options Compatibility with version 1 Modem commands Modem messages alo Initialisation string Dial prefix string Dial suffix string Hangup string a ATHEN Jh Drop DTR for hangup Cancel Help Selecting this feature lets y
468. sen the Macro button brings up the Define Edit Macro Command dialog box where Keyboard Macro Editor commands are available 4 4 157 Enable Indicator The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Windows Windows Custom and Custom style touch cell buttons This checkbox allows you to place an indicator light on the button 4 4 158 Layout Note This page is used to show the Layout tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties E 24x General Layout Attributes Custom es a Label Font Fixed Custom Font Text E Text Bkgd Je Transparent Line Cd Bkad IV Transparent Off CH On CH Cancel Help The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the Languages button brings up the Languages dialog box that lets you choose the language in which you wish to work Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 143 EXOR Tech note The label placement icons lets you place the label either above the touch cell or centered on the touch cell Note Fixed font text may only be placed above a t
469. serted as page 3 You can also access the Insert Page command by pressing the Alt Ins keys 4 5 3 Add Page Selecting this command adds a new page to the end of the project file You can also access the Add Page command by pressing the F7 function key 4 5 4 Delete Page Selecting this command deletes the currently selected page within the project file You will be prompted to confirm the operation The pages of the project file will automatically be renumbered You can also access the Delete Page command by pressing the Shift F7 keys Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 182 EXOR Tech note 4 5 5 Goto Page This dialog box is one method available for selecting a page in a project Select a page from the pull down list in the Go to page dialog box or type the page number in the entry field e cee for selecting a particular page in a project include selecting a page from the pull down Current page list on the toolbar double clicking on a page from the Project tab in the workspace or by pressing the Ctrl G keys 4 5 6 Previous Page Selecting this option displays the previous page in the project Pressing the Page Up key also displays the previous page 4 5 7 Next Page Selecting this option displays the next page in the project Pressing the Page Down key also displays the next page 4 5 8 Page Options 4 5 9 Page Options Page Options eS 2 xI G Pages BEA ed 8 Page 1 Ed Page 2 Link E Special Pages IV
470. sformations Page Separator k SPACE gt Packing No Packinc Y Default Font Font 1 Non printable characters Special Formats None Blink C Bold Numeric C Italic SEH ge DI C Underline Reverse C Print Anyway e None Blanks Condensed Text Asterisk Enlarged Text The Advanced tab allows you to select the following parameters which are common for every page in the report Wrap Lines Page Separator Packing Default Font Attribute Transformations Non printable characters Special Formats 4 6 184 Wrap Lines If wrapping is selected lines longer than the width of the page will be printed on the next line If wrapping is not selected lines longer than the width of the page will be truncated Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 237 E AS UR Tech note 4 6 185 Page Separator The page separator is a character that can be optionally defined as a placeholder for empty lines in the printed page 4 6 186 Packing If the page width is longer than the display width it is possible to print two or more rows ona single line 4 6 187 Default Font Specifies the default font to use when a particular font has not been selected in the page definition dialog box The list of available fonts depends on the printer driver 4 6 188 Attribute Transformations Display attributes such as reverse underline or blink or can be transformed into ano
471. shapes when decoding old projects V Enable all languages when decoding old multilanguage projects Designer Startup Option On Designer Startup open the last used project IT Select default project directory CADOCUMENTS AND SETTINGSA Se Cancel Apply Help The General tab allows you to specify if the if the page names have to be displayed or not by the panel The Show page names in panel font option allows you to show the page names with the panel font inside the Page Options dialog The Draw button shading option allows you to control if buttons inside bitmaps or custom touch cells have to be shaded or not The Interpolate character shapes option controls how the character shapes created with previous version of Designer are to be converted into the new graphic format By default the option is on if you get a bad conversion try to disable it and repeat the operation The Enable all languages controls how the multilanguage texts created with previous version of Designer are to be converted into the new graphic format By default the option is on i e all languages are enabled otherwise disables the text object for languages with empty texts When the On Startup open the last used project option is checked Designer will load at at start up the last used project automatically Using the Select default project directory you can specify the default project directory where the Designer files
472. sicidsssisescdadinesicdsorescusdenacees tabard 313 Compress Graphic 269 Compressing Panel Font occccnnononoconnnonnnononanaconnnonnnn 419 A A EEEEEEEEEEES EEEEEedN 419 CONE oaran r AE EE ELE REESS 241 Configuration mode SA E E EEN E AET A 276 Configuration mode 276 Configuration mode 277 Configure Tag Diceponartes cee 248 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Configured Nodes AAA 214 Configuring Ethernet disci asadas dicas 400 A prasetaisctvesaesetaleees ftnare 460 Recipe Parameter eis 434 Trend Butter 462 UniNET Network 372 COnfPUPING comicidad ied Acces 372 CON PUTING sssini iar roai 400 Configuring eiieeii noie 434 CA A aatuzessacdues 460 Cond UN iii 462 Confmaton 383 Connect Pate sess ssdisiaisacssecaasveicessacSeccasss 12 400 405 ET 338 COMME dius cid 12 CONNEC casavdsacadsvesenssardsandavansranseate AORN ERE ARENIE 338 COMME Cb E 400 COMME E 400 O ETRE 405 Connection Messages ssec 273 Connectivity Ext nding voir 408 COMNECHVILY ss euer EEN AEN 408 Contact Intormatpon 13 COMCTIS ccciardsacisarscacesartenceasesanecnnsdences 170 329 COME ASE ee ee E Ee 181 Control Variable Change 257 Control Variable Event 256 Control Variables eeeeeeeeerererererererenn 435 Controller ninia 192 218 Controller Control Word 431 Controller Driver ooononononoconcncnonononononinnnos 214 Controller List 249 Controller Mode 191 Controller Model 214 Controller Selecpon 356 C
473. signer software uses to display information from the controller These dynamic data items come in the form of numeric fields which can be displayed in numeric format or in ASCII format bargraphs message fields attributes dynamic graphics time and date fields These fields can be created by either selecting one of the seven types of fields from the Data Fields submenu in the Insert menu or by clicking on the various data field icons in the toolbar This brings up the data Field Properties dialog box for the appropriate data field type 4 4 6 Numeric ASCIl 4 4 7 Numeric ASCIl Data Fields This option is used to add a numeric data field or an ASCII data field to the current page A numeric data field reflects a numeric value read from the controller An ASCII data field displays a character string read from the controller An ASCII data field differs from a plain text field in that an ASCII data field interacts with the controller whereas plain text is a static screen item Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 44 E AS DR Tech note A numeric ASCII data field can be created by either clicking on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar or by selecting Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII Use the cursor to specify the location of the item Once the numeric ASCIlI field is created the Numeric Field Properties dialog box will appear Numeric Field Properties KR 21x General Text Range Scaling Attributes
474. splay the data The Reference area is controller specific 4 4 70 Style Dynamic Graphic is the only possible choice Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 96 EXOR Tech note 4 4 71 Size The width and height of the graphic box in pixels Note The field width height cannot exceed the width height of remaining panel from the current cursor row column position Note Size is adjusted depending on the current font size Double font takes twice the width height of regular font size etc 4 4 72 PLC Reference The Reference area is the memory location in the controller to be used and is dependent upon the type of controller selected The field data type data format and address reference are all configured in this area Only the items pertaining to the controller type and file type will be configurable PLC is the only reference option 4 4 73 Frames 4 4 74 Frames Properties Dynamic Graphic Properties RK E 2 xi General Attributes Frames Minimum Value m Number of Frames H Resample on Resize use for detailed images as St RI MIN a D d E Speed ms Cancel The Frames tab of the Dynamic Graphic Properties dialog box lets you configure the individual frames that comprise the dynamic graphic 250 Apply Enter a number in the Min box to establish the number of the first frame Set the total number of frames in the Frames box Users may toggle through the fra
475. ss in the network Duplicate IP addresses will cause network errors 7 12 3 Address Definition with Keypad The procedure to define manually an IP address using the keypad is the following Digits must be entered one by one Use Up Down arrow keys to select the value of each digit Use Left Right arrow keys to move from one digit to next Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 476 EXOR Tech note Please remind that the maximum value for each element of the IP address is 255 There is no address consistency check in the manual IP address definition procedure 7 12 4 Definition of IP Address using Pick Panel in Designer You can modify the IP address of the panel also using Designer Open the Pick Panel dialog box you can use either the icon in the toolbar or the item Pick Panel in the Transfer menu and select the Change IP Address Properties icon Please refer Pick Panel The Ethernet Control Panel for the detailed description of Pick Panel The address assigned defined using Pick Panel in Configuration Mode is persistent once the IP address has been defined it will be used by the panel until a new address is defined with an higher priority address definition method To remove an address defined with Pick Panel enter the IP address 0 0 0 0 with Pick Panel or manually from the panel touchscreen keypad 7 12 5 Assignment of IP Address from DHCP Server UniOP contains an implementation of the DHCP client protocol and can receiv
476. ssage number where you want to paste the first message and click on Paste to copy the message into its new location Special Characters Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 83 E AS D BR Tech note General Text Messages Attributes Min fo Messages h y Message Cancel Apply Help Special characters may be added to text by clicking on the Special Characters button This will bring up the Special Characters dialog box in which you can select the character s to be used by double clicking on them or by single clicking on them and pressing Insert The characters will appear in the last position the cursor was in before entering the special characters dialog box Select Language General Text Messages Attributes Default Chinese Cancel Apply Help Select a language from the pull down list If the language you wish to use is not in the list it may be created by clicking the Languages icon on the toolbar or by selecting Languages from the Project menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 84 EXOR Tech note 4 4 54 Message Example Select Insert Data Fields Message Use the cursor to outline an area for the message Select PLC as the Reference type and click on the button to set the memory location for the messages in the Data Field Properties dialog box Click OK to return to the Message Field Properties dialog box Click on the Te
477. ssing field and Creating the Time indexed addressing field These fields are all related in that the values that are displayed within them are dependent upon the stage of the process The indexed fields will be addressed in such a manner that whenever the field number is written into the Stage numeric field location DB10 DW9 the corresponding information will be displayed in each of the indexed fields For example when Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 63 EXOR Tech note a value of 2 is written into DB10 DW9 each of the indexed fields will display the corresponding data the temperature in stage 2 the pressure in stage 2 and the amount of time spent in stage 2 Creating the Stage Numeric Data Field Type the text labels Shown in black onto a blank project page to resemble the figure above To insert the Stage we must create a numeric data field on the screen to display the stage number Select Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII or click on the Numeric Field icon in the toolbar Use the cursor to define an area where the data field will be placed next to the text Stage Number The Numeric Field Properties box appears Under Size on the General tab set the field width to 1 since this field only needs to display a single digit Set the Reference as PLC and click the button to specify the controller location In the Data Field Properties dialog box set the address to DB10 DW9 Click OK to return to the
478. st and click on Properties Set the page properties such as spacing fonts etc Click OK Click on the Header tab Select several fields under Field Type to include on the page header Click on the Footer tab Select several fields under Field Type to include on the page header Click on the Advanced tab Verify the print settings then click OK Next we program a macro to print the report when function key F22 is pressed Select Keyboard Macro Editor from the Project menu In the Macro Editor dialog box on the All Pages tab select panel key F22 Under Commande select Print Report Choose the report to be printed when key F22 is pressed Click OK to return to the Macro Editor Click OK to close the Macro Editor The project is now set up to print the selected report whenever panel key F22 is pressed 7 7 RDA 7 7 1 RDA The UniNET network fully supports the use of all panel Reserved Data Areas RDA including Alarms and Mailboxes These Reserved Data Areas can be placed in any controller attached to any server on the network The RDA concept offers a simple and efficient method to have the controller program interact with the operator panel See the RDA Setup section for additional information on the use of the RDA in Designer Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 423 EXOR Tech note Note Since most RDA activities are carried out on a cyclical basis even with a small number of nodes in the network the resu
479. sword This should allow access to Configuration Mode 4 7 51 Start This transfers a start command to the panel 4 7 52 Stop This transfers a stop command to the panel 4 7 53 Dial This feature lets you enter a phone number and send a dial command to your modem By using the Add Entry and Delete Entry buttons you may add commonly used numbers to a phone directory for reference and delete numbers when they are no longer needed Click on the Start Dialing button to initiate dialing by your modem Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 277 EXOR Tech note 4 7 54 Hang Up This feature lets you send a hang up command to your modem 4 8 Tools Menu 4 8 1 Tools Menu The Tools menu contains commands to help you to customize the appearance of the toolbars grid and font that appear on the screen Tag Editor Font Editor Keypad Designer Customize Options Advanced Replace Image s 4 8 2 Tag Editor 4 8 3 Tag Editor Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 278 X O H Tech note IN a TagEd DC DIC New group File Edit Dictionary Record View Tools Window Help D a SB BlBlu rn e iz xi DC DIC New group y Logical_address tags mdb o De DC DIC fA New group Ze Dictionary For Help press F1 Tags allow mnemonic reference to PLC variables A thorough discussion of the use of tags is available The Tag Editor allow
480. t 6 Program size 277339 Bytes Last Message Preparing project to transfer This lets you transfer the project file from the computer to the operator interface panel You can choose this option by selecting Download from the Transfers menu by clicking on the Download icon in the toolbar or by pressing the F2 key Note The panel must be in Configuration Mode in order for the download procedure to work Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 262 EXOR Tech note 4 7 3 Upload Communication Status Transfer Mode Upload 1 Program size 532745 Bytes Last Message poe in progress Selecting this option lets you upload an existing application from the target system memory into PC workstation memory As this will erase the application that is currently loaded in the Designer software you will be prompted to confirm the operation You can choose this option by either selecting Upload from the Transfers menu by clicking on the Upload icon in the toolbar or by pressing the F3 key 4 7 4 Download to SSFDC 4 7 5 Download to SSFDC Communication status 8 x Transfer Mode Downloading SSFDC ROM file kd wg Program size 532745 Bytes Last Message Downloading graphics This command allows you to download a file to an SSFDC memory card if one is installed To download a file to an SSFDC card select Download to SSFDC from the Transfers menu or press the F
481. t Attributes Custom Style Push Action Ce Momentary Maintained f 3D Round C On C Off Ml Rectangle Button 3D Rectanale E Widows Ref DE 10 Dag Es a Custom Disable Cyclic Refresh Light Ref DETODWO n RI a E OK Cancel Help WC There are four tabs in the Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box They are General Layout Attributes and Custom The General tab allows you to select the style of push button the action that is to be represented and the memory location that has its status shown on the face of the button The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the illuminated push button The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom button An illuminated push button touch cell example is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 124 EXOR Tech note 4 4 122 General 4 4 123 General Illuminated Push Button Properties 3 cI x General Layout Attributes Custom Style Push Action Ce Momentary C Maintained f 3D Round C On C Off BB Rectangle Button 3D Rectangle Windows Ref DB10 DWO El Ei Custom Disable Cyclic Refresh Light Ref DETODWO on EJ or PS OK Cancel Help LBE The General tab allows you to select the style of push button the action that is to be represented an
482. t E A xi testagain CC Pages EI 1 Page 1 D Special Pages ZS Grap ADR E Project Pg 1 1 Row 12 Col 45 Simatic 55 55 0x0 Default IT OYE z 4 4 141 Indicator Light 4 4 142 Indicator Light The Indicator Light Properties dialog box is used to create a touch cell as an indicator light To insert an indicator light touch cell click the Indicator Light icon from the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells Indicator Light then use the cursor to define the area in which the touch cell is to be placed A dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of an indicator light touch cell may be configured Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 135 E AS D BR Tech note Indicator Light Properties E 2 x General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action OE Round States 2 4 El Rectangle 3D Rectangle 1 2 wv Custom Color O Y Assign Ref DB10 Daf El Cancel Help There are three tabs in the Indicator Light Properties dialog box They are General Layout and Custom The General tab allows you to select the style of indicator light the number of states and the memory location in the controller that the indicator light is to reflect The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab lt enables you to cr
483. t boxes enter any commands necessary to start or stop remote passthrough mode or to put the panel into Configuration Mode Likewise you can enter the response that you will receive back from the panel in the Response boxes Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 358 EXOR Tech note Note Your UniOP panel must contain firmware version 4 10 or later to use the Remote Hardware feature Note Configuring Remote Hardware passthrough under Panel Setup enables the Remote passthrough command on the Transfers menu Note When remote passthrough mode has been activated the UniOP panel does not communicate with the controller and the dynamic data displayed on the screen may no longer be correct It may be useful to inform the user when the passthrough option is active To do so create a numeric ASCII bargraph or message data field under Insert Data Fields Set the Reference type as Variable click the button and select the Control Variable Data Type as Passthrough Status This variable can take on two values zero meaning that passthrough is not active one meaning that passthrough is active 6 3 16 Miscellaneous Panel Settings Under the Miscellaneous tab of the Panel Setup dialog box in the Project menu you can configure several different panel parameters Selecting any of the checkboxes enables the entry boxes associated with those selections The Panel Upload Protection feature lets you password protect the project file so t
484. t happens A new macro command can be used to perform a manual backup operation Using UniOP Firmware version V4 44 or higher the memory backup is activated only by the manual of the corresponding macro command or after any controller recipe upload operation recipe field modification on panel doesn t force an automatically recipe backup to flash memory If the Recipes amp Events backup flags in Panel Setup are disabled the macro command does not have any effect If the flags are enabled the data backup is performed Commands MARES ALA EKA A For the duration of the write operation to the Flash memory the panel LED 65 will be on to indicate that a write operation is in progress Some UniOP models do not have this LED For those UniOP panels that do not have this LED the control variable Recipe Event Backup can be used to give feedback to the operator on the status of the backup operation This control variable takes the values listed below Recipe Event Backup 0 Standby 1 Backup operation in progress The S12 bit of the RDA area is used to inform the controller that a backup operation to Flash memory is in progress The UniOP will set this bit to 1 just before the backup operation begins When the backup operation is complete UniOP will reset the bit to 0 Note When UniOP goes from Configuration Mode to Operation Mode the content of the Event List stored in RAM is erased Using the Events Run time Backup f
485. t len Pg 1 1 X 272 Y 160 DEMO Controller E Default FP MM INS 4 Destination Reference Clicking the button under Destination Reference brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box where you can specify the register to be written to Job Execution Mode The Job Execution Mode box lets you select how the data is transferred either On Request or In Cycles Number of Words to Transfer The maximum number of words for each job is 30 Source Reference Clicking the button under Source Reference brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box where you can specify the register to be read To Delete a Data Transfer Job simply right click on Data Transfer item and select Delete Job from the contextual menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 347 3 Pages aa o a e i Pe H Special Pages M Panel Controller Interface Ai 5 M Data Transfer MMMM IW DB10 DWO gt DB30 DWO Request fi DB13 DW5 gt DB13 Dw6 Be BH DB15 DO 8 gt DB16 DO 8 1 Y pe EE ide AddJob fs es amp Graphics A Objects El Project Insert Job N ts EDE a gt Ea E Edit Job Float In Main Window Pg 1 1 X 272 Y 160 DE 6 Basics 6 1 Basics This section provides a Quick Start tutorial a description of the Designer screen instructions on how to configure Designer to create a project instructions on how to create a new project using simple U I elements and simple UO fie
486. t on the Windows clipboard This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl X keys 4 8 35 Copy The Copy command makes a copy of the selected item from the current page and places it on the Windows clipboard This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl C keys 4 8 36 Paste The Paste command places items from the Windows clipboard onto the current page at the current position of the cursor This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl V keys 4 8 37 Find Enter the text for which you are searching into the box Check the Match case box if you are looking for an exact match with regard to capitalization Indicate whether you wish to search up or down from the current point 4 8 38 Replace Enter the text for which you are searching into the Find what box Enter the text with which you wish to replace it in the Replace with box Check the Match case box if you are looking for an exact match with regard to capitalization Click the Find Next button to locate the next occurrence of the text in the Find what box When the text is located you can click the Replace button to replace only that instance or click the Replace All button to replace every instance 4 8 39 Dictionary Menu 4 8 40 Dictionary Menu The Dictionary menu allows you to add a New Dictionary a New Group or to Delete a Dictionary The commands on the Dictionary menu are available only when a dictionary is opened within the Tag Editor
487. ta Format WORD Bin DI The UniOP panel reserves a separate memory location for the Recipe Parameter Set Selection for each recipe page The Recipe Parameter Set Selection memory location stores the numeric identifier of the currently selected recipe parameter set for the recipe page Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields can be used to visually display the currently selected recipe parameter sets of the various recipes in the project When these data fields are added to a project they must specify which recipe is to be monitored by the data fields This is done by specifying the page number that contains the required recipe in the Data Field Properties dialog box For example a project might contain three recipes one on page 2 one on page 3 and the other on page 7 To monitor the currently selected recipe parameter sets of these three different recipes three Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields must be added to the project One of these data fields will be used to monitor the recipe on page 2 one to monitor the recipe on page 3 and the third to monitor the recipe on page 7 These three Recipe Parameter Set Selection data fields could all be placed on any page of the project Regardless of where they are placed in the project the address of the first data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 2 the address of the second data field would be Recipe Parameter Set Selection 3 and the address of the third data fi
488. tain all the necessary firmware files used by Designer to check and update the panel SSFDC memory card New firmware files have to be copied inside this directory to be accessible from Designer 7 1 5 FW Rescue Mode UniOP panels use the boot file that resides inside the internal FLASH memory to load firmware code When the internal boot file is corrupted or missing the firmware file cannot be loaded and the UniOP panel display will remain off In this condition it is necessary to use the FW Rescue Mode command to download a new copy of the boot file Note Make sure that the Firmware Download flag on the Settings index tab within the Panel Setup dialog box is enabled Otherwise the FW Rescue Mode command will be hidden After connecting the serial line of the UniOP panel to the computer simply click on the FW Rescue Mode command from the Tools menu and follow the instructions that will appear on the computer The rescue procedure will ask you to turn the UniOP panel off then back on UniLoader 3 21x Communication succesfully established SSES at baud rate 38400 e ance Choose BOOT for download Browse When communication is established the rescue procedure will check the boot files that are inside the firmware directory on the computer and prompt you to begin downloading the most recent version After completing these operations the UniOP panel will restart Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Ma
489. tem In the Properties dialog box click the Recipe radio button under Reference and then click on the button See Data Field Properties for more information regarding the configuration of data field properties Data Field Properties a 2 xi Reference Data Type DB Offset Address Data Black fo Bf peniw Data Format Left Right Byte WORD Bin DI AC Note In order to create a recipe for a data field the Reference for that data field must be set to Recipe The Interlock MailBox offers a powerful way to control the operation of recipes from the controller There are seven mailbox commands available to function with recipes Start Recipe Download Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 61 EXOR Tech note Start Recipe Upload Recipe Status Get Parameter Set Number Set Parameter Set Number Get Recipe Transfer Priority Set Recipe Transfer Priority The mailbox commands allow the choice of the recipe page and also of the parameter set All mailbox Commande related to recipes return a completion code describing the results of the operation The mailbox interface to recipes is particularly useful if it is necessary to transfer a sequence of recipes to and or from the panel A simple recipe example and a more complex recipe example are provided Additional information about recipes is available Index Index Indexed addressing mode lets you reference many controller memory locations from a single
490. th UniDataExchanger and you need to select the one you want to connect 7 12 23 Basic Ethernet Diagnostic with Ping UniOP supports the Ping protocol as a very simple network diagnostic method Just enter the Ping command followed by the IP address of the panel from any node in the network If the panel can be reached it will respond to Ping 7 13 Getting Started with B Series Panels 7 13 1 The New Hardware Platform for UniOP Panels The new B series of panels is a completely new hardware platform called T2003 The T2003 CPU board uses a new 200 MHz 4131 MIPS processor The B series uses a new Firmware Type called FW6O0 7 13 2 New Features Available in the T2003 Platform The new hardware platform brings up to the product a set of interesting new features Support for 64K color systems on panels with TFT display Support for 256 colors on panels with STN display Support for 8 levels of gray on panels with monochrome display 32MB Internal Memory Card and optional SSFDC External card Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 486 EXOR Tech note Video Input Option for panels with TFT displays Backlight dimming for panels with TFT display 7 13 3 Support for 64K Colors The support for 64K colors is available only on B units with TFT display To enable the 64K colors support select the High Colors option into the Settings tab from Panel Setup Panel Setup Panel Model Settings Extemal Devices
491. the Controller Control Word is set the operator cannot enter the Data Entry Mode on the panel even if the password otherwise enables them to do so In this way the controller can temporarily or permanently inhibit modification of variable values in a way defined by its program 7 7 34 C2 Select Alarm Mode When C2 is set the display will NOT switch to Alarm mode automatically Instead the operator will have to select ALARM from the Panel Command menu with the proper keyboard actions Once inside the ALARM menu the user will be able to view and acknowledge any active alarms If there are no pending alarms the user will not be able to enter the ALARM menu When the bit is reset to zero the display will automatically switch to Alarm mode when at least one alarm is active Note Bit C2 only disables the automatic display of the alarm screen Any alarm attributes that were set during project development remain active 7 7 35 C15 Enable Mailbox Setting bit C15 enables the panel to cyclically read the data in the Mailbox Note that the Mailbox must be configured prior to setting this bit see Chapter 8 When this bit is not set the panel will not read the data in the Mailbox thus reducing communication time and increasing system performance Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 432 EXOR Tech note 7 7 36 Buzzer handling The PLC Control Word of RDA block bit C6 amp C7 are used for buzzer control through PLC By setting C6
492. the Designer menu restores the project page to a previous appearance Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 341 E SD BR Tech note 4 10 3 Move The Move command on the Designer menu makes it possible to move the Designer project screen for placement on the overall Designer screen 4 10 4 Size The Size command on the Designer menu lets you easily resize the Designer project screen within the overall Designer screen 4 10 5 Minimize The Minimize command on the Designer menu makes it possible to minimize the Designer project screen to an icon within the overall Designer screen Minimize buttons in the top right corners of screens perform the same action 4 10 6 Maximize The Maximize command on the Designer menu lets you maximize the Designer project screen to take up all possible space within the overall Designer screen Maximize buttons in the top right corners of screens perform the same action 4 10 7 Close The Close command on the Designer menu closes the current Designer project You will be prompted to save the project if necessary Close buttons in the top right corners of screens perform the same action as does simultaneously pressing the Ctrl F4 keys 5 Workspace 5 1 Workspace The status bar to the left of the main Designer screen provides information on project pages and lists various graphics and objects that can be placed in a project Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 342 Designer
493. the Project menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 360 EXOR Tech note A dialog box will appear that contains information on the amount of memory that is used by the project file how many bytes of recipe data are contained within the project file and the amount of memory used by the graphic information bitmaps and touch cells in the project file 6 5 Printing You can use Designer to configure your UniOP panel to print reports either cyclically or upon a trigger event You can define report formats and timetables upon which a report is printed configure a key or touchcell to print a report or request a printout by using the Interlock Mailbox Note In order to use these print features your panel must contain firmware version 4 10 or higher Information on setting up a new printer printing reports and a printer setup example are provided 6 6 Project Upload and Download When your project is completely designed you need to transfer it from your PC to your UniOP panel A data transfer from your PC to a UniOP panel is termed a download To download data select Download from the Transfers menu click on the Download icon in the toolbar or press the F2 key Note The panel must be in Configuration Mode in order for the download procedure to work With some models it is also possible to download a project to an SSFDC memory card if you have such a card installed in your system To download to an SSFDC card sele
494. the graphic and use one of the selection handles that will appear around the edge of the graphic Note Resizing a graphic image by using the selection handles may distort the image To duplicate or copy a graphic within the same page left click on the image then click on the Copy icon select Copy from the Edit menu or right click on the image and select Copy Click where the copy of the image is to be placed then click the Paste icon or select Paste from the Edit menu or right click and select Paste To delete a bitmap graphic left click on the graphic to select it and press the Delete key or click on the Cut tool or right click on the image and select Cut Right click on a bitmap image and select Edit to open the Bitmap Editor dialog box Right click on a bitmap image and select Properties to view the image properties such as the image file name the image height and width in pixels and the image resolution Dynamic graphics and transparent and three dimensional touch cells may be placed over static bitmaps A bitmap graphics example is provided 4 4 308 Import Bitmap Graphics Example The following steps are used to import a bitmap file Select Import Bitmap Graphics from the Insert menu This will open a dialog box from which you can select a file Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 177 E AS D BR Tech note Look in a IMAGES e rz EB IV Preview ALXSIG BMP BY ASTRNAUT JPG EF blessing ipg annunci
495. the operation will be completed and the content of the controller memory will show the same values as those that are stored in parameter set 1 7 9 Tags 7 9 1 Tags Tags allow mnemonic reference to PLC variables Tags in a project can be imported from a description file generated outside Designer To use tags the Enable Tags box must be checked under Project Configure Tag Dictionaries Once enabled you can select a tag name instead of filling in the PLC address for a field in the project When a tag name is selected the PLC Reference information will be automatically filled in with the reference information associated with the tag name Discussions about tag dictionaries using the Tag Editor using tags in Designer and tag validation are provided as is a tag example Note When a tag name is selected the PLC Reference information will be filled in with the reference information from the tag and the PLC Reference dialog controls will be disabled You will only be able to change tag information from the Tag Editor in the Tools menu Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 454 EXOR Tech note Note Tag support is available for internal controllers as selected under Project Configure Controller Tag definition for an external controller is allowed only if the external PLC supports tag definitions Please refer to EXOR Technical Documentation for further information about drivers that support tag definition 7 9 2 Tag Di
496. ther printer attribute such as normal underlined bold or italicized 4 6 189 Non printable Characters Non printable characters can be printed as blanks or asterisks If Print Anyway is checked corresponding codes are sent to the printer even if the printer cannot correctly interpret them 4 6 190 Special Formats The options of printing in condensed or enlarged text are available Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 238 E AS DR Tech note 4 6 191 Triggers 4 6 192 Triggers List of triggers OK m Trigger properties Report Report 1 Trigger type RES Time At jor 00 E Cancel Help di Add Delete Triggers let you specify when a report is to be printed A list of triggers is shown at the left of the box with buttons to add and delete triggers Trigger properties may be set on the right side of the box Note It is also possible to print a report by using a function key or touch cell programmed via the Keyboard Macro Editor or by having the PLC issue a print request by using the Interlock Mailbox command Start Report Printout Note ltis possible to start printing more than one report Up to ten 10 printer requests can be stored in a FIFO first in first out buffer 4 6 193 List of Triggers The report to be printed can be selected from the list of available reports as defined under Project Report on Panel Printer Reports 4 6 194 Add Click on the Add button to
497. ties dialog box contains several options for video objects as shown in the below figure Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 492 EXOR Tech note Video Input Properties General Layout Attributes Colors Fill Error condition Py Border E Transparent MN Video Control ars Brightness O E VDO1 Brightness Cortast DO1 Contrast x Scale gt DD1 XScale Y Scale DO1 YScale x Offset V DO1 XOffset Y Offset DO1 Y Offset T Fixed aspect ratio Fit to scale Cancel Help Note Video Options can be changed at run time using the proper Control variables Fill error conditions It is the color used to fill the video object in case for instance no signal is detected at the video input Border The color of the border of the Video Input window Transparent The parts of the image filled with the selected transparent color will be transparent Brightness Brightness level The range is from 128 to 127 with zero as a normal level Contrast Contrast level The range is from 128 to 127 with zero as a normal level Scale The picture can be scaled belong both dimensions The value is measured in per mills of the original video stream meaning that a value of 1000 returns the image in the original size values greater than 1000 will zoom in while values smaller than 1000 will zoom out Scaling limits are resolution dependent the scale values will be anyhow
498. time it receives the token After a node sends one message packet it attempts to give the token to its successor by sending a token pass message If no network activity occurs the initiator will attempt to find a new successor One of the main benefits of the token passing method is that every station on the network gets the chance to communicate even in conditions of heavy communication load The maximum node address that the initiator will search before wrapping to zero is the value of the configurable parameter Maximum Node Number The main technical features of the UniNET Network are shown in the table below Characteristic Serial Connectivity Ethernet Connectivity 19200 baud 10 Mbps Physical interface RS 485 Half Duplex as per 10BaseT Connection cable Shielded twisted pair Standard RJ45 Cable Maximum length 1200 m as per 10BaseT Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 393 EXOR Tech note Access control protocol Token Passing UDP IP Maximum number of 32 32 stations 7 4 6 Graphical Symbols The following symbols are used in this chapter Bus Terminal and RS 232 to RS 485 converter without termination resistor Bus Terminal and RS 232 to RS 485 converter with termination resistor Y Bus terminal without termination resistor 10BaseT Ethernet Adapter E i Bus terminal with termination resistor Network cable 7 4 7 Network Configurations 7 4 8 Network Configurations You may choose betwe
499. tion The Video Input option is available using the VMO10 module that is delivered as a separate product and requires installation by the user Please refer to the product datasheet Tn209 and to the installation guide for specific information about specification and installation 7 13 8 How to Create a Video Input Object To create a video input object just select Insert Video Input or use the icon available in the toolbar d Designer VIDEO INPUT dpr Page 1 EJ File Edit View BIS Page Project Transfers Tools Window Help Deas Att 68 Bitmap Er Color Box Data Fields Touch Cells Shapes E VIDEO INPUT CH Pages BB 1 Page 73 Special F El Panel Contr E Trend Window tans aioe EE icon EE E eter Instrument EE T Trend Time Field Recipe Menu Ctrl R Special Characters A Import Bitmap Graphics Figure 4 Creating Video Input Objects The menu item and the icon are active only if the project has been configured for a panel model that supports the Video Input Option Please remind that icons layout can be restored to the default settings using the Default button in the Tools Customize dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 490 EXOR Tech note 7 13 9 Video Input Type The video module is provided of 1 VGA input and 3 PAL inputs the source of the video input object placed in the Designer project page can be selected using the related list box in the
500. tion with the internal controller to be part of its I O it can be used as an extension of the external controller that is connected to the UniOP panel or it can be used as a stand alone module Note The UIMO5 I O board cannot be used with Panel I O To configure the Panel I O select Panel Controller Interface from the Project menu and click on the Panel I O tab Panel Controller Interface 2 xi RDA Setup Interlock MailBox Panel 1 0 Je Input Update cycle Reference 100 msec 2 D810 Dag ES Je Output Update cycle Reference 100 msec y D810 Dwg a Modules Available Connected UIMO3 16 170 4 gt al Cancel Apply Help The digital UO points of the UIMO3 board can be mapped to a free memory area within the connected controller either the internal controller or an externally connected controller The resident PLC program will read the physical status of the UIMO3 inputs from the memory area dedicated to the input points the UIMO3 outputs are controlled by the PLC user program by writing to the memory area assigned to the UIMO3 output points Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 224 EXOR Tech note You can enable and set the input and output and specify which modules are to be connected 4 6 131 Input 4 6 132 Input The Input area allows you to specify the configuration parameters for the digital input points of the UIMO3 board Check to box enable panel input Th
501. to a UniNET Network In case the panel has an optional communication module and is connected to the PLC via the Aux port of this communication module then the panel can use its serial connection to become a UniNET Network server A panel can be in certain cases both a Server and a Client This means that the panel both satisfies the requests from other panels that require access to the data in the controller to which it is attached and also requests data from the controllers attached to other Servers The UniNET Networks supports two types of connectivity RS485 Connectivity Ethernet Connectivity Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 390 E AS DR Tech note Panel 1 Panel 2 Panel 3 Server Client Client Single Server Configuration Serial Connectivity Panel 2 Panel 3 Client Client Ethernet Single Server Configuration Ethernet Connectivity The Single Server Configuration using either the Serial Connectivity or the Ethernet Connectivity allows many panels to access data from a single controller via a panel acting as the single Server The client panels can perform all of the normal operations as if they were connected directly to the controller including displaying of variables modifying of variables handling of Recipes handling of the Reserved Data Area etc Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 391 E AS D BR Tech note Panel 1 Panel 2 Panel 3 Panel 4 Server Server
502. ton touch cell click the Push Button icon on the toolbar or select Insert Touch Cells Push Button then use the cursor to define the area in which the push button touch cell is to be placed A dialog box will appear where the appearance and action of a push button touch cell may be configured Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 117 E AS D BR Tech note Push Button Properties E 2lsl General Layout Attributes Custom Style Push Action 3D Round Ce Momentary 7 Maintained BB Rectangle On C Off 3D Rectangle Button E Windows a Custom Ref DB10 DWO El Disable Cyclic Refresh Cancel Help There are four tabs in the Push Button Properties dialog box They are General Layout Attributes and Custom The General tab lets you select the style of push button and the action that is to be represented The Layout tab lets you choose the colors font languages etc to be used The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the push button The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It lets you create a custom push button A push button touch cell example is provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 118 E SD BR Tech note 4 4 111 General 4 4 112 General tab Push Button Properties a i 21x General Layout Attributes Custom Style Push A
503. tring length has an effect on the real state occupied by that string on the screen 4 1 12 Import Strings It is possible to upload to a project the strings previously saved in a CSV Comma Separated Values a data format used by various applications e g Microsoft ExcelTM file by selecting Import Strings from the File menu This opens the Import Strings dialog box E 2x Look in A DesProjets ss Dirk ES DemoFul2 csv File name Files of type CSV file csv e Cancel 4 Note the Import Strings operation may upload a set of strings into the project that are either incompatible or have problems Before attempting this operation it is recommended to save backup the strings currently in use by calling the Export Strings function Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 23 E SD BR Tech note 4 1 13 Recent Files The most recently opened files are listed under the File menu as a shortcut Click on the name of a file to reopen it 4 1 14 Exit Selecting Exit from the File menu can be used to terminate the Designer program You are prompted to confirm the operation if the current application has not been saved 4 2 Edit Menu 4 2 1 Edit Menu This section provides information about the Edit menu The Edit menu contains many familiar Windows commands for working with text and objects on the page Cut Copy Paste Align Make Same Size Select All Fonts 4 2 2 Undo The Undo command revers
504. tton on a toolbar Select a category then click a button to see its description 4 8 155 Tools 4 8 156 Tools AA x Toolbars Commands Tools Menu Contents Command EA Ke Ve SET Arguments Initial Directory 327 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual EXOR Tech note The tools tab allows you to have the possibility to launch external applications from within Designer Commands in this tabinclude Menu Contents Command Arguments and Initial Directory 4 8 157 New Inserts a new tool into the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu 4 8 158 Delete Deletes a tool from the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu 4 8 159 Move Up Rearranges the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu so that the selected tool is moved up one position 4 8 160 Move Down Rearranges the list of Menu Contents and the Tools menu so that the selected tool is moved down one position Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 328 ES UH Tech note 4 8 161 Menu Contents Customize E Toolbars Commands Tools Command Arguments Initial Directory This section of the dialog allows you to define New Tools to Delete already existing ones to move one tool up Move Up or down Move Down in the tools list Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 329 E XS DR Tech note 4 8 162 Command Customize hl Toolbars Commands Tools Menu Contents Comma
505. twork is able to use Ethernet when available as the communication media The advantages of this type of network as compared to conventional UniNET technology are the ability to use existing network cables and a more effective solution for connecting a computer to the UniNET network Information is available on the TCM10 board required to connect a UniOP panel to an Ethernet network the UniNet OPC Server and configuring Ethernet networks 4 6 83 RS485 This network type must be used if the optional TCM10 board is not built into the panel In this type of network panels are interconnected using simple RS 485 cables Please refer to the Connecting Panels to a RS485 Network section to see how to build your RS485 UniNET Network 4 6 84 Network Selection Network Selection Select the network configuration Single Server Multiple Clients C Multiple Servers Multiple Clients C Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients In this configuration a Single Panel the Server is attached to a Single PLC Other Panels the Clients can access data in the PLC via the Server lt Back Cancel Help You may choose between the three network types Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 210 E AS D BR Tech note Single Server Multiple Clients Multiple Servers Multiple Clients same controller types Mixed Multiple Servers Multiple Clients different controller types The parameters for the network are
506. ue from the network it displays the string Bad 7 4 46 Interfacing Microsoft Excel with the UniNET OPC Server As an application example it is important to consider a typical use of the UniNET OPC Server The program Microsoft Excel can be easily equipped with the OPC Automation software components that will allow connection to any OPC Server installed on the computer EXOR has successfully tested a solution provided by FactorySoft that is downloadable free of charge from the following web site http www factorysoft com The Excel interface to the OPC Server consists in software components called OPC 2 0 Data Access Components FactorySoft provides an Automation interface and a Server browser service Automation FactorySoft wrote the Automation interface sample code for the OPC Foundation They provide a standard Automation component based on this code for redistribution An OPC Server vendor may use these components to provide its server Server Browser This COM server returns OPC Servers by Component Category It can be used to find Data Access 1 0 or 2 0 servers in addition to future OPC servers Because this is a COM server that can be run remotely clients can get access to remote servers without local registry entries The FactorySoft OPC Data Access Components downloadable will install the Server Browser the Data Access 2 0 proxy DLLs and the Automation DLL in the System directory This installation is used to install the OPC
507. ues of the recipe data fields are displayed on the screen of the panel and the values of the recipe data fields can be modified A value of 1 indicates that the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set is being transferred to the controller When the transfer is complete the value is automatically reset to 0 A value of 2 indicates that the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set is being transferred to the panel When the transfer is complete the value is automatically reset to 0 You can start a recipe transfer by entering a value of 1 or 2 for the Recipe Action data item By entering a value of 1 you can force the UniOP panel to send the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set to the controller By entering a value of 2 you can force the controller to transfer the recipe data for the currently selected parameter set to the panel Data Entry Status Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 53 Data Field Properties Data Entry Status WORDBin This control variable will be set to a 1 while the UniOP panel is in Data Entry Mode In all other modes it will be set to 0 Data Entry Field Number Data Field Properties This control variable simply contains the field number of the selected data entry field whenever the panel is in Data Entry Mode Language Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 54 IN XOR Tech note Data Field Properties ec 21xj
508. ular controller are set automatically when the selection is made However if there is a need to change the default settings press the PLC Driver Comm button in the Controller Setup dialog box This will bring up the Communications Parameters Setup dialog box where you can configure the baud rate parity data bits and stop bits for communication 4 6 15 Baud Rate This option specifies the baud rate to be used in communication between the panel and the controller 4 6 16 Parity Specifies the parity to be used in communication between the panel and the controller 4 6 17 Data Bits Specifies the number of data bits to be used in communication 4 6 18 Stop Bits Specifies the number of stop bits to be used in communication between the panel and the controller 4 6 19 Panel Setup 4 6 20 Panel Setup Panels come in many different types with different capabilities The Panel Setup dialog box lets you specify the appropriate panel type and the amount of target memory in the target panel Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 194 EXOR Tech note 21x Panel Model Settings Extemal Devices Passthrough Miscellaneous Panel Model VGA 256 Colors 48x128 Color LCD Panel Memory ls MBytes DI Firmware Version 4 50 Panel selection can be made manually or it can be obtained directly from the UniOP panel itself by using the Get Panel Resources command This command retrieves the
509. umeric Field CJASCII When the New File checkbox is marked this indicates that the keypad being downloaded is a new object that is not intended to substitute an existing keypad Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 311 EXOR Tech note The left part of the dialog box shows the keypads that have been downloaded to the UniOP panel The right part of the dialog box shows the association between each of the keypads and the corresponding field types When selecting OK the download procedure will begin and the Transfer dialog box will be displayed Downloading Gk Transfer 62 30451 of 49115 Cancel TTT Time left 00 00 18 Speed 1015 03 bytes sec D Trying to connect at port 1 Changed port to COM1 Connected at 9600 Changing baud rate Connected at 38400 Starting download procedure Downloading y fe This dialog box shows information about the current download process such as the completion rate of the process the estimated time for completion and the average transfer speed Once the file download is completed the next keypad can be downloaded to the UniOP panel 4 8 109 Edit Menu 4 8 110 Edit Menu The Edit menu contains many familiar Windows commands for working with text and objects on the page Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste and Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 312 EXOR Tech note Delete plus the less familiar commands
510. un the application 3 3 Conventions Names of menus and commands on menus are shown in bold type as are the names of dialog boxes For example A new project may be created by selecting New from the File Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 9 EXOR Tech note menu If the name of the command or menu is highlighted it is linked to another topic in the help text For example Select Get Panel Resources from the Transfers menu Keyboard keys that you should press are shown in bold as in Press Enter If two keyboard keys are to be pressed at the same time they are shown in bold with a plus sign between them as in Press Ctrl F2 Text that you are to type into a box appears in bold in a different font Courier for example Type D setup in the box 3 4 System Requirements The following hardware software is required to use Designer 3 4 1 Free hard disk space Designer once installed takes around 70 MB of hard disk space The installation procedure only at installation time requires twice as much i e 140 MB 3 4 2 RAM Memory Designer runs on systems with at least 32 MB RAM memory 3 4 3 Supported Operating Systems Windows 98 SE Windows NT version 3 51 and above Windows ME Windows 2000 Windows XP 3 5 Software Installation Note Microsoft Windows must be installed before installing the Designer software To install Designer Close all other programs Insert the CD RO
511. urrently selected memory location Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box where you can select the exact memory location to be affected You also have the option to disable the cyclic refresh 4 4 127 Light The Light section enables you to set the colors for On and Off stages of the illuminated push button The Ref entry box shows the memory location that is reflected by the Light Clicking on the button brings up the Data Field Properties dialog box which allows you to select the exact memory location to be reflected 4 4 128 Layout Note This page is used to show the Layout tab for all the Touch Cells Panel Key Button Properties j a 21 x General Layout Attributes Custom Label I Font Fixed Ze Custom Font Text E Text Bkgd E Transparent Line Cd Bkad MV Transparent Off CH On CH Cancel Help The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The upper Toolbar portion of the box contains a Special Characters icon a Languages icon and label placement buttons Clicking on the Special Characters icon brings up the Special Characters dialog box that can be used to enter a special character into the touch cell label Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 126 EXOR Tech note It is possible to integrate multiple languages within the same touch cell Clicking on the Languages button brings up the Languages
512. ustom State Edit Les On Image Handling Resample When Sizing use for detailed images Cancel Help The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom button Custom buttons can be created for both Off and On states Click the Load button to import a graphic from the Graphics Library Manager Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 128 EXOR Tech note Clicking on the Edit button brings up the Enter Bitmap Dimensions dialog box The button width and height can be specified Color options may also be selected according to the selected panel s support of colors The Enable Indicator checkbox is available with Custom buttons This checkbox allows you to place an indicator light on the button 4 4 131 lIlluminated Push Button Example In this example we will configure a push button touch cell Note It is suggested that touch cells be programmed with a reversed attribute when they are pressed so that the operator will have immediate feedback Select Insert Touch Cells Illuminated Push Button Use the cursor to outline an area on the page where the touch cell will appear In the Illuminated Push Button Properties dialog box select 3D Round as the Style Under Push Action click on the button to identify the controller reference location that will be mapped to the touch cell push action Under Light click on
513. ut for the PLC Communications Port The PLC Communications port is used to connect client panels to the network using a bus terminal unit The pinout of the PLC port is shown here for easy reference Note Panels to be used as servers must have a dedicated PC Printer port Pr Frame Ground O ICONO E E 5 Signal Ground A3 o o E CHB 15 CHB 7 4 25 Pinout for the PC Printer Communications Port Use the PC printer communications port to connect server panels to the network using a bus terminal unit with an RS 232 to RS 485 converter The pinout of the printer port is shown below Pin Description Pin Description Frame Ground Jo OSS ES AA 5 SignalGround 18 ES Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 401 E AS UH Tech note 7 4 26 RS232 Cable to TSIO1 Bus Terminal with Converter Printer Port Use the cable CA74 to connect the Printer port of a Server panel to the TSIO1 bus terminal with converter The maximum length of the cable is 12m Panel TSIO1 Panel connector D type 15P TSIO2 connector D type 15S 7 4 27 RS 232 Cable to TSIO1 Bus Terminal with Converter PLC Port Use the cable CA73 to connect the PLC port of a client panel to the TSIO1 bus terminal with converter The maximum length of the cable is 12m Panel TSIO1 Panel connector D type 15S TSI01 connector D type 15S Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 402 ES UH Tech note 7 4 28 RS485 Cable to TSI02 Bus Te
514. ut the current password status Command code 33 The command requires no parameters After performing the operation the panel will respond back to the Command Response Word with one of the codes listed below 0 No passwords are defined in the project file No valid password has been entered A valid password has been entered The system default password 0007 has been entered If Code 2 is returned the Parameter Words will contain additional information as follows Current password level First character ASCII coded of the current password Second character ASCII coded of the current password Third character ASCII coded of the current password Fourth character ASCII coded of the current password 7 3 23 Start Controller to Controller Transfer with No Confirmation This feature allows the user to transfer data in two different manners Between two controllers In this case the controllers can be connected by a controller network or with the UniNET network Between two registers located within the same controller Note Deleting a job changes the position of subsequent jobs if job 2 is deleted then job 3 will become job 2 We will call one complete data transfer a job When the controller requests a job to be executed the panel responds immediately back to the controller and executes the job as Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 382 E AS DDR Tech note soon as possible Therefore the contr
515. utton to define the Data Field Properties 4 6 249 Internal Variable If the variable to be sampled is an internal variable pick the type of variable from the list provided Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 254 E AS D BR Tech note 4 6 250 Scaling Allows for a linear transformation of the data being sampled This lets you scale the data before storing it inside the trend buffer 4 6 251 Sampling 4 6 252 Sampling tab Configure Trend Buffers 21xi Buffers i x General Sampling Name 3 myTrendBuffer Sampling OnPLC C Cycic fi sec s C On control var event E PLC Intemal variable E Only when variable not 0 PLE Intemal variable A Stop Sampling Free Stop when buffer is full Clear Buffer No automatic clear C On panel startup Global buffer usage C Dn control variable change When full Used 0 10 KB Free 19 90 KB PLE Intemal variable Bl Ol 1 Cancel Help This area lets you define when and how trend samples will be taken You can set the sampling circumstances select to stop sampling when the buffer is full and determine when to clear the buffer 4 6 253 Sampling 4 6 254 Sampling Sampling selections include sampling on PLC cyclic sampling sampling on a control variable event or sampling only when the variable is not zero Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 255 EXOR Tech note 4 6 255 O
516. variables on the pages of a multipage recipe are different Otherwise you could have problems in data integrity during download and upload operations 7 8 30 Recipe Menu for Multipage Recipes Recipe Menu features are enabled on multipage recipes in the same way as single page recipes Make sure that the recipe name is defined in only one page of the multipage recipe If you want to display names in the recipe menu for the multipage recipe the Recipe Page for Selection field must refer to the page that contains the ASCII field declared as the Recipe Name Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 446 EXUDR Tech note 7 8 31 Recipes and Events Backup in Flash 7 8 32 Recipes and Event Backup in Flash On some of the UniOP panels it is now possible to back up recipe data as well as the event list into flash memory inside the UniOP This means that even the UniOP loses power AND the backup battery is discharged or missing the recipe data and the event list will be preserved To use this feature select the two checkboxes entitled Recipe Backup and Events Backup by selecting Project Panel Setup and clicking on the Settings index tab Please note that selecting these features uses memory within the UniOP that is normally reserved for the project file Therefore the amount of memory available for the project file is reduced by the amount of memory reserved for the entire backup of both recipe data and the event list which is 128
517. vesveneaoecsaas dee 417 Interfacing Microsoft EXCe iccicctisciesssetatensseevereisocs 411 A 411 Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual Interlock Mailbox AA Eed 374 Interlock Mailbox oooonoccnnncccnocccnnnccnoncccnnnnnss 374 Interlock Mailbox ooooocccnncccnocccinncccnnaccnnnnnos 445 Interlock Mailbox Commande 377 Interlock Reference 223 375 Internal Flash Memory sosesc 364 Internal Memory sssr 488 Internal Panel Control Variables 467 Internal Variable cccceeeseeeteeeenteeeeeees 254 A E 181 IP Address EE 475 IP e E 216 IP Ee E 475 K Keep RDA Continuous s es 219 AA eege 314 Keyboard Macro Editor eects 441 Keyboard Update Area AA 425 Keypad Designer eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 306 KEE ege Ee 220 L A ge 162 320 Label section e ovio iadio st ncvceadiieeissdes 320 Labels Color uiiciosasdon ninas ais 162 Labels Fontese iris nte 163 Languages Number uds a 248 Languages coineanan 54 231 247 DAN SUAGES inncan aoran p 248 Large Buttons iii ici 325 Large Characters 302 Last e BEE 293 PP feet h e egie ER SeER ee 38 Layouten nae on 467 Layout Toolbar s es 161 LCD Screen Saver cccoccccnnocccnoncnononaconananananos 207 LED Control Be 429 LED Map Al Panels vavccsssccsccesivstccvarccsntesewasccvuncesse 430 Eight User LEDS eee ee eeeeeeeeeee 430 LED Ma EE 430 LED Map E 430 AA noie 166 o A ee Eden 37 DitDit 126 DANG eri pollas Sa Ei Eie 146 Eras 184
518. ware type 58 are not compatible with B series panels In the same way memory cards prepared for units with firmware type 60 are not compatible with units using T2000 hardware platform Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 497 EXOR Tech note The project stored on a memory card suitable for use with firmware 58 units cannot be copied to the internal memory of a B series unit The copy option operates only for the entire memory contents Any B series unit to be used as a replacement of existing Firmware 58 panels must be completely prepared at early stage and must be sent to site ready for installation 8 Index 6 64K Colors O Zeg eueEReeu ege 487 64K Col0fS cooooconocccnnoccnonocononcncnnncnnnoncconanannnos 487 A About TagEdit ooocccinocononi ninionr cinaconancnnc nio 296 Absolute Coordinates ooooocnocccnnocininoccconcnonns 315 PROCESS ege Giedi GEES 69 Access Information Using UniDataExchanger eeeeenee 483 Access Information oooocncccononicinocaconconanan nn 483 Access Protected Function SS Attempt eerste eet der eege 428 Access Protected Function ssseseeeeeeee 428 ACK siii dio dde ada 242 EI A A 113 Add oia EEE D 234 236 A orosei orostea 232 Add Page eroriaren rada 182 AVANCE 0 scencvcastecanlesthecedastcedtea tas tonevitvale 336 Advanced Network Programming 407 Advanced Report Parameterg 421 Advanced ob 237 Alarm Sg riendo egtie Eedechktt e
519. x will appear where panel key button touch cells may be configured Panel Key Button Properties E 21x General Layout Attributes Custom Style Action Key bd 5 3D Round E Rectangle 3D Rectangle EJ Windows wv Custom Cancel Help There are four tabs in the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box They are General Layout Attributes and Custom The General tab lets you select the style of panel button and the panel key that is to be represented The Layout tab lets you select the colors font languages etc to be used The Attributes tab lets you indicate the attributes to be associated with the panel key button The Custom tab is only selectable when a Custom style button is selected on the General tab It enables you to create a custom button Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 107 EXOR Tech note A panel key touch cell example is provided 4 4 91 General 4 4 92 General Panel Key Button Properties E 3 2 xi General Layout Attributes Custom ES Action Key aa 3D Round EFJ Rectangle 3D Rectangle EJ Windows ES Custom The General tab of the Panel Key Button Properties dialog box lets you select the style of panel button and the panel key that is to be represented 4 4 93 Style Within the General index tab you can specify the appearance of the touch cell by making a selection from the Style list Selections include
520. xes in the row for that Recipe Item with ASCII names for the recipe parameter set Select this Recipe Item by clicking on the button with the record number The entire row highlights to indicate that it is selected Click on the Set As Recipe name button to set this Recipe ltem to be the Recipe Name An asterisk appears to the right of the Recipe Item to identify it as the Recipe Name Click on the OK button to accept the changes 7 8 20 Recipe Menu Support Fields There are three specific fields that support the Recipe Menu They are the Recipe Menu field Recipe Page For Selection field and Recipe Key field The Recipe Menu field is the actual field that displays the menu with recipe names The currently selected recipe parameter set is indicated using user defined attribute combinations blink highlight reverse The Recipe Page For Selection field shows the number of the page containing the actual recipe data referred to by the Recipe Menu The Recipe Key field is not directly connected with Recipe Menus It is a less user friendly way of selecting a recipe parameter set by name In order to choose a recipe parameter set you have to edit the field and type the desired recipe name instead of being able to select it from a menu It can also be used to show the currently selected Recipe Parameter Set name for a specific page The Recipe Key field must refer to a specific page with a defined Recipe Name These fields do n
521. xis X Axis Layout 7 10 11 Y Axis The Y Axis index tab of the Trend Window Properties dialog box allows you to select the trend buffers curves to be displayed Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or remove trend buffers For any curve you can choose visualization properties such as line type style size and color Note Once a curve is added to the trend viewer you will only be able to add additional curves of the same sampling method to that particular trend window Designer creates three new variables for every curve defined These variables are internal panel control variables that can be used to display properties of the trend on the UniOP in alphanumeric format The Y cursor displays the value of the curve at a point on the Y axis Use the trend macros to activate the trend cursor The Y axis minimum and Y axis maximum variables contain the minimum and maximum values of the defined Y axis On the right of the dialog box you can define the default value Y axis range that will be used when the trend window is displayed If these internal panel control variables are on the UniOP as read write fields their values can be modified on line allowing you to dynamically change the Y axis range 7 10 12 X Axis 7 10 13 X Axis Under the X Axis index tab you can define the X axis properties of the trend window The format of the X Axis Time Samples or On PLC is defined from the curves that are inside Tn179 05 doc 12 01
522. xt tab and set the fonts and colors Click on the Messages tab Set the number of messages Enter the messages Click OK 4 4 55 Attribute 4 4 56 Attribute Data Fields Occasionally it is necessary to draw attention to a particular part of the screen or to indicate the increased importance of a message or data field For these instances dynamic and static attributes are provided To create an Attribute field either select the Attribute icon from the toolbar or select Insert Data Fields Attribute Then use the cursor to define the area in which the attribute field is to be placed The Attribute Properties dialog box will appear Attribute Properties RS E 2 xi General Style Static Attributes O I Blink Reverse ER Dynamic Highlight Size Width H 7 Height E PLC Reference iJ Cancel Apply Help A number of items can be configured from this dialog box These include Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 85 EXOR Tech note Style static or dynamic Static Attributes static attributes only Field dimensions PLC Reference dynamic attributes only 4 4 57 Style Static attributes and dynamic attributes are the two choices available 4 4 58 Static Attributes If Static is selected as the Style any combination of the blink reverse and highlight attributes may be used These attributes let you make an area of the screen stand out by highlighting the area reversing the area or making th
523. y as changing the value of a normal controller data field For example to make recipe parameter set number 3 the current parameter set enter a value of 3 in the appropriate Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable In order to do this the Recipe Parameter Set Selection variable must be set as a Read Write variable on the Range tab of the Properties dialog box under Insert Data Fields Numeric ASCII Bargraph or Message Recipe Action Data Field Properties E A 2 x Reference m Control Yariable Reference Data Type Page Number Address Recipe Action e 5 RACS Data Format WORD Bin DI OK Cancel Help OK For each page that contains a recipe the UniOP panel reserves a separate memory location for the Recipe Action for that recipe page The Recipe Action memory location stores the current status of operation of the recipe for the page Recipe Action data fields can be added to the project These data items can then be used to visually display the current state of the various recipes in the project When these data items are added to the project they must specify which recipe is to be monitored by the data item This is done by specifying the page number that contains the required recipe in the Data Field Properties dialog box A Recipe Action data field can take on only 3 values 0 1 or 2 A value of 0 indicates that the recipe is in its normal state of operation In this mode of operation the val
524. y available if the panel is connected via Ethernet 7 12 17 Download Recipe Data This command is available both with serial and Ethernet connection When the panel is connected via Ethernet however the command has been enhanced and recipe data can be transferred also when the panel is in Operation Mode 7 12 18 Upload Recipe Data This command is available both with serial and Ethernet connection When the panel is connected via Ethernet however the command has been enhanced and recipe data can be transferred also when the panel is in Operation Mode 7 12 19 Upload Trend Data This command is available both with serial and Ethernet connection When the panel is connected via Ethernet however the command has been enhanced and trend data can be transferred also when the panel is in Operation Mode 7 12 20 Upload Event List The command Upload Event List allows UniDataExchanger to retrieve the Event List from the panel This command is available only with the Ethernet connection The Event List data will be saved to a disk file in csv format The content of the file will be as shown in the figure below Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 483 E AS DR Tech note A BEE D 1 Type JAlarm Value Time 2 fon 0 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 3 jon 1 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 4 jon 2 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 5 fon 3 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 6 jon 4 0x20202020 5 31 2004 15 56 jon 5 0x20202020
525. y in the Font Editor as shown in the figure below insert figure here Select a character to edit by clicking on it from the character list across the bottom of the window Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 304 EXOR Tech note By double clicking on a particular pixel you can toggle the appearance of that pixel For example if a pixel is initially black double clicking on it will change its color to white To save the changes you have made see the Saving a Font section 4 8 93 Saving a Font When finished modifying the font see the Editing Characters section you can save it by selecting Save or Save As from within the File menu within the Font Editor When changing a font we recommend that you use Save As and give the font a new name so as not to change the original font Fonts need to be saved to the Windows System directory The font must then be installed by selecting Install View installed Fonts under the File menu within the Font Editor Select the display panels with which this font is to be used and click on the Install Font button Select File Exit from the Font Editor to return to your Designer project page Now choose Edit Fonts Panel Font from within Designer or press Ctrl F or click on the Panel Font icon in the toolbar and the customized font will be available from the Font Name pulldown menu in the Select Font dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 305 E AS DR Tech note
526. y the location from which the tags are being imported and click the Finish button to complete the operation A confirmation message will appear Click OK 4 8 16 Export Tags 4 8 17 Export Tags It is possible to export tags for use in another application Select Export Tags from the File menu of the Tag Editor and the Tag Export Wizard steps you through the process lt Back and Next gt buttons help you navigate through the process A Cancel button is available if you want to exit the Tag Export Wizard A Help button provides access to help text about the Tag Import Wizard 4 8 18 Export Tags Step 1 Tag Export Wizard a x Step 1 Column Configuration Database Columns Exported Column Tag name Group name Tag name Logical address Logical address Data format S Data format Add gt Comments Adir Comments Group name Delete Bach Cancel Help In Step 1 you will configure the columns to be exported In the left box are the columns available in the database being exported You may need to scroll to see all of the available column names In the right box are the columns normally exported If you want to add columns to this list you may do so Simply click on a column name in the left box and click the Add gt button The column name appears in the right box Column names are appended to the bottom of the list Select a column name and use the Up and Down buttons to rearrange the list order if
527. y will remain off In this condition it is necessary to use the FW Rescue Mode command to download a new copy of the boot file Note Make sure that the Firmware Download flag on the Settings index tab within the Panel Setup dialog box is enabled Otherwise the FW Rescue Mode command will be hidden After connecting the serial line of the UniOP panel to the computer simply click on the FW Rescue Mode command from the Tools menu and follow the instructions that will appear on the computer The rescue procedure will ask you to turn the UniOP panel off then back on UniLoader E 21x Communication succesfully established 0K at baud rate 38400 Cancel Choose BOOT for download Browse Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 337 EXOR Tech note When communication is established the rescue procedure will check the boot files that are inside the firmware directory on the computer and prompt you to begin downloading the most recent version After completing these operations the UniOP panel will restart 4 8 182 Validate Project Data Validate Project Data is a command introduced to verify the consistency of a Designer project file and automatically fix any known problem When a not valid object is found and there is no way for an automatic fix the object is deleted from the project A detailed log file with the list of the changes applied to the project is also generated and stored as ProjectFix log
528. you may have a graphic that encompasses the entire screen of a control process in a factory It contains images of flow control valves motors and blowers You can create touch cells on the separate images and configure them to perform certain tasks For instance if you press the touch cell that is on the image of the motor the motor may turn on If you press the touch cell that is on the image of a valve the valve may close etc All that will be seen on the screen is the image of the process the touch cells will be invisible 4 4 156 Action To define the functionality of the touch cell select one of the three radio buttons under the Action portion of the dialog box The action can be a Panel Key an ASCII Key or a Macro Command If Panel Key is selected clicking on the button brings up the Change View Panel Key Assignment dialog box where you have a list of panel keys to choose from Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 142 EXOR Tech note If ASCII Key is chosen simply enter the character to be sent in the box beside of the ASCII key radio button Macro commands represent all of the elementary macro commands that are available from the Keyboard Macro Editor The touch cells can be programmed using the Keyboard Macro Editor to perform a vast array of functions such as changing pages of the project file scrolling down a line entering Data Entry Mode and writing a value to the controller If Macro Command is cho
529. you enter a custom bitmap as the background for the gauge The bitmap can come from an external file or from the Graphics Library Manager that is supplied with Designer Select the image source to be used select the bitmap and click the Load image button Use the Edit button to edit the bitmap size and colors 4 4 285 Meter Instrument Example From the Insert menu select Meter Instrument Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 167 EXOR Tech note Use the cursor to define an area for the meter instrument From the Meter Instrument Properties dialog box select Full Circle as the meter Style Under Range insert 10 in the Count box to have labels at 10 20 30 etc Select the Layout tab and enter a Title for the meter By default the title is in the center of the meter Slide the Title Y selector to a value of 85 or 90 to place the title towards the bottom of the meter window Adjust the Size of the gauge as necessary to fit the area defined in step 2 Select the Gauge tab Under Ticks enter a value of 10 for Major and 10 for Minor This puts a major tick at each of the 10 labels and a minor tick at each whole value Select the Needle tab Set the Needle and Center colors to red Set the Center value to 15 Click OK to accept the meter settings and close the Meter Instrument Properties dialog box The meter instrument appears on the project page 4 4 286 Trend Time Field 4 4 287 Trend Time Field Trend Time Fi
530. you to print the currently open Tag Database Selecting Print from the File menu or pressing the Ctrl P keys brings up the familiar Thu H P Windows Print dialog box Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 289 E AS UR Tech note 4 8 26 Print Preview Selecting Print Preview from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Preview view from which the Tag Database may be previewed for printing 4 8 27 Print Setup Selecting Print Setup from the File menu brings up the familiar Windows Print Setup dialog box from which printer properties may be selected 4 8 28 Recent Files The most recently opened files are listed under the File menu as a shortcut Click on the name of a file to reopen it 4 8 29 Exit The Exit command closes the Tag Editor application 4 8 30 Edit Menu 4 8 31 Edit Menu The Edit menu of the Tag Editor contains familiar WindowTM commande for working with text and objects on the page These include Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Find Replace 4 8 32 Undo The Undo command reverses the last action This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl Z keys Tn179 05 doc 12 01 2007 UniOP User s Manual 290 EXOR Tech note 4 8 33 Redo The Redo command reapplies the actions that were previously canceled by the Undo command This action can also be activated by pressing the Ctrl Y keys 4 8 34 Cut The Cut command removes the selected item from the current page and places i

UniOP User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents